Easergy

T300
User Manual
Remote Terminal Unit for Distribution Networks

01/2023

NT00378–EN–10

www.se.com
Legal Information
The Schneider Electric brand and any trademarks of Schneider Electric SE and its
subsidiaries referred to in this guide are the property of Schneider Electric SE or its
subsidiaries. All other brands may be trademarks of their respective owners.
This guide and its content are protected under applicable copyright laws and
furnished for informational use only. No part of this guide may be reproduced or
transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording, or otherwise), for any purpose, without the prior written permission of
Schneider Electric.
Schneider Electric does not grant any right or license for commercial use of the guide
or its content, except for a non-exclusive and personal license to consult it on an "as
is" basis. Schneider Electric products and equipment should be installed, operated,
serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel.
As standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time, information
contained in this guide may be subject to change without notice.
To the extent permitted by applicable law, no responsibility or liability is assumed by
Schneider Electric and its subsidiaries for any errors or omissions in the informational
content of this material or consequences arising out of or resulting from the use of the
information contained herein.
 T300

Table of Contents
Foreword ......................................................................................................9
Safety Information ....................................................................................10
FCC Part 15 ............................................................................................. 11
EU Directives ...........................................................................................12
UKCA Directives.......................................................................................13
Cyber Security..........................................................................................14
About This Book .......................................................................................16
General Description ..................................................................................17
Safety Instructions ....................................................................................18
Functional Description ..............................................................................19
Description of T300 Modules .....................................................................21
HU250 Module – CPU and Communication Gateway.............................21
SC150 Module – Switch Control Unit ....................................................22
SC160 Module – Switchgear Control, Protection Unit.............................22
LV150 Module – Low Voltage Measuring Unit........................................23
PS50 Module – Backup Power Supply for Severe Environments ............24
T300 Internal Architecture ...................................................................24
T300 Configuration Principle .....................................................................26
Engineering in Easergy Builder ............................................................26
Adding/Deleting Channel and Modems ...........................................26
T300 Synchronization....................................................................27
Sequence of Events (SOE) ............................................................27
Historical Data according to DLT634.5101 / DLT634.5104
(HST) ...........................................................................................27
Client and Server Protocols............................................................27
Personalization of LEDs.................................................................28
Management of specific commands................................................28
Calculation Formulae ....................................................................29
IEC 61131-3 PLC ..........................................................................29
Automatic Transfer Switching .........................................................29
Condition Monitoring .....................................................................29
Management of RBAC and security policy ............................................30
Initial Start-Up ..........................................................................................31
Connection to the T300 Web Server...........................................................32
Equipment Required for the T300 Connection .......................................32
Principle of the T300 Embedded Web Server ........................................33
IP Addresses for Connection to the T300 ..............................................34
Connection to the T300 Web Server .....................................................34
Overview of the T300 Web Server .........................................................35
T300 Web Server Menu Overview .............................................................36
Home.................................................................................................36
Monitoring and Control ........................................................................37
MV/LV Measurements .........................................................................38
Diagnostics ........................................................................................39
Maintenance.......................................................................................39
Settings..............................................................................................40
Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages....................................................43
Home Page ........................................................................................43

NT00378–EN–10 3
T300

Substation Page .................................................................................45

Information Displayed for the HU250 Module...................................46
Information Displayed for the PS50 Module ....................................47
Information Displayed for the SCxxx Modules..................................50
Information Displayed for the LV150 Modules ..................................56
Synoptics Settings.........................................................................57
System Page ......................................................................................58
HU250 Module Status ...................................................................58
PS50 Module Status......................................................................59
LV150 and SCxxx Modules Status ..................................................59
Shortcut to Pages..........................................................................62
Zigbee Network Monitoring Page .........................................................64
Description ...................................................................................64
Condition Monitoring Page ..................................................................66
Information Displayed for the Substation Zones ...............................66
Data Pages ........................................................................................70
Measurements .........................................................................................74
Measurements Pages .........................................................................74
Diagnostic Files ........................................................................................83
Events Page.......................................................................................84
System Page ......................................................................................85
Cyber-Security Page ...........................................................................87
History Logs Page...............................................................................88
Disturbance Records Page ..................................................................88
Traces .....................................................................................................89
Protocol Traces ..................................................................................89
System Cyber-Security .............................................................................91
Users and roles ..................................................................................91
CAE and RBAC.............................................................................91
System Security Parameters ..........................................................92
Managing Users and Roles in the Web Server.................................93
Modifying User Roles/Passwords ...................................................95
Secure Operations ........................................................................96
Security Log Event File ..................................................................96
Certificate Management.................................................................97
Centralized Authentication with RADIUS............................................. 100
Operating Principle...................................................................... 100
Example of RADIUS Server Use .................................................. 102
Security Functionality Verification ................................................. 106
Device Synchronization........................................................................... 108
Clock Page....................................................................................... 108
Automatic Synchronization........................................................... 109
Manual Synchronization .............................................................. 109
IP Interfaces........................................................................................... 110
IP Configuration Page ....................................................................... 110
IP Configuration Prerequisites ..................................................... 110
Devices ...................................................................................... 110
Firewall ...................................................................................... 118
Router Function .......................................................................... 119
Port Configuration................................................................................... 122
Port Configuration on HU250 ............................................................. 123

4 NT00378–EN–10
 T300

Example of Physical Port Configuration of a T300 System ................... 125

Dial-Up Modem Settings ......................................................................... 126
Modems Configuration Page.............................................................. 126
4G Modem.................................................................................. 126
Upgrading the Firmware.......................................................................... 129
Firmware Page ................................................................................. 129
Firmware Upgrade ...................................................................... 129
Managing the Configuration..................................................................... 134
Configuration Page ........................................................................... 134
Configuration Principle ................................................................ 135
Saving the Configuration.............................................................. 137
Uploading the Configuration......................................................... 138
T300 Settings .......................................................................................... 140
Introduction to T300 Settings ................................................................... 141
HU250 Module Settings .......................................................................... 144
Local I/O .......................................................................................... 144
Customizing the Digital Inputs ...................................................... 144
Customizing the LEDs ................................................................. 146
External Local/Remote Switch...................................................... 149
Automatic Transfer Switching (ATS) ................................................... 150
ATS Automatic Control (Transfer of Source) .................................. 151
ATS Operating Modes ................................................................. 151
Changeover sequence ................................................................ 152
Source Transfer Locking .............................................................. 153
ATS Parameter Setting ................................................................ 153
Zigbee Network for Condition Monitoring ............................................ 156
Setting Condition Monitoring ........................................................ 156
SCADA Protocols ............................................................................. 159
Client Protocols ................................................................................ 160
Zigbee Client Protocol ................................................................. 161
Configuring the Physical Ports ........................................................... 163
Internal RS485............................................................................ 163
RS Modem Box........................................................................... 164
Synchronization ................................................................................ 169
Local Time and Summer Time ...................................................... 172
SC150 Module Settings .......................................................................... 173
MV Current and Voltage Sensors ....................................................... 175
MV Current Sensors .................................................................... 175
MV Voltage Sensors .................................................................... 177
Network Characteristics............................................................... 183
Switch Control .................................................................................. 184
Interlock Function on SC150 Module ............................................ 186
Switch Positions and Commands ................................................. 187
Command Filter Time Delays ....................................................... 193
Hit and Run Function ................................................................... 195
Switch Input Filters ...................................................................... 195
Front Panel Voltage Indication ........................................................... 197
Active Overpower ............................................................................. 199
Fault Current Detection Indication (FPI) on the SC150 Module ............. 200
Fault Current Detector Logical Nodes on the SC150
Module ....................................................................................... 201

NT00378–EN–10 5
T300

Fault Current Detection Indication (FPI) Principle........................... 201

Fault Current Detection Curves on SC150 Module ......................... 206
Inrush Filter ................................................................................ 209
Fault Event ................................................................................. 211
Fault Current Detection Indication Setting on the SC150
Module ....................................................................................... 212
Fault Current Validation and Indication................................................ 226
Fault Current Indication ............................................................... 226
Resetting a Fault Current ............................................................. 228
Fault Current Validation (and Indication)........................................ 228
Fault Current Validation and Indication Parameter Setting .............. 231
Locating Fault Currents on the MV Network................................... 236
MV Power Measurement Settings ...................................................... 238
Measurement parameter settings ................................................. 239
MV Power Quality Parameter Setting ................................................. 240
Disturbance Record Settings ............................................................. 242
Disturbance Records ................................................................... 242
Disturbance Record Triggers........................................................ 247
Automation Settings .......................................................................... 248
Sectionalizer Automation ............................................................. 249
Local I/O on SCxxx module................................................................ 252
Customizing LEDs on the SCxxx module ...................................... 252
SC160 Module Settings .......................................................................... 255
MV Current and Voltage Sensors ....................................................... 257
MV Current Sensors .................................................................... 257
MV Voltage Sensors .................................................................... 260
Network Characteristics............................................................... 265
Switch Control .................................................................................. 266
Interlock Function........................................................................ 268
Switch Positions and Commands ................................................. 270
Command Filter Time Delays ....................................................... 276
Hit and Run Function ................................................................... 278
Switch Input Filters ...................................................................... 278
Front Panel Voltage Indication ........................................................... 280
Active Overpower ............................................................................. 282
Fault Current Detection Indication (FPI) and Tripping Protection on
the SC160 Module ............................................................................ 284
General ...................................................................................... 284
Fault Current Detector and Protection Tripping Logical Nodes on
the SC160 Module ...................................................................... 284
Fault Current Detection Indication (FPI) Principle........................... 286
Fault Current Tripping Protection Principle .................................... 291
Fault Current Detection and Tripping Protection Curves on the
SC160 module ............................................................................ 293
Inrush Filter ................................................................................ 296
Cold Load PickUp Function.......................................................... 300
Fault Event ................................................................................. 303
Fault Current Detection Indication and Tripping Settings on the
SC160 module ............................................................................ 304
Fault Current Validation and Indication................................................ 323
Fault Current Indication ............................................................... 323

6 NT00378–EN–10
 T300

Resetting a Fault Current ............................................................. 325

Fault Current Validation (and Indication)........................................ 325
Fault Current Validation and Indication Parameter Setting .............. 328
Locating Fault Currents on the MV Network................................... 333
MV Power Measurement Settings ...................................................... 335
Measurement parameter settings ................................................. 336
MV Power Quality Parameter Setting ................................................. 337
Disturbance Record Settings ............................................................. 339
Disturbance Records ................................................................... 339
Disturbance Record Triggers........................................................ 344
Automation Settings .......................................................................... 345
Sectionalizer Automation ............................................................. 346
Local I/O on SCxxx module................................................................ 349
Customizing LEDs on the SCxxx module ...................................... 349
Settings by Protocol .......................................................................... 351
LV150 Module Settings ........................................................................... 355
LV Current and Voltage Sensors ........................................................ 356
LV Current Sensors ..................................................................... 357
LV Voltage Sensors ..................................................................... 359
Network Characteristics............................................................... 362
Front Panel Voltage Indication ........................................................... 363
LV Power Measurement Settings ....................................................... 366
Measurement parameter settings ................................................. 367
LV Power Quality Settings ................................................................. 368
Local I/O on LV150 module................................................................ 370
Customizing LEDs on the LV150 module....................................... 370
Settings Common to LV150, SC150 and SC160 Modules .......................... 372
Voltage Monitoring ............................................................................ 372
Undervoltage and Overvoltage ..................................................... 372
Neutral Overvoltage .................................................................... 375
Broken Phase Conductor Detection.................................................... 379
ANSI 47: Negative Sequence Overvoltage Detection ..................... 379
Port Configuration............................................................................. 382
Configuration of Physical Ports..................................................... 383
Configuration of Logical Ports ...................................................... 384
PS50 Module Settings ............................................................................ 385
Commissioning Tests .............................................................................. 388
Operation ................................................................................................. 391
Indications and Actions on the Front Panel ............................................... 392
Indications and Actions on the Front Panel of the HU250
Module............................................................................................. 393
HU250 LED Status............................................................................ 394
Indications and Actions on the Front Panel of the SC150
Module............................................................................................. 396
SC150 LED Status............................................................................ 398
Indications and Actions on the Front Panel of the SC160
Module............................................................................................. 399
SC160 LED Status............................................................................ 401
Indications and Actions in the Front Panel of the LV150 Module............ 402
LED Status on LV150 Module - Meaning of Colors............................... 403
Indications and Actions on the Front Panel of the PS50 Module............ 404

NT00378–EN–10 7
T300

Testing the LEDs on the Front Panel ........................................................ 405

Local/Remote Mode................................................................................ 406
Automation Enabled.......................................................................... 407
Switch Commands.................................................................................. 408
Other Commands ................................................................................... 409
Maintenance ............................................................................................ 410
General ................................................................................................. 411
Menu Overview................................................................................. 411
Substation and System Pages...................................................... 411
Viewing Events ........................................................................... 413
LED Indications........................................................................... 414
Diagnostic LEDs on the Front Panel......................................................... 415
Powering Down the Equipment................................................................ 420
Battery Maintenance............................................................................... 421
Replacing the Battery ........................................................................ 421
Battery Care and Storage .................................................................. 421
Equipment Disposal .......................................................................... 422
Replacing the HU250, SCxxx or LV150 Module......................................... 423
Addressing the SCxxx and LV150 Modules ......................................... 423
Checking the Firmware Version.......................................................... 424
Importing a Stored Configuration........................................................ 424
Checks To Be Performed After Module Replacement........................... 424
Replacing a Modem Box ......................................................................... 425
Replacing the PS50 Module .................................................................... 426
Addressing the PS50 Module............................................................. 426
Commissioning................................................................................. 427
Zigbee Network Maintenance .................................................................. 428
Zigbee Network Management ............................................................ 428
Overview .................................................................................... 428
Zigbee Box (K7) Replacement ........................................................... 430
Appendices .............................................................................................. 431
Appendix A: General characteristics......................................................... 432
HU250 ............................................................................................. 432
SC150 ............................................................................................. 433
SC160 ............................................................................................. 434
LV150 .............................................................................................. 436
HU250, SCxxx and LV150 ................................................................. 437
PS50 ............................................................................................... 439
Appendix B: List of Potential Issue Codes................................................. 442
SCxxx Potential Issue Codes on Switch/Breaker Control...................... 442
Appendix C: Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT).................................. 444
Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) Curves ................................... 444
Appendix D: Wi-Fi Access ....................................................................... 448
Activation of Local Wi-Fi Access......................................................... 448
Connection to T300 Web Server via Wi-Fi Access ............................... 450
Glossary ................................................................................................... 451

8 NT00378–EN–10
 T300

Foreword
What’s in This Part
Safety Information ..........................................................................................10
FCC Part 15................................................................................................... 11
EU Directives .................................................................................................12
UKCA Directives ............................................................................................13
Cyber Security ...............................................................................................14
About This Book.............................................................................................16

NT00378–EN–10 9
T300 Safety Information

Safety Information
Important Information
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar
with the device before trying to install, operate, service, or maintain it. The
following special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the
equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that
clarifies or simplifies a procedure.

The addition of this symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety label indicates that an
electrical hazard exists which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not
followed.

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury
hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or
death.

! DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.

! WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.

! CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.

NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury.

Please Note
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only
by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any
consequences arising out of the use of this material.
A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction
and operation of electrical equipment and its installation, and has received safety
training to recognize and avoid the hazards involved.

10 NT00378–EN–10
FCC Part 15 T300

FCC Part 15
This equipment is designed and tested with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with Easergy T300 range HU250 Installation
Guide (reference NHA77925) may cause harmful interference to radio
communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television
reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to prevent interference by one or more of the following
measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for general
population. This device must be installed to provide a separation distance of at
least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

NT00378–EN–10 11
T300 EU Directives

EU Directives
This equipment complies with the following Directives of the European Parliament
and of the Council:
• EMC Directive 2014/30/EU
• LVD Directive 2014/35/EU
• RED Directive 2014/53/EU
• RoHS Directive 2015/863/EU

12 NT00378–EN–10
UKCA Directives T300

UKCA Directives
UK Regulation:
• The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations SI 2016 No. 1091
• The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations SI 2016 No. 1101
• The Radio Equipment Regulations SI 2017 No. 1206
• The Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and
Electronic Equipment Regulations 2012 SI 2012 No. 3032

NT00378–EN–10 13
T300 Cyber Security

Cyber Security
Cyber threats are part of the digital world of communicating products. The T300 is
concerned about possible cyber security issues and offers different features to
users to manage the Cyber security and reduce the risks.

Potential Risks and Compensating Controls

NOTICE
HAZARD OF UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
Cyber threats are part of the digital world of communicating products. The T300
offers several different features to users to manage cyber security risks. Failure
to follow these recommendations can increase the risk of unauthorized access.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

• Unsecure protocols
Modbus, DNP3, IEC 60870-5-101, IEC60870-5-104, IEC 61850 (IEC 61850
MMS (Manufacturing Message Specification) and IEC 61850 GOOSE
(Generic Object Oriented System Event)) protocols, and some IT protocols
(SNTP, DHCP, GPS, PPP) are unsecure.
The device does not have the capability to transmit data encrypted using
these protocols. If a malicious user gained access to your network,
transmitted information could be disclosed or subject to tampering.
For transmitting data over an internal network, physically or logically segment
the network and restrict access using standard controls such as firewalls and
in particular IP Table allowlists.
For transmitting data over an external network, encrypt protocol
transmissions over all external connections using an encrypted tunnel, TLS
wrapper or a similar solution.
For PPP over 2G/3G/4G network, the customer is responsible for verifying
that the cellular network is a private and protected network.
• Enclosure
The physical integrity of the installation must be ensured by the end user.
Physical access to the T300 and the operational area must be restricted.
HU250 embeds a “door open” digital input (DI6) that can be used to report to
the system a physical access to the cabinet or the room.
The status is then reported to the control center using the variable HU01_
DoorISAF1_Alm_stVal.
Standard T300 cabinets are equipped with quarter turn for padlock, and an
optional opened door contact (EMS59510).
Refer to HU250 Module Settings \ Local I/O, page 144 for wiring of “door
open” signal.
• Port hardening
The following recommendations should be followed:
◦ Firewall: use the IP allowlist to limit external accesses to known devices.
Refer to Firewall, page 118 for details.
◦ Port configuration: disable unused physical ports. Refer to Port
Configuration, page 122 for details.
◦ Disable web pages for SC0x/LV0x module maintenance.

14 NT00378–EN–10
Cyber Security T300

• ISaGRAF®
If the ISaGRAF® device is active in the configuration, the TCP port 1131 is
opened to transfer the ISaGRAF® program from the ISaGRAF® programming
workbench.
An external access is then possible.
The following setting is recommended depending on the context:
◦ It is recommended to disable the ISaGRAF® TCP port 1131 during
exploitation phase to prevent any modification of the ISaGRAF® program.
To do this, use the firewall as follows: add 1131 in the drop ports list, for
WAN and LAN. Refer to Firewall, page 118 for details.

◦ Remove 1131 port from the drop ports list during development or
commissioning phases.
When the final program is downloaded in the HU250, add 1131 port again
to ensure the program cannot be accessible externally.
The product is constantly evolving and encryption of relevant communication
channels is planned in upcoming releases. Contact your SE branch office or field
service representative for more information about cyber security features on the
T300 platform.

NT00378–EN–10 15
T300 About This Book

About This Book

Purpose of this Guide
This guide gives a complete description of the T300 equipment for use,
configuration, installation and maintenance. It can be used as a general reference.

Document Revision History

Document reference–revision Release date Modifications
NT00378–10 12/2022 T300 software upgrade to 2.8.1

Inclusive terminology applied

Change in RoHs 3 Directive

Addition of UKCA Directives

PS50 characteristics appendix: changes

to Dielectric Compatibility, RS-485

USB port removed

PS25 removed (no longer

commercialized)

NT00378–09 11/2021 Cyber Security

NT00378–08 09/2021 T300 Software upgrade to V2.8

NT00378–07 11/2020 Light software evolutions

NT00378–06 11/2020 T300 Software upgrade to V2.7

Related Documents
Document Title Document Reference
HU250 Installation guide NHA77925

SC150 Installation guide NHA91857

SC160 Installation guide GDE64933

LV150 Installation guide NHA92575

PS50 Installation guide NT00375

T300 Quick Start Guide NT00383

Easergy Builder User Manual SE-S856-MSS

Terminology
In this document, the “master/slave” terminology has been replaced with “client/
server” terminology where expected, and the communication protocols
terminology has been changed according to their respective standards.
The T300 Web server screens shown in this document have not been updated
with the new terminology for this release.

16 NT00378–EN–10
 T300

General Description
What’s in This Part
Safety Instructions..........................................................................................18
Functional Description ....................................................................................19
Description of T300 Modules...........................................................................21
T300 Configuration Principle ...........................................................................26
Initial Start-Up ................................................................................................31
Connection to the T300 Web Server ................................................................32

NT00378–EN–10 17
T300 Safety Instructions

Safety Instructions

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe
electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E, NOM-029-STPS-2011, CSA Z462,
NFC 18–510 and UTE C18–510–1.
• This unit must be installed and serviced only by qualified electrical
personnel.
• Turn off all power supplies of this unit before working on or inside the unit.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that power is
off.
• To open a live current transformer secondary circuit, turn off the primary side
of the transformer and short-circuit the transformer secondary circuit.
• Set all devices, doors, and covers before turning on power to this unit.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

18 NT00378–EN–10
Functional Description T300

Functional Description
Easergy T300 features a modular architecture designed for applications in MV
network substations. The T300 offers the following functions:
• Management of the open/close motor mechanism on MV switchgear,
compatible with any MV switchgear
• Tripping protection with a circuit breaker
• Detection of ammetric and directional fault currents on the MV network
and tripping protection: operational on any neutral system with or without the
presence of distributed power and including fault current algorithms based on
the following international standards:
◦ Phase overcurrent and ground fault detection and tripping protection
(ANSI 50/51, ANSI 50N/51N)
◦ Directional overcurrent and ground fault detection and tripping protection
(ANSI 67/67N)
◦ Cold Load PickUp (CLPU)
Two fault current detection methods are used:
◦ Definite time (DT) curve
◦ Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) curve
• MV network voltage and current monitoring, for the following functions:
◦ Undervoltage detection (ANSI 27)
◦ Overvoltage detection (ANSI 59)
◦ Neutral overvoltage detection (ANSI 59N)
◦ Voltage broken conductor detection (ANSI 47)
◦ Undercurrent detection (ANSI 37)
◦ Active Overpower (ANSI 32P)
• MV current measurement using standard current sensors, compatible with
standard IEC 61869-2, according to following possible configurations:
◦ 3 phase CTs
◦ 1 core balance CT
◦ 2 phase CTs + 1 core balance CT
◦ 3 phase CTs + 1 core balance CT
• MV voltage measurement using the following voltage sensors:
◦ LPVT (low power voltage transformer) according to standard IEC 61869-7
◦ Standard MV/LV VTs with secondary from 57 Vac to 220 Vac according to
IEC 61869-3 (requires a VT adapter)
◦ VDS (voltage detecting system) indicator with voltage output (standard
IEC 61243-5)
◦ PPACS external capacitive divider mounted at the head of the MV cable
◦ VPIS-V3 VO
• MV power measurement according to standard IEC 61557-12
• Disturbance record according to IEC 60255-24
• Quality of the MV power supply delivered, according to the principles of IEC
61000-4-30 class S (up to harmonic 40), for T300 RTUs equipped with LPVT
and VT sensors
• LV network voltage monitoring, for the following functions:
◦ Undervoltage detection (ANSI 27)
◦ Overvoltage detection (ANSI 59)
◦ Neutral overvoltage detection (ANSI 59N)
◦ Voltage broken conductor detection (ANSI 47)

NT00378–EN–10 19
T300 Functional Description

• LV current measurement using standard current sensors, compatible with

IEC61869-2, according to two possible configurations:
◦ 3 phase CTs
◦ 3 phase cores + 1 neutral measuring sensor
• LV voltage measurement via a Voltage adapter measuring directly the
voltage on the LV network
• LV power measurement according to IEC 61557-12
• Quality of the LV power supply delivered according to the principles of IEC
61000-4-30 class S (up to harmonic 40)
• Transformer monitoring:
◦ Temperature monitoring with threshold alarm
◦ Measurement of current peaks
• Monitoring, remote indication, and local display of T300 and substation
data
• Integrated automation functions in the SC150/SC160 module
(Sectionalizer, Tripping protection)
• Substation thermal and environmental condition monitoring
• Recording of time- and date-stamped events in logs (SOE)
• Battery-backed power supply with several hours independent operation in
the event of an AC line outage
• Local or remote communication over 1 or more communication channels:
local communication with auxiliary equipment; remote communication with
the remote control center (SCADA system). The following modems are
managed on the communication ports:
◦ 4G (standard EU and US versions)
◦ RS-232/RS-485
◦ Zigbee receiver
• Settings by protocol in the SC160 module
• Communication protocols for communicating with the control center or with
other devices:
◦ IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC 60870-5-104 controlling station and controlled
station. For controlled station, DLT634.5101-2002 and DLT634.5104-2009
profiles are supported
◦ DNP3 master station and outstation
◦ Modbus client and server
◦ Modbus Sepam client
◦ IEC 61850 client and server
◦ Zigbee (IEEE standard 802.15.4) client
• Configuration of communication ports
• Device time synchronization, can be set:
◦ Via the communication protocol
◦ Via the SNTP server
◦ Via GPS (with 4G modem box)
• IEC 61131-3 PLC (ISaGRAF®) including text and graphics editors for
executing specific custom applications in the following programming
languages:
◦ SFC: Sequential Function Chart
◦ FBD: Function Block Diagram
◦ LD: Ladder Diagram
◦ ST: Structured Text
◦ IL: Instruction List

20 NT00378–EN–10
Description of T300 Modules T300

Description of T300 Modules

What’s in This Chapter
HU250 Module – CPU and Communication Gateway .......................................21
SC150 Module – Switch Control Unit ..............................................................22
SC160 Module – Switchgear Control, Protection Unit .......................................22
LV150 Module – Low Voltage Measuring Unit ..................................................23
PS50 Module – Backup Power Supply for Severe Environments.......................24
T300 Internal Architecture ..............................................................................24

Easergy T300 comprises several communicating modules.

HU250 Module – CPU and Communication Gateway

The T300 HU250 module manages the following functions:
• User database and access rights administration
• Remote communication with the control center (SCADA system) via the
protocols (IEC 60870-5-101/IEC 61850 protocols) and the secure protocols
(IEC 60870-5-104/DNP3)
• Flexible local communication (Ethernet, Wi-Fi, Zigbee, RS-232)
• Flexible communication media (Ethernet, 2G, 3G, 4G networks)
• Communication gateway for the T300 modules
• LAN communication for third-party devices (IED) in client/server station
protocols (Modbus, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850 protocols, DNP3)
• Access to local and remote configuration for all T300 modules
• Web server with local and remote access
• Integrated automation function with execution of programmable logic control
• Remote/local operation of global functions, enabling/disabling of PLC function
For more information regarding installing, connection, and use of HU250 module,
refer to the HU250 Installation Guide (ref: NHA77925).

NT00378–EN–10 21
T300 Description of T300 Modules

SC150 Module – Switch Control Unit

NOTE: In the document, SC150 and SC160 names are replaced with SCxxx
when the related information concerns both SC150 and SC160 modules.
Otherwise specificities are indicated for each module.
The T300 SC150 module manages the following functions:
• Control and monitoring of all switch types
• Detection of ammetric and directional fault currents:
◦ Detection of Ammetric phase overcurrent and ground fault
◦ Detection of Directional phase overcurrent and ground fault
• Detection of broken phase conductor
• Current measurements using standard current transformers
• MV Voltage measurements using different types of sensor: LPVT, VT, VDS,
VPIS-V3, and external capacitive divider installed on the MV cables
• MV Power measurement in accordance with standard IEC 61557-12
• MV Power quality according to the principles of IEC 61000-4-30 class S (up to
harmonic 40)
• Disturbance record according to IEC 60255-24
• Special integrated automation function: sectionalizer
• Port configuration

For more information regarding installing, connection, and use of SC150 module,
refer to the SC150 Installation Guide (ref: NHA91857).

SC160 Module – Switchgear Control, Protection Unit

The T300 SC160 module manages the following functions:
• Control and monitoring of all breaker types
• Detection or, detection and tripping protection of ammetric and directional
fault currents:
◦ Ammetric phase overcurrent and ground fault
◦ Directional phase overcurrent and ground fault
• Cold Load PickUp function
• Detection of broken phase conductor
• Current measurements using standard current transformers

22 NT00378–EN–10
Description of T300 Modules T300

• MV Voltage measurements using different types of sensor: LPVT, VT, VPIS-

V3
• MV Power measurement in accordance with standard IEC 61557-12
• MV Power quality according to the principles of IEC 61000-4-30 class S (up to
harmonic 40)
• Disturbance record according to IEC 60255-24
• Special integrated automation function: sectionalizer
• Remote settings by protocols
• Port configuration

For more information regarding installing, connection, and use of SC160 module,
refer to the SC160 Installation Guide (ref: GDE64933).

LV150 Module – Low Voltage Measuring Unit

The T300 LV150 module manages the following functions:
• Current measurements using standard current transformers
• LV Voltage measurements using Voltage adaptor
• LV Power measurement in accordance with standard IEC 61557-12
• LV Power quality according to the principles of IEC 61000-4-30 class S (up to
harmonic 40)
• Detection of broken phase conductor
• Port configuration

NT00378–EN–10 23
T300 Description of T300 Modules

For more information regarding installing, connection, and use of LV150 module,
refer to the LV150 Installation Guide (ref: NHA92575).

PS50 Module – Backup Power Supply for Severe

Environments
The PS50 is the default power supply for the T300. It supplies power to the system
and allows, through a battery-backup power supply, continuity of operation for the
equipment listed below in the event of a power outage:
• Motor mechanism for the MV switches and circuit breakers
• Transmission interfaces (radio, modem, etc.)
• T300 electronic modules
• Third-party devices, such as protection relays, fault current passage
indicators, and other electronic equipment installed in the MV substation
The PS50 module can communicate on an RS485 Modbus link with the HU250
module to exchange information managed by the PS50 power supply. This
communication also makes it possible to set the PS50 module from the T300 Web
server.

For more information regarding installing, connection, and use of PS50 module,
refer to the PS50 Installation Guide (ref: NT00375).

T300 Internal Architecture

The diagram below shows an example of internal architecture for a T300 RTU
comprising the following modules:
• 1 HU250
• 1 SCxxx
• 1 LV150
• 1 PS50
T300 platform offers a modular architecture. This means that multiple
architectures can be implemented, for example more SCxxx and LV150 modules
can be added depending on the requirements. Expansion modules can be added
to enhance the platform connectivity function.
There may be just the HU250 module used, or the PS50 module may be replaced
with another type of power supply.
This diagram shows the various internal links between the component modules.
The HU250 is the central interface for internal communication between all the
modules as well as for external communication.

24 NT00378–EN–10
Description of T300 Modules T300

Ethernet Ethernet

SCxxx
Voltage
presence

Motor. power supply

Transmission
equipment
(modem or
radio)

Cubicle CTs
link link
LV Voltage
input sensor link
IED 12 V battery
Temperature
sensors link

NT00378–EN–10 25
T300 T300 Configuration Principle

T300 Configuration Principle

What’s in This Chapter
Engineering in Easergy Builder.......................................................................26
Management of RBAC and security policy.......................................................30

The T300 is delivered with a default factory configuration corresponding to the

options ordered.
This initial configuration should then be customized to adapt it to the user
application and requirements.
Configuration backup to PC or in Easergy Builder:
Configuration backup
T300 Easergy Builder Web server
to PC or in
Easergy Builder

1 2 3

1. Default configuration
2. Custom configuration
3. Custom configuration with application parameter settings
There are some tools for this purpose:
• Easergy Builder: Engineering tool for adding or customizing specific
operational options adapted to the application. Easergy Builder generates a
custom configuration for the T300 based on the initial configuration modified
by the addition of these options.
• CAE (Cybersecurity Administrator Expert): engineering tool for defining /
changing the equipment security policy and roles assigned to users.
• T300 Web server: Commissioning tool for the end user. Using the
configuration set up in Easergy Builder and loaded onto the equipment, the
user can set the parameters for the T300 application program via the Web
server. This step consists in customizing the parameters of the various
functions, such as fault current detection, communication, switch control,
measurement, etc.
In contrast to Easergy Builder, the Web server does not allow functions to be
added to the equipment. It only allows parameters to be set and customized
for the application associated with the functions already selected.

Engineering in Easergy Builder

Before using the equipment, a certain number of functions need to be configured
in Easergy Builder. These functions are not included in the factory configuration as
they depend on the customer application.
The functions that required to be added/modified in Easergy Builder are listed
below:

Adding/Deleting Channel and Modems

The setting of Channels and existing modems in the default configuration can be
done via the T300 Web server. However, the addition or replacement of modems
or the creation of Channels for the SCADA link, can only be done via Easergy
Builder.

26 NT00378–EN–10
T300 Configuration Principle T300

Refer to the Easergy Builder User Manual for more details on these custom
settings.

T300 Synchronization
The default configuration does not include device synchronization. The choice of
synchronization source can only be configured in Easergy Builder. The Web
server only allows the synchronization parameters to be set once the function has
been configured in Easergy Builder.
There are three possibilities for synchronizing the RTU:
• Automatically by the communication protocol (via the SCADA)
• Through an SNTP server, if the RTU is connected to an IP network
• By GPS satellites, if the HU250 module includes a 4G modem with GPS
option.
You can define two channels of synchronization, the primary device and the
secondary device. The secondary device will be used if the primary device is
unavailable.
Instructions on how to configure synchronization are given in the T300 Quick Start
Guide (NT00383). Refer to this document for more information.

Sequence of Events (SOE)

An events file is automatically created in the T300 default configuration. This file
corresponds to standard use of the equipment and includes a number of data for
which events are generated on change of states.
The engineering phase is to modify or add additional variables to the file or to
create additional events files (for example, measures backup file), or to change
the default storage files.
The total capacity of event files is limited to maximum 4 files. Easergy Builder
allows the management, creation or modification of these events files.
Note that this management cannot be done via the Web server. The Web server
can only be used to operate these events files, that is, consulting, downloading, or
deleting them.
Instructions on how to configure the SOE option are given in the T300 Quick Start
Guide (NT00383). Refer to this document for more information.

Historical Data according to DLT634.5101 / DLT634.5104 (HST)

DLT634.5101 / DLT634.5104 are Chinese standards based on IEC60870-5-101-
2002 and IEC-60870-5-104-2009.
When this profile is used, historical data is created according to these standards.
This selection is done during the engineering phase with Easergy Builder.
The Web server can be used to consult and download this data.

Client and Server Protocols

The default configuration of the equipment is provided without addressing for the
protocol since it must be adapted to the SCADA type used or the type of server to
include in the configuration.

NT00378–EN–10 27
T300 T300 Configuration Principle

The Client Protocols

For client protocols, the engineering phase is to create first of all server devices in
the system and the data that is associated to these devices. The data to create
depend on the application and the connected device type.
The addressing protocol must be set for all data you wish to report the statements
to the T300.
The list of client protocols that can be used is as follows:
• IEC 60870-5-101 (controlling station)
• IEC 60870-5-104 (controlling station)
• DNP3 (master station)
• Modbus (client)
• Modbus Sepam (client)
• IEC 61850 MMS or GOOSE (client)
• Zigbee - IEEE standard 802.15.4 (client)

The Server Protocols

For server protocols, the engineering phase consists of selecting in the system
database, the data that must be reported to the SCADA and then to define the
corresponding protocol addressing.
The list of server protocols that can be used is as follows:
• IEC 60870-5-101 (controlled station)
• IEC 60870-5-104 (controlled station)
• DNP3 (outstation)
• Modbus (server)
• IEC 61850 MMS or GOOSE (server)
Instructions on how to configure the client and server protocol addressees are
given in the T300 Quick Start Guide (NT00383). Refer to this document for more
information.

Personalization of LEDs
Some indicators used in front panel of the product and external lights can be
customized to define the data that will trigger the lighting of these LEDs. This
operation is made during the engineering phase via Easergy Builder advanced
tool.
It is possible to customize the colors of the LEDs and set the I/O filter parameters
via the Web server (see the Local I/O section). Note that for HU250, the same
operations can also be carried out in Easergy Builder.
Instructions on how to assign the LEDs are given in the T300 Quick Start Guide
(NT00383). Refer to this document for more information.

Management of specific commands

A specific management function related to the switch controls voltage can be
configured in the engineering phase via Easergy Builder.
Instructions on how to configure this specific command management option are
given in the Easergy Builder User Manual. Refer to this document for more
information.

28 NT00378–EN–10
T300 Configuration Principle T300

Calculation Formulae
The calculation formulae are used to carry out math, combinational logic
operations or others on T300 data in order to perform specific personalized
functions.
These Calculation formulaes can be created via Easergy Builder.
The list of operations available are given in the Easergy Builder User Manual.
Refer to this document for more information related to the calculation formulae.

IEC 61131-3 PLC

An IEC 61131-3 programming tool (ISaGRAF® platform) is available with the
T300 for developing PLC programs. This ISaGRAF® platform is an external
software tool to be installed on a PC. It is used to develop specific custom
applications in the following programming languages:
• SFC: Sequential Function Chart
• FBD: Function Block Diagram
• LD: Ladder Diagram
• ST: Structured Text
• IL: Instruction List
Before developing and using a PLC program in the HU250, the interface must first
be created with ISaGRAF® in Easergy Builder to define the links and the
relationship between these 2 elements and the CoreDB.
Instructions on how to configure the interface with ISaGRAF® in Easergy Builder
are given in the Easergy Builder User Manual. Refer to this document for more
information.

Automatic Transfer Switching

If the T300 system has at least two SCxxx modules, it can be configured with an
Automatic Transfer Switching function (ATS).
The ATS system can use the values of CoreDB variables for dynamically blocking
or allowing transfers. The particular variables to be used, for example, specific
digital inputs, must be configured using Easergy Builder by defining the ATS bin
controller as a destination. Different variables can be used for different blocking
conditions, for example, blocking all transfers or blocking self-return transfers.
Refer to the description of the Automatic Transfer Switching (ATS) settings, page
150 for more information.

Condition Monitoring
The T300 system is able to integrate the following sensors:
• TH110 Zigbee sensors to read cable connection temperature
• CL110 Zigbee sensors to read environment humidity and temperature.
This data can be monitored and computed to generate monitoring information
such as alarms.
Refer to Condition Monitoring, page 66 page.

NT00378–EN–10 29
T300 T300 Configuration Principle

Management of RBAC and security policy

The T300 is provided with a standard security policy and a default RBAC (roles
assigned to a number of predefined users).
The T300 security policy is managed by a special tool - CAE (Cybersecurity
Administrator Expert). The CAE can be used during the engineering phase to
redefine or change the system access restrictions, including the access rights and
responsibilities, via an RBAC (Role-Based Access Control) model.
Radius protocol provides also the capability to have a generalized and unique
authentication policy on a dedicated server, rather than to define them locally on
the various T300s of the network.
The commissioning phase done in the Web server will be only limited to adding or
deleting users, to modify their associated passwords, and to assign or modify one
or more of the roles pre-defined in the CAE to these users.
See the Managing Users and Roles, page 93 section for more information on how
to set these parameters.
Instructions on how to configure the security policy in the CAE are given in the
CAE User Manual. Refer to this document for more information.
To communicate a security topic affecting a Schneider Electric product or solution,
go to: https://www.se.com/ww/en/work/support/cybersecurity/vulnerability-policy.
jsp.

30 NT00378–EN–10
Initial Start-Up T300

Initial Start-Up
Instructions relating to starting up the equipment are described in the T300 Quick
Start Guide (reference NT00383). Refer to this document to get the following
information:
• How to install Easergy Builder
• First local connection to the T300 Web server
◦ Connecting to the T300 Web server via an Ethernet network
◦ Connecting to the T300 Web server via a Wi-Fi network
• Configuring the SCxxx and LV150 modules IP addresses
• Overview of Easergy Builder
• How to import a T300 configuration into Easergy Builder
• How to import a saved tar.gz T300 configuration into Easergy Builder
• How to customize the T300 configuration in Easergy Builder
• How to synchronize the T300
• How to send a configuration to the T300 via Easergy Builder.

NT00378–EN–10 31
T300 Connection to the T300 Web Server

Connection to the T300 Web Server

What’s in This Chapter
Equipment Required for the T300 Connection .................................................32
Principle of the T300 Embedded Web Server ..................................................33
IP Addresses for Connection to the T300.........................................................34
Connection to the T300 Web Server ...............................................................34

Easergy T300 needs a connection from a PC, tablet, or smartphone to be able to

configure, consult, or carry out maintenance on the equipment. This can be via a
Wi-Fi or Ethernet connection (via the HU250 module).
Instructions on how to connect to the T300 Web server are not given in this
manual. Refer to the T300 Quick Start Guide (NT00383), for detailed instructions
on how to connect via Ethernet or Wi-Fi technologies.

Equipment Required for the T300 Connection

The T300 needs a PC with Windows XP, 7, or more recent operating system, and
a web browser. It also needs:
• An Ethernet port (RJ45) on the PC to connect to the T300 via an Ethernet
network or direct PC-T300 access
• Wi-Fi access on the PC to connect to the T300
Connection of a configuration/consultation/maintenance PC to one of the available
ETH port:

Ethernet cable for the PC-T300 link

NOTE: The choice of Wi-Fi or Ethernet access to the T300 is up to the user.
There is no difference in operation between the 2 types of link. However, Wi-Fi
is considered as a local access mode and Ethernet a remote access mode,
with the possibilities that relate to these two modes.
The T300 parameters and data are accessed directly via a web browser. No other
additional software is required to access the embedded Web server.

32 NT00378–EN–10
Connection to the T300 Web Server T300

Principle of the T300 Embedded Web Server

The T300 includes an embedded server that initializes automatically as soon as
the connection is established with the T300.
The data displayed by the T300 via this embedded server is presented in the form
of HTML pages.
Different pages and subpages can be accessed by the user depending on the
user’s rights.
The HTML pages displaying the data managed by the T300 Web server are
refreshed in real time to help ensure they show the most up-to-date status
information.
Access and connection are secured by a login and password.
From the embedded server you can do the following actions:
• Modify the fault current detection, communication, automation function, or
system parameters.
NOTE: The T300 is supplied with default parameters that can be modified
as required by the user.
• View the states managed by the T300 (indicators, events, potential issues,
measurements, counters, etc.).
• Save the T300 configuration to file or download it from a file already saved on
the PC.
• Send remote control orders to the T300.
• Transfer diagnostics logs in .csv file format compatible with Excel application.
• Load a new version of the T300 application firmware (to the HU250 or the
SCxxx and LV150 modules).
• Download disturbance records from SCxxx modules.
• Monitor protocol traces.
• Manage Zigbee network.

NT00378–EN–10 33
T300 Connection to the T300 Web Server

IP Addresses for Connection to the T300

As standard, the T300 integrates IP addresses for the local Ethernet connection
from a PC as well as for Wi-Fi access. The following characteristics are needed to
establish these connections:
• Default T300 Ethernet port address: https://192.168.0.254
• Wi-Fi access:
◦ Wi-Fi SSID = EasergyT300
◦ Password = EasergyT300
◦ Wi-Fi IP address = https://192.168.2.254
NOTE: To prevent conflicts and for security purposes, it is advisable to
configure a single and unique SSID for each T300. Refer to the corresponding
section, page 110 in this manual for information on how to change these
parameter settings. The default connection parameters are general purpose,
but it is possible to modify them to meet your network specifications.

Connection to the T300 Web Server

Easergy T300 needs a connection from a PC, tablet, or smartphone to be able to
configure, consult, or carry out maintenance on the equipment. This can be via a
Wi-Fi or Ethernet connection (via the HU250 module).
Instructions on how to connect to the T300 Web server are not given in this
manual. Refer to the T300 Quick Start Guide (NT00383), for detailed instructions
on how to connect via Ethernet or Wi-Fi technologies.

34 NT00378–EN–10
 T300

Overview of the T300 Web Server

What’s in This Part
T300 Web Server Menu Overview ...................................................................36
Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages .........................................................43
Measurements ...............................................................................................74
Diagnostic Files..............................................................................................83
Traces ...........................................................................................................89
System Cyber-Security ...................................................................................91
Device Synchronization ................................................................................ 108
IP Interfaces ................................................................................................ 110
Port Configuration ........................................................................................ 122
Dial-Up Modem Settings ............................................................................... 126
Upgrading the Firmware ............................................................................... 129
Managing the Configuration .......................................................................... 134

NT00378–EN–10 35
T300 T300 Web Server Menu Overview

T300 Web Server Menu Overview

What’s in This Chapter
Home ...........................................................................................................36
Monitoring and Control ..................................................................................37
MV/LV Measurements ...................................................................................38
Diagnostics...................................................................................................39
Maintenance .................................................................................................39
Settings ........................................................................................................40

The T300 Web server is the local and remote user interface for consulting and
monitoring T300 operating, maintenance, and application configuration data.
Once the user name and password have been entered, all data in the HTML
pages can be viewed simply by clicking on the links in the ribbon at the top of the
screen.
This ribbon contains five menus:
• Home
• Monitoring and Control
• MV/LV Measurements
• Diagnostics
• Maintenance

Home
The information on this page identifies the MV substation to which the user is
connected.
• the substation GPS coordinates
• a location map created automatically and updated using the GPS data (if
there is an Internet connection)
• the product ID with the option to add images
• notes added by the user.

36 NT00378–EN–10
T300 Web Server Menu Overview T300

Monitoring and Control

This menu is used to view the T300 status, monitor substation data, and control
the breaking device:
• Graphical representation of the substation and switchgear with electrical
symbols
• Display of T300 status in the form of a data point list with the values
associated with each type (state, command data, analog data, setpoint
values)
• Option to set command and setpoint data parameters manually from the Web
server and to assign a specific preset value (for security purposes, each
command must be confirmed by the user)
• Environmental and thermal connection condition monitoring in cubicles and
substation (Alarm, Warning, Normal status management)
NOTE: The user can modify command data via the Web server:
• Via the Wi-Fi network only if the T300 is in local mode
• Via the LAN or WAN only if the T300 is in remote mode

NT00378–EN–10 37
T300 T300 Web Server Menu Overview

MV/LV Measurements

This page is used to view the different measurements performed by the T300
(display of some measurements according to the options of the unit):
• Current measurements on each phase, residual current and mean current
• Average of the currents on each phase, the calculated or measured residual
current and the average current
• Phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase voltage measurements on each phase
and indication of residual voltage and mean voltage measurements
• Average of the voltages on each phase, the calculated neutral voltage and
the phase-to-neutral average voltage
• Active, reactive, and apparent power measurements on each phase
• Average of the active, reactive and apparent power on each phase and of the
total power
• Power factor measurement on each phase
• Active, reactive, and apparent energy measurements on each phase
• Power quality measurement (statistics and counters for the voltage
interruptions, sags, and swells on the MV network)
• Minimum and Maximum recorded for current averages, per day, week, month
and year
• Harmonic distortions on each phase current and the average of the three
phases
• Harmonic distortions on each phase voltage and the average of the three
phases
• Harmonic magnitude 1 on each phase current
• Harmonic magnitude 1 on each phase voltage
• Harmonic 1 current and voltage on the average of the three phases
• Harmonic angle 1 on each phase current
• Harmonic angle 1 on each phase voltage

38 NT00378–EN–10
T300 Web Server Menu Overview T300

Diagnostics
This menu is used to view the data logs recorded in real time by the T300. Events
are time-stamped with a 1 ms resolution.
Recording of events: Data changes are recorded in log files according to the
configuration.
The recording mode must be configured using the Easergy Builder configuration
tool:
• It is possible to define up to 4 log files (Events)
• The size and name of each log file are configurable
• Any data can be assigned to a log file
NOTE: By default, Event, Measurement and Alarm logs are created, with a
capacity of 2,000 events.
Log files can be downloaded locally or remotely. For all logs, when the storage
capacity is reached, the most recent event erases the oldest event from the list.

Maintenance
This menu helps with maintenance of the T300 by supplying the relevant
information or by allowing configuration of the standard RTU applications:
• Users: managing the roles and passwords associated with each user.
• Clock: Synchronization of the device date and time.
• IP configuration: Definition of the IP addresses of the LAN, WAN, and Wi-Fi
networks or the T300 router function.
• Physical port configuration: Physical configuration of the Ethernet on
HU250.
• Modem configuration: Configuration of the modem communication
parameters, for the modems providing remote access, such as the 4G
modem.
• Firmware: Information relating to the firmware for each module (version,
date, and time) with the option to update it.

NT00378–EN–10 39
T300 T300 Web Server Menu Overview

• Configuration: Information relating to the device configuration with the

option to import/export the configuration in file format or saving/importing it
into dedicated slot spaces in the device.
• IEEE 802.15.4 network management: (Option) Information relating to the
IEEE 802.15.4 network that manages sensors to monitor the environmental
and thermal conditions.

Settings
In the Settings window, you can access the pages dedicated to each T300
module and their configuration:
• HU250: Configuration of the HU250 module parameters
Accessed via HU01 Settings page.

◦ Local I/O
◦ Automatic transfer switching (ATS)
◦ Condition monitoring
◦ Communication protocols
◦ Communication ports and modems
◦ Physical port configuration (for example, RS-485 for PS50 link, RS-232/
485 modem box)
◦ Time synchronization

40 NT00378–EN–10
T300 Web Server Menu Overview T300

• SC0x: Configuration of the parameters of each SC150 or SC160 module

Accessed via SC0x Settings page.

◦ Current and voltage measurement sensors

◦ Switch controls
◦ Voltage presence/absence detection
◦ Voltage monitoring
◦ Active overpower
◦ Fault current indication
◦ Fault current detection
◦ Tripping protection (on SC160 module only)
◦ Cold Load Pick-up function (on SC160 module only)
◦ Broken conductor detection
◦ MV Measurements
◦ MV Power quality
◦ Disturbance record
◦ Sectionalizer automation function
◦ Port configuration
◦ Local I/O: User LED customization

NT00378–EN–10 41
T300 T300 Web Server Menu Overview

• PS50: Configuration of the parameters of each PS50 module:

Accessed via PS01 Settings page.

◦ Power supply input monitoring

◦ Battery
◦ Remote control order monitoring
◦ Back-up power supply management
• LV0x: Configuration of the parameters of each LV150 module:
Accessed via LV01 Settings page.

◦ Current and voltage measurement sensors

◦ LV Voltage monitoring
◦ Broken conductor detection
◦ LV Measurements
◦ LV Power quality
◦ Port configuration
◦ Local I/O: User LED customization

42 NT00378–EN–10
Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages T300

Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages

What’s in This Chapter
Home Page...................................................................................................43
Substation Page............................................................................................45
System Page ................................................................................................58
Zigbee Network Monitoring Page....................................................................64
Condition Monitoring Page .............................................................................66
Data Pages...................................................................................................70

Home Page
Accessed via Home page

Once the username and password have been entered to access the T300 Web
server, the Home page is displayed automatically.
This page contains the following general information about the MV substation:
• Device Information: It is possible to add the names of the operators who
have used or configured the equipment or a specific custom note that can be
viewed each time a connection is established to this substation.
• Location: The GPS coordinates for the MV substation location (latitude,
longitude, and altitude) can be entered here. If these coordinates are defined
and there is an Internet connection, a Google map automatically appears in
the Home page.

It is possible to download another image manually by clicking the button

next to the map. Then simply browse to select the relevant image file and
click Upload to upload the map:

NT00378–EN–10 43
T300 Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages

• Factory Information: This gives the product ID and the version of the
software loaded on the HU250 module. It is also possible to include an image
of the MV substation or a particular device here for identification purposes.

To do this, click the , button to select the relevant file and click Upload to
upload the image:

44 NT00378–EN–10
Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages T300

Substation Page
Access via Monitoring & Control > Substation page.
Substation with SC150 module:

Substation with SC160 module:

The Substation page provides an overview of the information relating to the MV

substation managed by the T300:
• The overall status of the T300 HU250 module (local/remote control, state of
the automation function, etc.)
• The overall status of the power supplies managed by the PS50 module
• Information related to the MV switches and the associated measurements,
with a graphical representation per channel (by SCxxx module)
• The Low Voltage measurements managed by each LV150 module
• The environmental and thermal conditions in the substation, if the Condition
Monitoring functionality is used.

NT00378–EN–10 45
T300 Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages

Information Displayed for the HU250 Module

A B

This graphical representation corresponds to the information displayed and the

actions that are possible on the HU250 module, namely:
A. Indication of Local/Remote operation (this can be changed using the
pushbutton on the HU250 module)
B. Reset button to clear the fault current indication
C. Automation function status (ON/OFF or locked), with the option to activate the

automation function (by clicking the ON button) and to reset the

automation function lock (by clicking the Reset button)

D. Indication of the ambient temperature, if there is a PT100 temperature sensor
connected to the HU250 module
E. CL110 and TH110 sensors can also be connected to provide respectively
temperature and humidity data, and connection temperature.

Extented Display for the HU250 Module

By clicking on the graphical representation of the HU250 above, an additional

representation appears on the right-hand side of the screen indicating the states
of all the digital I/O:

46 NT00378–EN–10
Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages T300

By clicking the Close button, the user has the option to change the
state of the associated digital output:

NOTE: the labels of the displayed states can eventually be customized by

changing the description of the corresponding data points in CoreDb via
Easergy Builder. Refer to the Easergy Builder User's Manual for more
information.

Information Displayed for the PS50 Module

A B

This graphical representation contains the following information:

A. The status of the power supplies managed by the PS50 module, respectively:
• The AC line supply
• The 24/48 VDC power supply for the switch motor mechanism
• The 12 VDC power supply for the transmission equipment
• The battery
B. A Reset button for restarting the power supplies in the event of an outage
following a potential issue on one of the outputs

Power supply shutdown

A power supply shutdown occurs when the mains power supply has been
switched off for a long time, in order to limit the time on the backup power supply
(battery). This power interruption preserves the capacity of the battery and its
lifetime. Battery backup saving can be enabled or disabled by configuration. When
this function is enabled, as soon as the MV network is switched off, the battery
takes over the power supply for a configurable maximum period Backup time
duration (default: 16 hours).
Beyond this period, an immediate alarm General shutdown is activated and then
Power supply is switched off automatically. The power supply is also switched off if
the battery reachs low level and then PS50 module enters sleep mode until the AC
network voltage returns.
From this sleep mode, the 24/48 V & 12 V power supply outputs can be
reactivated temporarily when the PS50 module is reset (Reset button B) or when
the External Reset digital input of the PS50 module is activated. The power
supply is switched off again and permanently if it reach the critical discharge
threshold (< 10.8 V).

NT00378–EN–10 47
T300 Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages

Extended Display for the PS50 Module

By clicking on the graphical representation of the PS50 above, additional
information appears on the right-hand side of the screen including states,
measurements, and the possible actions.

E F

G
A
B
C
D

I H J K

Under normal conditions, the information is displayed in green. In the event of an

anomaly, the information is displayed in orange or red depending on the severity
of the condition.

The extended information included in the detailed view of the PS50 module is
described in the table below:

A A Reboot PS50 button for restarting the PS50 module. This action performs a complete reboot of the
T300 device.

B A Restart all outputs button for restarting all outputs. This may reset the outputs to their initial state if this
is possible and if the anomaly is temporary.

C A General shutdown button that can only be activated if there is no AC line supply and power is supplied
by the battery only. Click this button to switch all T300 power supplies to standby mode and thereby
conserve battery power. It is possible to exit standby mode, either manually by pressing the Reset button
on the front of the PS50, or automatically when the AC line supply is restored.

D A Reload default settings button for clearing the current parameters and returning to the PS50 module
default parameters.

48 NT00378–EN–10
Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages T300

E A Health symbol indicating the overall state of the PS50 and an Overtemperature symbol indicating the
state of the PS50 module thermal protection.

F A symbol indicating the state of the 24/48 V switch motor mechanism power supply with an ON/OFF
button for turning this power supply on or off.
A voltage measurement and a consumption measurement are also displayed for this power supply.

G A symbol indicating the state of the 12 V transmission power supply with an ON/OFF button for turning
this power supply on or off.
A voltage measurement and a consumption measurement are also displayed for this power supply.

H A symbol indicating the state of the general 12 V power supply for the T300 modules and IEDs.
A voltage measurement and a consumption measurement are also displayed for this power supply.

I This section displays the overall state of the battery charger with a Reset temperature statistics button
to clear the stored minimum and maximum battery temperatures. A voltage measurement and a
consumption measurement are also displayed for the battery.

J A symbol for the presence/absence of the AC line supply with the corresponding voltage measurement.

K Two time indications and a button:

• Last battery charging time: Duration of the battery's last charging period
• Last battery discharging time: Duration of the battery's last discharging period
• Battery test button for activating the battery test immediately. The battery test is theoretically
conducted automatically depending on the period defined in the Automatic test interval parameter
(default setting: 1 day).

NOTE: The button is not displayed if the battery is disconnected, if battery

potential issue is detected, or if the AC supply is missing.

L A graphical representation of the overall status of the battery, including:

• Overall battery health indication
• Percentage battery charge remaining
• Internal resistance measurement in mOhm
• The temperature measured in the PS50 operating environment (measurement made internally in
the PS50 box) with an indication of the minimum and maximum values recorded since the last
statistics reset (see H)
• An indication of whether the battery is charging or discharging via arrows showing the direction of
the current. The measurement indicated at the charger level (see H) gives a measurement value for
this current.

NT00378–EN–10 49
T300 Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages

Information Displayed for the SCxxx Modules

SC150 module SC160 module

A
A

F G

B C
B C
E
E

D
D

Each switch managed by an SCxxx module is represented graphically with the

following indications:
A. Position of the switch or breaker (open or closed).
On the SC160, square grayed when the protection mode is disabled.
B. Position of the ground switch (open or closed) or position of the earth switch
and series disconnector
C. Presence of the MV voltage (ON or OFF)
D. Display of the RMS current and voltage measurements for each phase
E. Indication of the presence of a fault current by a red flash and an arrow
indicating the direction of the fault current (for directional fault current
detection):
• Green arrow = in the direction of the busbar
• Red arrow = in the direction of the network
F. Indication that the ATS function is used in the module. For SC160 only, when
it has tripped, the ATS commands are blocked.
G. Trip indication reset button

50 NT00378–EN–10
Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages T300

Button for editing the graphics parameters associated with switches:

Setting Graphical Representation of the Switch

CAUTION
HAZARD OF INCORRECT EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• The HMI provides essential information concerning the position of the
switchgear, earthing switch and disconnector if applicable.
• Ensure that the HMI configuration is consistent with the wiring and
configuration for each SC module.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment
damage.

It is possible to customize the graphical representation of each switch by clicking

the button at the top of the page.

Click the edit button that appears in the page to access the graphic
parameters for the switch you want to customize.
A window appears offering the following choices:

For SC150 module: For SC160 module:

NT00378–EN–10 51
T300 Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages

Parameter Possible choices Description

SC Position on the bus • Not connected Choice of position of the switch on the busbar:
• On the left • No link with the busbar

• On the right • On the left

• In the middle • On the right

• In the middle
Switch type • Disconnector Choice of switchgear represented:
• Load Switch • Disconnector

• Switch disconnector • Load switch

• Circuit breaker • Switch disconnector

• Circuit breaker
Earth switch and • Earth switch only Choice of switchgear and disconnector represented:
disconnector • Downstream • Earth switch only
disconnector and earth • Downstream disconnector and earth switch
switch
• Upstream disconnector and earth switch
• Upstream disconnector
and earth switch
Line output • Not any output Choice for the representation of the line downstream of the switch
• Cable
• LV0x
VT precense • No Choice of whether or not to display the voltage measurement transformer
• Yes
CT presence • No Choice of whether or not to display the current measurement transformer
• Yes
Bay name Name given to the channel

Extended Display for the SCxxx Module

By clicking on the graphical representation of the switch, additional information
appears on the right-hand side of the screen including counters and
measurements:

Dummy switch position LED on the Dummy switch position LED on the
front panel of the SC150 module front panel of the SC160 module

A A
B

A. Dummy switch position A. Tripping mode Enabled/Disabled

B. Dummy switch position if
configured in Local inputs and
outputs settings

52 NT00378–EN–10
Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages T300

For SC150 module

F
B

C
H
A

D
I

For SC160 module

F
B
G

C
H
A

D I

E
A. Information relating to the switch is displayed in the same way as in the
standard representation. There is also an option to send a command to the
switch by clicking the or button (depending on
its actual position). The graphical representation of the switch is automatically
updated as soon as the change of state is detected.
B. The general fault current counters representing the total number of phase-to-
phase and phase-to-ground (earth) fault currents detected are displayed by
type (transient, semi-permanent, and permanent), with the option to reset the

counter values by clicking the Reset button .

C. The detected phase-to-phase fault current counters are displayed by type
(transient, semi-permanent, and permanent), with the option to change the

values by clicking the Edit button .

D. The detected phase-to-ground (earth) fault current counters are displayed by
type (transient, semi-permanent, and permanent), with the option to change

the values by clicking the Edit button .

E. The number of operations counted on the switch is given, with the option to

change the value by clicking the Edit button .

NT00378–EN–10 53
T300 Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages

F. The T300 includes the option to configure 2 sets of fault current detection
parameters (with specific values for each set) in the Settings section, page 40
of the Web server. The option is given here to select which set of parameters

to apply to fault current detection by clicking or . The active group is

indicated by a green LED.
G. A Simulation section that is used to test a command on a dummy switch
without actually actuating it (this can be useful to test T300-SCADA
communication when it is not physically possible to operate the switch due to
an interruption on the MV network). To do this, click on the or
button to operate dummy switch and, for instance, check the
retransmission of the change of state remotely (e.g. at the SCADA end). The
position of the dummy switch changes state in this Simulation section of the
application but the actual position of the MV switch (indicated in A) does not
change. After a command is sent to the dummy switch, its position is
indicated for 30 seconds on the first customized LED on the SCxxx module.
H. The instantaneous current measurements for each phase as well as the
residual current
I. The instantaneous voltage measurements for each phase.

Extended Display for the ATS Function

Example for configuration with ATS enabled in case of switch 1 closed and
switch 2 open:
Main view in Monitoring & Control > Substation page – Web server

Display for the SC150 Display for the SC160

B
D E

Additional information when ATS function is activated (see the Automatic Transfer
Switching (ATS) section).

From the main view of the Substation page, click the button to display
detailed information about ATS:

54 NT00378–EN–10
Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages T300

A. ATS state:

Text Description

Off The automation is off.

Locked - invalid switch positions for initialisation One switch must be closed and the other switch must be open(1).

Waiting for voltage presence Voltage is absent for at least one switch.

Ready - waiting for voltage absence Voltage is present for both switches.

Checking transfer conditions following voltage absence Checking blocking conditions when voltage absence has been detected on
the active source.
Checking transfer conditions to return to normal Checking blocking conditions when voltage presence has been detected on
the normal active source.
Transfer in progress Transfer in progress.

Locked - blocking condition(s) for transfer The ATS has detected a blocking condition (1).

Locked - switch operation failure The ATS attempted a switch operation, but the switch did not reach the
desired position (1).

(1) If the ATS goes to a Locked state, then it can only be unlocked via a reset using the button on the HU250 front panel, the T300
Web server, or SCADA command.

B. Result of the last source transfer:

Text Description

Success The source transfer was successful.

Active switch position open or unknown The active switch was not in the closed state.

Active switch operations blocked The active switch was blocked.

Inactive switch position closed or unknown The inactive switch was not in the open state.

Inactive switch operation blocked The inactive switch was blocked.

Voltage present for active switch The voltage on the active switch was not absent.

Voltage absent for inactive switch The voltage on the inactive switch was not present.

Switch control power absent The power to control switches was absent

Transfer blocked The ATS has detected a blocking condition.

Transfer to inactive source blocked The changeover to the inactive source was blocked.

Transfer blocked due to a fault indication The changeover was blocked due to an active fault indication on one of the
SCxxx modules.
Maximum try count reached while checking transfer In the case where the voltage on the current active source repeatedly
conditions changes between present and absent, the maximum try count has been
reached.
Active switch did not open The The active switch has not been able to execute the command.

Inactive switch did not close The inactive switch has not been able to execute the command.
Maximum operation time exceeded while checking transfer In the case where the voltage on the current active source repeatedly
conditions changes between present and absent, the maximum operation time has
been reached.

C. Representation of the SCxxx modules, with the option to display the extended
display for the SC0x by clicking the corresponding green header.
D. Position of the switch (open or closed)
E. Presence of the MV voltage (ON or OFF)

NT00378–EN–10 55
T300 Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages

Information Displayed for the LV150 Modules

Each LV150 module has its own graphical representation including the display of
the following information:
A. The temperature measurements provided by the three PT100 sensors
connected to the LV150.
B. The LV current measurements on each phase and neutral.
C. The LV voltage measurements on each phase and neutral.
NOTE: The neutral current measurement displayed corresponds to a
measured value in case the 3-phase + neutral sensors mounting is used and
to a calculated value (by summing all 3 phases) when the neutral is not
connected.

Graphical Representation of LV150

Button for editing the graphics parameters associated with LV150.

Window for setting the parameters of the graphic objects associated with LV150

56 NT00378–EN–10
Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages T300

It is possible to customize the graphical representation of each LV150 module by

clicking the Edit button at the top of the page.

Click the button that appears in the page to access the graphic parameters
for the LV150 you want to customize.
A window appears offering the following choices:

Parameter Possible choices Description

LV Position on the bus • Not connected Choice of position of the LV150 on the busbar:
• On the left • No link with the busbar

• On the right • On the left

• In the middle • On the right

• In the middle
Bay name Name given to the channel

Synoptics Settings
Window for selecting the standard for the graphical representations

Click the button to define the type of graphical representation to apply for the
objects displayed in the page's synoptics:

Parameter Possible choices Description

Symbols • IEC standard The standard used relates to the representation of the switchgear, voltage
• ANSI standard and current transformers, and the ground switch:
• Objects represented in accordance with the IEC standard.
• Objects represented in accordance with the ANSI standard.

NT00378–EN–10 57
T300 Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages

System Page
Accessed via Monitoring & Control > System page

This page provides a general overview of the system. The states of the various
items (modules) are given by symbols indicating a correct operation or potential
issue conditions. The indications given by theses states are detailed by module
here after.

HU250 Module Status

Overall HU250 module status with Zigbee network status

58 NT00378–EN–10
Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages T300

A. The status of the Wi-Fi access, the K7 4G modem with a 5-bar GSM signal
strength indicator and indication of the IP address if connected to the mobile
network, and, if implemented, the status of the Zigbee network.
B. The status of the HU250 module itself, including the configuration, the PLC,
the GPS reception, the synchronization of equipment and a percentage value
representing the CPU usage level.
NOTE: The GPS reception symbol indicates the satus of GPS reception with a
color:
• gray: unconfigured or invalid GPS reception
• green: operational GPS reception
• red: GPS reception potential issue.
NOTE: A GPS reception issue causes a loss of synchronization and the
corresponding symbol becomes red.

PS50 Module Status

A. An indication of the type of link used for the internal HU250-PS50 link (RS485
in Modbus protocol).
B. The status of the PS50 module, the charger, and the battery, as well as the
overall status of the internal Modbus RS485 link.

LV150 and SCxxx Modules Status

NT00378–EN–10 59
T300 Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages

A. An indication of the type of link used for the internal link between HU250
module and SCxxx/LV150 modules (Ethernet LAN in IEC 60870-5-104
protocol).
B. The status of the SCxxx and LV150 modules, including for each the status of
the configuration and synchronization, as well as the overall status of the
internal IEC 60870-5-104 Ethernet LAN.

Extended Display
By passing the mouse over some graphical elements of the modules in the
System page, a "pop up" window appears giving additional indications.
This additional display concerns the following:
1. Configuration: By passing the mouse over the Conf element of a module,
the system indicates the following informations:
• The minimum software required for compatibility with the module
configuration.
• The options installed on the module (eg details of installed power
measurement options).
Example of a pop-up window displayed for the Configuration section of a
module:

60 NT00378–EN–10
Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages T300

2. Synchronization: By passing the mouse over the Synchro element of a

module, the system gives the following indications:
• For the HU250 module:
◦ Status of the two synchronization sources (primary and secondary).
• For the SCxxx and LV150 modules:
◦ Status of the module time synchronization and status of the
synchronization source generating this synchronization.
◦ Status of the "1 Hz" module synchronization as well as the status of
this synchronization 1 Hz signal. This synchronization allows all the
SCxxx and LV150 modules to be synchronized to the same 1 Hz
frequency top generated by the HU250 module.
NOTE: SCxxx and LV150 synchronization status remain "not
synchronized" until the HU250 has synchronized itself when
powering on.
Example of a pop-up window displayed for the Synchronization section of a
HU250 module and SC150/LV150 module:

3. Modem: by passing the mouse over the graphical representation of a 4G

modem, the system indicates the following informations:
• Type of selected network (GPRS, 3G or 4G).
• Received cellular signal strength, numbered from 0 to 99:
◦ 0 to 10: insufficient signal
11 to 31: correct signal
◦ 99: undetectable signals.
• The IP address obtained for the T300, assigned by the mobile operator.
• The modem IMEI code, allowing identification of the equipment
connecting to the mobile network.

NT00378–EN–10 61
T300 Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages

4. Zigbee Network: by passing the mouse over the graphical representation of

the Zigbee network, the following menus are displayed:
• Zigbee Network Management: to access the page that displays all the
devices (sensors) used to provide data for Condition Monitoring. Refer to
Zigbee Network Management, page 428 page description in the
Maintenance chapter.
• Zigbee Network Monitoring: to access the page that displays the
environmental conditions and cable thermal conditions in the substation
and cubicles. Refer to Condition Monitoring page description in this
chapter.
Access to Zigbee network functionalities:

Shortcut to Pages
By clicking on the graphical representation of a module, a pop-up window appears
giving the possibility to access directly certain pages of the Web server linked to
this module, like shortcuts or quick accesses.
Depending on the type of module, quick access can be of different types:
• PS50: shortcuts to the PS50 module configuration page (Settings page) and
the PS50 module status display page (Subview of PS page).
• Other modules: shortcuts to the system events page (Diagnostics >
System page) and the module settings page (Settings page).
Example of a pop-up window displayed for the Modem section of a module:

62 NT00378–EN–10
Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages T300

Example of shortcuts available by clicking on the module representation:

NT00378–EN–10 63
T300 Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages

Zigbee Network Monitoring Page

Access via System view, pass the mouse over the Zigbee network to display the
Slot #x menu, then select Zigbee Network Monitoring
Or
Access via Maintenance > Zigbee Network Management page, then click the
Net Monitor button.

The ZigBee Network Monitoring page provides a general view of the Zigbee
network used to manage the environmental and thermal conditions in the
substation and various zones in the substation.

Description
• Network information button: allows you to display Zigbee network and box
information:
◦ Network parameters: Port, Transmission Channel, Transmission Power,
Security
◦ EPID: Extended Personal Network Identification
◦ IEEE: address of the Zigbee box (or Zigbee K7) according to IEEE
standard 802.15.4
◦ Zigbee box firmware version
• Network management button: allows you to display the Maintenance >
Zigbee Network Management page.

64 NT00378–EN–10
Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages T300

• Network device tab and table: displays information related to sensors

configured in the Zigbee network, using Easergy builder.
◦ Sensor status: refer to Maintenance > Zigbee Network Management
page, page 428 for more information.

Sensor status Description

Offline and Not paired

Online and Paired

Online and Unpairing (previously paired, has been unpaired)

Offline and Paired

A sensor is Offline when data is no longer received from the sensor, for
example due to an incident on the sensor.
◦ Sensor name: configured using Easergy Builder
◦ Sensor description: also used to describe the sensor location,
configured using Easergy Builder
◦ Sensor ID: unique identifier of the sensor, generally configured using
Easergy Builder. May be Unknown when a sensor has been unpaired. In
this case, it must be configured in the Zigbee network device parameters,
page 162 window.
◦ Sensor Type: CL110 or TH110 types only, configured using Easergy
Builder.
◦ Received Signal Strength Indicator: signal value received from the
Zigbee box (K7). Used to check the signal reception from the sensor. An
RSSI < - 80 indicates a weak signal strength.
◦ Device temperature: available for TH110 sensors only. Refer to
Condition Monitoring for more details.
◦ Battery voltage: available for CL110 sensor only.
◦ Temperature: value measured by the sensor. Refer to Condition
Monitoring, page 29 for more details.
◦ Relative humidity: value measured by the sensor, only available on
CL110 sensors. Refer to Condition Monitoring, page 29 for more details.
◦ ?: indicates that the sensor is not communicating or the value provided by
the sensor is not valid.

NT00378–EN–10 65
T300 Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages

Condition Monitoring Page

Accessed via Monitoring & Control > Condition Monitoring
The Condition Monitoring page provides a general view of the environmental
and thermal conditions in the substation and various zones in the substation.
Depending on data provided by sensors (through Zigbee protocol), and settings
applied on this data, the condition states (Normal, Pre-alarm, or Alarm) are
displayed for each zone (substation, cubicle and cable).

Information Displayed for the Substation Zones

The page opens on a general table view of the status of each zone of the
substation where data can be provided.
Zone labels can be modified in Easergybuilder (in the description field in CMON
device; zone_id is fixed and cannot be changed after zone creation).

The provided data allows the following monitoring:

• Environmental monitoring: monitor climatic conditions (temperature, humidity,
condensation, pollution) to evaluate the maintenance frequency.
• Connection monitoring: temperature of cable connections.

66 NT00378–EN–10
Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages T300

+/- Zone Monitoring Functions Condition status / Data value

Substation Substation condition status: Normal, Pre-alarm, Alarm

Cubicle 01 Zone (cubicle 01) condition status: Normal, Pre-alarm, Alarm, or ? (*)

Cubicle environmental condition status (**): Normal, Pre-alarm, Alarm

Environmental
Temperature Temperature in the cubicle

Humidity Percentage of humidity in the cubicle

Severity indicator Indicator related to climatic conditions over time

Next Maintenance date Determined from the severity indicators

Cable condition status: Normal, Pre-alarm, Alarm, or ? (*)

Cable 1
Phase A Temperature of connection point of phase A

Phase B Temperature of connection point of phase B

Phase C Temperature of connection point of phase C

Discrepancy Temperature discrepancy between 3 phase connections (discrepancy between

current and temperature not provided)

(*): ? indicates that the status is undefined due to invalid or missing sensor values (broken or offline sensors).

(**): Environmental Condition Status

Environmental Condition Status:

Condition Status
Temperature higher than the configured threshold (Temperature Maximum (ºC) ) Pre-alarm

Humidity higher than the configured threshold for at least 24 h (Humidity Maximum (%)) Pre-alarm

Less than 2 months before the next maintenance date Pre-alarm

Degrees of severity depending on condensation and pollution 1 or 2: Pre-alarm
• Severity 1: pollution level light and condensation level = 1
• Severity 2: condensation level = 2

Next maintenance date due Alarm

Degrees of severity depending on condensation and pollution 3 Alarm

Other conditions Normal

NOTE: Additional sensors can be installed and configured to provide other

alarms, for example:
• Door open
• Gas Monitoring with manometer
• Flood detection

NT00378–EN–10 67
T300 Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages

Cubicle environmental condition detailed view

Accessed via button in Environmental cell.

Example of Environmental condition data display

Data Current value Maximum value or access to other function

Ambient temperature Provided by sensor Maximum value before pre-alarm (refer to
Settings)

Humidity Provided by sensor Maximum value before pre-alarm (refer to

Settings)

Coldpoint temperature Provided by sensor

Severity indicator Calculated according to condensation and View Graph: displays the Environment Severity
pollution Indicator Graph (*)

Duration without condensation Calculated according to ambient/coldpoint

temperatures and humidity

(*): Environment Severity Indicator Graph: Based on standard IEC 62271-304, four levels of severity are defined. The indicators take
into account the climatic conditions and the time spent in these conditions. This allows the determination of the condition status (Normal,
Pre-alarm, Alarm) and the calculation of the maintenance frequency required and consequently, the Next Maintenance Date.

Data Data Access to other function

Last Maintenance date Next Maintenance date Maintenance Done

NOTE: In zones where the Cold Point Temperature is not measured,

calculations related to Condensation and Maintenance Date cannot be done.
In such cases alarms are generated taking into account only ambient
temperature and humidity.

68 NT00378–EN–10
Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages T300

Cable temperature detailed view

Accessed via button in Cable cell.

Example of Cable temperature data display

Data for each phase Current Tmp PreAlarm Tmp threshold Alarm Tmp threshold
and discrepancy

Phase A Temperature of connection point of phase A Configured (*) Configured (*)

Phase B Temperature of connection point of phase B Configured (*) Configured (*)

Phase C Temperature of connection point of phase C Configured (*) Configured (*)

Discrepancy Maximum difference between phases temperatures Configured (*) Configured (*)

(*): Refer to Settings.

NT00378–EN–10 69
T300 Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages

Data Pages
Accessed via Monitoring & Control > Status-Command-Analog-Setpoint page
There are 4 pages in the T300 Web server for viewing status and measurement
data or for sending commands:
• Status page: For viewing the status of the digital data

• Command page: For sending change of state commands based on the

digital data
• Analog page: For viewing measurement values
• Setpoint page: For forcing parameter values
Each page has the same format, with the following information displayed on the
screen:
• The data refresh period can be configured in 1 of 3 ways:
◦ Fast: Data is refreshed every second
◦ Normal: Data is refreshed every 4 seconds
◦ Slow: Data is refreshed every 10 seconds

• It is also possible to set a filter to display data by Source or Destination to limit

the amount of data displayed on screen:

70 NT00378–EN–10
Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages T300

• The description of a data item is displayed over 3 main columns:

◦ Point name: Internal name of the data item in CoreDb (database)
◦ Description: Data label
◦ Value: Value of the data item

• By clicking the button associated with the Value field, you can manually
edit the state or value of a Command or Setpoint data item:

NOTE: For switch control, it is advisable to use the interface in the

Substation view.
• Similarly, for a Status or Analog data item, you can force its status or value.
However, this type of data is only processed in read mode; forcing is only
applied in simulation.

To do this, the actual data item must first be locked by clicking the Locking
option.
Once the data is locked, the button associated with the Value field then
becomes accessible and can be used to change its status or value in
simulation mode.
NOTE: The modified value also impacts the remote retransmission at the
SCADA end. This allows you, for instance, to simulate the state of a
variable and to test its retransmission at the SCADA end, without affecting
the actual equipment operation.

Disabling the Locking option cancels the simulation and returns to the actual
status or value of the data item.

NT00378–EN–10 71
T300 Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages

• Two icons displayed in the Quality column provide an indication of the data
processing quality. The quality of a data item can give an indication of the
validity of the status or value entered on the Web server page.
This quality is indicated for the following 2 sources:
◦ Local source: Reflects the quality of the data item from the viewpoint of
its processing at the HU250 end.

◦ Remote source: Reflects the quality of the data item sent by the
information source (device) processing the data (e.g. SCxxx, PS50, etc.)
In the same way as for a change of state or value for Status or Analog data,
it is possible to manually simulate the quality of a data item.
To do this you must first lock the data item using the Locking option, then
click the button associated with the Quality field.
The possible choices for the local and remote source quality are then
displayed on screen.
Disabling the Locking option cancels the simulation and returns to the actual
quality of the data item.
Choice of quality options for the local and remote sources

72 NT00378–EN–10
Data Consultation and Monitoring Pages T300

The table below shows the correspondence of the different quality types that can
be simulated after having locked a data item.
Note that this also gives an indication of the different quality types that can be
obtained in actual operation:

Local source quality Description

Overflow An overflow has occurred on a counter

Rollover An overflow and an automatic reset have occurred on a counter

Counter adjustment The counter has been adjusted

Chatter Excessive change on a digital input

Locked The data item is locked

Manual The data item has been manually replaced

Not typical The data item has not yet been written to the database

Invalid data Data item is invalid

Critical alarm The value of the data item has exceeded the High-High alarm threshold

High level alarm The value of the data item has exceeded the High alarm threshold

Low level alarm The value of the data item is below the Low alarm threshold
Signal alarm The value of the data item is below the Low-Low alarm threshold

Invalid alarm The data item time-stamp is invalid or inaccurate (the HU250 is not synchronized by a source)

Remote source quality Description

Overflow An overflow has occurred

Rollover A rollover has occurred on a counter
Counter adjustment The counter has been adjusted

Chatter Excessive change on a digital input

Locked The data item is locked

Substituted data The data item has been manually replaced

Not topical The data item has not yet been written to the database

Invalid data Data item is invalid

Invalid time The data item time-stamp is invalid

NT00378–EN–10 73
T300 Measurements

Measurements
What’s in This Chapter
Measurements Pages....................................................................................74

Measurements Pages
Accessed via MV Measurements and LV Measurements > PM – Power or PM –
Energy or Power Quality page
The MV Measurements and LV Measurements pages in the Web server display
the different types of power, energy, and quality measurements taken by the T300
on the MV and LV networks, in tabs including data tables based on the analog
data received from the current and voltage sensors.
NOTE: Regarding MV voltage measurement, the T300 takes the
measurements using the same current and voltage sensors as those used to
detect fault currents.
The power and energy measurements comply with standard IEC 61557-12.
The power quality measurements are completed according to the principles of IEC
61000-4-30 class S (up to harmonic 40).
NOTE: To comply with the accuracy required by the standards (1% accuracy),
voltage measurements are only possible using LPVT or VT type adaptors (for
LV measurement; only Voltage adaptor type).
Some measurements are optional for the T300 ("option" column in the table
below). If the corresponding option is not present in the equipment, the associated
data is not displayed in the MV Measurements and LV Measurements pages.
NOTE: The PM option (and associated measurements) is included as
standard for LV measurements, although this is optional for MV
measurements.
The data displayed in the MV Measurements page depends on the parameter
settings in the Settings > SC0x > Measurements and Power Quality pages. The
data displayed in the LV Measurements page depends on the parameter settings
in the Settings > LV0x > Measurements and Power Quality pages. Refer to the
corresponding sections for more information on how to configure these
parameters.

74 NT00378–EN–10
Measurements T300

Example of measurements displayed – MV or LV Measurement > PM – Power

page / RMS tab

The list of measurements displayed in the MV Measurements and LV

Measurements pages is identical and shown below:

Tab PM - Power
Tab RMS
Category Measure Description Option

Current Mean Mean current on all 3 phases Standard

Phase A Current on phase A Standard

Phase B Current on phase B Standard

Phase C Current on phase C Standard

Residual Residual current Standard

Single voltage Mean Mean phase-to-neutral voltage on all 3 phases Standard

Phase A Phase-to-neutral voltage on phase A Standard

Phase B Phase-to-neutral voltage on phase B Standard

Phase C Phase-to-neutral voltage on phase C Standard

Neutral Residual voltage Standard

Phase voltage Mean Mean phase-to-phase voltage on all 3 phases Standard

Vab Phase-to-phase voltage between phases A and B Standard

Vbc Phase-to-phase voltage between phases B and C Standard

Vca Phase-to-phase voltage between phases C and A Standard

Real power Total Total active power PM option (*)

Phase A Active power on phase A PM option (*)

NT00378–EN–10 75
T300 Measurements

Tab PM - Power
Tab RMS
Category Measure Description Option

Phase B Active power on phase B PM option (*)

Phase C Active power on phase C PM option (*)

Reactive power Total Total reactive power PM option (*)

Phase A Reactive power on phase A PM option (*)

Phase B Reactive power on phase B PM option (*)

Phase C Reactive power on phase C PM option (*)

Apparent power Total Total apparent power PM option (*)

Phase A Apparent power on phase A PM option (*)

Phase B Apparent power on phase B PM option (*)

Phase C Apparent power on phase C PM option (*)

Power factor Total Total power factor PM option (*)

Phase A Power factor on phase A PM option (*)

Phase B Power factor on phase B PM option (*)

Phase C Power factor on phase C PM option (*)

(*): PM option is incuded as standard for the LV measurements.

Example of measurements displayed – MV or LV Measurement > PM – Power

page / Average tab

Tab PM - Power
Tab Average (°) with PM option (*)

Category Measure Description

Current Average current phase A Average current phase A

Average current phase B Average current phase B

Average current phase C Average current phase C

RMS current residual (computed) RMS current residual (computed)

76 NT00378–EN–10
Measurements T300

Tab PM - Power
Tab Average (°) with PM option (*)

Category Measure Description

RMS current residual (measured) RMS current residual (measured)

Average of Mean RMS phase current Average of Mean RMS phase current

Voltage Average voltage phase A Average voltage phase A

Average voltage phase B Average voltage phase B

Average voltage phase C Average voltage phase B

Average voltage neutral (computed) Average voltage neutral (computed)

Average of Mean RMS voltage phase-N Average of Mean RMS voltage phase-N

Power Average P Real power phase A Average P Real power phase A

Average P Real power phase B Average P Real power phase B

Average P Real power phase C Average P Real power phase C

Average P Real power total Average P Real power total

Average Q Reactive power phase A Average Q Reactive power phase A

Average Q Reactive power phase B Average Q Reactive power phase B

Average Q Reactive power phase C Average Q Reactive power phase C

Average Q Reactive power total Average Q Reactive power total

Average S Apparent power phase A Average S Apparent power phase A

Average S Apparent power phase B Average S Apparent power phase B

Average S Apparent power phase C Average S Apparent power phase C

Average S Apparent power total Average S Apparent power total

Min/Max recording Minimum of average of Mean RMS phase current day Minimum of average of Mean RMS phase current day

Minimum of average of Mean RMS phase current Minimum of average of Mean RMS phase current week
week
Minimum of average of Mean RMS phase current Minimum of average of Mean RMS phase current month
month
Minimum of average of Mean RMS phase current year Minimum of average of Mean RMS phase current year

Maximum of average of Mean RMS phase current day Maximum of average of Mean RMS phase current day

Maximum of average of Mean RMS phase current Maximum of average of Mean RMS phase current week
week
Maximum of average of Mean RMS phase current Maximum of average of Mean RMS phase current month
month
Maximum of average of Mean RMS phase current Maximum of average of Mean RMS phase current year
year

(*): PM option is incuded as standard for the LV measurements.

(°): A button Reset min/max average current values on the page manually resets the calculated
averages on the currents.

NT00378–EN–10 77
T300 Measurements

Example of measurements displayed: MV or LV Measurement > PM – Energy

Tab PM – Energy (°) with PM (*) option

Category Measurement Description

Real energy Total Total active energy

Phase A Active energy on phase A

Phase B Active energy on phase B

Phase C Active energy on phase C

Demand Total active energy consumption

Supply Total active energy supplied

Reactive energy Total Total reactive energy

Phase A Reactive energy on phase A

Phase B Reactive energy on phase B

Phase C Reactive energy on phase C

Demand Total reactive energy consumption

Supply Total reactive energy in supply

Positive reactive energy Demand Total positive reactive energy consumption

Supply Total positive reactive energy in supply

Negative reactive Demand Total negative reactive energy consumption

energy
Supply Total negative reactive energy in supply

Apparent energy Total Total apparent energy

Phase A Apparent energy on phase A

Phase B Apparent energy on phase B

Phase C Apparent energy on phase C

(*): PM option is incuded as standard for the LV measurements.

(°): A button Reset Energy Counters on the page manually resets the energy counters.

78 NT00378–EN–10
Measurements T300

Example of measurements displayed: MV or LV Measurement > Power Quality

> Quality tab

Tab Power Quality

Tab Quality (°) with PQ option (*)

Category Duration Measurement Description

Voltage 10 min Mean Phase-N Mean voltage on each phase and neutral over 10 minute period

Phase A Mean voltage on phase A over 10 minute period

Phase B Mean voltage on phase B over 10 minute period

Phase C Mean voltage on phase C over 10 minute period

Neutral Mean residual voltage flowing in the neutral over 10 minute

period

2 hours Mean Phase-N Mean voltage on each phase and neutral over 2 hour period

Phase A Mean voltage on phase A over 2 hour period

Phase B Mean voltage on phase B over 2 hour period

Phase C Mean voltage on phase C over 2 hour period

Neutral Mean residual voltage flowing in the neutral over 2 hour period

Unbalance 150/180 cycles (*) Current unbalance Current unbalance over 3 seconde period
negative sequence
Voltage unbalance Voltage unbalance over 3 seconde period

10 min Current unbalance Current unbalance over 10 minute period

Voltage unbalance Voltage unbalance over 10 minute period

2 hours Current unbalance Current unbalance over 2 hour period

Voltage unbalance Voltage unbalance over 2 hour period

Dips swells and Short Dip Short voltage sag indication

interruption
Swell Short voltage swell indication

Interruption Short voltage interruption indication

Medium Dip Medium voltage sag indication

Swell Medium voltage swell indication

NT00378–EN–10 79
T300 Measurements

Tab Power Quality

Tab Quality (°) with PQ option (*)

Category Duration Measurement Description

Long Dip Long voltage sag indication

Swell Long voltage swell indication

Interruption Long voltage interruption indication

(*): 150 measurement cycles corresponds to 3 secondes at 50 Hz. 180 measurement cycles corresponds to 3 secondes at 60 Hz.

(°): A button Reset Quality Event Counters on the page manually resets the quality event counters.

NOTE: All Quality data are displayed in the Monitoring & control > Data >
Analog pages. See also the T300 Database Manual (ref. NT00391), for the
details of the variables corresponding to Quality data.
Example of measurements displayed: MV or LV Measurement > Power Quality
> Harmonics tab

Tab Power Quality

Tab Harmonics
Period Feature Measurement Description

Voltage harmonic (with PQ option)

Instantaneous Total harmonic distortion Mean Voltage total harmonic distortion mean of 3 phases

Phase A Voltage phase A total harmonic distortion

Phase B Voltage phase B total harmonic distortion

Phase C Voltage phase C total harmonic distortion

Magnitude H1 Mean Voltage harmonic 1 magnitude mean of 3 phases

Phase A Voltage phase A harmonic 1 magnitude

Phase B Voltage phase B harmonic 1 magnitude

Phase C Voltage phase C harmonic 1 magnitude

Angle H1 Phase A Voltage phase A harmonic 1 angle

Phase B Voltage phase B harmonic 1 angle

Phase C Voltage phase C harmonic 1 angle

10 minutes Total harmonic distortion Mean Voltage total harmonic distortion mean of 3 phases- 10 minutes

Phase A Voltage phase A total harmonic distortion - 10 minutes

Phase B Voltage phase B total harmonic distortion - 10 minutes

80 NT00378–EN–10
Measurements T300

Tab Power Quality

Tab Harmonics
Period Feature Measurement Description

Voltage harmonic (with PQ option)

Phase C Voltage phase C total harmonic distortion - 10 minutes

Magnitude H1 Mean Voltage harmonic 1 magnitude mean of 3 phases - 10 minutes

Phase A Voltage phase A harmonic 1 magnitude - 10 minutes

Phase B Voltage phase B harmonic 1 magnitude - 10 minutes

Phase C Voltage phase C harmonic 1 magnitude - 10 minutes

Magnitude Hx (x is rank 2 Phase A Voltage phase A harmonic x magnitude - 10 minutes

to 40 harmonics)
Phase B Voltage phase B harmonic x magnitude - 10 minutes

Phase C Voltage phase C harmonic x magnitude - 10 minutes

2 hours Total harmonic distortion Mean Voltage total harmonic distortion mean of 3 phases - 2 hours

Phase A Voltage phase A total harmonic distortion - 2 hours

Phase B Voltage phase B total harmonic distortion - 2 hours

Phase C Voltage phase C total harmonic distortion - 2 hours

Magnitude H1 Mean Voltage harmonic 1 magnitude mean of 3 phases - 2 hours

Phase A Voltage phase A harmonic 1 magnitude - 2 hours

Phase B Voltage phase B harmonic 1 magnitude - 2 hours

Phase C Voltage phase C harmonic 1 magnitude - 2 hours

Magnitude Hx (x is rank 2 Phase A Voltage phase A harmonic x magnitude - 2 hours

to 40 harmonics)
Phase B Voltage phase B harmonic x magnitude - 2 hours

Phase C Voltage phase C harmonic x magnitude - 2 hours

Current harmonic (with PQ option)

Instantaneous Total harmonic distortion Mean Current total harmonic distortion mean of 3 phases

Phase A Current phase A total harmonic distortion

Phase B Current phase B total harmonic distortion

Phase C Current phase C total harmonic distortion

Residual (*) Residual current total harmonic distortion

Magnitude H1 Mean Current harmonic 1 magnitude mean of 3 phases

Phase A Current phase A harmonic 1 magnitude

Phase B Current phase B harmonic 1 magnitude

Phase C Current phase C harmonic 1 magnitude

Residual Residual current harmonic 1 magnitude

Angle H1 Phase A Current phase A harmonic 1 angle

Phase B Current phase B harmonic 1 angle

Phase C Current phase C harmonic 1 angle

Residual Residual current harmonic 1 angle

10 minutes Total harmonic distortion Mean Current total harmonic distortion mean of 3 phases - 10 minutes

Phase A Current phase A total harmonic distortion - 10 minutes

Phase B Current phase B total harmonic distortion - 10 minutes

Phase C Current phase C total harmonic distortion - 10 minutes

Residual Residual current total harmonic distortion - 10 minutes

NT00378–EN–10 81
T300 Measurements

Tab Power Quality

Tab Harmonics
Period Feature Measurement Description

Voltage harmonic (with PQ option)

10 minutes Magnitude H1 Mean Current harmonic 1 magnitude mean of 3 phases - 10 minutes

Phase A Current phase A harmonic 1 magnitude - 10 minutes

Phase B Current phase B harmonic 1 magnitude - 10 minutes

Phase C Current phase C harmonic 1 magnitude - 10 minutes

Residual Residual current harmonic 1 - magnitude - 10 minutes

Magnitude Hx (x is rank 2 Phase A Current phase A harmonic x magnitude - 10 minutes

to 40 harmonics)
Phase B Current phase B harmonic x magnitude - 10 minutes

Phase C Current phase C harmonic x magnitude - 10 minutes

Residual Residual current harmonic x - magnitude - 10 minutes

2 hours Total harmonic distortion Mean Current harmonic 1 magnitude mean of 3 phases - 2 hours

Phase A Current phase A total harmonic distortion - 2 hours

Phase B Current phase B total harmonic distortion - 2 hours

Phase C Current phase C total harmonic distortion - 2 hours

Residual Residual current total harmonic distortion - 2 hours

Magnitude H1 Mean Current harmonic 1 magnitude mean of 3 phases - 2 hours

Phase A Current phase A harmonic 1 magnitude - 2 hours

Phase B Current phase B harmonic 1 magnitude - 2 hours

Phase C Current phase C harmonic 1 magnitude - 2 hours

Residual Residual current harmonic 1 magnitude - 2 hours

Magnitude Hx (x is rank 2 Phase A Current phase A harmonic x magnitude - 2 hours

to 40 harmonics)
Phase B Current phase B harmonic x magnitude - 2 hours

Phase C Current phase C harmonic x magnitude - 2 hours

Residual Residual current harmonic x magnitude - 2 hours

(*): Only the residual current I0 measured is calculated in Power Quality. Residual current I0 calculated by adding the values of the three
phases is not calculated in Power Quality.

NOTE: All Harmonics data are displayed in the Monitoring & control > Data
> Analog pages. See also the T300 Database Manual (ref. NT00391), for the
details of the variables corresponding to harmonics.

82 NT00378–EN–10
Diagnostic Files T300

Diagnostic Files
What’s in This Chapter
Events Page .................................................................................................84
System Page ................................................................................................85
Cyber-Security Page .....................................................................................87
History Logs Page .........................................................................................88
Disturbance Records Page ............................................................................88

The T300 includes log files that can be viewed in the Web server for performing
diagnostics on the equipment.
Three files are created by default:
• An events file, displayed in the Events page (default capacity: 2,000 events).
• A system status file, displayed in the System page.
• A Cyber Security status file, displayed in the Security page.
The overall storage capacity for all diagnostic files is 500,000 events.
NOTE: Other diagnostic files can be added by configuring them in the T300
Web server (a maximum of 4 diagnostic files in total). The Events file
configuration can also be modified, for instance, to change the type of data
displayed or to modify the file size. To do this, refer to the dedicated SOE User
Manual or the T300 Quick Start Guide. Note that the System file cannot be
modified by configuration.
The data recording parameters are saved in the log files according to the definition
in Easergy Builder:
• It is possible to define up to 4 log files.
• The size and name of each log file is configurable.
• Any data can be assigned to a log file.
By clicking the Export CSV button, the log files can be downloaded locally and
remotely in .csv format (respecting the standard RFC4180 format), which means
they are compatible with Excel or any other spreadsheet package.
By clicking the Refresh button, the data displayed is immediately refreshed.
Clicking the Clear button clears all events at once. Confirmation is requested to
help avoid the potential for inadvertant operator selection.
Sorting data displayed by column

Data can be sorted by clicking the title of a column and selecting the sort option
required.
For all logs, when the storage capacity is reached, the most recent event erases
the oldest event from the list.

NT00378–EN–10 83
T300 Diagnostic Files

Events Page
Accessed via Diagnostic > Events page
This page is used to view events associated with changes of state on data items.
These are recorded in real time by the T300 and time-stamped with a 1 ms
resolution.
On a change of state, an event is recorded in the file using predefined descriptions
specific to each state or measurement unit. The name of the data item and its
corresponding description are given on this page as well as the source that
processed the data item that generated the event.

84 NT00378–EN–10
Diagnostic Files T300

System Page
Access via Diagnostic > System page.

The T300 integrates the option to save additional internal system data for
operation and maintenance purposes.
This data informs the user of any potential internal anomalies or potential
operating issues in the system.
One tab per module is displayed on this page. Each tab contains the system
information or the ERRORS generated by the module concerned (HU250, SCxxx
or LV150).
The messages displayed on each tab are categorized into 3 different types:
• INFO: Normal information on actions executed by the module
• WARNING: Messages that need to attract the user's attention regarding
possible anomalies
• ERROR: Potential issue detected by the system that could downgrade
operation

NT00378–EN–10 85
T300 Diagnostic Files

Tip: a sort in the Level column can be performed (by typing the first letters of the
desired level) to display the information by category:

86 NT00378–EN–10
Diagnostic Files T300

Cyber-Security Page
Accessed via Diagnostic > Cyber Security page

This page displays the Cyber Security logs. All information about user connections
to the Web server is saved as simple information (INFO) or security alerts
according to the level of importance (WARNING or EMERGENCY).
The name of the user making the connection is logged in order to identify who is
trying to connect. A "WARNING" type message is logged for each authentication
error. An "EMERGENCY" message is logged when users whose access is
blocked after a certain number of failed attempts (see chapter CAE and RBAC -
System Security Parameters, page 92 for details on the T300 security policy).
NOTE: This page can be accessed in the Web server only by users who have
the "SECADM" role (see section Managing Users and Roles, page 93 for
more information on user roles and access rights).

NT00378–EN–10 87
T300 Diagnostic Files

History Logs Page

Accessed via Diagnostic > History logs page.

The semantic is detailed in DLT634.5101 / DLT634.5104 standards.

Click the Export button to download the log files locally and remotely in .msg
format (according to the DLT634.5101 / DLT634.5104 standards).
Click the Refresh button to refresh the displayed data.

Disturbance Records Page

Accessed via Diagnostics > Disturbance Records page

This page displays disturbance records provided by each SCxxx module.

Up to 50 records are displayed.
In case of clock update of the T300 system, stored records are kept as they were
recorded.

By clicking the button, data displayed is immediately refreshed.

Download and delete records:
• To download one record of the SC0x, select the check box next to the file
name and click Download.
• To download all the records of the SC0x, select the check box of the SC0x
section and click Download.
• To delete one record of the SC0x, select the check box next to the file name
and click Delete.
• To delete all the records of the SC0x, select the check box of the SC0x
section and click Delete.

88 NT00378–EN–10
Traces T300

Traces
What’s in This Chapter
Protocol Traces .............................................................................................89

Protocol Traces
Accessed via Diagnostic > Trace page

From the Trace pages, you can display the exchanges on the different
communication channels of the T300. For example, you can view internal
communications between the T300 modules, or external communications
between the T300 and the IEDs or between the T300 and a SCADA.
In the Communication section, from the communication channels available in the
unit, select the traces to display. The available channels depend on the initial
configuration of the equipment.
It is also possible to display the communication of AT commands between the
HU250 and the modems. To display the AT commands in a trace, select Modems
and then select Modem1, Modem2, or both.
The communication between the HU250 and the Zigbee receiver can be
monitored by selecting Zigbee. It is then possible to filter only application-level
traces by selecting app.
In addition to the exchanges related to communication and modems instructions, it
is also possible to display in the trace any new event occurring to the CoreDb
database, by selecting All events.
When the elements are selected for the trace, click the Show selected traces
button to display the corresponding trace in a new page.

NT00378–EN–10 89
T300 Traces

Trace display
Example of trace with a Modbus protocol (HU250-PS50 communication)

Example of trace with modem AT commands

In the Trace page, each frame received or sent by the T300 is identified by a
symbol and a unique number at the beginning of the line. This number and this
symbol make it possible to identify the corresponding communication channel,
modem or event.
Each line in the trace contains a timestamp indicating when the communicaton
was sent or received. For frames and AT commands, the timestamp is at the
beginning of the line. For events, the timestamp is at the end of the line.
A frame corresponding to an exchange by a protocol is displayed in hexadecimal.
An AT command instruction is displayed in text. A database event is displayed with
the name of variable and the new state or value associated with it.
For certain protocols, the end of the line may give additional informations on the
nature of the frame ("Read" or "Write" function, for example in Modbus protocol).
When the page capacity is reached (1000 lines maximum), the trace is recorded in
sub-pages classified and numbered in order of trace appearance. To pause
scrolling of the trace but continue to record trace information, click the Suspend
auto scrolling button.
To stop recording trace information, click the Stop traces button.
To start or restart recording trace information, click the Start traces button.
To export trace information into a text file, click the Export button. The text file
contains the information that is displayed on the Trace page.
The Select traces button is displayed when trace recording has been stopped
manually. Click this button to return to the trace selection page.
NOTE: The IEC61850 protocol can not be displayed in the trace.

90 NT00378–EN–10
System Cyber-Security T300

System Cyber-Security
What’s in This Chapter
Users and roles .............................................................................................91
Centralized Authentication with RADIUS ....................................................... 100

Users and roles

Accessed via Maintenance > Users page.

CAE and RBAC

CAE is the T300 security administration tool for managing the security policy and
defining the restrictions for accessing the system or the communication interfaces.
It is a software tool for installing on a PC.
The T300 security policy consists in structuring the rights and responsibilities
within the system and defining who is authorized to do what, when, and how,
based on an RBAC (role-based access control) model.
The access is controlled via roles. A role is a set of permissions, and users receive
these permissions via the role to which they are assigned.
This RBAC model allows the T300 to:
• secure local and remote connections for maintenance: HTTPS, SSH
• secure file transfer protocols: SFTP
The T300 is supplied with a predefined RBAC model allowing different levels of
user access adapted to T300 usage compliant with standard IEC 62351-8.
It is not strictly necessary, therefore, to modify the permissions and the roles of
this default RBAC model if it is suitable.
This RBAC contains one user per role. These users are configured with
passwords by default.

NT00378–EN–10 91
T300 System Cyber-Security

WARNING
HAZARD OF UNSECURE ACCESS
Change the default passwords either via the CAE or via the T300 Web server.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

The CAE can be used to create its own user database along with definition of its
own roles, as well as to manage the RBAC models for each device centrally.
The CAE can be used to manage:
• User accounts (add/modify/delete user accounts)
• Security of the installed base in the T300
For more information on the CAE, refer to the specific user instructions.
User Assignment Permission Assignment

Operations

Objects

Users Functional roles Permissions

System Security Parameters

Cybersecurity involves a certain number of system parameters that are applied to
the security policy.
These parameters are summarized in the table below.
Use the CAE tool to modify the parameter values.
Refer to the CAE User Manual for more information on these functions. The
default values in the CAE are given in brackets.

Parameter Description

Idle session timeout After a period of inactivity, user access to the Web server lapses. The user must re-enter their
username and password to reconnect (default setting: 15 minutes).

Authorize user lockout Option to lock/unlock a user account (function authorized by default)

Maximum number of connections The maximum number of connection attempts a user can make (5 attempts by default)

Password timeout Maximum time period allowed for entering password (3 minutes by default)

Account auto-unlock Automatic unlocking of a user account after a defined duration (see below) if the account has been
locked out (unlocking enabled by default)

Account lock duration Maximum time period for an account to remain locked (240 seconds by default)

Password complexity Choice of policy (strength) used for creating or modifying passwords.
3 levels of complexity are possible, compliant with standards:
• None:
◦ 1 character minimum
◦ Valid characters: ASCII [33,122]
• IEEE Std 1686 (default):
◦ 8 characters minimum
◦ Allowed characters: ASCII[33,122],
– lower case letter
– upper case letter
– numeric
– non-alphanumeric (! " # $ % & ' ( ) * , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ ] ^_ `)

92 NT00378–EN–10
System Cyber-Security T300

Parameter Description

• NERC:
◦ 8 characters minimum
◦ Allowed characters: ASCII [33,122], with at least 3 or more different types of the following
characters:
– lower case letter
– upper case letter
– numeric
– non-alphanumeric (! " # $ % & ' ( ) * , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ ] ^_ `)

Monitoring and recording List of supported standards:

standards
• BDEW (default)
• E3
• NERC_CIP
• IEEE 1686
• IEC 62351
• CS_PH1
Several standards can be selected in parallel.

Syslog server IP address (*) IP address for the Syslog server (10.22.90.14 by default)

Syslog server IP port (*) IP port number for the Syslog server (TCP 601 port by default)

SNMP Client/Server IP address Function not developed in T300

Rights activation Options for activating user rights:

• Cybersecurity rights (default)
• Generic rights

(*): A Syslog server has the ability to centralize cyber-security logs. Logs can be transmitted to the Syslog server, that is specified by these
two parameters.

Managing Users and Roles in the Web Server

Using the Web server, you can do the following actions:
• add or delete users, modify passwords, and assign or unassign one or more
predefined roles to users (either default roles or those created in the CAE).
• act only on 1 single Easergy T300 at a time (HU250 to which you are
connected).
In the default user database, the SecurityAdmin user is the only user with
sufficient rights (SECADM role) to administer T300 cybersecurity actions (see
table below).
Consequently, this is the only user who can manage/modify user passwords and
rights (roles):

Default Roles
Default Users INSTALLER ENGINEER VIEWER OPERATOR SECADM SECAUD RBACMNT
Installer x

Engineer x

Viewer x

Operator x

SecurityAdmin x

SecAud x

RbacMnt x

You need to connect to the T300 as a SecurityAdmin user to be able to perform

the user and role administration operations described below.
The rights defined for each role are detailed in the table below:

NT00378–EN–10 93
T300 System Cyber-Security

OPERATOR
INSTALLER

VIEWER
Rights Defined For Each Role/User

RBACMNT
ENGINEER

SECADM

SECAUD
Object Description Action

CONF_DB T300 application configuration CONFDB_READ x x x x

(HU250, SCxxx)
CONFDB_WRITE x x

CONF_SYS T300 system configuration CONFSYS_READ x x x

(Ethernet, Wi-Fi, modem box, etc.)
CONFSYS_ x x
WRITE
FIRMWARE HU250 firmware FIRMWARE_ x x x
VIEW
FIRMWARE_ x x
READ
FIRMWARE_ x x
WRITE
WEBSERVICE T300 Web server WEBSERVICES_ x x x x x
ACCESS
SSH Easergy Builder, console SSH_ACCESS x x

OS_SHELL Linux Shell, configuration import/ OSSHELL_ x

export service ACCESS

SYS_LOG System and SOE log files SYSLOG_READ x x x

SYSLOG_WRITE x x

RBAC System security (users, passwords, RBAC_READ x CAE

access rights, certificate
management) RBAC_WRITE x CAE

RBAC_LOG Security log file RBACLOG_READ x CAE CAE

DATA Device data (signals, DATA_READ x x x x

measurements, controls, counters,
PS50 settings, etc.) DATA_WRITE x x x

RESET Device reset RESET_ACCESS x x

NOTE: "CAE" means that this user/role cannot access the Web server, but
has the rights assigned via the CAE only.
NOTE: It is not possible to modify the rights assigned to a role via the T300
Web server. This can only be done via the CAE. Refer to the CAE manual for
more information on how to administer the roles and associated rights in the
RBAC model.
NOTE: To have full access to read and write a configuration in Easergy
Builder, you will need the services "SSH" and "OS_SHELL". So, only the
access Engineer allows this possibility.

94 NT00378–EN–10
System Cyber-Security T300

Modifying User Roles/Passwords

Example of default roles assigned to Changing a user password
the Installer user

Proceed as follows to change user roles and passwords:

• Connect to the T300 via the SecurityAdmin user.
• Go to the Maintenance > Users page in the Web server.
• This displays the list of existing users.
• Click on a user to display the roles assigned to them.
• To assign or remove a role from a user, simply check or uncheck the box next
to the specific role in the list. Several roles can be assigned to a single user,
but there must be at least one role per user.

• Once the user roles have been modified, click the button to save the
changes.

• It is also possible to delete the user by clicking the button. Confirmation

is requested to help avoid an inadvertant operator selection.

• Click the Change password button to change the user

password. The new password must be entered twice to confirm it for security
reasons.
Password creation rules are defined in the CAE (see the System Security
Parameters section). By default, the password must contain the following:
◦ At least 1 character
◦ Valid characters: ASCII code [33,122]

• By clicking the Add user button, it is also possible to create a new

user in addition to the default users.
This opens a new window, requesting entry of the password and definition of
the roles for this user. Click Ok to confirm creation of this user.

NT00378–EN–10 95
T300 System Cyber-Security

NOTE: It is possible to lock an existing user by enabling

the lock . The user will then no longer be able to connect using their login
(username and password).
NOTE: It is possible to assign cybersecurity administrator rights to a
predefined user other than SecurityAdmin. This other user can then perform
the same role and password administration tasks for all other users, except
their own.

Secure Operations
Using the T300 RBAC (Role-based Access Control), the Security Administrator
can segregate duties within the customer organization, by applying the following
recommendations:
• Grant users only the access they need to perform specific tasks, instead of
giving everybody one type of permission.
• When planning the access control strategy, it is a best practice to grant users
only the necessary rights to get their work done, and to define roles
accordingly.
• Change all the default passwords immediately after the installation and
responsibility transfer of the product.
• Create relevant user accounts and remove default ones, except
SecurityAdmin.

Access control coverage Recommendation

Password management Grant passwords only to users who need

access. Prohibit password sharing.

Account management Require Security Administrator to change

passwords regularly (and not to use the last N
passwords).

Account management Remove employee access account when

employment has terminated.

Account management Define and secure a backup Security

Administrator account.
User account Define different passwords for different
accounts.
Password management Do not transmit passwords via email or any
other way over insecure internet.

Security Log Event File

A dedicated cybersecurity event file is created in T300. This file logs all events
associated with connections to the T300 and all modification operations linked to
the cybersecurity strategy.
This file can only be accessed by a user with cybersecurity access rights. It can be
viewed and downloaded in the Diagnostic > Security log page in the Web server.

96 NT00378–EN–10
System Cyber-Security T300

NOTE: The cybersecurity event file has 750 entries which are overwritten in a
continuous loop.

Configuration of System Logging Protocol

If the Security Administrator has a System logging external server supporting
SYSLOG protocol, it is possible to configure the HU250 to send Security Logs to
this server.
The configuration is done using the CAE tool:

The supported logging standards are listed in the System Security Parameters
table, page 92.
Refer to the CAE User Manual for more information on the Security Log
configuration.

Certificate Management
TLS (Transport Layer Security) is a protocol used to secure IP communications. It
uses a certificate to generate a session key, used for encryption.
The T300 uses TLS with https protocol.

NT00378–EN–10 97
T300 System Cyber-Security

Device Identity
The T300 is identified by the remote clients thanks to its certificate.
The T300 is delivered with a self-generated self-signed certificate, there is no
external Certification Authority (CA) to confirm the validity of the certificate.
The identity of the device, used for https and ssh communications, can be updated
by the user.
The identity is generated and managed by a Private Key Infrastructure (PKI). This
infrastructure is not detailed in this document. Only the update of the device
identity is described here.
This operation requires:
• A CA certificate (to identify the CA)
• A pfx file (one by T300) (generated by the CA, checked with the CA certificate
during the import). It contains the certificate and a private key.

Installing the Certificate

Access the Web server using SECADM role to display the Device Identification
page.
Access via Maintenance > Device Identification.

1. Click on Upload New CA, then install it by clicking Install button.

2. Click on Upload a new certificate. Upload a .pfx file, protected by a

password.
Then install it by clicking Install button.
The content of the certificate can be checked at each step.
The T300 restarts after the import of the pfx file.

98 NT00378–EN–10
System Cyber-Security T300

Secure Operations
If the Security Administrator has a Public Key Infrastructure, it is recommended to
generate a certificate and install it.
It is a best practice to install and renew the certificates in a timely manner.

NT00378–EN–10 99
T300 System Cyber-Security

Centralized Authentication with RADIUS

Operating Principle

RADIUS server CAE

Centralized Remote
RBAC RBAC

Network
Infrastructure

HU250 HU250 HU250

Local Local Local

RBAC RBAC RBAC

Radius protocol provides the capability to use a centralized user database to

authenticate users remotely and provide their RBAC Role on the local system
(T300). This makes it possible to have a generalized and unique authentication
policy on a dedicated server, rather than to define them locally on the various
T300s of the network.

Network Infrastructure
Centralized authentication requires an architecture that includes T300s, a CAE
server, and a RADIUS server connected together via a remote network.
• The T300 includes the locally defined authentication policy in the unit. This
policy is used in case of non-availability of centralized authentication.
• The CAE server includes the remote authentication policy. It includes all the
individual authentications of each T300 on the same server. Rather than
configuring it locally on each product, it may be useful to define it in one place
on a dedicated server.
• The RADIUS server includes the remote centralized authentication policy,
enabling global authentication common to each T300.
The exchange during an authentication between the RADIUS server and the T300
depends on the authentication mode defined:
• Locally only (RADIUS server not used)
• Locally then centralized, if the requested user is not locally found.
• Centralized then locally, if the requested user is not found in centralized.
The operating parameters of the authentication are configured in the CAE.

100 NT00378–EN–10
System Cyber-Security T300

The RADIUS server

Radius server is part of the network infrastructure in which HU250 (T300) device
is connected to. It provides the centralized database of users and contains:
• The dictionary: definition of the list of attributes of user records.
• User records: list of the users, respecting the attributes specified in the
dictionary.
User attributes are provided to the Radius client once the user is authenticated.
Hence Radius server provides to HU250 device the following information related
to the authenticated user:
• RBAC Roles
• Expiration date.

Common Authentication configuration on the CAE

The common authentication parameters are defined in the CAE:

Name Data Description

type

Authentication mode Integer Indicate the kind of authentication used

1: local
2: local then centralized
3: centralized then local
When one of the 2 centralized option is selected, the RADIUS tab become active

Default role for centralized String The role assigned by default when the centralized access is used and that the role is
authentication not given by the Radius server

Centralized authentication timeout Integer The maximum time for which an authentication response is expected from each Radius
server.
Configurable from 0 to 99 secondes.

Centralized authentication protocol Integer Defines the current protocol managed to reach a distant authentication Radius server.
1: Radius
2: Samba (not supported)
3: LDAP (not supported)

RADIUS Protocol
RADIUS RADIUS
Client Server
RADIUS: Access-Request

RADIUS: Access-Accept

RADIUS: Access-Reject

Radius has several authentication schemes.

The T300 implements Radius client with PAP scheme (EAP scheme is not
supported for the moment).
In Radius PAP scheme, the client sends an Access request, and the server replies
with Access Accept, or Access Reject.
The exchange uses UDP, on a configurable port (by default 1812).
In order to secure exchanges between client and server (authentication of both
parts, and ciphering of some part of the information), RADIUS uses a shared key
mechanism. This shared secret is pushed using CAE to each HU250 configured to
use this server.

NT00378–EN–10 101
T300 System Cyber-Security

CAE RADIUS Authentification Configuration via the CAE

The CAE also allows you to define the configuration parameters of the RADIUS
client in the HU250:<div

Name Data type Description

Mode Integer It indicates the communication mode of the RADIUS client. Can take the value:
1:RADIUS_CLEAN
2: EAP-TTLS is not supported

IP address String The server IP address expressed in the classic way of IP address: www.xxx.yyy.zzz

Port Integer The server port number used for the communication.
Configurable from 0 to 65535

Shared Secret String This is a text string that serves as a password between the RADIUS client and the RADIUS
server. This field is optional and can have a maximum length of 32.

IP Address backup String IP address of the second server, used as backup (this field is optional)
(optional)

Port backup (optional) Integer Port number of the second server, used as backup (this field is optional)

Shared secret backup String Text string that serves as a password between the RADIUS client and the second RADIUS server,
(optional) used as backup (this field is optional)

Role attribute name String Name of the attribute in the Radius protocol accepted answer where the role assignment is
stored. It must be identical to the attribute in the server dictionary.

AoR attribute name String Name of the AoR (Area Of Responsability) attribute in the Radius protocol accepted answer
where the AoR assignment is stored. It must be identical to the attribute in the server dictionary
NOTE: AoR exists in CAE but is not supported by T300. So, the CAE parameter is used by
other devices than T300.
Date attribute name String Name of the attribute in the Radius protocol accepted answer where the date assignment is
stored. It must be identical to the attribute in the server dictionary

Attributes separator String Optional character used inside the attributes (eg role) to transmit multiple fields

Dictionary String Long string storing contents of RADIUS dictionary. It must be identical to the Radius server
dictionary. Role, AoR and Date attributes must be identical to the ones previously filled.

The Radius server has a specific configuration as explained in the current chapter.
HU250 device must know this configuration in order to be able to communicate
with it.
This configuration is divided in 2 categories:
• Networking information: IP address, port, Shared Secret.
• Protocol parameters:
◦ The structure of the user database: the dictionary.
◦ The name of the attribute related to Role and Date in this dictionary, so
that the client can extract them from the Access-Accept response.
◦ The attributes separator in case an attribute contains a list of values (eg:
multiple roles).

Example of RADIUS Server Use

This chapter describes a nominal use case with:
• Default CAE users that are pushed to HU250. Those users act as "recovery"
users if network connection to the Radius server is not operational.
• Configured Radius server. Remote users in this server can connect to HU250
device.
The following use case is a suggestion of configuration and must be adapted to
the network infrastructure. It assumes a network infrastructure including the
following characteristics:
• Network: 192.168.1.0/24
• Radius server address: 192.168.1.84

102 NT00378–EN–10
System Cyber-Security T300

• HU250 connected with WAN port to this network with following IP addresses:
192.168.1.10, 192.168.1.11…

RADIUS Server Configuration

The configuration detailed hereafter is provided as a minimal setup for evaluation
purpose. For more information about configuring the RADIUS server, please refer
to the Freeradius server documentation at the following Web address: http://
freeradius.org/doc/.

Prerequisite
Host or VM running Ubuntu server 16.04 LTS

Configuration
1. Install the RADIUS service using the following command:
# sudo apt-get install freeradius freeradius-utils
2. Replace the content of file /etc/freeradius/client.conf with:
client 192.168.1.0/24 {
secret = testing123
shortname = private-network-1
}
3. Replace the content of /etc/freeradius/dictionary with:
$INCLUDE /usr/share/freeradius/dictionary
# EasergyT300 dictionary
VENDOR EASERGYT300 12345
BEGIN-VENDOR EASERGYT300
ATTRIBUTE EASERGYT300-Role 1 string
ATTRIBUTE EASERGYT300-Scope 2 string
ATTRIBUTE EASERGYT300-Date 3 date
END-VENDOR EASERGYT300
4. Add users in /etc/freeradius/users, as follows:
John Cleartext-Password := "John1!"
EASERGYT300-Role = "INSTALLER"
EASERGYT300-Scope = "France"
EASERGYT300-Date = 1577836800
Alice Cleartext-Password := "Alice1!"
EASERGYT300-Role = "ENGINEER"
EASERGYT300-Scope = "Spain"
EASERGYT300-Date = 1577836800

Cyber Security Configuration in CAE

Start the CAE, select the “SECURITY SETTINGS” tab, then open Authentication
configuration area by clicking on the green arrow. Configure the parameters as
follow (see screenshot here after):
• Authentication mode: Local then Centralized
• Default role for centralized authentication: VIEWER
• Centralized authentication protocol: RADIUS
Click Ok to take into account the setting.

NT00378–EN–10 103
T300 System Cyber-Security

Example of RADIUS settings

Go to the "RADIUS" menu: in “Security Configuration” horizontal tab and

“Authentication configuration” vertical tab, open the “RADIUS” horizontal tab and
configure the following values (see screenshot RADIUS beside):
• Mode: RADIUS_CLEAN
• IP Address: 192.168.1.84
• Port: 1812
• Shared Secret: testing123
• Role attribute name: EASERGYT300-Role
• AoR attribute name: EASERGYT300-Scope
• Date attribute name: EASERGYT300-Date
• Attribute separator:

104 NT00378–EN–10
System Cyber-Security T300

• Dictionary:
ATTRIBUTE User-Name 1 string
ATTRIBUTE User-Password 2 string
ATTRIBUTE NAS-IP-Address 4 ipaddr
ATTRIBUTE NAS-Port 5 integer
ATTRIBUTE Service-Type 6 integer
ATTRIBUTE Reply-Message 18 string
ATTRIBUTE State 24 octets
ATTRIBUTE Class 25 octets
ATTRIBUTE Vendor-Specific 26 octets
ATTRIBUTE Session-Timeout 27 integer
ATTRIBUTE NAS-Identifier 32 string
ATTRIBUTE EAP-Message 79 octets
ATTRIBUTE Message-Authenticator 80 octets
VENDOR EASERGYT300 12345
BEGIN-VENDOR EASERGYT300
ATTRIBUTE EASERGYT300-Role 1 string
ATTRIBUTE EASERGYT300-Scope 2 string
ATTRIBUTE EASERGYT300-Date 3 date
END-VENDOR EASERGYT300
Click Ok to take into account the setting.
NOTE: A minimal list of “ATTRIBUTE”s must be added in order for the CAE to
understand the dictionary. The list of attributes above the “VENDOR” shall
simply be copied “as is” in CAE “Dictionary” field.

HU250 Cyber Security Configuration Update via CAE

NOTICE
HAZARD OF UNINTENDED OPERATION
• The Cyber Security configuration update applies to all "Easergy T300" in the
list.
• Consequently, remove undesired devices that may appear in the list, using
the trash icon on the right.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Once the configuration has been made in CAE, this one must be loaded into the
HU250 modules. To do this, do the following:
• Click on the green arrow at the top left of the page, then open the Network
Device List tab
• Press the Refresh button on the bottom left
• Check that the "EasergyT300" you want to configure is visible
• Press the Send to all button on the bottom right to send the configuration to
all the T300.

Finally, CAE indicates successful operation:

NT00378–EN–10 105
T300 System Cyber-Security

HU250 User Login Sequence

Once Radius server is configured and cyber security configuration has been
pushed accordingly to HU250 devices, authentication is ready to be tested.

Authentification Sequence
Testing can be done by connecting with one of the users defined in the RADIUS
server (Alice or John users in our use case)
• Via an access to the T300 Web server
• Via a SSH connexion (eg: acces via Easergy Builder by a user including
Engineer role).

RADIUS Remote Authentication Principle

A B

HU250

1 2

4
5

A. User (Web server)

B. RADIUS
During an authentication request from a user connected to the Web server (or
wishing to access the T300 via SSH), the procedure is as follows (we will take the
example of a "Local then centralized" authentication mode):
1. The Web server requests an authentication test from the HU250.
2. The HU250 first checks if this user is present in the local user database.
3. If so, authentication is accepted. Otherwise, remote authentication is
requested from the RADIUS server.
4. The RADIUS server responds to the HU250 request.
5. The HU250 responds to the user with an approval or a refusal depending on
whether the user is recognized by the RADIUS server.

Security Functionality Verification

NOTICE
HAZARD OF MISSING VERIFICATIONS
• When cybersecurity functionalities have been configured, verify that the
functions listed below are working as intended.
• Repeat these verifications after firmware update or security policy update.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

106 NT00378–EN–10
System Cyber-Security T300

• Verify that the RBAC function prevents the user to perform actions for which
he does not have priviledge.
• Verify that the security event logs (for cybersecurity advanced only) are
properly generated locally in HU250, and that the remote Syslog server (if
configured) keeps records of them.
• Verify that disabled logical and physical ports can no longer be accessed.

NT00378–EN–10 107
T300 Device Synchronization

Device Synchronization
What’s in This Chapter
Clock Page ................................................................................................. 108

Clock Page
Access via Maintenance > Clock page.

There are three ways to automatically synchronize the T300:

• Via the communication protocol (SCADA)
• Via an SNTP server, if the T300 is connected to an IP network
• By satellites, if the HU250 module includes a 4G modem with GPS option
Two synchronization channels can be defined using either of the synchronization
modes above: the primary device and the secondary device.
The secondary device is automatically used if the primary device is unavailable.
The synchronization modes are configured in the Settings > HU250 >
Synchronization page in the Web server. Refer to the corresponding parameter
setting, page 169 section for more details.

108 NT00378–EN–10
Device Synchronization T300

Automatic Synchronization
The Clock page displays the general status of both the primary and the secondary
device (synchronization active or lost), which allows the user to determine the
device synchronization status:

As soon as one of the synchronization modes becomes active, the equipment is

automatically synchronized via the active device.
If no synchronization device is active, synchronization can be performed
automatically via the PC date and time.

The Set datetime button then appears on the page, which

performs an immediate synchronization as soon as it is clicked.

Manual Synchronization
If no synchronization device is active and the Manual option is selected by clicking

the corresponding button, , the system allows the date and time to
be entered manually via the following interface on the Clock page:

NT00378–EN–10 109
T300 IP Interfaces

IP Interfaces
What’s in This Chapter
IP Configuration Page.................................................................................. 110

IP Configuration Page
Access via Maintenance > IP configuration page.

IP Configuration Prerequisites
• The configuration of the IP interfaces requires a good knowledge in TCP
network management, to avoid losing the access to the equipment.
• Do not use Subnet masks : 255.255.255.255, as it is filtering all the IP
addresses and no communication is possible with this mask.
• Do not set WAN and LAN in the same network range.
• Set up the routers carefully: "subnet IP" should be different from the local
network range.

Devices
This page is used to set the parameters of the various T300 IP connection
interfaces:

LAN
The LAN is the T300 internal local area network.
It corresponds to the IP network for internal communication between the T300
modules. It is also possible to connect to this LAN via a PC to establish an
Ethernet connection to the equipment.

110 NT00378–EN–10
IP Interfaces T300

Setting the LAN parameters

Three levels of setting are defined by the buttons Automatic Address, Fixed
addresses, and DHCP server.
The settings corresponding to these levels are detailed below:

Parameter Default Description

Automatic address
- - No parameters to configure. The address is assigned automatically by the DHCP router of the
external network on which all the T300 modules are connected on the LAN. The IP address may
change with each connection.

Fixed addresses
IP 192.168.0.254 Fixed IP address defined for a host connexion to the LAN. It is recommended that this default IP
address is not modified since any change may affect internal communication between the T300
modules.
Additional host IP addresses and associated subnet masks can be added by clicking on the +
button
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask linked to an IP address to define the range of IP address allowed on this subnet and
thus to establish an access restriction for the hosts.
Used to define the usable IP address range on this subnet and limit the possible number of hosts.

DHCP server
Start IP 192.168.0.40 Enabling the DHCP function allows to automatically assign an IP address to a device connecting to
this network according to the range of available addresses here after.
Start address for the DHCP function.
End IP 192.168.0.60 End address for the DHCP function.
The available address range for the DHCP function is the range between the start address and the
end address.

Adding an additional IP address by clicking on the + button

NT00378–EN–10 111
T300 IP Interfaces

WAN
The WAN is the remote IP communication network for access via an external
modem or router accessible, for example, via a SCADA system.
Setting the WAN parameters:

Two levels of setting are defined by the buttons Automatic Address and Fixed
addresses.
The settings corresponding to these levels are detailed below:

Parameter Default Description

Automatic address
- - No parameters to configure. The address is assigned automatically by the DHCP router of the
external network on the T300 is connected. The IP address may change with each connection.

Fixed addresses
IP 192.168.1.10 Fixed IP address defined for accessing the WAN. This address should theoretically be modified
and configured according to the static IP address to be used for the remote network.
Other fixed IP addresses can be added by clicking on the + button.

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask linked to an IP address to define the range of IP address allowed on this subnet
and thus to establish an access restriction for the hosts.

WAN also supports IPv6.

Parameter Default Description

Automatic address
Automatic ID Yes Automatic addressing means the high part of the address is provided by a router. The low part of
the address (Interface ID) can either be provided by the HU250 based on the MAC address, or
defined manually.

Fixed addresses
IP Fe80::405:fe17:5d9: Fixed IP address defined for accessing the WAN. This address should theoretically be modified
cbF and configured according to the static IP address to be used for the remote network.
Other fixed IP addresses can be added by clicking on the + button.

Subnet prefix - 64
length

112 NT00378–EN–10
IP Interfaces T300

Wi-Fi Network

The Wi-Fi network is the dedicated local connection for connecting to the
equipment from a PC, smartphone, or a tablet, for operation, maintenance, or
configuration purposes.
Three levels of setting are defined by the buttons Disabled, Enabled and DHCP
server.
The settings corresponding to these levels are detailed below:

Parameter Default Description

Disabled
- - No parameters to configure. The Wi-Fi is not activated. The user must activate this Wi-Fi
connection manually for the first time, since by default the Wi-Fi connection is deactivated.

NT00378–EN–10 113
T300 IP Interfaces

Parameter Default Description

Enabled
Hidden SSID No The SSID is visible by default. Hiding it means that the T300 is invisible on the Wi-Fi network,
which helps to secure access. In effect, the Wi-Fi access parameters are saved the first time they
are defined on a PC, and only that PC can then connect automatically.

SSID Easergy T300 Custom name used to identify the Wi-Fi network. It is essential that a single, unique SSID is
configured for each T300 to prevent conflicts and enhance network security.

Timeout s 180 Time of inactivity on the Wi-Fi network resulting in automatic disconnection of Wi-Fi link. This
automatic Wi-Fi disconnection only works if it has been previously activated by the WIFI ON/OFF
command of the Monitoring/Data/Command page. This disconnexion is not valid for an
activation by the Local button on the front panel of the HU250.

IP 192.168.2.254 IP address defined for accessing the Wi-Fi network. In theory there is no need to modify this
address unless there is an incompatibility issue with an IP gateway or router.

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask linked to an IP address to define the range of IP address allowed on this subnet and
thus to establish an access restriction for the hosts.

Parameter Default Description

DHCP server
Start IP 192.168.2.10 DHCP function enabled allows to automatically assign an IP address to a device connecting to
this network according to the range of available addresses.
Start address for the DHCP function.
End IP 192.168.2.100 End address for the DHCP function.
The available address range for the DHCP function is the range between the start address and
the end address.

PPP Link
The PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) is a remote link that requires a 4G modem on
the T300 capable of establishing an IP connection between the T300 and a
remote device.
The parameter settings of this network are as follows:

Parameter Default Description

General parameters

Reboot after max. Yes Enabling this option reinitializes the modem after a maximum number of attempts have been
connection retries made to connect to the mobile network. Rebooting the modem re-establishes the network
connection. It is recommended that this option is enabled to enhance operational reliability.

Idle timeout 5 min Setting for the time delay after which the modem disconnects from the mobile network if no
IP data flow is detected by the T300. Can be configured between 1 and 60 minutes.

114 NT00378–EN–10
IP Interfaces T300

Parameter Default Description

Daily disconnection

Daily disconnection Yes Forced disconnection of the 4G modem every day at a set time. This allows reconnection to
the mobile network immediately afterward.

Time 00:00 Time setting for the daily disconnection. This option should only be set if the Daily
disconnection option is enabled.

NT00378–EN–10 115
T300 IP Interfaces

Parameter Default Description

Regular ping test

Regular ping test Yes Enables the ping test to run at a fixed interval according to the delay configured in the
Interval parameter.

IP - IP address to which the data packet corresponding to the ping will be sent. Set an IP address
for a known website or server, or even the SCADA system provided that this has a known
static IP address.
The configured address must correspond to a standard-format IP address.

Interval 4 min Time delay between 2 successive ping tests. Can be configured between 1 and 360 minutes.

Attempts 3 Maximum number of attempts to run the ping test if no response is received from the remote
IP address. Can be configured from 1 to 10.

Reply timeout 5 sec Maximum delay to wait for a response during the ping test before declaring a detected
potential test issue.
Can be configured from 1 to 360 seconds.

<

Parameter Default Description

SIM
Access point name - Name of the access point for connection to the mobile network. This name is given by the
network operator.

Authentication Disabled Some mobile networks require authentication when establishing a connection. In this case,
this option needs to be enabled.
The following encryption protocols are authorized: - PAP, CHAP, MSCHAP, MSCHAP V2.
This is set to Disabled by default.

Login - Login for authentication for connection to the mobile network. Only to be filled in if the
Authentication option is enabled.

Password - Password for authentication for connection to the mobile network. Only to be filled in if the
Authentication option is enabled.

116 NT00378–EN–10
IP Interfaces T300

Operating Principle of the Regular Ping Test

In certain circumstances the SCADA system may no longer be capable of
establishing communication with the T300 by means of a protocol even though the
mobile network and the T300 are still operational.
The T300 therefore continuously monitors the IP data packet flow reaching it via
the mobile network. A 5 minute Idle timeout delay automatically disconnects the
modem from the mobile network if no IP data flow reaches the T300. After
disconnection, the modem is rebooted, making the T300 unavailable for 1 minute,
which is the time needed to reconnect the modem to the mobile network.
To help avoid this inconvenience of automatic disconnection and temporary
unavailability, the regular ping test is used to test the connection to the mobile
network. This prevents disconnection of the T300 when the problem is related to
the SCADA system only and not the network. In other words, if the T300 is still
connected to the mobile network, there is no reason to disconnect it because of a
non-existent IP protocol flow.
As soon as the ping address has been configured in the IP field on the Regular
ping test page, the T300 will try every 4 minutes (Interval setting) to send a ping to
the specified IP address (note that this Interval must be less than the Idle
timeout). An IP data flow will therefore return to the T300 so that it does not
disconnect from the network.
If the result of the ping test is satisfactory, the T300 will remain connected to the
network as it knows that it is available. The T300 will then do nothing in particular
until the next ping test after the next 4 minutes has elapsed.
If the result of the ping test is unsatisfactory and the T300 has detected no IP data
flow for 5 minutes (Idle timeout setting), the T300 will automatically disconnect
from the network (to reset the modem), then try again (after the modem has
rebooted) to reconnect to the network.
If the network is still not available, the T300 will send another request to the
modem to reinitialize immediately, and will do so indefinitely until the network is
finally detected.
This phase of rebooting and reconnection to the network requires approximately
1 minute for the modem (see diagram below).
NOTE: The regular ping test method is preferable to the "Daily disconnection"
method because, for the regular ping test, network disconnection only lasts a
maximum of 5 minutes.
NOTE: The regular ping test sends the smallest possible number of data
packets (equivalent to 0 byte) to the specified IP address to help avoid the
extra cost of an IP data flow transfer.

Problem on the
2G/3G/4G network
Yes
Availability of
2G/3G/4G network No T300 power-up

1
2G/3G/4G modem
reset 0

T300 Yes TA TA TA TA
TC
connection to
2G/3G/4G network Test Test Test
No OK failed OK
1 TB TB TB
Automatic
ping test
0
SCADA T300 still
protocol connected
frames
SCADA
inoperative

TA = Modem initialization time + connection to mobile network (approximately 1

minute)

NT00378–EN–10 117
T300 IP Interfaces

TB = Ping test period (4 minutes)

TC = Modem reset time (= 5 minutes) if IP data flow non-existent on the T300

Modem Connection Status

It is possible to check the connection status of the 4G modem by the flashing of
the LED on the front of the modem:
• LED flashing every second (500 ms ON/500 ms OFF): The modem is
searching for a network, or no SIM card detected, or no PIN code entered.
• LED flashing every second (10 ms ON/900 ms OFF): The modem is calling
or communicating.
• LED flashing every 2 seconds (10 ms ON/1,900 ms OFF): The modem is
transferring data.
• LED flashing every 4 seconds (10 ms ON/3,900 ms OFF): The modem is
connected to the mobile network but there are no calls or data exchanges.
Problem on the
2G/3G/4G network
Yes
Availability of
2G/3G/4G network No T300 power-up

1
2G/3G/4G modem
reset 0

T300 Yes TA TA TA TA
TC
connection to
2G/3G/4G network No Test Test Test
OK failed OK
1 TB TB TB
Automatic
ping test 0
SCADA T300 still
protocol connected
frames
SCADA
inoperative

Firewall
This page is used to set the firewall parameters.

For each network interface (LAN, WAN, Wi-Fi, PPP), the firewall can be
configured on the HU250 regarding:
• Dropped ports (to block TCP ports)

118 NT00378–EN–10
IP Interfaces T300

• A blocklist of IP addresses (IP addresses not authorized to access the

HU250. Any try to access the HU250 from any of these addresses will be
rejected.)
• An allowlist of IP addresses (IP addresses authorized to access the HU250
module)
The firewall parameter settings displayed under the LAN, WAN, Wi-Fi, PPP
sections are identical and shown below:

Parameter Default Configuration Description

Range

LAN / WAN / Wi-Fi / PPP section

Drop ports

Protocol TCP • TCP Port type of the port to block

• UDP
Port - 1-65,535 Port number of the port to block

Blocklist
IP - IP address in the blocklist
Subnet mask - Mask linked to the corresponding IP address

Allowlist
IP - IP address in the allowlist
Subnet mask - Mask linked to the corresponding IP address

Parameter setting for WAN IPv6:

Parameter Default Configuration Description

Range

WAN IPv6 section

Drop ports

Protocol TCP • TCP Port type of the port to block

• UDP
Port - Port number of the port to block

Blocklist
IP - IP address in the allowlist
Subnet prefix length -

Allowlist
IP - IP address in the allowlist
Subnet mask -

Router Function
The Router function is used to define connection rules for accessing the T300
remotely via other IP networks. It allows devices, such as tablets or PCs that are
connected to different auxiliary LANs than the T300, to access the T300 via a
WAN within defined connection rules and limits.

NT00378–EN–10 119
T300 IP Interfaces

Example of routing on the T300 network gateway

PC PC

LAN 1: Auxiliary LAN 2:

10.214.xx.xx network 10.194.xx.xx
(Subnet IP) (Subnet IP)

WAN

LAN 3: Router for the

10.195.42.1 network the
(Router IP) T300 is on

10.195.43.241 T300

In the WAN IPv6 configuration, Subnet Mask field is replaced with Prefix length.
The parameter settings of this network are as follows:

Parameter Default Description

Subnet IP - IP address of the auxiliary network that wants to access the T300

Subnet Mask / Prefix Length (For - Used to define the usable IP address range on the auxiliary network and limit the
WAN IPv6) possible number of hosts

Router IP - Address of the IP network gateway to which the T300 is connected

NOTE: The Router IP address configured here must be authorized in the

subnet mask defined for the T300 WAN address.
Default routing: It is possible to define a default route through which
communication will be automatically routed by the router when a connection is
established.
To do this, simply configure the router parameters as follows:
• Subnet IP: 0.0.0.0
• Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0
• Router IP: IP address of the default gateway through which traffic is directed
NOTE: If a PPP interface is configured with a modem, this interface is
automatically defined as the T300 default router. It is therefore only necessary
to define a default router if no PPP modem is used.

120 NT00378–EN–10
IP Interfaces T300

Example of WAN IP address settings for the T300

NT00378–EN–10 121
T300 Port Configuration

Port Configuration
What’s in This Chapter
Port Configuration on HU250 ....................................................................... 123
Example of Physical Port Configuration of a T300 System .............................. 125

Access via Settings > LV0x/SC0x > Port Configuration page.

T300 manages port configuration to limit access to the minimal subset of required
physical ports.

122 NT00378–EN–10
Port Configuration T300

Port Configuration on HU250

Accessed via Maintenance > Physical port configuration page.

WARNING
HAZARD OF INCORRECT SETTINGS
To limit access to a physical port on the T300 equipment, deactivate ports from
the Web server.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

For physical port configuration on:

• HU250, see table below
• SCxxx, see page 138
• LV150, see page 151
In the T300 Web server:
• By default, all HU250 physical ports are enabled (parameter set to Yes).
• At least one of the Ethernet ports must be set to Yes to access the T300
equipment.
• Do not set to No the port of the interface (LAN, WAN, or WAN EXT) on which
the Web server is connected. Otherwise, the communication with the T300
equipment is lost.
Port identification on HU250

NT00378–EN–10 123
T300 Port Configuration

A C
B D

The parameter settings of HU250 physical ports are presented by type (Ethernet,
Wi-Fi) as follows:

Leg- Parameter Default Configuration Description

end Range

Ethernet
A WAN External IED (ETH1) Yes • No Local communication Ethernet port used for the link to an external
• Yes device in the MV substation or for connection to a PC

B WAN (ETH2) Yes • No Ethernet port used for the remote communication with the control
• Yes center, via a modem or router

C LAN left Yes • No Ethernet LAN port dedicated to internal communication between
T300 modules or for connection to a PC
• Yes
D LAN right Yes • No Ethernet LAN port dedicated to internal communication between
T300 modules or for connection to a PC
• Yes

124 NT00378–EN–10
Port Configuration T300

Example of Physical Port Configuration of a T300 System

Maintenance/Physical ports configuration

A.
1. Settings > SC01 > Port Configuration
2. Settings > SC02 > Port Configuration
3. Settings > SC03 > Port Configuration
B. Settings > LV01 > Port Configuration

NT00378–EN–10 125
T300 Dial-Up Modem Settings

Dial-Up Modem Settings

What’s in This Chapter
Modems Configuration Page ........................................................................ 126

Modems Configuration Page

Access via Maintenance > Modems configuration page.

This page is used to configure the application parameters required for the modem
connections.
The proposed configuration depends on the type of modem installed on the
HU250 module ports (port 1 or port 2).

4G Modem
4G modems require a SIM card to be able to connect to the mobile network.
In order to have better security on the 2G/3G/4G network, it is recommended to
require from the operator a private APN via a VPN network.
Modem parameter setting
Access via Maintenance > Modems page.

126 NT00378–EN–10
Dial-Up Modem Settings T300

Parameter Default Description

Network type AUTO There are 3 possible choices for defining the IP network type:
• AUTO: Automatic detection of the mobile network type by the T300
• GPRS: 2G network
• 3G: 3G network
• 4G: 4G network.
Pin Enabled Option to use the PIN code. Depends if the SIM card needs a PIN code to operate.

Pin code - 4-digit PIN code for the SIM card. This parameter should only be entered if the Pin parameter is
enabled.
NOTE: After 3 validations of the settings on this page or 3 modem initializations with an incorrect
PIN code, the SIM card is blocked. If this happens, the only solution is to call the network operator
to unblock it.

Operating Conditions for Mobile Access

For mobile communication to be able to function between the T300 and the
SCADA system, there are some conditions that must be fulfilled by the network
operator:

NT00378–EN–10 127
T300 Dial-Up Modem Settings

• The T300 must have a static IP address assigned by the operator:

In fact, the mobile connection will not function if the T300 has a dynamic IP
address, since the SCADA system will not be able to determine the new IP
addresses allocated to the T300 by the operator when they are reassigned. It
would therefore not be possible to initialize protocol communication from the
SCADA system, nor would it be possible to connect to the T300 embedded
Web server remotely over Ethernet.
The only way to determine the T300 IP address would be to connect locally
(on site) to the T300 embedded Web server, which is not particularly feasible
as this would involve traveling to the site of each T300 each time the IP
address is reassigned.
Once the T300 connected to the mobile network, the IP address assigned to
the T300 is displayed in the Monitoring & Control/System page (see image
beside). This is the address that must be used by the SCADA system to
connect to the T300 over Ethernet or via the protocol.
NOTE: If connection to the mobile network is not established, "NA" is
displayed instead of the IP address.
◦ Connection to 2G/3G/4G network not established – IP address not
available

• The IP ports used by the T300 must be opened by the operator:

A certain number of ports are used for the T300 application. The list of default
ports used can be viewed in the Easergy Builder Workspace page
(Environment variables tab):
◦ SSH port: 22
◦ HTTPS port: 443

All the ports used by the application must be open at mobile operator level for
the functions associated with these ports to be operational. If this is not the
case, it is still possible to configure different port numbers in Easergy Builder
to be consistent with the port numbers available at the operator end. Refer to
the Easergy Builder Configuration Tool User Manual for more information on
how to access and configure these ports.

128 NT00378–EN–10
Upgrading the Firmware T300

Upgrading the Firmware

What’s in This Chapter
Firmware Page............................................................................................ 129

The T300 Web server shows the versions of firmware that are currently loaded
(per module) and whether it is possible to upgrade to newer versions.
The T300 firmware is delivered as a single package that includes the firmware for
all of the modules (HU250, SCxxx and LV150). A Release Note provided with the
package contains information about the compatibility between the firmware
versions of the modules.
Respect the following rules during a firmware update:
• The firmware version to be installed on a module must be compatible with the
firmware modules already installed on the other modules (see the Release
Note).
• To maintain compatibility between the firmware versions of all modules, apply
updates to all modules in a single operation.

Firmware Page
Access via Maintenance > Firmware page.

This page displays:

• The current HU250 firmware version with the option to check the version and
date of the each BIN controller module firmware embedded in the HU250 by
clicking the Show more button
• The version of the firmware in each SCxxx module
• The version of the firmware in each LV150 module

Firmware Upgrade
The current versions of the firmware embedded in the HU250, SCxxx and LV150
modules are displayed in the Firmware page.

NT00378–EN–10 129
T300 Upgrading the Firmware

By clicking the Install new firmware button associated with the HU250 module,
SCxxx or LV150 modules, it is possible to update the firmware for each module.
After clicking this button, a window appears on screen showing the firmware
upgrade procedure, which involves several steps:
1. Click the Select file button associated with the HU250 module or the SCxxx
modules, it is possible to update the firmware for each module. This
compressed file with a .tar.gz extension must be available on the PC
connected to the Web server. Contact Schneider Electric technical support to
obtain this file.

2. Click the Upload button to upload the file.

The upload progress is indicated as a percentage in a progress bar on

screen.

130 NT00378–EN–10
Upgrading the Firmware T300

3. This step differs depending on whether it relates to HU250 or SCxxx and

LV150 installation.

• HU250: Once the file is uploaded, the file consistency is checked

automatically.
• SCxxx and LV150: Before installing the firmware, select which modules
are to be updated.
4. Click the Install new firmware button to install the new version.

A progress bar indicates the installation progress.

NOTE: Do not close the web browser during this stage otherwise you will
lose the progress of the current step.

NT00378–EN–10 131
T300 Upgrading the Firmware

5. This step differs depending on whether it relates to HU250 or SCxxx and

LV150 modules.
• SCxxx/LV150: Once the firmware has been successfully installed
("Complete" indicated on screen), the process is complete. Click "Close
to close the window and return to the Firmware page.

• HU250: Once the firmware is installed, the system is automatically

rebooted. Wait several minutes for the reboot to finish.
NOTE: Do not close the web browser during this stage otherwise you
will lose the progress of the current step.

If a potential issue occurs during installation of the firmware, or if the

firmware installed is found to be corrupt, the system aborts the update
and automatically reactive the previous firmware version.
6. (HU250 only): This step is transparent and is initiated automatically after the
T300 is restarted. This step initiates the updating of the Web application in
relation to the downloaded software.

132 NT00378–EN–10
Upgrading the Firmware T300

7. (HU250 only): Now the system has been rebooted, it needs to be

reconnected to the Web server by entering one of the following default
usernames and passwords and clicking the Login button:

USERS Installer Engineer Viewer Operator SECADM

Username Installer Engineer Viewer Operator SecurityAdmin

Password Installer1! Engineer1! Viewer1! Operator1! Security1!

NOTE: For security purposes, the passwords must be changed during

commissioning.
8. (HU250 only): Once the connection has been re-established, the newly
installed version of the HU250 firmware and the previous version are
displayed on the page to compare and check.

Click Close to close the window.

This completes the firmware installation process.

NT00378–EN–10 133
T300 Managing the Configuration

Managing the Configuration

What’s in This Chapter
Configuration Page...................................................................................... 134

The Web server is used to manage the T300 configuration based on files stored
locally in the HU250 memory or saved externally on a backup device (hard disk,
etc.).

Configuration Page
Access via Maintenance > Configuration page.

The configuration management page includes two distinct sections:

• One section for managing the active configuration of the T300 that can be
saved in one of the HU250 memory slots (3 separate slots). It is also possible
to overwrite this active configuration and replace it with a configuration
already saved in one of these slots or with one saved externally, on a PC, for
instance.
The project name and date indicated in the Active configuration section
correspond to the name given to the project and either the date the
configuration was created or the date it was last modified in Easergy Builder.

134 NT00378–EN–10
Managing the Configuration T300

• One section for managing the stored configurations that are saved in the
memory (slots). It is possible to download each configuration stored in one of
these slots to a PC or to replace them with another configuration saved
previously as an external file, on a PC, for instance.

The name and date indicated for each slot correspond to the name given to
each backup and the date this backup was executed.
The T300 configuration uploaded into the product or saved externally is a
compressed .tar.gz file type.
This file contains the entire equipment configuration, excluding the user
parameters and RBAC access rights, which are stored in the rights management
tool (CAE).
The file also contains the system parameters (IP address, modem parameters,
etc.), and a copy of the K7 Zigbee internal memory.
NOTE: It is possible to create a configuration file in Easergy Builder without
integrating these system parameters for the purposes of importing into
another device with the same application program configuration without
overwriting the device system parameters.

Configuration Principle
The initial configuration is factory-loaded into the T300 before delivery. This
configuration includes the equipment specifications and options. The delivered
T300 therefore includes a default configuration adapted to the equipment's
operating requirements.
This initial configuration then needs to be adapted. This is what is known as the
engineering phase and should be completed in Easergy Builder to carry out the
following operations:
• Configure the SCADA protocol addresses
• Configure device synchronization
• Configure the SOE
• etc.

NT00378–EN–10 135
T300 Managing the Configuration

Easergy Builder

2 2
Slot #1, 2, 3 T300 PC

1. Initial loading
2. Save/Restore
Once the configuration has been finalized, it is simply uploaded to the T300 via
Easergy Builder or saved to PC as a backup file for subsequent import into the
T300 via the Web server.
Refer to the Quick Start Guide for more information on these configuration
operations and how to upload/save the configuration via Easergy Builder.
On commissioning, the configuration then needs to be customized via the Web
server menus to define the application program parameters associated with
communication, modems, fault current detection, switchgear monitoring, etc.
Once these parameters have been set, the configuration should be saved in the
device memory (slot) and to an external backup device, or imported into Easergy
Builder to create an archive.
These saved configuration files are compatible with Easergy Builder and can be
imported and stored in the tool.
Before any changes are made to the SCxxx configuration, it is recommended that
a restore point is systematically created, i.e. that the current T300 configuration is
saved before being stored to create a configuration archive.
For security reasons, it is advisable to regularly back up the active configuration to
an external device, in addition to the local backups in the memory slots. An
external backup can be used to retain the configuration even if the HU250 module
is replaced.

136 NT00378–EN–10
Managing the Configuration T300

Saving the Configuration

Saving the Active Configuration

Proceed as follows to save the active configuration:

• Click Save configuration button to open the window.
• Define a name for the backup ("conf" proposed by default), then select the
destination for the file by clicking one of the following:
◦ Your device: Saves the configuration to an external backup device (e.g.
hard disk, etc.). A *.tar.gz compressed configuration file will be
automatically saved to the PC in the normal location for web browser
downloads.
◦ Slot #1, #2, or #3: Saves the configuration in slots 1, 2, or 3. The date and
name of the backup in the slot will be updated with the current date and
time once the backup is complete.
• Click Save button to start the backup. A progress bar indicates the stage of
progress.
• For a backup in one of the slots, the current date and time as well as the
backup file name are updated in the slot once the save is complete.
• The backup is complete.

Saving a Stored Configuration

NT00378–EN–10 137
T300 Managing the Configuration

Proceed as follows to save a configuration stored in one of the slots to PC:

• Click the Download configuration button for the slot from which you want to
download the configuration.
• A *.tar.gz compressed configuration file is automatically saved to the PC in
the normal location for web browser downloads.
• The backup is complete.

Uploading the Configuration

Uploading into the Active Configuration

Proceed as follows to replace the active configuration with a stored configuration:

• Click the Apply configuration button to open the Apply configuration
window.
• Select the backup file source by clicking on one of the following:
◦ Your device: Uploads the configuration from an external backup device
(e.g. hard disk, etc.).
Click Select file button, then select the corresponding configuration file
from the PC or drag and drop the file onto the Drag the configuration file
here section of the screen. This compressed file with a .tar.gz extension
must be available on the PC connected to the Web server.
◦ Slot #1, #2, or #3: Uploads the configuration directly from slot 1, 2, or 3.
• Click Apply configuration button to start uploading the configuration. A
progress bar indicates the upload progress.
• Once the upload is complete, the T300 is automatically rebooted. Re-enter
the username and password to access the T300 Web server.
• The configuration upload is complete.

138 NT00378–EN–10
Managing the Configuration T300

Uploading into a Slot

Proceed as follows to upload a previously saved configuration from the PC into

one of the slots:
• Click Upload configuration button to open the
Upload configuration files
window.
• Click Select file button then select the corresponding configuration file from
the PC or drag and drop the file onto the Drag the configuration file
heresection of the screen.
This compressed file with a .tar.gz extension must be available on the PC
connected to the Web server.
• Click Upload button to start uploading the file. A progress bar indicates the
upload progress:
• Click Save to slot #3 button to confirm the save to the selected slot. A
progress bar indicates the progress of the save to slot operation:
• The date and name of the backup are updated in the slot once the save is
complete.
• The configuration upload is complete.

NT00378–EN–10 139
T300

T300 Settings
What’s in This Part
Introduction to T300 Settings......................................................................... 141
HU250 Module Settings ................................................................................ 144
SC150 Module Settings ................................................................................ 173
SC160 Module Settings ................................................................................ 255
LV150 Module Settings ................................................................................. 355
Settings Common to LV150, SC150 and SC160 Modules ................................ 372
PS50 Module Settings .................................................................................. 385
Commissioning Tests.................................................................................... 388

140 NT00378–EN–10
Introduction to T300 Settings T300

Introduction to T300 Settings

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
• The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure
modes of control paths and, for certain critical control functions, provide a
means to achieve a safe state during and after a path failure. Example:
Emergency Stop.
• Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control
functions.
• System control paths may include communication links. Consideration must
be given to the implications of anticipated transmission delays or failures of
the link.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

The following pages give an overview of the various function configurations for
each T300 module:
• HU250: Configuration of the HU250 module parameters:
Accessed via HU01 Settings page.

◦ Local I/O
◦ Automatic transfer switching (ATS)
◦ Condition monitoring
◦ Communication protocols
◦ Communication ports and modems
◦ Physical port configuration (for example, RS-485 for PS50 link, RS-232/
485 modem box)
◦ Time Synchronization

NT00378–EN–10 141
T300 Introduction to T300 Settings

• SCxxx: Configuration of the parameters of each SC150 or SC160 module

Accessed via SC0x Settings page.

◦ Current and voltage measurement sensors

◦ Switch controls
◦ Voltage presence/absence detection
◦ Fault current indication
◦ Fault current detection
◦ Tripping protection (on SC160 module only)
◦ Cold Load Pick-up function (on SC160 module only)
◦ Broken conductor detection
◦ MV Measurements
◦ MV Power quality
◦ Disturbance record
◦ Sectionalizer automation function
◦ Port configuration
◦ Local I/O: User LED customization
• PS50: Configuration of the parameters of each PS50 module:
Accessed via PS01 Settings page.

◦ Power supply input monitoring

◦ Battery
◦ Remote control order monitoring
◦ Back-up power supply management

142 NT00378–EN–10
Introduction to T300 Settings T300

• LV0x: Configuration of the parameters of each LV150 module:

Accessed via LV01 Settings page.

◦ Current and voltage measurement sensors

◦ LV Voltage monitoring
◦ Broken conductor detection
◦ LV Measurements
◦ LV Power quality
◦ Port configuration
◦ Local I/O: User LED customization

NT00378–EN–10 143
T300 HU250 Module Settings

HU250 Module Settings

What’s in This Chapter
Local I/O..................................................................................................... 144
Automatic Transfer Switching (ATS).............................................................. 150
Zigbee Network for Condition Monitoring....................................................... 156
SCADA Protocols........................................................................................ 159
Client Protocols........................................................................................... 160
Configuring the Physical Ports...................................................................... 163
Synchronization .......................................................................................... 169

Local I/O
Accessed via Settings > HU01 > Local inputs and outputs page
The I/O and LEDs are managed via the T300 LIOC (Local Input Output Controller)
BIN controller.
Slot for digital inputs on the HU250 module:

DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4

V present
Door open

Local
Remote

You can use the Web server to customize:

• Filters on the HU250 module local digital inputs
• The color of some of the LEDs on the front of the HU250 module

Customizing the Digital Inputs

Several filters can be activated and customized on the 8 digital inputs available on
the HU250 module. Note that filter customization applies to all 8 digital inputs
globally but you can choose to disable the customization for each digital input.
Digital Input Filtering:

Digital Input Filtering

De- Hold
Digital bouncing User data
input

Anti-chatter

144 NT00378–EN–10
HU250 Module Settings T300

The digital input filter parameter settings:

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Digital Inputs

Sample period (ms) 5 • 1 Sampling period on the digital inputs for taking a state into account
• 5
• 10
Debouncing sample 0 0 or 2-30 Filtering period for the bounce on a digital input. The value configured for the filter
count (increment = 1) corresponds to a number of Sample periods. The digital input must remain in the
same state for a period greater than the defined debouncing period for its state to
be taken into account. A value of 0 inhibits the debouncing filter.

Hold time (ms) 0 0 or 5-2,000 Holding period for a digital input. When a change of state (debouncing filtered) is
(increment = 1 detected on a digital input, the input is held in its new state until the Hold time
ms) period has elapsed. At the end of the period, the input returns to its actual value. A
value of 0 inhibits the holding filter.

Chattering detection 0 0 or 5-60,000 Sliding time period corresponding to a window of observation and counting of the
time (ms) (increment = 1 changes of state on a digital input. If during this period, the count becomes higher
ms) than the Chatter detection count value, the anti-chatter filter is activated, the state
of the input is maintained at its last state. An event is signaled with the value
maintained at its last state and with quality flags indicating “invalid”.
The quality of the data is then signaled as bad. The anti-chatter filter becomes
inactive again if, during the same period, no change of state is detected on the
digital input. A value of 0 inhibits the anti-chatter filter.

Chattering detection 16 1-255 (increment Counts the number of changes of state on a digital input to define the anti-chatter
count = 1) filter action. The changes of state counted are only those filtered by the debouncing
filter.

Block Diagrams for the Different Filters

Debouncing filtering on digital inputs

State 1
Digital
input
State 0
TF TF TF TF

Bounce State 1
filter
output
State 0
TF = Debounce filter time

NT00378–EN–10 145
T300 HU250 Module Settings

Holding filtering on digital inputs

State 1
Digital
input
State 0
TF TF TF
Locking State 1
Filter
output TF TF
State 0
TF = Minimum holding filter time

Anti-chatter filtering on digital inputs

State 1
Digital
input
State 0

Chatter count
No.= No.= No.= No.=
1 2 3 4
Sliding count
period

Anti-
chatter State 1
filter Anti-chattering count = 4
output State 0

Customizing the LEDs

The color of 8 of the LEDs on the front of the HU250 module can be customized:
• LEDs 1 to 5 are assigned to potential issue indication functions relating to the
PS50 module power supplies or battery (refer to the HU250 Installation
Guide, reference NHA77925, for more information about each LED). The
colors of these LEDs can be customized for each state.
• LEDs 6 to 8 are free to assign as required; their uses can be defined in the
Easergy Builder tool (refer to the corresponding section in the Quick Start
Guide (NT00383)). The colors of these 3 LEDs can also be customized for
each state.

146 NT00378–EN–10
HU250 Module Settings T300

Customizable LEDs on the front of the HU250 module:

LED 1
LED 2
LED 3
LED 4
LED 5

LED 6
LED 7
LED 8

LED color parameter setting

Settings > HU01 > Local inputs and outputs page

NT00378–EN–10 147
T300 HU250 Module Settings

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

LEDs 1 to 8
On state color Red (LED 1 to 5) • Off Choice of color for LEDs 1 to 8 for the active state of the data.
Orange (LED 6 to • Red
8)
• Green
• Orange

Off state color Green (LED 1 to • Off Choice of color for LEDs 1 to 8 for the inactive state of the data.
5)
• Red
Off (LED 6 to 8)
• Green
• Orange

Intermediate state Off (LED 1 to 5) • Off Choice of color for LEDs 1 to 8 for the intermediate state of the data. The
color Green (LED 6 to intermediate state can be, for instance, the transitional phase of a change
• Red
8) of state.
• Green
• Orange

Bad state color Off (LED 1 to 5) • Off Choice of color for LEDs 1 to 8 for a bad state of the data. A bad state
Red (LED 6 to 8) may be an unexpected state for the data.
• Red
• Green
• Orange

Invalid state color Off (LED 1 to 8) • Off Choice of color for LEDs 1 to 8 for an invalid state of the data. An invalid
• Red state corresponds to a missing known state for the data.

• Green
• Orange

148 NT00378–EN–10
HU250 Module Settings T300

External Local/Remote Switch

The last 2 digital inputs on the HU250 module terminal block are customizable. By
configuration, it is possible to use them to connect an external local/remote switch
if required (for dry loops).
Note that if this option is used, the Local/Remote button on the front of the HU250
module becomes inoperative. Only the external switch can then be used to
change from local to remote mode on the T300.
Local/Remote inputs on the HU250 module

DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4

V present
Door open

Local
Remote

External local/remote option parameter setting

Settings > HU01 > Local inputs and outputs page

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Miscellaneous
External local/remote No • Yes Enables the use of digital inputs "Local/Remote" to acquire dry loops from an
key • No external local/remote switch.
If this parameter is set to No, both digital inputs can be used as any other
standard digital input.

Automatism On/Off No • Yes Deactivation of the global automation ON/OFF function on all SCxxx modules.
key deactivated • No If this parameter is set to Yes, the ON/OFF button to Enable/Disable the
automation on the front panel of the HU250 becomes inoperative (the automation
stays in OFF position).
The Enable/Disable function of the automation via the Web interface
(Monitoring&Control / Substation page) or via the Scada protocol are also
inoperative.
Note: This deactivation of the ON/OFF automation function can also concern the
automation systems programmed on the HU250 via ISaGRAF®, if the ON/OFF
command has been programmed on these automations.

Force remote mode No • Yes

• No Deactivation of the local/remote pushbutton on the HU250 module. When
the setting value is Yes, the local/remote mode turns to Remote and the
corresponding LED is lit on the front of the HU250 module. See section Local/
Remote Mode for more information about the mode.

NT00378–EN–10 149
T300 HU250 Module Settings

Automatic Transfer Switching (ATS)

Access via Settings > HU01 > ATS page.

This function is optional on the HU250. If the T300 system has at least two SCxxx
modules, it can be configured with an Automatic Transfer Switching function
(ATS). If this option is not configured, the corresponding parameter setting page is
not displayed in the Web server. This is also true for the values of these optional
measurements displayed on the extended display for the ATS function from the
main view of the Substation page. See the relevant section for more information
on displaying these measurements
If an SC160 module has tripped and is in tripping locked out, it is not controlled by
ATS or other automation running on the Head Unit.

150 NT00378–EN–10
HU250 Module Settings T300

ATS Automatic Control (Transfer of Source)

Automatic transfer switching minimises power interruptions by transferring the
load from the normal source to an alternate source when the normal source is
temporarily unavailable. When the normal source becomes unavailable, the
system transfers to the alternate source. If configured, once voltage returns to the
normal source, the system automatically switches back.
The ATS function for the T300 is designed for the case when both sources are
connected to utility networks. The switch operations are executed as open
operations first. In the case of back to normal operation (in Self-return mode), the
parallel coupling is possible. In this case, the two sources must be synchronized
(controlled by RSYN_REL signal).
The ATS function can be used with standby generators but this requires additional
custom logic to be defined using formulas or ISaGRAF®.
NOTE: ATS requires a voltage presence/absence indication per module. This
can either be the voltage measurement sensors or the digital input DI6. For
more information, see the Front panel voltage indication section.

CAUTION
HAZARD OF INCORRECT EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• In case of automatic parallel coupling management (with formulas or
ISaGRAF®), both sources must be synchronized before the parallel
coupling.
• Use a synchro-check relay to control the synchronization of both sources.
Information from the synchro-check must be used by the automatism to
enable the transfer.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment
damage.

ATS Operating Modes

The ATS can operate in several different modes depending on the settings. The
initial conditions are that voltage is present on both sources, the switch is closed
for the active source, and the switch is open for the inactive (backup) source.
Network ATS used with T300:

Auto-Return mode SW1 � � SW2 mode

In the event of a voltage loss for time delay T1 on the active source, the automatic
transfer system switches to the other source. In this mode, there is no concept of
priority source. After the voltage returns on the original source, the ATS remains in
the ready state and only switches back when voltage is lost on the current active
source.

NT00378–EN–10 151
T300 HU250 Module Settings

Auto mode:
RT = Switch response time

Vn
SW1
0

Vn
SW2
0
C
RT
SW1 T1 RT
O
C
SW2 RT T1 RT
O

Self-Return mode
In this mode, source #1 is considered the normal source and source #2 is
considered the backup source. In the event of a voltage loss for time T1 on the
normal source, the ATS system switches to the backup source. The system
remains in this state while the voltage is absent on the normal source. When the
voltage returns on the original source for time T2, then the ATS automatically
switches back.
Self-Return mode:
RT = Switch response time

Vn
SW1
0

Vn
SW2
0
C
T1 RT RT
SW1
O
C
RT T2 RT
SW2
O

No Return SW1 � SW2 or SW2 � SW1 mode

This mode only allows transfers in one direction. After a transfer, the system
remains in that state whether or not the voltage returns on the original source.
To select a No Return mode, use the settings Allow back to normal source
transfer = No and select the appropriate values for source settings Block
transfer to this source.

Changeover sequence
The ATS goes to the ready state if the following conditions are met:
• ATS control enabled.
• Position of channel 1 and 2 switches complementary: SW1 in closed position
and SW2 in open position (or SW2 closed and SW1 open).
• MV voltage present on both channels.

152 NT00378–EN–10
HU250 Module Settings T300

Changeover is triggered by MV voltage absence and takes place if the following

conditions are met:
• ATS control enabled
• Position of channel 1 and 2 switches complementary: SW1 in closed position
and SW2 in open position (or SW2 closed and SW1 open)
• Source transfer locking absent
• MV voltage absent on the active source
• MV voltage present on the inactive source
In the Self-Return mode, the changeover is triggered if:
• the normal source switch is open
• the MV voltage on the normal source is present.

Source Transfer Locking

Changeover can be blocked for the ATS by various inputs depending on the
configuration.
The ATS system can use the values of CoreDB variables for dynamically blocking
or allowing transfers. The particular variables to be used, for example, specific
digital inputs, must be configured using Easergy Builder by defining the ATS bin
controller as a destination. Different variables can be used for different blocking
conditions, for example, blocking all transfers or blocking self-return transfers.
Automation enable/disable
The HU250 module has parameter settings to enable or disable the ATS
automation. In addition, automation functions are enabled or disabled globally on
the T300 either remotely from the SCADA system or locally:

• By pressing simultaneously the (automation state change) and OK

buttons on the front of the HU250 module.
• Via the Web server (on the Monitoring & control/Substation page).

ATS Parameter Setting

ATS parameter setting for the HU250 module:

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

ATS0x
Enabled No • Yes Activation of automatic transfer switching function(1)
• No
Switches maximum operation time 15,000 1,000-30,000 Maximum wait time for the switch to change position(2)
(ms)

Enable fast open mode No • Yes Activation of a faster mode. In fast open mode, the process is
• No shortened by removing some controls.

This mode is adapted to installations with hardware interlocking. It

enables a faster transfer.

This option should be activated only with specific installations that have
mechanical interlocking between the two sources (eg: NSM cubicle). In
this case; some firmware checks are skipped, allowing a faster transfer
(<300 ms).

Minimum backup source transfer 1,000 0-120,000 Time that voltage must be absent on the currently active source to
conditions stability duration (ms) trigger a transfer switching sequence.
Note: not visible in fast open mode, where the transfer is
immediately executed.

NT00378–EN–10 153
T300 HU250 Module Settings

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Maximum delay of backup source 0 0-10 Time before lockout, in the case where the voltage on the current active
transfer process after start signal. 0 source repeatedly changes between present and absent.
means unlimited. (min) A value of 0 means that this delay is unlimited.

Maximum try count of backup 0 0-4 Maximum number of voltage absences before lockout, in the case
source transfer conditions where the voltage on the current active source repeatedly changes
stabilization attempts. 0 means between present and absent.
unlimited. A value set to 0 means unlimited attempts.

Allow back to normal source No • Yes Controls the behaviour after a transfer to the backup source and
transfer voltage returns on the normal source.
• No
• Use a No means that the ATS waits for voltage absence on the backup
varaible source.

Yes means that the system transfers back to the normal source.

Use a variable means that back to normal is enabled depending on the

value of a variable (coordinate AATS_BLK_SELF_RE
T).

Minimum back to normal source 15,000 0-21,600000 Timeout related to the Self-Return mode.
transfer conditions stability duration
(ms) If Allow back to normal source transfer is Yes or enabled by a
variable, then when the voltage is detected as present on the normal
source for this time period, and there are no other blocking conditions,
a transfer switching sequence is be started.

Enable parallel transfer mode No • Yes If Allow back to normal source transfer is Yes or enabled by a
• No variable, the parallel mode is allowed in automatic mode. Activating
this option enables paralleling of the channels by automatic control,
during the phase of automatic return to the normal source.
NOTE: Perform this operation when both sources are
synchronized. The signal RSYN_REL (by default DI2 of the
HU250) is used for this purpose and must be activated to
authorize paralleling.

Parallel coupling maximum delay 1 0-180 Maximum duration to wait for the synchronization of the sources.
(s)
During this period, the transfer is launched as soon as RSYN_REL is
present.

If after this period the RSYN_REL is not present, the transfer is

cancelled and the ATS is locked.
FPI blocks transfer when a fault Yes • Yes Controls whether transfers are blocked when the configured fault
occurs • No indication variable is active.

Minimum voltage presence 3,000 0-30,000 After a reset, minimum voltage presence duration of the active source
duration on a source to consider to consider that its voltage has returned. This timeout is used only on
that its voltage returned (ms) the first phase of the ATS after initialization, to check that the network is
stable enough to start the process.

Source # 1
Switch number 1 Undefined, 1- Number of the SCxxx switch control module for the normal source. For
24 example, 1 means module SC01.

Block transfer to this source No • Yes Blocks or allows transfer to this source.
• No Use a variable means that the system uses the value of a variable(3).
Value 0 means Allow transfer.
• Use a Value 1 means Block transfer.
variable
Source # 2
Switch number Undefined, 1- Number of the SCxxx switch control module for the normal source. For
24 example, 2 means module SC02.

Block transfer to this source • Yes Blocks or allows transfer to this source.
• No Use a variable means that the system uses the value of a variable(3).
Value 0 means Allow transfer.
• Use a Value 1 means Block transfer.
variable
Interlocking

Enable local mode to block Yes • Yes Yes means that the ATS automation is blocked when the control mode
automation is Local. It will be operational only if the control mode is Remote.
• No
No means that the ATS automation is operational regardless of the
control mode.
See Local/Remote Mode section

154 NT00378–EN–10
HU250 Module Settings T300

(1): The Automation cannot be enabled if the switch number is undefined.

(2): The maximum switch number will be set to the number of SCxxx modules
configured for T300 system.
(3): The Block transfer to this source option Use a variable requires suitable
configuration in CoreDB (see next page).
The ATS system can use the values of CoreDB variables for dynamically blocking
or allowing transfers. The particular variables to be used (for example, digital
inputs) must be configured using Easergy Builder by defining the ATS Device as a
destination with the appropriate coordinates. If needed several variables can be
defined with the same ATS destination coordinate. In this case, for that coordinate,
the ATS function automatically uses the logical-OR of the variable values.

Destination Destination Description

Device Coordinate
ATS1 AATS_BLK If any of the variables with this destination coordinate have value 1 then all transfers are
blocked with result "transfer blocked".
ATS1 AATS_PWR_BLK If any of the variables with this destination coordinate have value 1 then all transfers are
blocked with result "switch control power absent".

ATS1 AATS_BLK_RET If any of the variables with this destination coordinate have value 1 then self-return
transfers are blocked.
Only applies if setting Allow back to normal transfer is Yes.

ATS1 AATS_BLK: If any of the variables with this destination coordinate have value 1 then transfers to
SOURCE01 source 1 are blocked.
Only applies if for source #1, the setting Block transfer to this source is Use a Variable.

ATS1 AATS_BLK: If any of the variables with this destination coordinate have value 1 then transfers to
SOURCE02 source 2 are blocked.
Only applies if for source #2, the setting Block transfer to this source is Use a Variable.

Refer to the Easergy Builder User Manual for more information on how to change
configurations.

NT00378–EN–10 155
T300 HU250 Module Settings

Zigbee Network for Condition Monitoring

The Zigbee network is used to manage the devices (sensors) installed to provide
data to monitor the following conditions:
• Environmental conditions in the substation and cubicles, with CL110 sensors
• Thermal conditions on cables, busbars or transformers, with TH110 sensors
For specific use cases, you may need to review the Zigbee network settings. To
set up the Zigbee Network for Condition Monitoring, proceed as follows:
1. Commission the Zigbee network. Refer to Zigbee network parameters, page
161.
2. Commission installed sensors by pairing them with the Zigbee network. Refer
to the detailed procedure in the Maintenance/Zigbee Network Management,
page 428 in the Maintenance chapter.
3. Set up the installed sensor parameters. Refer to Setting Zigbee Network
Device Parameters, page 162.
4. Set up the Condition monitoring to set up the alarm display.
Up to 60 Zigbee devices can be defined.

Setting Condition Monitoring

Accessed via Settings/HU01/Condition Monitoring page.
This page displays two tabs to define settings to monitor the following conditions:
• Environmental conditions in the substation and cubicles
• Thermal conditions on cables

156 NT00378–EN–10
HU250 Module Settings T300

Monitoring of the Environmental Conditions

Settings for environmental monitoring algorithm
Example of Environmental Condition Monitoring settings

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Pollution Level LIGHT • HEAVY Pollution Level

• LIGHT
Periods between maintenances in 60 1 – 240 Maximum period between maintenance inspections in months
months
Humidity Maximum (%) 90 50.0 – 95.0 Maximum value (%) of humidity that can be reached without
triggering the pre-alarm

Temperature Maximum (ºC) 70 30.0 – 80.0 Maximum value of temperature (ºC) that can be reached without
triggering the pre-alarm

Setting alarm on customized digital input

Example of a customized Gas pressure low alarm settings

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Alarm State Alarm Alarm or Pre- To trigger an Alarm or a Pre-alarm when the state of data provided
alarm by the sensor is different from its normal level of operation

Normal level of operation On • On Define if the normal state of the data provided by the sensor is On or
Off:
• Off

NT00378–EN–10 157
T300 HU250 Module Settings

Monitoring Connection Temperature

Setting parameters

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Absolute Alarm (ºC) 75 50 – 115 Maximum value (ºC) before triggering an alarm (= TMPMAXPH)

Absolute Pre-alarm (°C) 60 40 – (0.8 * TMPMAXPH) Maximum value (ºC) before triggering a pre-alarm

Discrepancy Alarm (ºC) 10 10 – 25 Maximum discrepancy between phases (ºC) before triggering an
alarm (= TMPMAXDIS)

Discrepancy Pre-alarm 8 5.00 – (0.8 * Maximum discrepancy between phases (ºC) before triggering a pre-
(ºC) TMPMAXDIS) alarm

Example of connection temperature monitoring settings:

158 NT00378–EN–10
HU250 Module Settings T300

SCADA Protocols
Access via Settings > HU01 > SCADA protocols page.
Example of a SCADA protocol settings page - DNP3 outstation

The SCADA protocols are those protocols that can be used for remote
communication between the T300 and the SCADA system via modems or IP
access. These protocols are server type since the SCADA system is the client for
communication management and the T300 is the server.
There are several SCADA protocols available on the T300. The protocol
requested at the time of the order is configured in the product before delivery:
• DNP3 outstation
• IEC 60870-5-101 controlled station

NT00378–EN–10 159
T300 HU250 Module Settings

• IEC 60870-5-104 controlled station

• Modbus server
• IEC 61850 protocols server
The parameters displayed in the Web page correspond to the application
parameters of the protocol installed in the T300. These parameters can be
adjusted according to the use and the protocol parameter settings at the SCADA
system end.
In contrast to other protocols, the IEC 61850 application parameters can be
configured only in Easergy Builder and do not appear in the Web server. Refer to
the protocol user manual for details on parameter settings.
Easergy Builder is used for the advanced protocol configuration and SCADA
addressing. Refer to the protocol User Manual and the Quick Start Guide (ref:
NT00383) for more information on advanced configuration.

Client Protocols
Access via Settings > HU250 > Client protocols page.
The client protocols are those protocols allowing the HU250 to communicate as
the client with auxiliary equipment or an external IED installed in the MV
substation (server).
For example, communication between the HU250 and the PS50 power supply is
via the RS485 serial link on the Modbus client protocol.
The following client protocols are available for the T300:
• Modbus client
• Modbus Sepam
• DNP3 Master station
• IEC 60870-5-101 controlling station
• IEC 60870-5-104 controlling station
• Zigbee client
• IEC 61850 MMS or GOOSE client
• SNMP manager
When installed on the T300, the Modbus client protocol parameters can be
defined in the Client Protocols page in the Web server in the same way as the
server protocols. These parameters can be adjusted according to the use and the
equivalent protocol parameter settings at the external IED end.
In contrast to the Modbus client and Zigbee client protocols, the DNP3 Master
station, Modbus Sepam, IEC 60870-5-101, IEC 60870-5-104 controlling stations
and IEC61850 client protocol, and SNMP Manager application parameters can
only be configured in Easergy Builder and do not appear in the Web server.
Refer to the User Manual for the protocol in question and the Easergy Builder
manual for more information on parameter settings and advanced configuration.

160 NT00378–EN–10
HU250 Module Settings T300

Zigbee Client Protocol

Accessed via Settings > Module settings > HU250 > Client protocols > Zigbee
page
The Zigbee protocol is used to manage devices (sensors) to monitor the
environmental conditions and the thermal conditions on the cables, in the
substation or the cubicles.
Example of a Zigbee protocol definition page

Setting Zigbee Network Parameters

Access via Settings > Module settings > HU250 > Client protocols > Zigbee
page, then click Setting.

Parameter setting:
The Port parameter, already set up, indicates where the Zigbee box (K7) is
connected. Change default settings only if required.

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Channel AUTO • AUTO Zigbee radio channel configured.

AUTO: the channel is selected automatically by K7Z at
• 11 – 26
network creation.
IMPORTANT: The change of the radio channel impacts
the network creation. To change the channel, you must
first unpaired all paired devices and create a new
network. See Maintenance/Zigbee Network
Management page.

Transmission power (db) 7 0–7 Transmission power expressed in decibels. Maximum

value by default. Can be reduced in some cases, for
example to avoid perturbations between different near
sites.
Security YES • YES Not used. CL110, TH110 devices are always
• NO commissioned with authentication and encryption
options.

NT00378–EN–10 161
T300 HU250 Module Settings

Setting Zigbee Network Device Parameters

Accessed via Settings > Module settings > HU250 > Client protocols > Zigbee
page, then click Devices.
This page allows you to:
• Change the Zigbee sensor parameters
• Define the sensor ID for sensors with unknown IDs.
The environmental and connection temperature sensors are managed by the
Zigbee network. Refer to the Maintenance/Zigbee Network Management, page
428 page in the Maintenance chapter for more details.
Example of a TH110 sensor commissioning:

Setting TH110 or CL110 sensors:

The Name, Description and Type data for the device is already configured (using
Easergy builder). The sensor ID is also pre-configured, but a Sensor ID can be
defined when missing, for example when replacing a sensor.

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

ID FFFFFFFF 32 bits Device unique identifier. The value FFFFFFFF is interpreted as

hexadecimal “unknown” which means that the device is not configured but it is
discovered during the “pairing process”. See Maintenance/Zigbee
Network Management, page 428 page.

Timeout (seconds) 150 for TH110 120 – 62535 Time in seconds without receiving data to consider that the device is
300 for CL110 “offline”.

When a Zigbee sensor is defined, it must be enabled on the Zigbee Network. This
action is done from the Zigbee Network Management, page 428 page, described
in the Maintenance chapter.

162 NT00378–EN–10
HU250 Module Settings T300

Configuring the Physical Ports

Accessed via: Settings/HU01/Physical ports configuration page
The physical ports correspond to the modems installed in the T300 managing
"serial" type communications.
There are 2 types of physical port available:
• RS-485: RS-485 Modbus network port. This port is used for internal
communication between the HU250 and the PS50 power supply.
• RS MODEM BOX SLOT (1) or (2): Port that can be used for an RS-232/RS-
422/RS-485 "serial" type link to the SCADA system or an external IED
installed locally in the MV substation

Internal RS485
Since this type of link is used for internal communication between the HU250 and
the PS50 power supply, it is recommended that this factory setting is not modified.
If the setting is changed, take care not to modify the PS50 communication
parameters as well as this link may cease to operate correctly.
Example of settings for the Internal RS485 port:

Setting the Internal RS485 link

NT00378–EN–10 163
T300 HU250 Module Settings

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Channel RS485 RS485 Type of port/modem used

Transmission power (db) RS485 RS485 Choice of link mode

Baudrate (bds) 38400 • 300 Transmission speed used on the internal RS485 link between the
• 600 HU250 and the PS50 power supply.

• 1200
• 2400
• 4800
• 9600
• 19200
• 38400
Data bits 8 7 or 8 bits Number of bits defining the frame. The 8th bit provides the
required parity information.

Parity Even • Even Parity method to be used. Parity allows errors to be detected
during transmission. A binary word is even if the number of "1s" it
• None
contains is even.
• Odd
Stop bit 1 1, 1.5, or 2 bits Number of stop bits used to define the end of a frame

Delay before transmission (ms) 2 0 – 65532 Delay before transmission of a message (response). This delay
serves to prevent a potential signal overlap between the
message received and the message transmitted.

RTS control Auto- • Automatic Method for managing the RTS signal: automatic or delayed
matic
• Toggle

RTS (or (CTS) message delay 2 0 – 65532 This delay can only be configured if RTS Control is set to Toggle.
(ms) It is the delay between the changeover to the active state of the
RTS (or CTS if this signal is used) and the start of message
transmission. Typically, this delay is used to help avoid the need
to truncate the start of the message by the modem prematurely
changing over to transmission mode.

Message – RTS delay (ms) 0 0 – 65532 This delay can only be configured if RTS Control is set to Toggle.
It is the minimum wait time following transmission of a message
before the RTS drops out. This delay is used to help avoid
truncation of the end of the message by the modem prematurely
dropping out of transmission mode.

Terminator resistor Yes Yes Use of RS485 line termination resistors at the T300 end. In
theory, the line terminator must be activated at both ends of the
RS485 line, especially for long distance lines.

Polarization Yes Yes Used to polarize the RS485 line at the T300 end. In theory, the
RS485 line only needs to be polarized at one end, preferably at
the Client (T300) end.

NOTE: The grayed-out parameters are fixed, they cannot be modified.

RS Modem Box
Since this type of link is used for connecting to a SCADA system, device, or
external modem, the parameter settings need to be customized according to
certain criteria.

Configuration Process
The T300 is supplied with a default factory configuration corresponding to the type
of modem installed.
The settings of this modem (specifically the speed, modem management signals,
and associated delays) may need to be adjusted according to the requirements of
the external modems used or possibly the transmission network.

164 NT00378–EN–10
HU250 Module Settings T300

In terms of adjusting the transmission delays, start by configuring high values for
all delays and check first whether dialog has been established between the T300
and the remote device.
You can then gradually reduce the first delay to determine the modem operating
limit in relation to the adjusted signal.
Once this has been established, increase the delay by a few milliseconds to
maintain a buffer. Continue in the same way for the other delays.
This method allows you to optimize the T300 transmission times.
If there is any doubt about the configuration, it is advisable to leave the default
values.
Setting RS modem box:

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Channel K7 RS K7 RS SLOT (i) Type of port/modem used

SLOT (i = 1 or 2, depending on which slot the modem box is in on the HU250)
(i)

Mode RS232 • RS232 Choice of link mode.

• RS422
• RS485
Baudrate (bds) 38400 • 300 Transmission speed used on the external link between the HU250 and
• 600 the other device. The speed used must be managed and configured in
exactly the same way as the other remote modem.
• 1200
• 2400
• 4800
• 9600
• 19200
• 38400
• 56000
• 57600
• 115200
Data bits 8 7 or 8 bits Number of bits defining the frame. The 8th bit provides the required parity
information.
Parity Even • Even Parity method to be used. Parity allows errors to be detected during
• None transmission. A binary word is even if the number of "1s" it contains is
even.
• Odd
Stop bit 1 1, 1.5, or 2 bits Number of stop bits used to define the end of a frame.

Delay before transmission 2 0 – 65532 Delay before transmission of a message (response). This delay serves to
(ms) prevent a potential signal overlap between the message received and the
message transmitted.

RTS control Toggle Toggle Method for managing the RTS signal: automatically via the associated
RTS (or CTS) message delay.

RTS (or (CTS) message 2 0 – 65532 This is the delay between the changeover to the active state of the RTS
delay (ms) (or CTS if this signal is used) and the start of message transmission.
Typically, this delay is used to help avoid the need to truncate the start of
the message by the modem prematurely changing over to transmission
mode. This delay is configurable only if the RTS control setting is
configured to Toogle.

Message – RTS delay (ms) 0 0 – 65532 This is the minimum wait time following transmission of a message before
the RTS drops out. This delay is used to help avoid truncation of the end
of the message by the modem prematurely dropping out of transmission
mode. This delay is configurable only if the RTS control setting is
configured to Toogle.

Terminator resistor No • No Parameter only available in RS-422 and RS-485 mode. Automatically set
• Yes to No for RS-422. Use of RS-422/RS-485 line termination resistors at the
T300 end. In theory, the line terminator must be activated at both ends of
the RS-422/RS-485 line, especially for long distance lines.

Polarization No • No Parameter only available in RS-422 and RS-485 mode. Automatically set
• Yes to No for RS-422. Used to polarize the RS-485 line at the T300 end. In

NT00378–EN–10 165
T300 HU250 Module Settings

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

theory, the RS-485 line only needs to be polarized at one end, preferably
at the Client end.
Parameters only available for RS232 link

DTR Control Toggle • Disabled Method for managing the DTR signal. If Toggle is selected, DTR is
• Enabled managed via the associated DTR - RTS delay.

• Toggle

RTS Control Toggle • Automatic Method for managing the RTS signal. The choice of this management
• Disabled mode is configurable only if the DTR control parameter is set to Enabled
or Disabled. Otherwise, this one is frozen at Toggle.
• Enabled
• Toggle

DTR – RTS delay (ms) 5 0 – 65532 Maximum wait time for the RTS signal after the DTR signal has been
activated. If the RTS has not become active by the end of this delay, the
T300 aborts transmission of the frame (see the description of the control
signals below).

Timeout CTS (ms) 20 0 – 65532 Maximum wait time for the CTS signal after the RTS signal has been
activated. If the CTS has not become active by the end of this delay, the
T300 aborts transmission of the frame (see the description of the control
signals below).

CD Control Disa- Disabled If this parameter is enabled, the CD signal is managed during
bled transmission exchanges with the modem.

DSR Control Disa- Disabled If this parameter is enabled, the DSR signal is managed during
bled transmission exchanges with the modem.

NOTE: The grayed-out parameters are fixed, they cannot be modified.

166 NT00378–EN–10
HU250 Module Settings T300

Example of settings for the K7 RS SLOT port in RS232 mode:

Modem Management Signals

The management signals below are listed in the order in which they come into
play during communication between the T300 modem and the interface or the
external modem, or even directly with the SCADA system.
• DSR (Data Set Ready):
This signal may be sent to the T300 to indicate that the control center (or
modem) is capable of transmitting (or simply that it is powered up). This
signal is only used for an RS232 link (not used for radio link).
• CD (Carrier Detect):
This signal, if it exists, is used to confirm receipt of the frame received. It may
also serve to determine the occupancy on the transmission network.
• DTR (Data Terminal Ready):
If the control center uses DSR, DTR is used to signal that the T300 is ready
for the transmission (equivalent to DSR but in the other direction). For a radio
link, this signal may be used by the T300 to command the changeover to
transmission from a radio receiver if it requires different commands for the
changeover to transmission mode and transmission of the carrier.
• RTS (Request To Send):
This signal commands transmission of the carrier from the modem.

NT00378–EN–10 167
T300 HU250 Module Settings

• CTS (Clear To Send)

After the RTS signal has been picked up, the transmitter sometimes applies a
power-up delay before being able to transmit the messages sent to it. This is
especially true for radio devices. When the device is ready to send, it informs
the T300 by sending the CTS signal. Waiting for the return of the CTS signal
usually helps avoid the need to truncate the start of the message sent to the
modem, simply because it is not ready to process the message.
• Squelch:
This signal is used in radio communications only to indicate the radio network
occupancy status to the T300.

DSR
CD
Frame received
DTR
or
Tx command
RTS
CTS
Frame sent

Squelch

168 NT00378–EN–10
HU250 Module Settings T300

Synchronization
Access via Settings > HU01 > Synchronization page.

The T300 can be synchronized in several different ways:

• Automatically via the SCADA protocol.
• Automatically via an SNTP or NTP server, if the T300 is connected to an IP
network.
• Automatically by GPS satellites reception, if the T300 includes a 4G modem
with GPS option.
Two synchronization sources are defined in the T300: the primary device and the
secondary device. The secondary device is used if the primary device is
unavailable. Both these synchronization devices can be linked to either a protocol
or an SNTP server or a GPS reception. This selection and the associated
configuration are made in the Easergy Builder configuration tool.
Refer to the T300 Quick Start Guide (NT00383) for more information on how to
configure synchronization sources.

NT00378–EN–10 169
T300 HU250 Module Settings

Setting the SNTP source parameters - Settings > Synchronization page:

Setting the Protocol source parameters - Settings > Synchronization page:

170 NT00378–EN–10
HU250 Module Settings T300

Setting the GPS source parameters - Settings > Synchronization page:

The T300 Web server is used to set most of the parameters. However, the settings
for SNTP server can only be viewed.

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Synchronization/Primary or Secondary Device/SNTP Device

Device SNTP • None Enabling the SNTP device as the synchronization source.
• SNTP
Timeout (s) 30 1 – 4294967295 Time delay before the active device is declared to be in ERROR mode
and the switch is made to another device.
SNTP Server IP – Valid IP address SNTP server IP address
Mode Active • Active In Active mode, the HU250 requests a new synchronization from the
• Passive SNTP server at the end of the delay set in Period. In Passive mode,
the HU250 simply waits to be synchronized by the server.

Period 30 1 – 4294967295 Synchronization period, used in Active mode only. Period should be
shorter than Timeout.
IPV6 No • No
• Yes
Synchronization/Primary or Secondary Device/Protocol Device

Device Protocol • None Enabling the Protocol device as the synchronization source.
• Protocol
Timeout (s) 30 1 – 4294967295 Time delay before the active device is declared to be in ERROR mode
and the switch is made to another device.
Device Source Name • Dnp3S1 Sources from which the device will receive the synchronization date
and time by communicating with the SCADA system. Several protocol
• I104S1
sources can be activated at the same time.
• I101S1
Synchronization/Primary or Secondary Device/GPS Device

Device GPS • None Activation of the GPS device as a source of synchronization

• GPS
Timeout (s) 30 1 – 4294967295 Time delay before the active device is declared to be in ERROR mode
and the switch is made to another device.
K7 SLOT K7 GPS • K7 GPS 1 HU250 channel number (K7) on which the 4G/GPS modem used for
1 • K7 GPS2 synchronization is installed:
• K7_GPS_1: modem slot number 1
• K7_GPS_2: modem slot number 2
The parameter setting is only available if a 4G/GPS modem is
connected.
PPS Yes • Yes Use of the 1 Hz PPS (Pulse Per Second) synchronization signal sent
• No by the GPS modem. Extended setting, fixed to yes for T300.

NT00378–EN–10 171
T300 HU250 Module Settings

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Local time zone

Local time Zone - Hour +0 —12 to +3 Difference in hours between local time and GMT
Local time Zone - +0 0 to 59 Difference in minutes between local time and GMT
Minute
Summer time
Enabled No • Yes If the summer time is taken into account by selecting Yes, Start and
• No End dates and times of the period can be specified.

SNTP Server
Enabled Yes • Yes The SNTP server is used by the T300 to set the time on the SCxxx and
• No LV150 modules. An IED can also be connected as an SNTP client to
this server if required for synchronization purposes, by configuring it as
follows: Time zone inactive: No summer time management. Passive
mode.
Mode Active • Active The T300 is active for synchronization. It synchronizes clients at the
• Passive end of the period defined below.

Destination Eth0 Port on which the SNTP server is active (HU250 LAN)

Period (s) 30 SNTP client synchronization period

IPV6 No • No
• Yes

NOTE: The grayed-out parameters are fixed, they cannot be modified.

Local Time and Summer Time

Internally, the system time- and date-stamping for CoreDb data is stored in GMT
(seconds and nanoseconds since 1970). The SNTP server (client, server) and the
GPS reception always operate in GMT. The time zone and summer time functions
are used when it is necessary to change the system time from GMT to local time,
which involves:
• Synchronizing the client protocols: the client protocols send a synchronization
message with the local time and the server protocols assume the
synchronization message as local time.
• Time-stamping the events of the server protocols: the events received are
interpreted as local time before being stored and broadcast by applying the
local time.

172 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

SC150 Module Settings

What’s in This Chapter
MV Current and Voltage Sensors.................................................................. 175
Switch Control............................................................................................. 184
Front Panel Voltage Indication...................................................................... 197
Active Overpower........................................................................................ 199
Fault Current Detection Indication (FPI) on the SC150 Module........................ 200
Fault Current Validation and Indication .......................................................... 226
MV Power Measurement Settings................................................................. 238
MV Power Quality Parameter Setting ............................................................ 240
Disturbance Record Settings........................................................................ 242
Automation Settings .................................................................................... 248
Local I/O on SCxxx module .......................................................................... 252

Other functionalities (common to the SC150, SC160 and LV150 modules):

• Voltage Monitoring, page 372
• Broken Phase Conductor Detection, page 379
• Port Configuration, page 122
Settings menu for the SC150 module.

All these functions are explained in detail in this manual, together with the
corresponding application parameter settings.

NT00378–EN–10 173
T300 SC150 Module Settings

• Current and voltage measurements

The SC150 is compatible with all standard current sensors (according to IEC
61869-2).
VDS and PPACS sensors cannot be used for SC160 module.
There are 4 possible connection configurations for acquiring the current
measurement:
◦ Type A: 3 phase CTs
◦ Type B: 2 phase CTs + 1 core balance CT
◦ Type C: 1 core balance CT
◦ Type D: 3 phase CTs + 1 core balance CT
• MV switches control and monitoring
Control is compatible with all existing switch types and all types of command
(single or double). There is a wide range of control voltages: 12 VDC to 127
VDC, 90 VAC to 220 VAC.
• Fault current detection and indication
Fault current detection is compatible with all neutral systems with or without
distributed generation. Fault current detection is based on the following
international ANSI code standards:
◦ Phase overfault current (ANSI 50/51)
◦ Ground fault (ANSI 50N/51N)
◦ Directional phase overfault current (ANSI 67)
◦ Directional ground fault (ANSI 67N) for detection
Two groups of settings can be defined for each fault current type. All fault
current detection algorithms function according to the methods of detection:
◦ Definite time (DT)
◦ Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) with a choice of standardized
inverse time curves
• MV network voltage monitoring
◦ Undervoltage detection (ANSI 27)
◦ Overvoltage detection (ANSI 59)
◦ Neutral overvoltage detection (ANSI 59N)
◦ Broken conductor detection (ANSI 47)
◦ Active Overpower (ANSI 32P)
• Sectionalizer automation
The sectionalizer (SEC) automation function is controlled by the SC150
module. This automation function is factory-installed but configurable on-site.
• Power measurements and power quality
◦ Power measurements (IEC 61557-12)
◦ Power quality (according to the principles of IEC 61000-4-30 class S - up
to harmonic 40).
• Disturbance record
Record measured analog signals, digital input signals and logical states.
• Port configuration
Limit access to a physical port on the SC150 module.
• LEDs customization

174 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

MV Current and Voltage Sensors

Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Sensors page

MV Current Sensors
The SC150 default configuration includes a current transformer with a ratio of
500:1.
The type of CT to be used is selected by the user.
Note that the CTs supplied by the T300 manufacturer also have a ratio of 500:1. It
is possible, however, to define a different primary/secondary ratio by configuration
if a CT with different characteristics is used.
Several CT connection configurations are possible on the T300:
• Type A: 3 phase CTs
• Type B: 2 phase CTs + 1 core balance CT
• Type C: 1 core balance CT
• Type D: 3 phase CTs + 1 core balance CT

NT00378–EN–10 175
T300 SC150 Module Settings

NOTICE
HAZARD OF INCORRECT WIRING
• When fitting the CTs on the cables, it is essential to comply with the direction
of positioning: HAUT/TOP marking facing upward, wire exit downward (see
illustration beside).
• The shielding of each MV cable must be re-inserted inside the
corresponding CT before being connected to ground (see diagram beside).
• The blue wire on the CT secondary (S2) is connected internally to the blue
wire (blue wire including a round terminal at the end).
• The blue wire including the round terminal must be connected to the same
frame ground as the cubicle.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Not following wiring instructions can lead to equipment damage and incorrect
current measurements.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
• The current sensors used for measuring must be 1 A or 5 A secondary with
security factor limiting the current to 100 A secondary -1 s (according to
standard IEC61869-2).
• Always use grounded external CTs for current inputs.
• The CTs should not remain disconnected, while being installed and power
on. If a disconnection is to be made, for any reason whatsoever, a short
circuit is required at the secondary part of the CTs. CTs connectors are IP2X.
• Cables of voltage rating greater than 1000 V must have a shield connected
to ground.
• The low-voltage insulation of the Easergy CTs means they can only be used
on insulated cables.
• Ensure that all electrical power on MV network is removed before working on
or installing CTs on the MV cable and making CT connections.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Connection type A (3 phase CTs) Connection type B (2 phase CTs + 1 core

balance)

Connection type C (1 core balance CT) Connection type D (3 phase CTs + 1 core
balance)

176 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Current sensor parameter settings

Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Sensors page

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Current Transformer
CT connection mode D • None Choice of CT connection configuration options:
• A • Type A: 3 phase CTs

• B • Type B: 2 phase CTs + 1 core balance CT

• C • Type C: 1 core balance CT

• D • Type D: 3 phase CTs + 1 core balance CT

Phase CT primary rated 500 50 – 1,250 Nominal value of the current at the phase CT primary
current (A) (increment = 1)

Phase CT secondary 1 • 1 Nominal value of the current at the phase CT secondary.

rated current (A) • 5
Phase A (B, C) No • No Used to reverse the direction of the current flowing from phase A (B, or C).
inversion • Yes This parameter is used to compensate for an inversion of the direction of
connection of the CT on the MV cable via the software.
Core balance CT 500 50 – 1,250 Nominal value of the current at the core balance CT primary
primary rated current (increment = 1)
(A)

Core balance CT 1 • 1 Nominal value of the current at the core balance CT secondary
secondary rated current • 5
(A)

Core balance inversion No • Yes Used to reverse the direction of the residual current. This parameter is
• No used to compensate via the software an inversion of the direction of
connection of the CT on the MV cable or a reverse winding direction of core
balance CT compared to phase CTs.

MV Voltage Sensors
The SC150 offers several sensor options for measuring and monitoring medium
voltage. The accuracy of the voltage measurement depends primarily on the type
of sensor used. The SC150 needs the voltage measurement for the following
functions:

NT00378–EN–10 177
T300 SC150 Module Settings

• Fault current detection and indication

• MV network monitoring and automation
• MV voltage measurement
• MV power measurement
• MV power quality measurement
The following table presents the voltage sources that can be used for the
automation functions:

Parameter Current presence only Digital input LV AC supply Measured (any MV voltage sensor)

Sectionalizer X X X X
ATS – X – X

The link between the adapter and the voltage input on the SC150 module (RJ45
connector) is via "straight-through" Ethernet cable including RJ45 connectors.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
• Do not connect VT adapter directly to the MV sensors. Always use fuse and
disconnect switch (maximum voltage allowable on the VT adapter inputs:
600 VAC).
• Never short the secondary of a Voltage Transformer (VT).
• Do not connect items of equipment with different earth potentials with an
RJ45 cable.
• Do not use RJ45 cable longer than 10 meters (32.8 feet).
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

178 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Voltage sensors for SC150

Depending on the type of sensor used, the way in which the measurements are
processed is different:
• LPVT/VT: A direct sensor measurement is taken without calibration.
• VDS HR/VPIS-V3 (with SC150 LPVT): Calibration is performed on manual
demand, through the Web server. Calibration is stored in the module.
Calibration is to be performed with the complete voltage measurement chain
and with a known reference value used as nominal voltage. For best
accuracy, in factory with a controlled voltage source, once for all.
NOTE:
The calibration takes the assumption that there is no phase shift between
the currents and the voltages, and adds angle corrections to align
voltages and currents.
In the case of on-site calibration, set angle corrections manually to 0 after
the calibration.
• PPACS/VDS/VPIS-V3 (with SC150 CAPA): Autocalibration is performed
automatically in the following cases:
◦ At the first power-up of the network
◦ On manual command from the Web server
◦ If nominal voltage is changed
◦ If voltage sensor type is changed.
Following autocalibration, the nominal voltage is recalculated. The auto-calibration
consists in defining the current voltage as the nominal voltage of the network.
The different MV sensors used with the SC150 are summarized in the table below.
Each type of voltage sensor requires a specific adapter (available as an option) for
connection to the SC150 module:

LPVT adapter SCxxx VT adapter

VPIS-V3 adapter VDS adapter

A. SC150 output A. SC150 output
B. VPIS input B. VDS input

A B A B

PPACS adapter

NT00378–EN–10 179
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Voltage Description Adapter Required

sensor
SC150-CAPA version: 3 phases mounting only

VPIS-V3 VO Official Schneider Electric voltage presence indicator with voltage output VPIS-V3 VO adapter (ref: EMS59577):
(IEC 62271-206). The VPIS-V3 VO sensor is connected to the capacitive Voltage input (LL): 1 V to 30 VAC max.
divider installed in the MV cubicle. IP 30
VDS Type LRP, LRM, and LR. Voltage detection system with voltage output VDS adapter (ref: EMS59571):
(IEC 61243 5). The VDS is connected to the capacitive divider of the MV Voltage input (LL): 1 V to 30 VAC max.
switch. IP 30
PPACS External capacitive divider connected at the head end of the MV cable in PPACS adapter (ref: EMS59575):
the switch cubicle. Important: the routing of PPACS cables affects the Voltage input (LL): 1 V to 30 VAC max.
residual voltage. Install these cables in order to decrease at maximum Cable length: 54 cm
the crosstalk (no crossover, regrouping and installation consistent for all IP 30
three phases).

SC150-LPVT version: 1,2 or 3 phases mounting

VT Standard voltage transformer according to IEC 61869-3 with 2KV/1 mn SC150- VT adapter (ref: EMS59572):
AC insulation. Note: The SC150-VT adapter accepts only 1, 2 or 3-phase Voltage input (LL): 50 V to 250 VAC
transformer-primary type assemblies without neutral (phase-to-phase or IP 30
phase-to-ground). For more information, refer to the SC150-VT Adapter
Installation Guide. (ref: NT00394).

LPVT Low power voltage transformer according to IEC 60044-7 LPVT adapter (ref: EMS59573):
IP 30
VPIS-V3 VO Official Schneider Electric voltage presence indicator with voltage output VPIS-V3 VO adapter (ref: EMS59577):
(IEC 62271-206). The VPIS-V3 VO sensor is connected to the capacitive Voltage input (LL): 1 V to 30 VAC max.
divider installed in the MV cubicle. IP 30
VDS HR Voltage Detector System High Resistance (IEC 61243-5) Specific adapter

Voltage sensor parameter settings for SC150

Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Sensors page.
Example of voltage sensor setting with a CT-CAPA VT board type

180 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Example of voltage sensor setting with a CT-LPVT VT board type

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Voltage Transformer

VT board type Depends on • CAPA Indication of the type of SC150 module delivered. The SC150
the model type cannot be modified by the user. This choice is factory-set as
• LPVT
supplied it corresponds to the circuit board specific to each version.

Parameter Settings for VT board type = CAPA

VT type None • None Choice of the type of voltage adapter used as the voltage
• VPIS-V3 measurement sensor: type of capacitive divider used (VPIS-V3,
VDS, or PPACS)
• VDS
• PPACS
VT sensor type None • None • VT type = VPIS-V3: Choice of the type of VPIS adapter
• EMS59577 installed in the MV cubicle (EMS59577)

• PPACS C2 • VT type = PPACS: Choice of PPACS model installed in the

MV cubicle. This choice depends on the nominal voltage of
the MV network:
◦ PPACS C2: Un = 12 to 36 kV
L-L nominal voltage (V) 20,000 3,000-36,000 Definition of the nominal voltage of the MV network (phase-to-
(increment = 1) phase voltage)

Execute automatic No • No Immediate activation of the automatic calibration. This calibration

calibration now is performed after validating this option, once the network voltage
• Yes
is detected present on the three phases for 3 seconds.
Parameter only available for the option VT board = CAPA.
NOTE: This calibration is automatically executed after every
product start-up.

Parameter Settings for VT board type = LPVT

VT Type None • None

• VT
• LPVT
• VDS HR

NT00378–EN–10 181
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Voltage Transformer

• VPIS–V3
VT connection mode with 3 phases 3 phases ABC Choice of the type of connection used for the voltage sensor. The
PQ ABC sensor can be wired on a single phase, or between 2 or 3 phases
depending on the connection configuration used. The type of
VT connection mode 3 phases • 3 phases ABC voltage measurement performed (with 1, 2 or 3 phases) also
without PQ ABC depends on the type of connection and mounting of the voltage
• Single phase A
sensor defined by this parameter.
• Single phase B
• Single phase C
• Line to line AB (only
in VT type)
• Line to line BC (only
in VT type)
• Line to line CA (only
in VT type)

L-L nominal voltage (V) 20,000 3,000-36,000 Definition of the nominal voltage of the MV network (phase-to-
(increment = 1) phase voltage).
(extended to 59,000 for
Single line VT connection)

LPVT or VT Primary 20,000 3,000-36,000 Definition of the primary voltage of the measurement transformer.
rated voltage (V) (increment = 1) Must correspond to the characteristics of the transformer used.
(extended to 78,000 for Parameter only available for the options VT type = VT or LPVT.
Single line VT connection)

LPVT-Specific Parameter Settings

LPVT Secondary rated 3.25000 1-10 (increment = 0.001) Definition of the secondary voltage of the measurement
voltage (V) transformer. Must correspond to the characteristics of the
transformer used.
Phase A magnitude 1.00000 0.5-2 (increment = Used to correct the LPVT sensor phase A measurement to
correction 0.00001) improve accuracy

Phase B magnitude 1.00000 0.5-2 (increment = Used to correct the LPVT sensor phase B measurement to
correction 0.00001) improve accuracy

Phase C magnitude 1.00000 0.5-2 (increment = Used to correct the LPVT sensor phase C measurement to
correction 0.00001) improve accuracy

Phase A angle correction 0.000 -180 to 180 (increment = Used to correct the induced phase shift on phase A caused by
0.001) the sensor used

Phase B angle correction 0.000 -180 to 180 (increment = Used to correct the induced phase shift on phase B caused by
0.001) the sensor used

Phase C angle correction 0.000 -180 to 180 (increment = Used to correct the induced phase shift on phase C caused by
0.001) the sensor used

VT-Specific Parameter Settings

VT secondary rated 250.000 50-250 (increment = Definition of the transformer secondary voltage. Must correspond
voltage (V) 0.001) to the characteristics of the transformer used.

VT Adapter magnitude 50.600 30-60 (increment = 0.001) Used to calibrate the phase A measurement taken by the VT
correction phase A adapter to improve accuracy. The corresponding calibration value
is indicated on the VT adapter.

VT Adapter magnitude 50.600 30-60 (increment = 0.001) Used to calibrate the phase B measurement taken by the VT
correction phase B adapter to improve accuracy. The corresponding calibration value
is indicated on the VT adapter.

VT Adapter magnitude 50.600 30-60 (increment = 0.001) Used to calibrate the phase C measurement taken by the VT
correction phase C adapter to improve accuracy. The corresponding calibration value
is indicated on the VT adapter.

VPIS-V3/VDS HR -Specific Parameter Settings

VT sensor type None • None Choice of the type of VPIS adapter installed in the MV cubicle
• EMS59577 (EMS59577).

Capacitive adapter 1.00000 0.2-8 (increment = 0.001) Used to correct the sensor phase A measurement to improve
magnitude correction accuracy.
phase A

Capacitive adapter 1.00000 0.2-8 (increment = 0.001) Used to correct the sensor phase B measurement to improve
magnitude correction accuracy.
phase B

182 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Voltage Transformer

Capacitive adapter 1.00000 0.2-8 (increment = 0.001) Used to correct the sensor phase C measurement to improve
magnitude correction accuracy.
phase C

Phase A angle correction 0.000 -180 to 180 (increment = Used to correct the induced phase shift on phase A caused by
0.001) the sensor used.

Phase B angle correction 0.000 -180 to 180 (increment = Used to correct the induced phase shift on phase B caused by
0.001) the sensor used.

Phase C angle correction 0.000 -180 to 180 (increment = Used to correct the induced phase shift on phase C caused by
0.001) the sensor used.

Execute automatic No • No Immediate activation of the calibration. This calibration is

calibration now • Yes executed after validating this option, using the L-L nominal
voltage Un as the reference. The corrections are stored
permanently in the product. The calibration is executed only with
this command (no automatic calibration at start).

Network Characteristics
There are other parameters in addition to the sensor parameters.
• The SCxxx module can take current and voltage measurements at 50 Hz or
60 Hz to correspond with the existing network frequencies.
• The sequence of phases A, B, and C can be inverted.
Measured voltages and frequency parameter settings
Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Sensors page.

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Voltage Transformer

Nominal frequency 50 • 50 Choice of MV network frequency

(Hz) • 60
Phase rotation No • Yes Used to invert the phase sequence:
inverted • Yes = ACB (inverted)
• No
• No = ABC (normal sequence)
The ACB sequence must be used when the CT wiring or connection
configuration has been inverted in relation to the theoretical phase sequence or
for networks with an inverted phase sequence.
NOTE: This inversion affects current and voltage.

NT00378–EN–10 183
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Switch Control

WARNING
HAZARD OF INCORRECT EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• The SC module has various software interlocks to reduce the risk of
unintended switch operations. For these to work as intended, both the
module configuration AND the wiring between the module and the
equipment must be correct.
• Ensure that the main switch position indications are correctly wired.
• Ensure that the earth switch position indication(s) is/are correctly wired.
• Ensure that the disconnector position indication is correctly wired (if
applicable).
• Ensure that the SC module is correctly configured to match the wiring
arrangement for the earth switch and disconnector (if applicable).
• Ensure that the HMI is configured to show the correct arrangement of earth
switch and disconnector (if applicable). Refer to Setting Graphical
Representation of the Switch, page 51.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

184 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Switch control page.

The switch control settings are used to adapt to any type of switch. The
management of switch position control and command signals is essentially
specific to each switch type.
Commands can be issued from a variety of sources. Remote commands are
received by the SCADA system via the HU250. Local commands are received via
the buttons on the front panel of the SCxxx modules or via the Web server pages.
Commands can also be received via the automation functions present in the
HU250 module (ATS, or other) or the SCxxx module (SEC). Local commands on
the front panel of the module can be disabled by configuration to prevent
unintended operation.
The T300 systematically performs a consistency check of the switch positions
before executing a command.

NT00378–EN–10 185
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Interlock Function on SC150 Module

The interlock function is managed by the T300 "Cilo" BIN controller. The interlock
function checks only the command execution conditions. It rejects a command if
the execution conditions are not fulfilled. The majority of these conditions are
defined by configuration via a specific parameter.
When the earth switch and disconnector wiring is selected, the earth switch
interlock with the main switch command is disabled. Then, when the earth switch
is closed, the main switch operations are not blocked.
The T300 power supply is only capable of managing one switch command at a
time. If several commands are issued simultaneously (commands made using the
buttons on the front panels of two SCxxx modules at the same time, or commands
via the SCxxx sectionalizer automation functions that have detected a potential
issue on their channel), the interlock function coordinates with the system
modules to help ensure that a command will only be executed if the previous
command is considered to be completed.
The diagram below summarizes the various command input options checked by
the interlock function as well as the possible blocking sources:

SCADA Remote
command

Local HMI
Local
(buttons, LED, command
Web, etc.) Interlock Command
(Cilo) outputs
SCxxx Automation
automation command
Blocking

HU250
Automation
automation command
Blocking

External
interlock DI
Blocking

PS50
power supply
Blocking

The table below summarizes the main command rejection conditions for the
interlock function:

Command status Result of the

Command
Command already being executed on the same SCxxx module

Command already being executed on another SCxxx module

Manual command in local or remote mode when the automation function is active and the corresponding blocking
function has been enabled by configuration

Open command when the switch is already open or its position is unknown and the corresponding blocking function
has been enabled by configuration Rejected

Close command when the switch is already closed or its position is unknown and the corresponding blocking function
has been enabled by configuration

Ground switch closed or in unknown position

Switch command when the external interlock digital input (DI5) is enabled and the corresponding blocking function has
been enabled by configuration

186 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Command status Result of the

Command
Switch command when the 24/48 V motor mechanism power supply is not available or there is a problem with the
battery (end of life or low charge)

Command blocked because protection trip lockout is active

Switch control parameter settings

Access via SC0x > Settings > Switch control page.

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Interlocking

Enable local commands Yes • No Enables local switch commands via the buttons on the front panel
• Yes of the SCxxx module

Enable automation to block local Yes • No Enables the blocking of local or remote switch commands when the
or remote commands • Yes automation function is enabled. In this case, the automation
function also manages the other command options (see the "Local/
Remote Mode" section for more information).

Enable local mode to block Yes • No Enables the blocking of automation commands when local control
automation • Yes mode is enabled on the HU250

Block if switch position is Yes • Yes Enables the blocking of switch commands when the position of the
unknown or same as command • No switch is not known or inconsistent (e.g. in the same state as the
command issued)

External input mode for open None • None Enables the blocking of the switch open command by external
commands • Block if true digital input (DI5 on 9-way switch state connector)

• Block if false
External input mode for close None • None Enables the blocking of the switch close command by external
commands • Block if true digital input (DI5 on 9-way switch state connector)

• Block if false
External local/remote input No • Yes Enables forcing the local mode on the SCxxx by using the DI7
• No external input
The SCxxx responds to remote commands when both the
HU250 and the S0xxx are in remote mode. The SCxxx
responds to local commands when either the HU250 or the
SCxxx is in local mode.

Switch Positions and Commands

Managing Switch Positions on the SC150 Module
There are several ways of managing switch position signals. In principle on the
T300, the switch position is obtained via a double status signal (open, closed). It is
possible, however, to manage the switch position via a single status signal, i.e.
using one of the hard-wired status indications from the switch (open or closed).

NT00378–EN–10 187
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Wired switch inputs

SCxxx 9-way connector (DI3, DI4, DI5, DI6, and DI7 can be configured)

Switch states 9–pin plug-in-screw connector

Switch states
1 DI1–Switch open

2 DI2–Switch closed
3 DI3–Earthing switch open

4 DI4–Earthing switch closed

5 DI5–Switch interlock
6 DI6–MV voltage presence

7 DI7–SCxxx local/remote input

8 DI8–Unassigned digital input

9 DI9–Common (0V)
Control by –V

Control by +V

NOTICE
HAZARD OF MISWIRING
The digital inputs accept only wet contacts. Consequently, these inputs must not
receive voltage.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

The table below summarizes the various options for managing switch position
signals according to the switch wiring:

Input Wiring Parameter Hard-Wired Digital Input Pins Switch Status Signal

DI1 (Switch Open) DI2 (Switch Closed)

Open Active (1) Open

Inactive (0) Closed

Closed Active (1) Closed

Inactive (0) Open

Open and closed Active (1) Inactive (0) Open

Inactive (0) Active (1) Closed

Active (1) Active (1) Invalid

Inactive (0) Inactive (0) Intermediate

188 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Switch command outputs

SCxxx 3-way connector

Switch controls 3–pin plug-in-screw connector

Switch controls
1 DO1–Motor pack power supply
common
2 DO2–Closing control

3 DO3–Opening control

Control by –V

Control by +V

12Vdc < V < 127Vdc or

90Vac < V < 220Vac

The same type of single or double command management is possible for switch
control. The following table summarizes the different management modes
possible and the resulting switch action:

Output Wiring Parameter Hard-Wired Digital Output Pins Command sent to switch

DO2 (Closed command) DO3 (Open command)

Open Active (1) Open

Active (1) Close

Closed Active (1) Close

Active (1) Open

Open and closed Active (1) Inactive (0) Open

Inactive (0) Active (1) Close

(1): Each pulse of the output wiring activates the complementary command compared to the current state.

In order to proceed to the command, two relays (select + open or close) must be
activated at the same time. They are controlled by two different micro-controllers
to secure commands and avoid unexpected operations.

NT00378–EN–10 189
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Switch control parameter settings

Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Switch control page.

190 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Main Switch
Input wiring Open and • Open Choice of wiring used for the switch position inputs:
closed • Open means that the open status is wired to manage the 2 switch status
• Closed
signals (open and closed).
• Open and
closed • Closed means that the closed status is wired to manage the 2 switch
status signals (open and closed).
• Open and closed means that both states (open and closed) are wired
to manage the corresponding switch status signals.

Output wiring Open and • Open Choice of wiring used for the switch command outputs:
closed • Open means that only the open command is wired to control the 2
• Closed
switch positions.
• Open and
closed • Closed means that only the close command is wired to control the 2
switch positions.
• Open and closed means that both commands (open and close) are
wired to control the 2 switch positions.

Pulse mode Fixed width • Fixed width There are several options for managing the switch command signal:
• Status return. • Fixed width: This is a fixed period defined by the Pulse duration
• Latched. parameter to enable the switch command polarity. At the end of this set
period, command polarity stops.
• Status return: Variable period for enabling command polarity. This
depends on the time taken by the switch to change position. Command
polarity stops as soon as the change of position is detected.
• Latched: In this mode, the control relay remains energized until the
opposite command is detected. On power-up, the initial relay status will
be set by the Latched mode startup mode parameter. If the command
does not execute, the relay remains in its last position.
In this mode, simultaneous multi-channel commands are possible. Note
that the power supply of T300 has the power necessary only to control a
single motorization at a time.

Pulse duration 2,200 • 50–60,000 Definition of the time it takes to send the switch command polarity (in Fixed
(ms) width mode).
(increment = 50)

Latched mode No action • No action Choice of mode used for the initial state of the control relay on power-up. Only
startup mode • Open valid for Pulse mode = Latched.

• Closed

Ground Switch (Earth Switch) and Series Disconnector

In the same way as for switch position signals, the ground (earth) switch can also
be managed by a single or double status signal according to the wiring of the MV
switch inputs (open or closed).
In the case of use with series disconnector, then the ground switch and
disconnector are managed by single status signal only.
The table below summarizes the various options for managing ground (earth)
switch position signals according to the switch wiring:

Input Wiring Parameter Hard-Wired Digital Intput Pins Ground Switch Status Signal

DI3 (Ground Switch Open) DI4 (Ground Switch Closed)

None

Open Active (1) Open

Inactive (0) Closed

Closed Active (1) Closed

Inactive (0) Open

Open and closed Active (1) Inactive (0) Open

Inactive (0) Active (1) Closed

NT00378–EN–10 191
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Active (1) Active (1) Bad

Inactive (0) Inactive (0) Intermediate

DI3 (Disconnector DI4 (Ground Switch Ground Switch Status Disconnector Status
Open) Closed) Signal Signal

Active (1) Inactive (0) Open Open

Earth Switch and
Series Disconnector Inactive (0) Inactive (0) Open Closed

Active (1) Active (1) Closed Open

Inactive (0) Active (1) Bad Bad

Ground (earth) switch parameter setting:

Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Switch control page, Earth switch tab.

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Ground (Earth) Switch

Input wiring Close- • None Choice of wiring used for the ground switch inputs:
d • Open • None means that the interlock function does not take account of the
ground switch.
• Closed
• Open means that the open status is wired to manage the 2 ground
• Open and closed switch signals (open and closed).
• Earth switch and series • Closed means that the closed status is wired to manage the 2 ground
disconnector switch signals (open and closed).
• Open and closed means that both states (open and closed) are wired
to manage the corresponding ground switch signals
• Earth switch and series disconnector means that the DI3 is wired to
manage the disconnector state (open and closed) and DI4 is wired to
manage the earth switch state (open and closed).

Managing Switch Commands

Switch commands can be managed according to several modes on the T300. The
mode used generally allows adaptation to the different types of switch used, which
each have their own specific mode of operation. This applies mainly to sequencing
and the command polarity enabling period.
The diagrams opposite and below show the operating principle for executing an
open command in each mode. The principle is the same for a close command.
Explanations for each mode are also provided in the table above.

192 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Principle of a command in Fixed width mode:

Command in progress
Open command

Active

Inactive
Pulse duration
End of command
Switch position Switch in open position

Closed

Open

Maximum operation time

Principle of a command in Status return mode:

Command in progress
Open command

Active

Inactive

End of command
Switch position Switch in open position

Closed

Open

Maximum operation time

Principle of a command in Latched mode:

Close command

Active

Inactive

Command in progress
Open command

Active

Inactive

End of command
Switch position Switch in open position

Closed

Open

Maximum operation time

Command Filter Time Delays

The inputs for reading the switch position are scanned continuously during and
after the command operation time, with a consistency check.
Once the control relay has de-energized, the command is considered to be
complete by the T300 when the switch signals a position that corresponds to the
request. The command is considered to be in ERROR mode if the position is not
consistent with the command issued or if the position is unknown after the filter
time delay.

NT00378–EN–10 193
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Command filter time delay parameter settings:

Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Switch control page, Main switch tab, and set
up by the following parameters:
• Maximum operation time (ms)
• Intermediate state filter time (ms)

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Main Switch
Maximum 15,000 1,000–65,000 Maximum wait time for the switch to change position following a command before
operation time (increment = 100) an ERROR is declared for this command. In Pulse mode=Status return, this also
(ms) corresponds to the maximum time it takes to send the command polarity if the
change of position is not detected within this time period.

Intermediate state 10,000 0–30,000 Time delay for filtering the switch status before an intermediate or unknown state is
filter time (ms) (increment = 100) declared. This delay is used to filter transient states or unintended changes. When
a command is executed, it is preferable to check for a filtered and stable state
before declaring an ERROR on the switch position.

Principle of switch position filtering after an open command (in Fixed width
mode):

Close command

Active

Inactive

Command in progress Command in progress

Open command

Active

Inactive

End of command End of command

Switch position Command not Switch position - open
successful
Closed

Open

Maximum operation time T < Maximum operation time

Command not successful Command successful

194 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Hit and Run Function

The Hit and Run function is only available in local mode. It is available for all
different command modes (fixed width, status return and latched).
The Hit and Run function adds an extra level of risk minimization on manual
commands on MV switches. A time delay is applied after the user has pressed the
buttons on the front panel of the SCxxx module to issue the command to the MV
switch before the command is executed. This leaves sufficient time to exit the
substation before the command is executed.
Hit & Run function parameter setting:
Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Switch control page, Main switch tab, and set
up by the Hit & Run delay time (seconds) parameter.

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Main Switch
Hit & Run delay time 0 0–60 Execution delay for the Hit & Run function. The delay corresponds to the time
(seconds) required to exit the substation before the command is executed.
Only available on the T300 in Local mode.

Available for all commands types (fixed width, status return and latched).

Switch Input Filters

In the same way as the filters that are applied to the digital inputs, some types of
filter can also be applied to the switch inputs (states).
Digital Input Filtering:

Digital Input Filtering

Debouncing Holding
Digital User data
input

Anti-chatter

NOTE: For the digital inputs (DI1 to DI4) that correspond to the switch position
signals, an additional 20 ms filter (not shown in the diagram), is applied to the
user data.

NT00378–EN–10 195
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Digital input filter parameter setting:

Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Switch control page, Filtering tab.

Parameter De- Configuration Description

fault range

Digital Inputs

Sample period 5 • 1 Sampling period on the digital inputs for taking a state into account
(ms) • 5
• 10
Debouncing 0 0–30 Filtering period for the bounce on a digital input. The value configured for the filter
sample count (increment = 1) corresponds to a number of Sample period periods. The digital input must remain in the
same state for a period greater than the defined debouncing period for its state to be
taken into account. A value of 0 inhibits the debouncing filter.

Hold time (ms) 0 0–2,000 Hold time for a digital input. When a change of state (debounce-filtered) is detected on a
(increment digital input, the input is locked in its new state until the Hold time has elapsed.
= 1 ms) At the end of the time period, the input returns to its actual value.
A value of 0 inhibits the hold filter.
Chatter 0 0–60,000 Sliding time period corresponding to a window of observation and counting of the
detection time (increment changes of state on a digital input. If during this period, the count becomes higher than
(ms) = 1 ms) the Chatter detection count value, the anti-chatter filter is activated, the state of the
input is maintained at its last state. An event is signaled with the value maintained at its
last state and with quality flags indicating “invalid”. The quality of the data is then
signaled as bad. The anti-chatter filter becomes inactive again if, during the same
period, no change of state is detected on the digital input.
A value of 0 inhibits the anti-chatter filter.
Chatter 16 0–255 Counts the number of changes of state on a digital input to define the anti-chatter filter
detection count (increment = 1) action. The changes of state counted are only those filtered by the debouncing filter.

196 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Front Panel Voltage Indication

Access via Settings > SC0x > Voltage absence/presence page.

A LED on the front panel of the SCxxx module indicates the presence or absence
of the MV network voltage.
The status is also reported to the Head Unit for display on the web pages and for
use by Automation functions.
The voltage presence indication can be configured with two different sources:
• Digital input DI6 connected to an external voltage presence relay
• Measurements from the voltage sensors.
When configured to use measured values, the threshold and delay settings are
displayed.
These settings are used to determine the value of two status variables for “voltage
absence for three phases” or “voltage presence for three phases” (see diagrams).
The variable “Voltage presence for HMI", that is displayed on the Head Unit web
pages, is a combination of “presence OR not absence”.
For steady-state conditions, this variable is true if at least one phase is present.
For transient conditions, the value depends on the operate delay times and hold
delay times.
Note that the voltage presence thresholds are common with those configured in
the Fault indication/Voltage presence page.

NT00378–EN–10 197
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Detection of MV voltage absence from the Detection of MV voltage presence from the
measures measures

MV network voltage Hysteresis MV network voltage Hysteresis

30% +
Hysteresis 70%
30% 70% -
Hysteresis

ToA
Voltage absence ThA Voltage presence
ToP ThP
Yes Yes

No
No

Front panel voltage indication parameter setting:

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Voltage absence (parameter available only for the case Voltage presence source = Measured)

Start threshold (%) 30 10-100 Definition of the measured MV network voltage threshold, as a percentage of
(increment = 1) the nominal voltage, below which the MV network voltage will be considered to
be absent.
NOTE: Configure the threshold taking into account hysteresis (6%).
Consult the glossary for the definition of hysteresis.

Operate delay time 50 0-300000 Period within which the voltage must be below the Start threshold level to
(ms) (increment = 1) consider the MV network voltage to be absent.

Hold delay time 40 40-300000 Period within which the voltage must return to above the Start threshold level
(ms) (increment = 1) to consider the MV network voltage to be not absent (to define the delay to be
configured, take into account hysteresis: 6%).

Voltage presence (parameter available only for the case Voltage presence source = Measured)

Start threshold, (%) 50 10-100 Definition of the measured MV network voltage threshold, as a percentage of
(increment = 1) the nominal voltage, above which the MV network voltage will be considered to
be present.
NOTE: Configure the threshold taking into account hysteresis (7%).
Consult the glossary for the definition of hysteresis.

Operate delay time 50 0-300000 Period within which the voltage must remain above the Start threshold to
(ms) (increment = 1) validate the overvotlage detection.

Hold delay time 40 40-300000 Period within which the voltage must return to below the Start threshold level
(ms) (increment = 1) to consider the MV network voltage to be not present (to define the delay to be
configured, take into account hysteresis: 7%).

Front panel indication

Voltage presence Digital • Measured Choice of source for indicating voltage presence/absence on the front panel of
source input the SCxxx module:
• Digital input
• Measured: voltage measurement taken by the voltage sensors.
• Digital input: digital input DI6 ("MV Presence") on the SCxxx 9-way
connector. This digital input is typically connected to an external voltage
relay installed in the MV cubicle (for example. VD23).

Number of absent All • Any • If the option is All, the three phase must be absent to declare an overall
phases to report • All voltage absence.
overall absence • If the option is Any, one single phase (any of them) voltage absence is
enough to have an overall voltage absence.

NOTE: To get the voltage absence and the voltage presence at the same
time, Voltage absence operate delay time and Voltage presence hold
delay time parameters must be set up with the same value.

198 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Active Overpower
Access via SC0x > Settings > Active Overpower page.
The indication Active Overpower is based on ANSI 32P standard, “Directionnal
active overpower”.
This is a two-way indication based on calculated active power, for the following
applications:
• active overpower (or maximum active power) to detect overloads and allow
load shedding
• reverse active power to detect:
◦ power injection from distributed production if the measure is done on
transformer incomer
◦ abnormal power flow if the measure is done on the feeder (MV line
switchgear).
The indication 32 P is triggered if the absolute value of the active power is greater
than the threshold PS if the operation mode is maximum active power (lower than
the threshold -PS) and if the ratio reactive power / active power (Q / P) is less than
32.

reverse power overpower

-Ps Ps
P

NT00378–EN–10 199
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Setting Active Overpower indication:

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Instance 1 enable No • Yes Instance activation

• No
Start threshold 5% 1% to 120 % Percentage of the apparent power that the active power must reach to trigger
the function.
Operate delay time 100 ms 100 ms to Period (in millisecond) within which the active power must be greater than the
300000 ms Start threshold level to consider the Overpower to be present.

Direction Forward Forward or The mode of operation of the function. Forward for maximum active power.
backward Backward for reverse active power.

Fault Current Detection Indication (FPI) on the SC150

Module
The SC150 is capable of detecting a fault current on any type of neutral system
with or without the presence of distributed power on the MV or LV network.
Fault current Detection and Protection modes available:
• Indication only
• FPI + Sectionalizer

200 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Fault Current Detector Logical Nodes on the SC150 Module

The T300 fault current detection algorithms are based on the ANSI standards as
well as on a certain number of logical nodes (LN, as described in standard
IEC 61850) each with their own specific role. These are given for information
purposes in the table below.

Logical Node (LN) Category Description

PhPTOC PTOC (ANSI 50/51) Phase overfault current detection indication

EfPTOC PTOC (ANSI 50N/51N) Ground (earth) fault current detection indication

SEfPTOC PTOC (ANSI 50N/51N) Sensitive Ground (earth) fault current detection indication

BcPTOV POTV (ANSI 47) Negative sequence overvoltage/broken conductor detection

DirPhPTOC PTOC (ANSI 67) Directional phase overfault current detection indication

DirEfPTOC PTOC (ANSI 67N) Directional ground (earth) fault current detection indication

AbsPTUC PTUC Current absence detection

PRSPTOC PTOC Current presence detection

PTUV PTUV Voltage absence detection

PrsPTOV PTOV Voltage presence detection

SVPI SVPI Indication of voltage presence based on inputs from the PTOV and PTUV logical nodes

SCPI SCPI Indication of current presence based on inputs from the PTOC and PTUC logical nodes

SFPI SFPI Fault current indication calculation based on confirmation of fault current detection (SVPI and/or
SCPI)

FltMMXU FltMMXU H1 current and voltage at time of fault for phases A, B, C and residual.

Interconnection between the logical nodes used on the SC150 module:

MV switch SC150
MMXU

PTOC
HMII

CT PTOC
CTTR SFPI HMII
PTUC
VT
SCPI Output for
PTOV external
VTTR
LED
PTUV
MV feeder
EXTSVPI
SVPI
ACSVPI
HU250

Fault Current Detection Indication (FPI) Principle

Counters are used for storing the type and number of fault currents on the MV
network to provide statistical and analytical data on the quality of the network.
Internal variables, which can be consulted on the Monitoring & Control > Data >
Analog page, allow you to save the latest current and voltage values before the
fault current occurs on the network (values stored up to 3 seconds before the fault
current appears).
NOTE: In case of type B connection (2 phase CTs + 1 core balance CT), the
only mean to detect a fault on phase B is to use a core balance current
transformer and activate the earth fault detection.
Monitoring phase B is done through I0 detection (2 or 3 instances available).
To activate the earth fault detection in the EfPTOC and DefPTOC functions,
set parameters in SC0x > Settings > Non-Directional fault detection Web
server and/or SC0x > Settings > Directional fault detection Web server
page.

NT00378–EN–10 201
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Fault current detection curve with three instances:

Time
: IDMT

150 ms B : DT
100 ms
C : DT
10 ms
Is (100 A) 1 kA 15 kA Current

Instance A: IDMT curve (overload)

Instance B: DT curve (short-circuit)
Instance C: DT curve (instantaneous short-circuit)

Different Fault Current Types Detected

The T300 can detect and indicate several types of fault current:
• Self-extinguishing fault currents:
Detected fault currents that appear and disappear on the MV network, without
tripping the upstream circuit breaker. This type of fault current is stored in the
event log but not indicated by the LEDs on the T300.
Example of self-extinguisher fault current (the MV network power is not cut:
the fault current is not validated. The delay T_70 is ignored).
PTOC Ts: PTOC operate delaytime
T_0: Fault validation time
Ts T_0 T_3: Fault confirmation time
T_70: Primary CB recloser maximum
ON
operation time

OFF

Indication Self-extinguisher fault

MV network
T_3 T_70
Pres.

Non
Pres.

202 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

• Transient fault currents

Detected and validated fault currents on the MV network that are self-cleared
in the first reclose cycle of the upstream circuit breaker or by a manual reset
action.
Example of transient fault current (the fault current is validated but network
power is restored at the end of the T_3 or T_70 time delay).
PTOC Ts: PTOC operate delay time
T_0: Fault validation time
Ts T_0 T_3: Fault confirmation time
T_70: Primary CB recloser maximum
ON
operation time

OFF
Indication Transient fault
MV network
T_3 T_70
Pres.

Non
Pres.

NOTE: Self-extinguishing and transient fault currents are combined in a

single transient fault current counter.
• Semi-permanent fault currents:
Detected and validated fault currents that trip the upstream protection on the
MV network, but that are self-cleared by the reclose cycles of the upstream
circuit breaker (cycle 2 or cycle 3).
Example of semi-permanent fault current, with reclose cycle (the validated
fault current disappears before the end of the T_70 delay and network power
is restored)
PTOC Ts: PTOC operate delay time
Ts T_0: Fault validation time
T_0 T_3: Fault confirmation time
T_70: Primary CB recloser
ON
maximum operation time

OFF
Indication Semi-permanent fault
MV network
T_3 T_70
Pres.

Non
Pres.

NT00378–EN–10 203
T300 SC150 Module Settings

• Permanent fault currents:

Detected and validated fault currents that trip the upstream protection
permanently on the MV network (with or without reclose cycles). This means
that the upstream circuit breaker remains open at the end of the reclose cycle
time delay (T_70).
Example of permanent fault current, with reclose cycle (the validated fault
current has not been eliminated by the end of the cycle and the T_70 delay
and network power is not restored)
PTOC Ts: PTOC operate delay time
T_0: Fault validation time
T_3: Fault confirmation time
Ts T_0 T_70: Primary CB recloser
maximum operation time
ON

OFF
Indication Permanent fault
MV network
T_3 T_70
Pres.

Non
Pres.

Example of a permanent fault current when there is no confirmation of

network non présence (FPI network presence and confirmation mode=None).
In this mode, the fault current is not validated by the non presence of the MV
network, but only by detection and disappearance of the fault current during
the time delay T_Valid.

PTOC Ts: PTOC operate delay time

T_0: Fault validation time
Ts T_0
ON
Indication
Permanent fault
OFF

Example of a permanent fault current, without reclose cycle (the validated

fault current has not been eliminated by the end of the T_70 delay and
network power is not restored)
PTOC Ts: PTOC operated delay time
T_0: Fault validation time
Ts T_0 T_3: Fault confirmation time
T_70: Primary CB recloser
ON
maximum operation time

OFF
Indication Permanent fault
MV network
T_3 T_70
Pres.

Non
Pres.

204 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

NOTE: When the fault current confirmed by the non presence of the MV
network is not enabled by configuration (FPI network presence and
confirmation mode =None), any detected fault current is only confirmed by
the disappearance of the fault current, if this occurs during the confirmation
time delay (T_Valid). In this mode, any confirmed fault current is considered to
be a permanent fault current.
See the parameter settings table in the Fault Current Indication section for a
detailed explanation of the time delays mentioned in these diagrams (T_0, T_3, T_
70).

Fault current Acknowledgment Principle

The diagram below illustrates the principle for taking account of a detected fault
current according to the current threshold (Threshold value) and configurable
time delay (Reset delay time and Operation delay time) settings.
The time counter mentioned in the diagram is incremented whenever the current
is greater than the fault current threshold and it remains at its most recent value if
the current falls back below the threshold. The counter is then reset if the time for
which the current remains below the detection threshold reaches the Reset delay
time setting.
The following scenarios are possible based on the different phases in the diagram:
• Scenario A
The measured current is not validated as a fault current since the duration for
which the current is present above the fault current threshold (Is) is less than
time Ts. The counter is reset at the end of time Rdt because the current
remains below the threshold Is for a time longer than this delay
• Scenario B
The current greater than threshold Is appears twice in succession above
threshold Is and increments the counter in stages. Time Ts is not reached,
consequently the fault current is not validated. The counter is reset at the end
of time Rdt because the current remains below the threshold Is for a time
longer than this delay.
NOTE: CT saturation phenomena may cause transient conditions for the
current to fall below the threshold. The counting system described in
scenario 2 allows this type of behavior to be filtered.
• Scenario C
The current remains above the threshold Is long enough for the counter to be
incremented until time Ts is reached. The current is validated as a fault
current. As soon as the current falls below the threshold Is, time Rdt is no
longer applicable once the fault current has been validated.
NOTE: For definite time (DT) detection, time Ts remains the same, regardless
of the value of the current Is. In contrast to this, in terms of the principle of
inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) detection, time Ts varies according to
the value of Is.

NT00378–EN–10 205
T300 SC150 Module Settings

I > Is A B C
Yes

Rdt Rdt Ts

No

Time counter

Ts

Fault detection
(PTOC)

Yes

No
Duration

Rdt: Reset delay time

Is: Threshold value (fault current)
Ts: Operation delay time (for taking account of fault current)

General Configuration Rule

The general rules for configuring the settings thresholds on the T300 are as
follows: The fault current detection settings used by the T300 must be configured
on the T300 to correspond to those configured on the upstream circuit breaker on
the MV network. The detection curves and the instances used must also be the
same as those on the protection device for fault current behavior to be identical.
In theory, the fault current detection thresholds and time delays to be configured
on the T300 must be slightly lower (e.g. by 20%) in relation to those of the
upstream circuit breaker for the T300 to be able to detect the presence of the fault
current before tripping the circuit breaker.
Additionally, for an ammetric fault current, the current configured on the T300 must
be greater than the downstream capacitive current.
Fault current detector configuration example:

Circuit Breaker End T300 End

I Max threshold = 350 A Phase fault current threshold = 300 A
I0 threshold = 45 A Ground fault threshold = 40 A
ACK I max. = 250 ms ACK = 225 ms
ACK I0 = 250 ms ACK = 225 ms

Fault Current Detection Curves on SC150 Module

Two main types of fault current detection are used on the T300:
• Definite time (DT) detection
• Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) detection
Different detection curves can be derived from these 2 types of fault current
detection.

206 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Definite Time (DT) Detection Curve

The basic principle behind this type of detection is summarized as follows:
• For a current less than or equal to the configurable fault current threshold Is
(Threshold value), there is no fault current detection.
• For a current greater than Is, fault current detection takes place, but only if the
current remains above this threshold for a time greater than or equal to the
configurable acknowledge time Ts (Operate delay time).

Time
Ts

Is Current

Definite time (DT) detection curve

Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) Detection Curve on the SC150

Module
The basic principle behind this type of detection is essentially the same except for
one difference in that the time taken to acknowledge the fault current depends on
the value of the fault current:
• For a current less than or equal to the configurable fault current threshold Is
(Threshold value), there is no fault current detection.
• For a current greater than Is, the fault current acknowledge time depends on
the value of the current. The higher the current, the shorter the acknowledge
time and vice versa. This type of curve allows the fault current detector to
react more swiftly to high currents.
• The acknowledge time is infinite for a current equal to Is.
The Is (Threshold value) parameter is set by configuration.
Time Ts (Operate delay time) is also a configurable parameter set by the user. It
corresponds to the acknowledge time for a current value of 10 Is.
Both these values are common to all selected curve types. The equation of the
curve is constructed on the basis of these 2 values. It corresponds to the vertical
asymptote of the curves.
Time

Normal inverse
Very inverse
Extremely inverse

Ts

Is 10 Is Current

Several types of IDMT curve, defined on the basis of this principle and the IEC and
IEEE standards, are used by the fault current detector.
3 IDMT curves are defined based on the IEC standard:
• IEC normal inverse time/A (SIT)
• IEC very inverse time/B (VIT)

NT00378–EN–10 207
T300 SC150 Module Settings

• IEC extremely inverse time/C (EIT)

3 IDMT curves are defined based on the IEEE standard:
• IEEE moderately inverse time (MI) o o
• IEEE very inverse time (VI)
• IEEE extremely inverse time (EI)
See the Appendix for more information about these IDMT curves.
Conversion of Time Multiplier settings to Operating Time
The fault current detection function settings must be set up to be consistent with
the settings for the circuit breaker protection at the feeder source.
Sometimes protection device settings are defined using a Time Multiplier setting
and not an Operating Delay setting.
To convert a Time Multiplier setting to Operating Time, use the following formula
Ts = Time Multiplier Setting TMS / β
Where β depends on the selected curve (see tables of equations for IEC and IEEE
here after).
• Equation for IEC-Type IDMT Curves
The equation is similar for each IEC IDMT curve except for the parameters:

A T
td ( I ) = P
´
æ I ö b
ç ÷ - 1
è IS ø
Where:
◦ td(I) = Fault current detection time according to the current value (in
seconds). Equivalent to Ts
◦ I = Measured current value
◦ A, p, ß = Parameters defined by the IEC standard (see table below)
◦ Is = Fault current detection threshold value (configurable Threshold
value)
◦ T = Time delay value 10 Is.

Curve Parameters A p ß

Normal inverse time/A 0.14 0.02 2.9709

Very inverse time/B 13.5 1 1.5

Extremely inverse time/C 80 2 0.8081

NOTE: The letters A, B, and C associated with the IEC curves define the
category of a curve. The power "p" defined in the equation is used to
classify a curve into 1 of 3 the categories according to the following
criteria:

Category p

A p ≤ 0.5

B 0.5 ≤ p ≤ 1.5

C p ≥ 1.5

208 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

• Equation for IEEE-Type IDMT Curves

The equation is similar for each IEEE IDMT curve except for the parameters:

A T
td ( I ) = ( P
+ B) ´
æ I ö b
ç ÷ -1
è IS ø
Where:
◦ td(I) = Fault current detection time according to the current value (in
seconds). Equivalent to Ts
◦ I = Measured current value
◦ A, B, p, ß = Parameters defined by the IEEE standard (see table below)
◦ Is = Fault current detection threshold value (configurable Threshold
value)
◦ T = Time delay value 10 Is.

Curve Parameters A B p ß

IEEE moderately inverse time 0.0515 0.114 0.02 1.20676

IEEE very inverse time 19.61 0.491 2 0.68908

EE extremely inverse time 28.2 0.1217 2 0.40548

Inrush Filter
A filter for detecting transformer inrush current can be enabled on the T300 to
prevent spurious fault currents being detected on the MV network.
A current peak may occur on power-up of the MV network due to energization of
the transformers and saturation of the phase CTs installed on the network. These
current peaks may activate the fault current detectors falsely by tripping the
configured thresholds.
To avoid this phenomenon, an algorithm is used to discriminate fault currents from
transformer inrush currents on network power-up.
The algorithm for detecting the transformer inrush phenomenon is based on an
analysis of the ratio between the second harmonic distortion and the fundamental
current on the 3 network phase currents. The inrush filter becomes active when a
high proportion of second harmonics are detected.
The inrush filter is only possible for ANSI 50/51, ANSI 50N/51N, and ANSI 67 type
detection, and for instances 1 and 2 only.
Example of inrush current with 2nd harmonic content on transformer
magnetization:

NT00378–EN–10 209
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Block Diagram

I1, I2, I3 Harmonic 1

Cross Harmonic 2 Inrush restraint for
I1, I2, I3 Harmonic 2 blocking phase over-current detection

&
Restriking Harmonic 2 Inrush restraint for
Inhibit residual over-current detection

Ir Harmonic 1
Earth fault
Samples Ir Inhibit

Cross Blocking
The quadratic harmonic 2 is used to do a cross blocking on inrush currents when a
feeder is energized.

If I12h1 + I 22h 1 + I 3h2 1 > 3 · (0.008) 2 In 2

then
I12h 2 + I 22h 2 + I 32h 2
TQ =
I12h1 + I 22h1 + I 32h1
else
TQ = 0
End
When TQ is higher than 0.03 (harmonic 2 ratio > 17.3%), the output Inrush
restraint for phase over-current is set.

Restriking Earth Fault Inhibit

On restriking earth fault, the harmonic 2 ratio is high only on one phase.
So to discriminate inrush currents from restriking earth fault we use the harmonic
ratio on each phase, to inhibit the cross blocking inrush restraint.

If Ixh21 > (0.008) 2 In 2 for x = 1 to 3

then
Ixh22
Tx =
Ixh21
else
Tx = 0
End
Restriking_Inhibit = (T1 > 0.04) AND (T2 < 0.01) AND (T3 < 0.01)

Restriking_Inhibit = Restriking_Inhibit OR [(T2 > 0.04) AND (T1 < 0.01) AND (T3 < 0.01)]

Restriking_Inhibit = Restriking_Inhibit OR [(T3 > 0.04) AND (T1 < 0.01) AND (T2 < 0.01)]

Earth Fault Inhibit

If an earth fault is present when the feeder is energized, we compare the form
factor of the residual current to discriminate inrush currents from earth fault.

210 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

2
If max (| xi |36
i =1 ) < 4 • mod ( I r )
2

then
Earth_fault_inhibit=1
else
Earth_fault_inhibit=0
End
The function

max (| xi |i36=1 )
calculates the maximum value of absolute samples of residual current on one
cycle.

Fault Event
The magnitudes of the values of the first harmonic (H1) currents FltMMXU1.A and
voltages FltMMXU1.phsV during the fault are saved and are reported to the Head
Unit for logging or reporting to SCADA.
The phase currents at time of fault are the magnitudes of the H1 values (or the
filtered crest if it is greater) used by the phase over-current PTOCs (ANSI 50/51 or
67 functions) in the cycle that changes the operate status (delayed bit).
The residual current at time of fault is the magnitude of the H1 values (or the
filtered crest if it is greater) used by the earth fault PTOCs (ANSI 50N/51N or 67N
functions) in the cycle that changes the operate status (delayed bit).
If current values (for phase) exceeds the measurement range for the phase
currents, then the over-range quality flag is set.
• Phase current maximum: 20 In (when CT = 1A)
• Phase current maximum: 7 In (when CT = 5A)
If current value of I0 (calculated or measured) exceeds the measurement range,
then the over-range quality flag is set.
• Residual current maximum: 7 In (when I0 is calculated)
• Residual current maximum: 7 In0 (when I0 is measured)
The phase voltages at time of fault are the magnitudes of the H1 values of the
phase voltages during the cycle where the first PTOC operates.
The residual voltage at time of fault is the magnitude of the H1 value of the
residual voltage during the cycle where the first PTOC operates.
If voltage values exceed the measurement range, then the over-range quality flag
is set.
• Phase voltage maximum: 4 Un
• Residual voltage maximum: 4 Un
If one channel is not available, because of the configuration of CT sensors, its
value is fixed to 0.
Voltage channels (line to neutral) are always saved. When the VT sensor is not
wired (single phase) or is wired to measure a line to line voltage, the calculated
line to neutral voltage is used.
An additional variable FltMMXU.ClcExp is needed to signal to the Head Unit that
the other data (voltages and currents harmonic 1) is ready. This variable is
published in the same execution cycle than the publication of the current and
voltage values.

NT00378–EN–10 211
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Fault Current Detection Indication Setting on the SC150 Module

The Tripping protection mode is not available on the SC150.

ANSI 50/51 Phase (PhPTOC) Overcurrent Description for SC150 Module

This fault current detection is based on the fundamental component of the rms
current on the 3 phases (types A and D CT connection configurations) and on the
2 phases (type B CT connection configuration). Detection is activated if 1, 2, or all
3 phases reach the operating threshold. Fault current detection is delayed. The
time delay can be definite time (DT) or inverse time (IDMT) according to the
curves indicated in the table below.
2 groups of settings are available. It is possible to change over from one group of
settings to the other during operation as follows:
• Manually in the Substation page in the Web server
• Remotely via the SCADA system
The table below describes the ANSI 50/51 characteristics.
Each instance has its own specific parameters for each group of settings. The 3
instances can operate simultaneously with different settings.

ANSI 50/51 Characteristics

Number of instances 3
Groups of settings 2

Logical node name PhPTOCx (x = instance number)

Indication only Indication of faulted phases A, B, C (*)

Phase fault detected: instance 1, 2, or 3
FPI + Sectionalizer
• No
• Indication only : the instance is used for fault detection, but not in the
sectionalizer. A fault detected by the instance will be indicated, but ignored by
the sectionalizer.
• FPI + sectionalizer: the instance is used both by the FPI and the sectionalizer

Parameter Setting (For Each Instance)

Instance 1 • No
Instance 2 • Indication only : the instance is used for fault detection, but not in the
Instance activation sectionalizer. A fault detected by the instance will be indicated, but ignored by
Instance 3 the sectionalizer.
• FPI + sectionalizer: the instance is used both by the FPI and the sectionalizer

IEC definite time (DT) Instance 1, 2, and 3

Inverse definite minimum

time (IDMT):
• IEC normal inverse
time/A
• IEC very inverse time/
Detection mode B
(curve type) • IEC extremely Instance 1 and 2 only
inverse/C
• IEEE moderately
inverse time
• IEEE very inverse
time
• IEEE extremely
inverse time
Overcurrent DT
threshold
IDMT
Acknowledge time DT See parameter settings table, page 214.

IDMT
Reset time DT

212 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

ANSI 50/51 Characteristics

Inrush filter Instance 1 and 2 only (**) Active or inactive

(*): Phase B fault indication is not available with type B CT connection.

(**): Instance 3 is dedicated to detecting high fault currents. There is no value in using the inrush filter in this case, since inrush currents can
only be detected for lower fault currents.

Example detection curve with several instances:

• Instance 1: Inactive:
• Instance 2: Active/IEC inverse time/A (IDMT)
• Instance 3: Active/IEC definite time (DT)
Time (second)
100

Tripping curve
10 instance 2

1
Tripping curve
instance 3
0.1

0.01
0 1 Is instance 2 2 3 Is instance 3 4 5
1.2 In 3.5 In I/In

ANSI 50N/51N Earth Fault (EfPTOC) and Sensitive Earth Fault (SEfPTOC)
Description for SC150 Module
Ground fault detection is based on residual current values measured by a core
balance CT (type B, C or D connection configuration) or calculated from the
currents of all 3 phases (types A and D connection configuration).
Type D connection configuration allows 2 ways of detecting ground fault currents:
• By measuring the current from the 3 phase CTs
• By measuring the current from 1 core balance CT (for greater accuracy)
NOTE: It is still possible to define by configuration a ground fault
measurement obtained by adding the 3 phase CTs together, even if a core
balance CT is available, knowing that this does not really make sense, as this
configuration does not provide the most accurate results.
Detection is activated if the residual current reaches the threshold defined by
configuration.
This is delayed. The time delay can be definite time (DT) or inverse time
(IDMT) according to the curves indicated in the table below.

ANSI 50N/51N Characteristics

Number of instances 3 available instances for EfPTOC (capable of operating simultaneously with different
settings)
Only one instance available for SEfPTOC

Groups of settings 2

Logical node name • EfPTOC (x = instance number)

• SEfPTOC
Fault current indication only Earth fault detected
Cross-country fault detected: instance 3 Generic phase fault indication
FPI + Sectionalizer Indication of faulted phases A, B, C (*) Phase fault detected: instance 1, 2, or 3
• No
• Indication only : the instance is used for fault detection, but not in the sectionalizer.
A fault detected by the instance will be indicated, but ignored by the sectionalizer.
• FPI + sectionalizer: the instance is used both by the FPI and the sectionalizer

Parameter Setting (For Each Instance)

NT00378–EN–10 213
T300 SC150 Module Settings

ANSI 50N/51N Characteristics

Instance 1
Activation of the instance for detecting phase-to-phase fault currents
• No
Instance activation • Indication only : the instance is used for fault detection, but not in the sectionalizer.
A fault detected by the instance will be indicated, but ignored by the sectionalizer.
Instance 2
• FPI + sectionalizer: the instance is used both by the FPI and the sectionalizer

Instance 3
Ires (sum of all 3 phases)
Residual current acquisition
I0 (directly from the core balance CT)

IEC definite time (DT)

Inverse definite
minimum time (IDMT):
• IEC normal
inverse time/A
• IEC very inverse
Detection mode time/B
Instance 1, 2, and 3
(curve type) • IEC extremely
inverse/C
• IEEE moderately
inverse time
• IEEE very
inverse time
• IEEE extremely
inverse time
Ground fault DT
threshold
IDMT
Acknowledge time DT See parameter settings table, page 214.

IDMT
Reset time DT
Inrush filter Instance 1 and 2 only Active or inactive
(*) and in 3 phase CTs
connection
configuration only

(*): Instance 3 is dedicated to detecting high fault currents. There is no value in using the inrush filter in this case, since inrush currents can
only be detected for lower fault currents.

ANSI 50/51 and ANSI 50N/51N Non-Directional Fault Current Detection

Indication Settings on SC150
• Configuring an ANSI 50/51 instance
Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Non-directional fault detection, PhPTOC
tab.
• Configuring an ANSI 50N/51N instance
Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Non-directional fault detection , EfPTOC
tab.
2 groups of settings are available. It is possible to change over from one group of
settings to the other during operation as follows:
• Manually in the Substation page in the Web server
• Remotely via the SCADA system
Each instance has its own specific parameters for each group of settings. The 3
instances can operate simultaneously with different settings.

214 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Function Activation – PhPTOC (ANSI 50/50): Phase Over-current

Instance 1 enabled No • None

• Indication only
• FPI + sectionalizer
Activation of the instance for detecting phase-to-phase fault currents:
Instance 2 enabled No • None • Indication only: the instance is used for fault detection, but not in
the sectionalizer. A fault detected by the instance will be
• Indication only indicated, but ignored by the sectionalizer.
• FPI + sectionalizer • FPI + sectionalizer: the instance is used both by the FPI and the
sectionalizer
Instance 3 enabled Yes • None
• Indication only
• FPI + sectionalizer
Function Activation – EfPTOC (ANSI 50N/51N): Earth Fault

Instance 1 enabled No • None

• Indication only
• FPI + sectionalizer
Activation of the instance for detecting phase-to-phase fault currents:
Instance 2 enabled No • None • Indication only: the instance is used for fault detection, but not in
the sectionalizer. A fault detected by the instance will be
• Indication only indicated, but ignored by the sectionalizer.
• FPI + sectionalizer • FPI + sectionalizer: the instance is used both by the FPI and the
sectionalizer
Instance 3 enabled Yes • None
• Indication only
• FPI + sectionalizer
Function Activation – SEfPTOC: Sensitive Earth Fault
Instance 1 enabled No • None Activation of the instance for detecting phase-to-phase fault currents:
• Indication only • Indication only: the instance is used for fault detection, but not in
the sectionalizer. A fault detected by the instance will be
• FPI + sectionalizer indicated, but ignored by the sectionalizer.
• FPI + sectionalizer: the instance is used both by the FPI and the
sectionalizer

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Setting Group 1 or 2 – PhPTOC Instance 1, 2, or 3

Operating curve IEC • IEC definite time Choice of the type of standardized IEC or IEEE curve to apply to the
type definite • IEC normal inverse selected instance for detecting (Indication only) phase-to-phase fault
time currents for settings group 1 or 2.
• IEC very inverse
NOTE: Instance 3 only uses the IEC definite time curve.
• IEC extremely invers
• IEEE extremely inverse
• IEEE very inverse
• IEEE moderately inverse

Threshold value (A) 100 • DT Minimum threshold for detecting phase-to-phase fault currents. The
• IDMT current must be detected above this threshold for a longer time than
the Operate delay time to validate the presence of a fault.

DT
• 0.02-10 In (1 A minimum) for CT = 1 A (*)
• 0.02-4 In (1 A minimum) for CT = 5 A (*)

IDMT
0.02-1 In (1 A minimum) (**) (increment = 1)

Operate delay time 100 • Instance 1 and 2 Minimum time for which the detected current must be greater than the
(ms) ◦ DT: 50-300,000 phase-to-phase Threshold value to validate the fault current.

◦ IDMT: 100-12,500
• Instance 3
◦ DT: 0-300,000
(increment = 1)

NT00378–EN–10 215
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Reset delay time 0 0-3 00,000 (increment = 1) Minimum time for which the current must pass and remain below the
(ms) fault current detection threshold to reset the Operate delay time. For
the period when the current is below the threshold, the Operate
delay time maintains its value, as long as there is no reset. This time
is incremented again if the current exceeds the threshold. This reset
time is inactive once the fault current has been validated.
Inrush filter enabled No • Instance 1 and 2: Activation of the algorithm for detecting transformer inrush.
◦ No
◦ Yes

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Setting Group 1 or 2 – EfPTOC Instance 1, 2, or 3 — SEfPTOC Instance 1

Io measured No • Instance 1 and 2: Activation of the I0 current measurement by core balance CT for
◦ No ground fault detection. If this option is not enabled, the residual
current is calculated by adding together the currents from the 3 phase
◦ Yes CTs.
NOTE: This parameter is only configurable for a type D
connection configuration with core balance CT.

Operating curve IEC • IEC definite time Choice of the type of standardized IEC or IEEE curve to apply to the
type definite • IEC normal inverse selected instance for detecting zero sequence fault currents for
time settings group 1 or 2.
• IEC very inverse Note that instance 3 only uses the IEC definite time algorithm.
• IEC extremely invers
• IEEE extremely inverse
• IEEE very inverse
• IEEE moderately inverse

Threshold value (A) 100 • DT: 0.008 In-1.6 In (0.4 A Minimum threshold for detecting zero sequence fault currents. The
minimum) (**) current must be detected above this threshold for a longer time than
• IDMT: 0.008 In-In (0.4 A the Operate delay time to validate the presence of a fault current.
minimum) (**)
(increment = 1)

Operate delay time 100 • Instance 1 and 2: Minimum time for which the detected current must be greater than the
(ms) ◦ DT: 50-300,000 zero sequence Threshold value to validate the fault current.

◦ IDMT: 100-12,500
• Instance 3:
◦ IDMT: 100-12,500

Reset delay time 0 0-3 00,000 (increment = 1) Minimum time for which the current must pass and remain below the
(ms) fault current detection threshold to reset the Operate delay time. For
the period when the current is below the threshold, the Operate
delay time maintains its value, as long as there is no reset. This time
is incremented again if the current exceeds the threshold. This reset
time is inactive once the fault current has been validated.
Inrush filter enabled No • Instance 1 and 2: Activation of the algorithm for detecting transformer inrush.
◦ No
◦ Yes
Reset delay time 0 0-3 00,000 (increment = 1) Minimum time for which the current must pass and remain below the
(ms) fault current detection threshold to reset the Operate delay time. For
the period when the current is below the threshold, the Operate
delay time maintains its value, as long as there is no reset. This time
is incremented again if the current exceeds the threshold. This reset
time is inactive once the fault current has been validated.

(*): Setting value of Phase CT secondary rated current in SC0x > Settings > Sensors > Current Transformer parameter.
(**): In corresponds to the nominal current at the CT primary (by default In = 500 A).

ANSI 67 Directional Phase Overcurrent Description for SC150 Module or

SC160 Module (if Tripping mode is disabled on the SC160 module)
In a looped network where a fault current is supplied with power at both ends, but
also in a network with several power sources, a method of detection that is
sensitive to the direction of the fault current flow is required to be able to locate

216 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

and indicate the fault current direction selectively: this is the role of directional
phase overcurrent detectors.
Fault current detection operates if the phase overcurrent function is enabled for at
least 2 of the 3 phases. The fault current direction (network or busbar) will also be
determined and associated with this detection. The detector indicates the phases
in which the fault current has occurred and the direction of the fault current.
Direction convention for a directional fault current:

Busbar direction Network direction

• Busbar direction: from the busbar to the network (=Backward)
• Network direction: from the network to the busbar (=Forward)
To enable detection, the residual current must reach the threshold defined by
configuration. Detection is delayed. The time delay can be definite time (DT) or
inverse time (IDMT) according to the curves indicated in the ANSI 67
characteristics table.
2 groups of settings are available. It is possible to change over from one group of
settings to the other during operation as follows:
• Manually in the Substation page in the Web server
• Remotely via the SCADA system
Direction of Fault Current
The direction of the fault current is determined by the comparison between the
phase current and the polarization voltage. The detector therefore requires both
current and voltage data. The direction is classed as either busbar or network
according to the direction convention defined opposite. Polarization voltage is the
phase-to-phase voltage in quadrature with the current for cos φ= 1 (phase-to-
phase voltage creating a 90° angle in relation to the current).
The table below indicates the polarization voltage used to determine the direction
as a function of the current on each phase (only phases 1 and 3 are used in the
case of type B CT connection):

Measured current I1 I2 I3
Polarization voltage U23 U31 U12

Example with 1 phase: current and polarization voltage (U32 in this case)

I1

V1

V3 90° V2
U32
The current vector plane on 1 phase is divided into 2 semi-planes separated by a
boundary line. These 2 semi-planes correspond to 2 zones: the network zone and
the busbar zone.

NT00378–EN–10 217
T300 SC150 Module Settings

The characteristic angle φ is the angle between the perpendicular to the boundary
line between these 2 zones and the polarization voltage. The value of this angle
(which is configurable) determines the position of this boundary line in the vector
plane.
The direction of the fault current is determined by the presence of current in the
zone in which this vector plane is located:
• Current in the busbar zone: the fault current is in the direction of the busbar
• Current in the network zone: the fault current is in the direction of the network
This rule of positioning of current in the vector plane depends on the value of the
angle α between the current and the polarization voltage.

Example of fault current on phase 1, in the Example of fault current on phase 1, in the
network zone, with characteristic angle φ = 30°: network zone, with characteristic angle φ = 45°:

I1
I1
α1
α1
θ = 45˚
θ = 30˚
U32
U32

Voltage Memory
In the event of a 3-phase fault current close to the busbar, the level of each
polarization voltage may not be sufficient (close to zero) to detect the fault current
correctly. The fault current detector therefore uses a voltage memory to detect the
fault current reliably.
To help ensure that the voltage memory is only used for a 3-phase fault current,
the detector verifies that at least 2 phase-to-phase voltages are close to zero.
NOTE: If a fault current occurs just after the MV network is energized, the
direction of the fault current cannot be indicated by the voltage memory. In this
case, where the voltage is zero just before the fault current, the voltage
memory is not reliable for determining the direction. The fault current will still
be detected and indicated by the detector, however.

ANSI 67 Characteristics
Number of instances 2 (capable of operating simultaneously with different settings)

Groups of settings 2

Logical node name DPhPTOCx (x = instance number)

Type of fault current detected

Fault current indication
Phase with fault current condition: instance 1, 2 with indication of
direction
FPI + Sectionalizer Generic phase fault indication Indication of faulted phases A, B, C
(*)

Phase fault detected: instance 1, 2, or 3

Parameter Setting (For Each Instance)

Instance 1 Active or inactive

Instance activation
Instance 2 Active or inactive
IEC definite time (DT) Instance 1, 2, and 3

Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT):

• IEC normal inverse time/A
Detection mode
(curve type) • IEC very inverse time/B
• IEC extremely inverse/C
• IEEE moderately inverse time
• IEEE very inverse time

218 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

ANSI 67 Characteristics
• IEEE extremely inverse time

Overcurrent DT
threshold
IDMT
Acknowledge time DT See parameter setting table, page 220

IDMT
Reset time DT
Inrush filter Active or inactive
Characteristic angle 30, 45, or 60° (default: 45°)

NT00378–EN–10 219
T300 SC150 Module Settings

ANSI 67 Directional Phase Fault Current Detection Indication Parameter

Setting on SC150 Module or the SC160 Module (if Tripping mode is
disabled on the SC160 module)
Access via SC0x > Settings > Directional fault detection page.

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Function Activation – DPhPTOC: Phase Over-current
Instance 1 or 2 No • No Activation of the instance for detecting phase-to-phase fault currents
• Indication only • Indication only: the instance is used for fault detection, but not in
• FPI + Sectionalizer the sectionalizer. A fault detected by the instance will be indicated,
but ignored by the sectionalizer.
• FPI + sectionalizer: the instance is used both by the FPI and the
sectionalizer

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Setting Group 1 or 2 – PhPTOC Instance 1 or 2

Operating curve type IEC • IEC definite time Choice of the type of standardized IEC or IEEE algorithm to apply to the
defi- • IEC normal inverse selected instance for detecting phase-to-phase fault currents for settings
nite group 1 or 2
time • IEC very inverse .
• IEC extremely invers
• IEEE extremely inverse
• IEEE very inverse
• IEEE moderately
inverse

Threshold value (A) 100 • DT Minimum threshold for detecting phase-to-phase fault currents. The
◦ 0.02-10 In (1 A current must be detected above this threshold for a longer time than the
minimum) for CT = Operate delay time to validate the presence of a fault.
1 A (*)
◦ 0.02-4 In (1 A
minimum) for CT =
5 A (*)
• IDMT:
0.02-1In (1 A minimum)
(**)
(increment = 1)

Operate delay time 100 • DT: 50-300,000 ms Minimum time for which the detected current must be greater than the
(ms) • IDMT: 100-12,500 ms phase-to-phase Threshold value to validate the fault current.

Reset delay time (ms) 0 0-300,000 (increment = 1) Minimum time for which the current must pass and remain below the
fault current detection threshold to reset the Operate delay time. For
the period when the current is below the threshold, the Operate delay
time maintains its value, as long as there is no reset. This time is
incremented again if the current exceeds the threshold. This reset time
is inactive once the fault current has been validated.
Do not define a reset time between 1 and 49 ms. When you choose a
reset time equal to 0, a reset time equal to 35 ms fixed is used internally
to limit the impact of the CT saturation.

Inrush filter enabled No • No Activation of the inrush current filter function.

• Yes

220 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Characteristic angle 45 • 30 ° Choice of characteristic angle value. The characteristic angle is the
(degrees) angle between the perpendicular to the boundary line and the
• 45 °
magnitude of polarization (phase-to-phase voltage in quadrature with
• 60 ° the current for Cos φ=1). The value of the characteristic angle
determines the position of the boundary line defining the separation
between the busbar zone and the network zone (see the description of
the ANSI 67 function).

(*): Setting value of Phase CT secondary rated current in SC0x > Settings > Sensors > Current Transformer parameter.
(**): In corresponds to the nominal current at the CT primary (by default In = 500 A).

ANSI 67N Directional Earth (DEfPTOC) Fault Detection Indication

Description for the SC150 Module or the SC160 Module (if Tripping mode is
disabled on the SC160 module)
This directional fault current detection combines a ground function based on
residual voltage with a fault current direction indication.
The residual current I0 measured on this detection can be determined in 2
different ways (configurable option: Io measured):
• By adding the values of the 3 phase CTs together (A or D type connection
configurations)
• By measuring the residual current directly using the core balance CT (B, C or
D type connection configurations)
Principle of projecting the residual current onto the residual voltage to determine
the direction of the fault current:

Reverse zone Direct zone

Residual current (I0)

Projection Residual voltage (V0)

NT00378–EN–10 221
T300 SC150 Module Settings

There are 3 steps to directional ground (earth) fault current detection:

1. The fault current is taken into account if the residual voltage exceeds the
threshold defined by configuration (Minimum residual voltage threshold),
and if it remains above this threshold for a longer time than the configurable
time period (Operate delay time).
NOTE: The time delay is definite time only (DT).
2. The direction of the fault current is determined during the transient phase of
the fault current, by examining the sign of the zero sequence current
projected onto the residual voltage.
Depending on the parameters used for this type of detection, it is possible to
only validate fault currents with a high current peak during this transient
phase by using specific thresholds on the residual current and voltage
measurements (see parameter settings table below).
3. The presence of the fault current detected in step 1 is then validated by the
absence of residual voltage.
Two groups of settings are available for this type of detection. It is possible to
change over from one group of settings to the other during operation as follows:
• Manually in the Substation page in the Web server
• Remotely via the SCADA system
Direction of Fault current
The direction of the fault current is determined by projecting the residual current
onto the residual voltage during the transient phase. This projection can be
detected in 2 distinct zones (see diagram above):
• In the direct zone, if the integral of the projection of I0 on V0 is positive
• In the reverse zone, if the integral of the projection of I0 on V0 is negative
The direction of the fault current can then be determined using the following
convention:
• Current in the direct zone: the fault current is in the direction of the busbar
• Current in the reverse zone: the fault current is in the direction of the network
Direction convention for a directional fault current:

Busbar direction Network direction

222 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

ANSI 67N Characteristics

Number of instances 2 (capable of operating simultaneously with different settings)

Groups of settings 2

Logical node name DEfPTOCx (x = instance number)

Direction of fault current Busbar / Network

Cold Load Pickup Enabled (Yes / No)
Only available on the SC160 module

Parameter Setting (For Each Instance)

Instance 1 Active or inactive

Instance activation
Instance 2 Active or inactive
Ires (sum of all 3 phases)
Residual current acquisition
I0 (directly from the core balance CT)

Detection mode (curve type) IEC definite time (DT) Instance 1 and 2

Minimum residual voltage threshold DT

Acknowledge time DT See parameter setting table, page 224.

Reset time DT
Direction of fault current Busbar / Network
Validation by residual current and voltage peaks Active or inactive

Residual voltage peak threshold

See parameter setting table, page 224.
Residual current peak threshold

NT00378–EN–10 223
T300 SC150 Module Settings

ANSI 67N Directional Earth (DEfPTOC) Fault Indication Parameter Setting

on the SC150 Module or the SC160 Module (if Tripping mode is disabled on
the SC160 module)
Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Directional fault detection page
Each instance has its own specific parameters for each group of settings. The 2
instances can operate simultaneously with different settings.

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Function Activation – DEfPTOC Indication: Earth Fault Current

Instance 1 or 2 No • No Activation of instance 1 or 2 for detecting zero sequence fault currents.
• Indication only
• FPI + Sectionalizer

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Setting Group 1 or 2 – DEfPTOC Indication Instance 1 or 2

Io measured No • No Activation of the I0 current measurement by core balance CT for

• Yes directional ground fault detection. If this option is not enabled, the
residual current is calculated by adding the currents from the 3
phase CTs together.
NOTE: This parameter is only configurable for a type D
connection configuration with core balance CT.

Operating curve type IEC definite time IEC definite time This type of detection only uses the IEC definite time algorithm.

Operate delay time 100 50-300,000 ms Minimum time for which the detected voltage must be greater
(ms) than the Minimum residual voltage threshold to validate the
(increment = 1) presence of a fault current.

Reset delay time (ms) 0 0-300000 ms Minimum time for which the voltage must pass and remain below
the fault current detection threshold to reset the Operate delay
(increment = 1) time. For the period when the voltage is below the threshold, the
Operate delay time maintains its value, as long as there is no
reset. This time is incremented again if the voltage exceeds the
threshold. This reset time is inactive once the fault current has
been validated.
Minimum residual 10% Instance 1 For SC150: Minimum value, as a percentage of the nominal voltage, above
voltage threshold (% 20% Instance 2 From 6% to 30% of which the residual voltage activates fault current detection. The
nominal line voltage) rated voltage (Un) residual voltage must be detected above this threshold
For SC160: (excluding during the transient phase) for a longer time than the
From 2% to 80% of Operate delay time to validate the presence of a zero sequence
rated voltage (Un) fault current.

Enable validation Yes • No Activation of the option to add an extra level of validation to fault
checks • Yes current acknowledgment. This filter validates the fault current
through the presence of minimum current and voltage peaks
during the transient phase of the fault current, according to the
values defined by the next 2 parameters below.

Minimum (blocking) 25% Instance 1 0.015 In-2.3 In (*) Minimum peak value, as a percentage of the nominal voltage,
operating peak 55% Instance 2 above which the residual voltage peak (during the transient
voltage (% nominal (increment = 1) phase of the fault current) enables the optional fault current
line voltage) detection validation function (if the Enable validation checks
option is selected).

Minimum (blocking) 15A Instance 1 For SC150: Minimum peak value of the residual current peak during the
operating peak 70A Instance 2 0.015 In-2.3 In (*) transient phase of the fault current used to enable the optional
current (A) fault current detection validation function (if the Enable
(increment = 1) validation checks option is selected).

For SC160:
• 0.03 In-2.3 In if
Phase CT
secondary rated
current =1A
• 0.03 In-5 In if
Phase CT
secondary rated
current = 5 A
• 2.8 A to 6250 A
Cold load pickup No • No Define if CLPU is enabled for DEfPTOC (ANSI 67N) fault
enabled • Yes detection.

224 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Only available on the

SC160 module
Cold load pickup 150% From 100 % to 999 % Define the value of the multiplying factor applied on Is threshold
multiplier for ANSI 67.
Only available on the
SC160 module
(*): In corresponds to the nominal current at the CT primary (by default In = 500 A).
NOTE: The grayed-out parameters are fixed and therefore not configurable.

NT00378–EN–10 225
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Fault Current Validation and Indication

Access via SC0x > Settings > Fault indication page.
The T300 offers several ways of indicating fault currents detected on the MV
network:
• Via the LEDs on the front panel of the SCxxx module: 2 "arrow" LEDs are lit
orange, red, or green depending on the indication phase or the type of
detection.
• Via an external LED.
• In the Substation Web server page: A red "flash" symbol is displayed for all
fault current types, accompanied by a red or green arrow to indicate the
direction of the fault current (for a directional fault current).
On the LEDs (front panel and external), fault currents (validated and confirmed)
can be indicated in different ways depending on the type of detection and the fault
current type:
• Ammetric detection: Flashing red for earth fault, Steady for cross-country or
phase-to-phase faults.
• Directional detection: Flashing red or green for earth faults, steady red or
green for other types of fault.
NOTE: On the LEDs on the front panel only, an orange indication phase
precedes the green or red indication. This phase corresponds to the fault
current confirmation wait time within which the fault current type is analyzed
(transient, or semi-permanent/permanent).

Fault Current Indication

The diagrams below illustrate the different indication phases for a potential fault
current. Note that these diagrams correspond to indication via LEDs on the front
panel, which is the most comprehensive method in terms of number of colors
represented, as it includes the orange indication phase that does not exist with the
other types of indication (via external LED or the Web server).
No indication of a non-validated (and therefore unconfirmed) transient fault current
on the front panel:

Network current
T_0: Fault validation time

ID
IN

T_0
Network voltage

Present

Non Pres.

Fault indication

Yes

No

226 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Indication of a validated but not confirmed transient fault current on the front
panel:
Network current Ts : Operated delay time
T_0: Fault validation time
ID T_3: Fault confirmation time

IN

Ts T_0
Network voltage

Present

T_3

Non Pres.

Fault indication

Blink Orange
Yes

No

Indication of a permanent or semi-permanent validated and confirmed fault current

on the front panel:
Network current
Ts: operate delay time
ID T_0: Fault validation time
T_3: Fault confirmation time
IN
T_70: Primary CB recloser
maximum operation time

Ts T_0
Network voltage

Present

T_3 T_70

Non Pres.

Fault indication

Blink Orange Green/Red

Yes

No

Indication of a permanent or semi-permanent validated and confirmed fault current

on the front panel, reset by a power return:
Network current Ts: Operate delay time
T_0: Fault validation time
ID T_3: Fault confirmation time
T_70: Primary CB recloser maximum operation time
IN T_Res 1: Time before resetting indication if network present

Ts T_0
Network voltage

Present

T_3 T_70

Non Pres.

T_Res 1
Fault indication

Blink Orange Green/Red

Yes

No

NT00378–EN–10 227
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Indication of a permanent validated and confirmed fault current on the front panel,
reset by the network non presence delay time:
Network current
Ts: operate delay time
T_0: Fault validation time
ID T_3: Fault confirmation time
T_70: Primary CB recloser maximum operation time
IN
T_Res 2: Time before resetting indication if network not present

Ts T_0
Network voltage

Present

T_3 T_70

Non Pres.

Fault indication

Blink Orange Green/Red

Yes

T_Res 2

No

The principle for these diagrams remains the same for indication via external LED,
except for the fact that there is no orange phase and the red (or green) indication
is therefore given at the start of the confirmation phase.
Instructions on how to configure external LED are given in the T300 Quick Start
Guide (NT00383). Refer to this document for more information.
In the Web page, the indication principle is the same as for the external LED.
See the parameter settings table for a detailed explanation of the time delays
mentioned in these diagrams (T_0, T_3, T_70, etc.).

Resetting a Fault Current

A fault current indication is reset as follows:
• Automatically when power is restored (if the corresponding option is enabled)
• Automatically at the end of the reset delay time, if the voltage remains absent
for the duration of this time delay
• Manually by pressing the button on the front panel of the HU250 module
(general reset for all channels where a fault current has been detected)
• Manually from the Web server, using the Reset button on the Substation
page
• Remotely from the SCADA system, via the communication protocol.

Fault Current Validation (and Indication)

A detected fault current is generally validated by the non-presence detection of the
MV network, if the T300 configured for this purpose.
The MV network absence/presence detection is also used by the T300 to indicate
the fault current passage, by various means (for example LEDs on the front panel,
or indications on the Monitoring > Substation page).
Absence/presence detection of the MV network can be done by monitoring current
or the voltage (parameter FPI network presence and confirmation mode). You can
also choose not to monitor current or voltage of the MV network for fault
confirmation. In this case, the fault is indicated if the threshold is exceeded,
without any further validation.

228 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Some automation functions might also use the MV presence/absence detection as

a start condition for a reclose cycle or a fault current isolation (for example ATS, if
present in the unit).
This table summarizes the signaling/indication possibilities proposed by the T300
for indicating the MV network absence/presence, depending whether current or
voltage is used for detection.

FPI IHM Web server Data pages

Network Absence/Presence
By current Yes No No Yes

By voltage Yes Yes Yes Yes

Detection of MV current absence/ Detection of MV voltage presence/

presence non-presence by the measures
ToA: Operate delay time – current ToP: Operate delay time – voltage
absence (by default: 50 ms) presence (by default: 65 ms)
ToP: Operate delay time – current ThP: Hold delay time – voltage
presence (by default: 50 ms) presence (fixed at 40 ms)

MV network current MV network voltage

Hysteresis

5A 70%
4A 70% +
Hysteresis

ToA
Current absence Voltage presence

Yes Yes

No No

ToP ToP ThP

Current presence Voltage non presence

Yes Yes

No No

Detection of Network Absence/Presence by the Current

The detection of MV network absence/presence by the observation of the current
is carried out only by the measurement of the MV currents from CTs. Configurable
thresholds based on these measurements are used to determine the level at
which the current is detected to be present or absent and for how long, and the
level at which these detections were canceled out and for how long.
The current is considered to be present if the 3 phases meet the presence criteria
defined by the configured thresholds and time delays. The current is considered to
be absent if at least 1 phase meets the absence criteria defined by the configured
thresholds and time delays. The current is considered to be non-present if at least
one of the phases no longer meets the presence criteria defined by the configured
thresholds and time delays. The current is considered to be non-absent if the 3
phases no longer meets the absence criteria defined by the configured thresholds
and time delays.
Network current absence detection for validation of a fault current uses the
following standardized ANSI standard: ANSI 37 (undercurrent detection).
NOTE: If current is chosen as the source for validating a fault current, a
detected fault current is validated by the non-presence of the MV current and
not by the absence of the MV current.

NT00378–EN–10 229
T300 SC150 Module Settings

ANSI 37 Characteristics
Number of instances 1 (presence/absence)

Groups of settings 1

Detection mode Definite time (DT)

Logical node name AbsPTUC x (x = instance number)

Hysteresis reset detection 0,2 % x In

Parameter Setting (For Each Instance)

Operation mode On all 3 phases

Detection threshold
See parameter table, page 231.
Time delays

Detection of Network Presence/Absence by the Voltage

Detection of MV network presence/absence by the observation of the voltage can
be carried out in several ways:
• By the information from the digital input DI6 of the SC150 module (MV
network presence via an external voltage presence relay, e.g. VD23)
• By the information from the digital input DI5 of the HU250 module (main
supply presence/absence information via the PS50 power supply)
• By the measurement resulting from the voltage sensors. Configurable
thresholds related to these measurements define whether the MV voltage is
considered to be present and for what duration this detection is considered to
be not present (see diagram attached). The voltage is considered as present
(or absent) if all the measured phases (1, 2 or 3 phases according to
configuration) satisfy the criteria of presence (or absence) defined by the
thresholds and time delays. The voltage is considered as not present (or not
absent) if at least one phase no longer checks the presence (or-absence)
criteria defined by the thresholds and time delays.
NOTE: If voltage is chosen as the source for validating a fault current, a fault
current detected is validated by the non-presence of the MV network voltage
and not by the absence of the MV network voltage. Note that these voltage
presence thresholds are for the most common with those configured in the
Voltage presence/absence page.

230 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Fault Current Validation and Indication Parameter Setting

Setting Fault Mode and Timeouts
Access via SC0x > Settings > Fault indication page, Fault mode and timeouts
tab.

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Fault current Mode and Timeouts tab
FPI network Cur- • None Choice of source to define presence of the MV network and to enable a fault
presence and rent • Voltage current detection confirmation (confirmation by absence of current and non-
confirmation mode presence of voltage). None disables fault current confirmation. In this case,
• Current detection of a fault current only is sufficient to validate and indicate it.

It is advisable to enable fault current detection confirmation by either

current or voltage to help ensure that only fault currents detected by the
upstream protection device are confirmed.

Voltage presence AC • Measured The voltage source can be acquired in several ways for the fault current
source power • Digital input indication:
supply
• AC power supply • Measured: Using the measurement from the voltage sensors
• Digital input: Using the information from the digital input DI6 of the
SC150 module (via external voltage relay)
• AC power supply: Using the information from the digital input DI5 of the
HU250 module (via the PS50 module). Parameter only available for the
options FPI network presence and confirmation mode = Voltage.

Fault validation 3,000 0-300,000 for SC150 Observation window within which the MV network (via observation of the
time: time to wait for current or voltage) must be non present to validate a fault current that has just
network absence 0-10,000 for SC160 been detected. This validation is used to filter self-extinguishing type faults
(ms) (T_0) and only validate those fault that have caused the upstream circuit breaker or
recloser to trip. Fault current indication starts the moment the fault current is
validated.
Automatically reset Yes • Yes If enabled, this option is used to clear the permanent fault current indication,
permanent fault • No once the MV network power has been restored, at the end of the Time before

NT00378–EN–10 231
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Fault current Mode and Timeouts tab
indications if resetting permanent fault indications if network present delay. On
network present networks with "non-sustained" fault currents, the fact that the upstream circuit
breaker or recloser has reclosed means that the fault current has
disappeared. It is therefore generally no longer necessary to indicate it.

Fault indication Net- • Network present • Network present: The permanent fault can be reset with an indication
reset mode work of “Network present”, once the MV network power has been restored.
• Network present
pres- AND switch • Network present AND switch closed: This condition can be completed
ent closed by a “switch closed” condition, to cover cases where automation system
• Network present (such as sectionalizer) has opened the switch. Therefore, even if the MV
And switch closed, network has been restored, the fault can be still present downstream
OR current and must be still indicated.
present • Network present And switch closed, OR current present: The third
case is to add a security, for the case the network present indication
would fail: a current present indication normally corresponds to network
present and switch closed

Time before 240 1-1440 This time delay corresponds to a maximum delay (timeout) for indicating a
resetting permanent (increment = 1) permanent fault current if the MV network is still non present. It is important to
fault indications if leave the indication active for a certain length of time to be able to locate the
network not present fault on the MV network. However, indication stops at the end of this timeout,
(mn) (T_Res 2) primarily to save battery power.

Time before 0 0-300 Filter time before clearing indication of a permanent fault current, when MV
resetting permanent (increment = 1) network presence is detected again. This time delay is used to help ensure
fault indications if that the MV network is in a stable state and that no other fault current has
network present (s) occurred, before being able to clear the fault current indication.
(T_Res 1)

Time before 1 0-300 This time delay corresponds to a maximum delay (timeout) for indicating a
resetting transient (increment = 1) transient fault current. Indication stops at the end of this timeout.
fault indications (s)

Enable cross- No • Yes This option is used to enable detection of "double" fault, i.e. 2 simultaneous
country fault • No phase-to-ground fault on 2 phases and at 2 different locations on the network.
detection
NOTE: Double fault are only available on instance 3 of a zero sequence
fault (in ammetric fault current detection).

Setting Recloser Parameters

Access via SC0x > Settings > Fault indication page, Recloser Parameters tab.

232 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Recloser Parameters
Primary CB recloser 0 0-300 (increment = 1) After a fault current has been detected on the MV network, this time delay
maximum operation corresponds to the maximum wait time for the reclose cycle of the upstream
time (ms) (T_70) protection device. This time delay is used to categorize the detected fault
current as a permanent or semi-permanent fault current depending on
whether it occurs during the delay period or not (see the "Fault current
Detection" section). Setting a value of "0" disables this time delay. In this case,
the fault current is categorized as a permanent fault current at the end of the
Fault confirmation time.
NOTE: This time delay must be set to a value other than "0" to be able to
use the Sectionalizer automation function.
Fault confirmation 3,000 0-10,000 Confirmation time corresponding to an observation window within which
time: delay before power must not be restored on the MV network after a fault current has been
re-checking for validated. The fault is indicated by the color orange on the LEDs on the front
network absence panel during this confirmation phase. This stops if the fault current is not
(ms) (T_3) confirmed during this confirmation window. Once the time delay expires,
confirmation is enabled and the fault remains indicated (although now either
red or green) until the reset time becomes active.

Selecting the Active Setting Group

Access via SC0x > Settings > Global fault settings page, Setting group tab.

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Active setting group

Active setting group 1 1 or 2 Choice of group of parameter settings to apply to fault detection. Each group
includes specific thresholds, time delays, and parameters (see the sections
relating to ammetric and directional fault detection).

NT00378–EN–10 233
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Setting Voltage Presence / Absence Parameters

Access via SC0x > Settings > Fault indication page, Voltage presence tab.

234 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Voltage presence

Start threshold (%) 70 10-100 (increment = 1) Definition of the measured MV network voltage threshold, as a percentage of
the nominal voltage, above which the MV network voltage is considered to be
present.
NOTE: Configure the threshold taking into account hysteresis (7 %).
Consult the glossary for the definition of hysteresis.
Parameter available only for the case Voltage presence source = Measured.

Operate delay time 65 0-300000 (increment = Period within which the voltage must be above the Start threshold level to
(ms) 1) consider the MV network voltage to be present. Parameter available only for
the case Voltage presence source = Measured.

Hold delay time 40 — Period within which the voltage must return to below the Start threshold level
(ms) to consider the MV network voltage to be not present (to define the delay to be
configured, take into account hysteresis: 7 %). Parameter available only for
the case Voltage presence source = Measured.
NOTE: The Hold Delay time delay used for the voltage presence of the
MV fault indication is fixed at 40 ms.
Voltage absence

Start threshold (%) 30 10-100 (increment = 1) Definition of the measured MV network voltage threshold, as a percentage of
the nominal voltage, below which the MV network voltage is considered to be
absent.
NOTE: Configure the threshold taking into account hysteresis (6 %).
Consult the glossary for the definition of hysteresis.
Parameter available only for the case Voltage presence source = Measured.

Operate delay time 50 0-300000 (increment = Period within which the voltage must be below the Start threshold level to
(ms) 1) consider the MV network voltage to be absent. Parameter available only for
the case Voltage presence source = Measured.

NOTE: The grayed-out parameters are fixed and cannot be modified.

Setting Current Absence / Presence Parameters

Access via SC0x > Settings > Fault indication page, Current absence/
presence tab.

NT00378–EN–10 235
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Current absence
Threshold value (A) 0.008 0.002 In-0.02 In (*) Definition of the measured current threshold below which the MV network
In (increment = 0.1) current is considered to be absent.

Operate delay time 50 0-300,000 Period within which the current must remain below the Threshold value to
(ms) (increment = 1) validate detection of the absence of the MV network current.

Current presence

Threshold value (A) 0.01 In 0.002 In-0.02 In (*) Definition of the measured current threshold below which the MV network
(increment = 0.1) current is considered to be present.

Operate delay time 50 0-300,000 Period within which the current must remain above the Threshold value to
(ms) (increment = 1) validate detection of the presence of the MV network current.
NOTE: It is the non-presence of the MV network current that allows to
validate and indicate a fault current.
(*): In corresponds to the nominal current at the CT primary (by default In = 500 A).

Advanced Settings
Access via SC0x > Settings > Fault indication page, Advanced settings tab.

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Advanced settings

Publish indication No • No This option is used to wait for the fault confirmation (network absence) to
only after indicate the fault. By default, the fault is indicated as soon as the detection
confirmation • Yes element is triggered.

Validation starts Rising • Rising This option is used to start the validation timer when the fault condition
after fault condition becomes untrue (falling edge of the detection element). By default, the
detected • Falling validation timer starts on the rising edge of the detection element.

Locating Fault Currents on the MV Network

The LEDs on the T300 are used to help locate the fault current on the MV network
according to the following rules:

236 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

• Ammetric detection
The fault current is only signaled by fault current detectors located on the
section of the MV network upstream of the fault current: i.e. the fault current
will be located between the last detector indicating the fault current and the
first detector not indicating the fault current. The fault current is indicated by a
red flashing LED regardless of type (zero sequence, double, or phase-to-
phase).
Example of colors indicating a fault current in ammetric detection

Det.1 Det. 2 Det.1 Det. 2 Det.1 Det. 2

• Directional detection
Fault current detection is directional. All the T300 RTUs located on the
section of MV network where the fault current has been signaled flash the
same color. The direction of the fault current is indicated by the color of the
LED. The following rules apply when the LED on the front panel of the
detector in the substation indicates the color green or red:
◦ Green: The fault current impacts the section of the network in the direction
of the busbar in the substation.
◦ Red: The fault current impacts the section of cable outside the substation.

Example of colors indicating a fault Second example of colors indicating

current in directional detection: a fault current in directional
detection:

Det.1 Det. 2 Det.1 Det. 2 Det.1 Det. 2 Det.1 Det. 2 Det.1 Det. 2 Det.1 Det. 2

NOTE: This theory is only valid if there is sufficient capacitive current in the
network for a downstream detector to indicate the fault current (via flashing
LED).
The section in which the fault current condition exists will therefore be identified in
the conventional manner:
• Either in the section between the last detector to indicate the fault current
(flashing) and the first detector that is not flashing
• Or by 2 consecutive detectors that are flashing the same color, indicating 2
opposite directions.

NT00378–EN–10 237
T300 SC150 Module Settings

MV Power Measurement Settings

Access via SC0x > Settings > Measurements page.

These power measurements are optional on the SCxxx. If this option is not
present in the equipment, the corresponding parameter settings page is not
displayed in the Web server. This is also true for the values of these optional
measurements displayed on the MV Measurement/PM – Power, and PM – Energy
pages. See the relevant section for more information on displaying these
measurements.
The SCxxx is used to take power measurements for the purposes of monitoring
the MV network. These power measurements comply with standard IEC 61557-
12.
The SCxxx takes these MV measurements using the same current and voltage
sensors as those used to detect fault currents.
The SCxxx stores the power measurements taken. These can be viewed locally
via the Web server or remotely via the SCADA system.
Parameters
MV Power measurements require certain options to be configured.

238 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Setting the RMS values Setting the Average values

Measurement parameter settings

The same parameters specify the Power Measurement for MV or LV network.

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
RMS
Positive power Yes • No Definition of the direction of the power flow on the channel. By default, a positive
flow is from line direction corresponds to a flow of power from the line to the CTs. This parameter
• Yes
to CT depends on the location of the channel (channel = feeder or incomer). The choice
assigns the sign for the power measurements calculated by the module (SCxxx or
LV150).

Power factor IEC • IEC Choice of sign convention for the power factor calculation:
sign convention • IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission
• IEEE
• IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

Zero dead-band 0.35 • 0.01–10 Filtering of low values on measured voltages. Values below this percentage will
for voltage be filtered and displayed at zero value to avoid inaccurate measurement.
measurements
(% of nominal)

Average

Calculation 10 • 1 Definition of the period for calculation interval of the averages on the
interval period • 5 measurements.
(m)
• 10
• 15
• 20
• 30
• 60
First day of Sun- • Monday Definition of the first day of the week for the calculation of averages and min/max
week day • Tuesday including a period based on the weeks.

• Wednesday
• Thursday
• Friday
• Saturday
• Sunday

NT00378–EN–10 239
T300 SC150 Module Settings

MV Power Quality Parameter Setting

Access via SC0x > Settings > Power Quality page.

Parameters are displayed in the Voltage variation events, Current unbalance

variations and Voltage unbalance variations tabs.
These power quality measurements are optional on the SC150. If this option is not
present in the equipment, the corresponding parameter setting page is not
displayed in the Web server. This is also true for the values of these optional
measurements displayed on the MV Measurement/Power – Quality page. See
the relevant section for more information on displaying these measurements.
Voltage measurement of power quality is performed with the 3-phase voltages.
Therefore, if power quality option is activated, parameter VT connection mode is 3
phase ABC.
In addition to power measurements, the T300 can also take measurements to
check the quality of the power supply on the MV network.
These measurements are completed according to the principles of IEC 61000-4-
30 class S (up to harmonic 40).
They are used in particular to monitor the number and duration of voltage
interruptions, sags (dips), or swells, as well as the current and voltage unbalance
and the harmonics.
The T300 takes these measurements using the same current and voltage sensors
as those used to detect fault currents.
The T300 stores the measurements taken. These can be viewed locally via the
Web server or remotely via the SCADA system.
Power quality measurements require certain options to be configured.

240 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Setting the voltage unbalance parameters Setting the current unbalance parameters

These are summarized in the table below:

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Voltage variation events tab

Voltage dip start (%) 90 5-100 Threshold, as a percentage of the nominal voltage, below which the detected
drop in voltage is considered to be a voltage sag (dip) by the power quality
measurement.
Voltage swell start 110 100–150 Threshold, as a percentage of the nominal voltage, above which the detected
(%) voltage rise is considered to be a voltage swell by the power quality
measurement.
Dip or swell short 1000 10-60,000 Duration below which the presence of a voltage sag (dip) or swell is considered
duration (ms) to be short duration.

Dip or swell long 60,000 10-60,000 Duration above which the presence of a voltage sag (dip) or swell is considered
duration (ms) to be long duration.
Similarly, the average duration corresponds to the time interval between the
short and long duration.

Voltage interruption 5 1-90 Threshold, as a percentage of the nominal voltage, below which the detected
start (%) drop in voltage is considered to be a voltage interruption by the power quality
measurement.
Interruption short 180 60-900 Duration below which the voltage interruption is considered to be short duration.
duration (s) Similarly, a long duration corresponds to an interruption lasting longer than the
time set for the short duration.
There is no notion of average duration for voltage interruptions.

Current unbalance variations tab

Start threshold (%) 5 1–100 Threshold, as a percentage of the nominal current, above which the current
variation is considered to be a current unbalance by the power quality
measurement, provided that this variation lasts longer than the configured
Operate delay time.

Operate delay time 1,000 200–60,000 Time delay above which the current variation is taken into account and
(ms) considered to be a current unbalance by the power quality measurement.

Voltage unbalance variationstab

Start threshold (%) 5 1–100 Threshold, as a percentage of the nominal voltage, above which the voltage
variation is considered to be a voltage unbalance by the power quality
measurement, provided that this variation lasts longer than the configured
Operate delay time.

Operate delay time 1,000 200-60,000 Time delay above which the voltage variation is taken into account and
(ms) considered to be a voltage unbalance by the power quality measurement.

NT00378–EN–10 241
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Disturbance Record Settings

Access via SC0x > Settings > Disturbance Record page.

Disturbance Records
Operation
The disturbance record function is used to record measured analog signals, digital
input signals and logical states.
The storage of records is activated by one or more events set in the Disturbance
records page in the Web server, for each SCxxx module.
Depending on the trigger position setting, the stored event can begin before the
event and continues afterwards.
stored record
time

triggering event

Records comprise the following information:

• Values sampled from the different signals
• Date
The disturbance records can log the following elements:
• Actual samples at a rate of 4,800 samples per second for:
◦ Ia, Ib, Ic, I0 (measured) according to CT connection mode setting for
SCxxx module (in SC0x/Settings/Sensors page)
◦ Va, Vb, Vc or Uab, Ubc, Uca according to VT board type and VT
connection mode setting for SCxxx module (in SC0x/Settings/Sensors
page)
• Any change of state of the main switch (digital inputs DI1 and DI2)
• Any change of state of digital input (digital inputs DI3 to DI8)
• Any change of active Instantaneous PTOC (ANSI 50/51, 50N/51N, 67/67N
and 47)
• Any change of active Instantaneous (ANSI 59, 59N)
• Any change of PQ event indications (dip, swell, and interruption)
• Any change of network presence as defined by fault confirmation
Files can be transferred locally using a PC which is connected on the HU250 front
panel and includes the T300 Web server access. The record files can be
downloaded from the T300 Web server (see the Disturbance Records Page, page
88).
Files can also be transferred by protocol. Refer to the protocol user manual and
the Easergy Builder manual for more information on file transfer by protocol.

Characteristics
Characteristics Values
Recording content • Set-up file: date, channel characteristics, sampling rate
• Sample file: recorded signals

Sampling frequency 4,800 samples per second

242 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Characteristics Values
Analog signals recorded (2) • Ia, Ib, Ic, I0 (measured) current channels
• Va, Vb, Vc or Uab, Ubc, Uca voltage channels

Logical states recorded (1) (3) Digital input signals and logical states

Number of recordings stored Up to 50 (recorded in FIFO (First In First Out) type shift storage: when the maximum number of
records is reached, the oldest record is erased when a new record is triggered.)

Total duration of a recording (1) 100 to 70,000 ms

Maximum recording capacity 140 s maximum with 70 s maximum per record

File format COMTRADE - IEC 60255-24 Ed. 1 - 2001

Comtrade revision 1999 or 2013
(1) To be set in the SC0x Disturbance Records Page, page 88 in the T300 Web server.

(2) According to type and connection of sensors.

(3) According to T300 system configuration.

NT00378–EN–10 243
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Disturbance Records Parameter Setting

Accessed via Settings > SC0x > Disturbance records page.

244 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Recording 1,500 100-70,000 Total duration of a recording

duration (ms)

Trigger 33.3 0-100 Sets the trigger point as a percentage of the recording
position (%) duration. For example, the default settings show that the
overall recording time is set to 1.5 s with the trigger point
being at 33.3 % of this, taking into consideration the
following recording times: 0.5 s before trigger and 1 s after
trigger.

Trigger on No • No Disturbance record triggered on any change on network

network • Any change presence
presence

Trigger on fault No • No Disturbance record triggered on instantaneous detection of

indication • Rise a protection event (ANSI 50/51, 50N/51N, 67, 67N, 47)

Trigger on No • No Disturbance record triggered on instantaneous detection of

voltage event a protection event (ANSI 59 or 59N)
• Rise
Trigger on No • No If power quality available, disturbance record triggered on
power quality the occurrence of a power quality event (voltage dip or
• Rise
event swell or interruption)

Trigger on No • No Digital channel selected to trigger the disturbance record on

digital input 1 • Rise either a rising (low to high) or a falling (high to low)
to Trigger on transition or any change
digital input 8 • Fall
• Any change

NT00378–EN–10 245
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Comtrade 2013 • 2013 Version of the comtrade.

revision • 1999
If 1999 is selected, the following parameters are displayed
further down:
• Channel order
• Phase identification
• Data scaling

Filename YYYYMMDD_ • YYYYMMDD_hhmmssuuuuuu Format of the comtrade file name:

hhmmssuuuuuu • NNNN_YYYYMMDD_ NNNN is the comtrade number
hhmmssuuuuuu
YYYYMMDD_hhmmssuuuuuu and YYYYMMDD_
• NNNN_YYYYMMDD_ hhmmss_xxx are the comtrade date with:
hhmmss_xxx
• YYYY = year
• MM = month
• DD = day
• hh = hour
• mm = minute
• ss = second
• uuuuuu = microsecond
• xxx = millisecond
Channel order Standard • Standard Only displayed if Comtrade revision = 1999.
• Specific If Standard is selected, the channel order is similar to
SC150.

If Specific is selected, the channel order is:

• Voltage channel (U instead of V and Vz for neutral)
• Current channel (Iz for neutral instead of I0)
• and only two digital channels:
◦ FW1 (Switch open)
◦ HW1 (Switch closed)

Phase None • None Only displayed if Comtrade revision = 1999.

identification
• Specific
The channel identification is the 3rd element in analog
channel information (ph) in the configuration file (*.cfg).

Analog channel information: An,ch_id,ph,ccbm,uu,a,b,

skew,min,max,primary,secondary,PS.

If None is selected, the channel phase identification is

empty.

If Specific is selected, the channel phase identification is A

or B or C or Z.
Data scaling Primary • Primary Only displayed if Comtrade revision = 1999.
• Secondary
The disturbance recording data scaling is the last element
in analog channel information (PS) in the configuration file
(*.cfg).

Analog channel information: An,ch_id,ph,ccbm,uu,a,b,

skew,min,max,primary,secondary,PS.

If Primary is selected, the converted data is in primary (PS

= P).

If Secondary is selected, the converted data is in

secondary (PS = S).

Any configuration change on this function or on sensors and network

characteristics stops the record in progress. It is saved but may not comply with
the expected duration. Previous records are kept as they were recorded. In case
of voltage absence during disturbance recording in progress, the record is lost.

246 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Disturbance Record Triggers

Depending on the T300 system configuration, a disturbance record can be
triggered on either one or several of the following conditions:
• Network presence and absence
• Combination of instantaneous bits of fault detection protections (ANSI 50/51,
50N/51N, 67,67N, 47)
• Combination of instantaneous bits of ANSI 59 and 59N voltage
• PQ event (dip, swell, interruption)
• Digital input and switch change of state
• Dedicated command
Disturbance record can be triggered on communication via remote control or a
dedicated command sent from the T300 Web server. Triggering on dedicated
command is always active.
There is no effect on a record if a new trigger happens while the record is already
on-going.
Use WaveWin software to analyse disturbance record file.

NT00378–EN–10 247
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Automation Settings
Access via Settings > SC0x > Sectionalizer page.

248 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Sectionalizer Automation
Sectionalizer automation is used to disconnect a section of feeder that has a
permanent fault. It is used in conjunction with an upstream circuit breaker or
recloser. This type of automation is applicable for feeders with sections of
overhead line.
The general principle is that the automation function counts the number of supply
interruptions. When the configured number of interruptions is reached, the
controller opens the MV load break switch during the recloser "dead time", that is,
whilst the voltage is absent. This isolates the downstream fault, allowing the
recloser to restore supply to the upstream sections.
A feeder may have several sectionalizer switches, each with a different
configuration, such that upstream devices are set to open at a higher number of
supply interruptions than the downstream devices.
A supply interruption is defined as a fault current followed by network absence.
The sectionalizer automation uses the same network absence state as the FPI
functions.
Upstream
protection
device Switch 1 Switch 2 Fault

NOTE: On the SC160 module, the sectionalizer is not available if the Tripping
mode is enabled. It is available when the Tripping mode is disabled.

Operation
In normal operating conditions, the MV network is energized and the switch is
closed.
The automation function sends an open command to the MV switch if:
• The module sectionalizer setting is enabled for the active setting group.
• The T300 automation status is ON.
• The switch is closed.
• The number of supply interruptions counted reaches the number configured.
• The MV network is absent.
• There is no fault current.
Automation enable/disable
Each SCxxx module has parameter settings to enable or disable sectionalizer
automation for the MV switch controlled by that module.
In addition, automation functions are enabled or disabled globally on the T300 (for
all SCxxx modules) either remotely from the SCADA system or locally:
• By pressing simultaneously the

(automation state button) and OK buttons on the front of the HU250 module.
• Via the Web server (on the Monitoring & control > Substation page).

NT00378–EN–10 249
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Automation and FPI settings

The sectionalizer automation works in conjunction with the fault passage
indication function. To use the sectionalizer automation, certain FPI parameters
must have compatible values:
• The FPI network presence and confirmation mode setting must be either
Voltage or Current.
• The Primary CB recloser maximum operation time must be at least
1,000 ms and greater than the time required to detect the required number of
supply interruptions.
• If it is required to ignore the first rapid reclose cycle, then the recloser Fault
confirmation time should be greater than the first rapid cycle time.

Example 1: Example 2:
Count after confirmation mode = No Count after confirmation mode = Yes
Open after 3 interruptions Rapid cycle ignored Open after 2 interruptions,
plus operation delay time

Maximum operation time Maximum operation time

Fault 1 confirmation time

Current Current Fault 2 confirmation time
Absense confirmation time
Absense confirmation time
Operation delay time
Open
Open Command
Command
Time
Time
Interruption: 1 2

Interruption:1 2 3

Network absence can be detected:

• By measurement sensors (current or voltage). If the voltage measuring
sensor is used, refer to the chapter Front panel voltage indication, page 363
to set the corresponding MV voltage absence settings.
• By digital input DI6.
• By the AC power supply (in this case, the T300 must be powered by a low
voltage source from the MV line on which the switch is installed).
For details, see the Fault Current validation and indication section.

Automation Lock Out

Certain conditions can block the automation function. When this occurs, the
“automation locked” LED lights up orange on the front panel of the SCxxx
(and the HU250). It is possible to reset the automation lock out as follows:

• By pressing the Reset (fault current indication reset) button on the front
of the HU250 module

• On the Substation page, by clicking the Reset button associated with

the automation function.
The automation lock out conditions are active only if the Enable LockOut option
is activated by configuration. These conditions are associated with any action that
makes it impossible to operate the MV switch, namely:
• If the T300 is in local mode and the Enable local mode to block automation
option is enabled by configuration.
• If the switch interlock digital input (DI5) is enabled and the External input
mode for open commands blocking option is enabled by configuration.
• If the switch position is unknown at the time of the command and the Block if
switch position is unknown or same as command option is enabled by
configuration

250 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

NOTE: The three blocking options above can be configured in the Switch
control page (see the Interlock Function section).

Sectionalizer automation parameter setting

Access via SC0x > Settings > Sectionalizer page.
The setting includes two groups of settings. These two groups define two sets of
preset parameters.
The settings group can easily be changed by a command to select group 1 or
group 2 from the preset thresholds, without needing to reconfigure the T300. This
is done in the Monitoring & Control > Substation page (see the corresponding
section) or remotely from the SCADA system.
Sectionalizer automation requires certain options to be configured. These are
summarized in the table below.

Parameter De- Configuration Description

fault range

Sectionalizer
Enabled No • No Activation of the sectionalizer automation function on the SCxxx.
• Yes NOTE: On the SC160 module, if the tripping protection is enabled, the
sectionalizer function is not available.
Supply interruptions 4 1-4 Number of confirmed faults to detect during the sectionalizer Maximum
operation time (ms) to trigger the sectionalizer automation action

Count supply Yes • No Counting supply interruptions condition:

interruptions after • Yes • When the setting value is No, supply interruptions are counted as soon as a
confirmation time (3000 fault has been validated by a supply interruption.
ms)
• When the setting value is Yes, the function waits for the confirmation time
before counting supply interruptions. Confirmation time is set in Fault
confirmation time: time network must be absent (ms) in the Settings >
SC0x > Fault indication > Recloser parameterspage.

Direction Any • Any Choice of the fault current direction taken into account to activate sectionalizer
• Forward automation

• Backward
Enable LockOut Yes • No This setting applies if the switch does not open when commanded.
• Yes • When the setting value is No then the automation function attempts to open
the switch on the next interruption.
• When the setting value is Yes then the automation function is locked out
and is not activated for new fault interruptions until it is reset by the user.
When lock out is active, the “automation locked”

LED is lit on the front of both the SCxxx and HU250 modules.
Absence confirmation 0 0-10,000 The time network must be absent before the sectionalizer automation takes the
time (ms) decision to send the switch open command.

Open command delay 0 0-30,000 Additional delay after confirmation of network absence before executing the
time (ms) switch open command

Maximum operation 0 0-30,000 Sectionalizer maximum operation time. If the Enabled setting value is Yes, this
time (ms) setting must be greater than 1,000 ms and less than or equal to the value of
Primary CB recloser maximum operation time (ms).

Primary CB recloser 0 0-300,000 Read only (copy of the value set in the Settings > SC0x > Fault indication >
maximum operation Recloser parameters page).
time (ms) After a fault current has been detected on the MV network, this time delay
corresponds to the total operation time for all the reclose cycles of the upstream
protection device.

NT00378–EN–10 251
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Local I/O on SCxxx module

Customizing LEDs on the SCxxx module
The color of 3 user LEDs on the front of the SCxxx/LV150 modules can be
customized.
LEDs 1 to 3 can be assigned to different variables/functions. The colors and
behaviour can be customized for each state.

Access via Settings > SCx > Local inputs and outputs page.

252 NT00378–EN–10
SC150 Module Settings T300

Variables/functions that can be associated with each LED (1, 2, 3)

Associated variables Comment Type Proposed Color / Behavior

None Default for LED 2 SPS • 0 Intermediate: Off

• 1 Off = Off
• 2 On = Off
Dummy switch

Simulated switch position Default for LED 1 (dummy circuit breaker) DPS • 0 Intermediate: Off
• 1 Off = Open: Green
• 2 On = Closed: Red
Physical inputs

Digital input 5 (Switch interlock input) SPS • 0 = Off

• 1 On = Orange
Digital input 6 (Voltage presence) SPS
• Invalid: Red-blink
Digital input 7 SPS

Digital input 8 SPS

Physical outputs

Open command output status SPS • 0 Off = Off

• 1 On = Orange
Close command output status SPS

Switch controller blocking conditions

External lock active Default for LED 3. SPS • 0 Off = Off

Logical OR of {MainXSWI_BlkOpn_stVal,
• 1 On = Orange
MainXSWI_BlkCls_stVal}
• Invalid: Red-blink
Switch open commands blocked Function of variables {Switch position, Digital input 5} SPS
and setting {“External input mode for Open
commands”}

Switch close commands blocked Function of variables {Switch position, Digital input 5} SPS
and setting {“External input mode for Close
commands”}

Sectionalizer state
Sectionalizer enabled for active setting group SPS • 0 Off = Off
• 1 On = Green
Sectionalizer automation started (in progress) SPS • 0 Off = Off
• 1 On = Orange
Automation operated (sectionalizer opened the switch) SPS

FPI Phases
Fault indication on phase A / B / SPS • 0 Off = Off
C
• 1 On = Red
FPI Faults
Phase fault SPS • 0 Off = Off
Earth fault SPS • 1 On = Red

Sensitive Earth fault SPS

NT00378–EN–10 253
T300 SC150 Module Settings

Setting LED colors

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

LEDs 1 to 3
On state color Red • Off Choice of color for LEDs 1 to 3 for the active state of the
• Red data.
Off state color Green • Green Choice of color for LEDs 1 to 3 for the inactive state of the
data.
• Orange
Intermediate state color Off • Red blink Choice of color for LEDs 1 to 3 for the intermediate state of
the data. The intermediate state can be, for instance, the
• Green blink transitional phase of a change of state. For DPS only.
• Orange blink
Bad state color Off Choice of color for LEDs 1 to 3 for a bad state of the data.
A bad state may be an unexpected state for the data. For
DPS only

Invalid state color Green blink Choice of color for LEDs 1 to 3 for an invalid state of the
data. An invalid state corresponds to a missing known
state for the data.

254 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

SC160 Module Settings

What’s in This Chapter
MV Current and Voltage Sensors.................................................................. 257
Switch Control............................................................................................. 266
Front Panel Voltage Indication...................................................................... 280
Active Overpower........................................................................................ 282
Fault Current Detection Indication (FPI) and Tripping Protection on the
SC160 Module ............................................................................................ 284
Fault Current Validation and Indication .......................................................... 323
MV Power Measurement Settings................................................................. 335
MV Power Quality Parameter Setting ............................................................ 337
Disturbance Record Settings........................................................................ 339
Automation Settings .................................................................................... 345
Local I/O on SCxxx module .......................................................................... 349
Settings by Protocol..................................................................................... 351

Other functionalities (common to the SC150, SC160 and LV150 modules):

Voltage Monitoring, page 372
Broken Phase Conductor Detection, page 379
Port Configuration, page 382
Functions of both SCxxx types (SC150 and SC160) are described in this manual.
NOTE: In this manual "SCxxx" name is used when the information is related to
both SC150 and SC160 modules. Otherwise, SC150 or SC160 module is
specified.
Settings menu for SC160 module

NT00378–EN–10 255
T300 SC160 Module Settings

All these functions are explained in detail in this manual, together with the
corresponding application parameter settings.
• Current and voltage measurements
LPVT, VT and VPIS-V3 sensors can be used with SC160 module for voltage
measurement.
Tripping protection is available with LPVT and VT sensors only.
The SC160 is compatible with all standard current sensors (according to IEC
61869-2).
There are 4 possible connection configurations for acquiring the current
measurement:
◦ Type A: 3 phase CTs
◦ Type B: 2 phase CTs + 1 core balance CT
◦ Type C: 1 core balance CT
◦ Type D: 3 phase CTs + 1 core balance CT
• Fault current detection indication and tripping protection
Fault current detection is compatible with all neutral systems with or without
distributed generation. Fault current detection is based on the following
international ANSI code standards:
◦ Phase overfault current (ANSI 50/51)
◦ Ground fault (ANSI 50N/51N)
◦ Directional phase overfault current (ANSI 67)
◦ Directional ground fault (ANSI 67N) for detection
◦ Directional ground fault (ANSI 67N) for tripping protection
Two groups of settings can be defined for each fault current type. All fault
current detection algorithms function according to the methods of detection:
◦ Instantaneous (SC160 only)
◦ Definite time (DT)
◦ Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) with a choice of standardized
inverse time curves
• MV network voltage monitoring
◦ Undervoltage detection (ANSI 27)
◦ Overvoltage detection (ANSI 59)
◦ Neutral overvoltage detection (ANSI 59N)
◦ Broken conductor detection (ANSI 47)
◦ Active Overpower (ANSI 32P)
• Sectionalizer automation
The sectionalizer (SEC) automation function is controlled by the SCxxx
module. This automation function is factory-installed but configurable on-site.
The Sectionalizer automation function is deactivated if the tripping protection
mode is enabled on the SC160 module.
• Power measurements and power quality
◦ Power measurements (IEC 61557-12)
◦ Power quality (according to the principles of IEC 61000-4-30 class S - up
to harmonic 40).
• Control and monitoring of MV switches
Control is compatible with all existing switch types and all types of command
(single or double). There is a wide range of control voltages: 12 VDC to 127
VDC, 90 VAC to 220 VAC.
• Disturbance record
Record measured analog signals, digital input signals and logical states.

256 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

• Port configuration
Limit access to a physical port on the SCxxx module.
• LEDs customization

MV Current and Voltage Sensors

Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Sensors page

MV Current Sensors
The SCxxx default configuration includes a current transformer with a ratio of
500:1.
The type of CT to be used is selected by the user.
Note that the CTs supplied by the T300 manufacturer also have a ratio of 500:1. It
is possible, however, to define a different primary/secondary ratio by configuration
if a CT with different characteristics is used.
Several CT connection configurations are possible on the T300:
• Type A: 3 phase CTs
• Type B: 2 phase CTs + 1 core balance CT
• Type C: 1 core balance CT
• Type D: 3 phase CTs + 1 core balance CT
For the SC160, the tripping protection function is available only with current
transformer 1A at secondary according to IEC 61869-2.

NT00378–EN–10 257
T300 SC160 Module Settings

NOTICE
HAZARD OF INCORRECT WIRING
• When fitting the CTs on the cables, it is essential to comply with the direction
of positioning: HAUT/TOP marking facing upward, wire exit downward (see
illustration beside).
• The shielding of each MV cable must be re-inserted inside the
corresponding CT before being connected to ground (see diagram beside).
• The blue wire on the CT secondary (S2) is connected internally to the blue
wire (blue wire including a round terminal at the end).
• The blue wire including the round terminal must be connected to the same
frame ground as the cubicle.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Not following wiring instructions can lead to equipment damage and incorrect
current measurements.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
• The current sensors used for measuring must be 1 A or 5 A (only for FPI)
secondary with security factor limiting the current to 100 A secondary -1 s
(according to standard IEC61869-2).
• Always use grounded external CTs for current inputs.
• The CTs should not remain disconnected, while being installed and power
on. If a disconnection is to be made, for any reason whatsoever, a short
circuit is required at the secondary part of the CTs. CTs connectors are IP2X.
• Cables of voltage rating greater than 1000 V must have a shield connected
to ground.
• The low-voltage insulation of the Easergy CTs means they can only be used
on insulated cables.
• Ensure that all electrical power on MV network is removed before working on
or installing CTs on the MV cable and making CT connections.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Connection type A (3 phase CTs) Connection type B (2 phase CTs + 1 core

balance)

Connection type C (1 core balance CT) Connection type D (3 phase CTs + 1 core
balance)

258 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Current sensor parameter settings

Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Sensors page

NT00378–EN–10 259
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Current Transformer
CT connection mode D • None Choice of CT connection configuration options:
• A • Type A: 3 phase CTs

• B • Type B: 2 phase CTs + 1 core balance CT

• C • Type C: 1 core balance CT

• D • Type D: 3 phase CTs + 1 core balance CT

Phase CT primary rated 500 50 – 1,250 Nominal value of the current at the phase CT primary
current (A) (increment = 1)

Phase CT secondary 1 • 1 Nominal value of the current at the phase CT secondary.

rated current (A) • 5 The tripping protection function is available only with current transformer
1A at secondary according to IEC 61869-2

Phase A (B, C) No • No Used to reverse the direction of the current flowing from phase A (B, or C).
inversion • Yes This parameter is used to compensate for an inversion of the direction of
connection of the CT on the MV cable via the software.
Core balance CT 500 50 – 1,250 Nominal value of the current at the core balance CT primary
primary rated current (increment = 1)
(A)

Core balance CT 1 • 1 Nominal value of the current at the core balance CT secondary
secondary rated current • 5
(A)

Core balance inversion No • Yes Used to reverse the direction of the residual current. This parameter is
• No used to compensate via the software an inversion of the direction of
connection of the CT on the MV cable or a reverse winding direction of core
balance CT compared to phase CTs.

MV Voltage Sensors
The SC160 offers several sensor options for measuring and monitoring medium
voltage. The accuracy of the voltage measurement depends primarily on the type
of sensor used. The SC160 needs the voltage measurement for the following
functions:
• Fault current detection and indication
• Fault current detection and tripping protection (SC160 only)
• MV network monitoring and automation
• MV voltage measurement
• MV power measurement
• MV power quality measurement
The following table presents the voltage sources that can be used for the
automation functions:

Parameter Current presence Digital input LV AC supply Measured (any MV voltage sensor)
only

Sectionalizer X X X X
ATS – X – X

260 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

The link between the adapter and the voltage input on the SCxxx module (RJ45
connector) is via "straight-through" Ethernet cable including RJ45 connectors.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
• Do not connect VT adapter directly to the MV sensors. Always use fuse and
disconnect switch (maximum voltage allowable on the VT adapter inputs:
600 VAC).
• Never short the secondary of a Voltage Transformer (VT).
• Do not connect items of equipment with different earth potentials with an
RJ45 cable.
• Do not use RJ45 cable longer than 10 meters (32.8 feet).
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

NT00378–EN–10 261
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Voltage sensors for SC160

Depending on the type of sensor used, the way in which the measurements are
processed is different:
• LPVT/VT: A direct sensor measurement is taken without calibration.
• VPIS-V3: Calibration is performed on manual demand, through the Web
server. Calibration is stored in the module. Calibration is to be performed with
the complete voltage measurement chain and with a known reference value
used as nominal voltage. For best accuracy, perform calibration in factory with
a controlled voltage source, once for all.
The different MV sensors used with the SC160 are summarized in the table below.
Each type of voltage sensor requires a specific adapter (available as an option) for
connection to the SC160 module:

LPVT adapter VT adapter

VPIS-V3 adapter
A. SCxxx output
B. VPIS input

A B

Voltage Description Adapter Required

sensor
SC160-LPVT version: 1,2 or 3 phases mounting

VT Standard voltage transformer according to IEC 61869-3 with 2KV/1 mn AC SC160- VT adapter (ref: EMS59572):
insulation. Voltage input (LL): 50 V to 250 VAC
NOTE: The SC160-VT adapter accepts only 1, 2 or 3-phase transformer- IP 30
primary type assemblies without neutral (phase-to-phase or phase-to-
ground).

LPVT Low power voltage transformer according to IEC 60044-7 LPVT adapter (ref: EMS59573):
IP 30
VPIS-V3 VO Official Schneider Electric voltage presence indicator with voltage output (IEC VPIS-V3 VO adapter (ref: EMS59577):
62271-206). The VPIS-V3 VO sensor is connected to the capacitive divider Voltage input (LL): 1 V to 30 VAC max.
installed in the MV cubicle. IP 30

262 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Voltage sensor parameter settings for SC160

Access via SC0x > Settings > Sensors page with a CT-LPVT VT board type.

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Voltage Transformer

VT board type Depends on • LPVT This choice is factory-set as it corresponds to the circuit
the model board specific to each version.
supplied

Parameter Settings for VT board type = LPVT

VT Type None • None

• VT
• LPVT
• VPIS-V3
VT connection mode with PQ 3 phases ABC 3 phases ABC Choice of the type of connection used for the voltage
sensor. The sensor can be wired on a single phase, or
VT connection mode without PQ 3 phases ABC • 3 phases ABC between 2 or 3 phases depending on the connection
configuration used. The type of voltage measurement
• Single phase A performed (with 1, 2 or 3 phases) also depends on the
• Single phase B type of connection and mounting of the voltage sensor
defined by this parameter.
• Single C
• Line to line AB (only
in VT type)
• Line to line BC (only
in VT type)
• Line to line CA (only
in VT type)

L-L nominal voltage (V) 20,000 3,000-36,000 Definition of the nominal voltage of the MV network
(increment = 1) (phase-to-phase voltage)

LPVT or VT Primary rated 20,000 3,000-36,000 Definition of the primary voltage of the measurement
voltage (V) (increment = 1) transformer. Must correspond to the characteristics of
the transformer used. Parameter only available for the
options VT type = VT or LPVT.

LPVT-Specific Parameter Settings

LPVT Secondary rated voltage 3.25000 1-10 (increment = 0.001) Definition of the secondary voltage of the measurement
(V) transformer. Must correspond to the characteristics of
the transformer used.
Phase A magnitude correction 1.00000 0.5-2 (increment = Used to correct the LPVT sensor phase A measurement
0.00001) to improve accuracy

Phase B magnitude correction 1.00000 0.5-2 (increment = Used to correct the LPVT sensor phase B measurement
0.00001) to improve accuracy

NT00378–EN–10 263
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Voltage Transformer

Phase C magnitude correction 1.00000 0.5-2 (increment = Used to correct the LPVT sensor phase C measurement
0.00001) to improve accuracy

Phase A angle correction 0.000 -180 to 180 (increment = Used to correct the induced phase shift on phase A
0.001) caused by the sensor used

Phase B angle correction 0.000 -180 to 180 (increment = Used to correct the induced phase shift on phase B
0.001) caused by the sensor used

Phase C angle correction 0.000 -180 to 180 (increment = Used to correct the induced phase shift on phase C
0.001) caused by the sensor used

VT-Specific Parameter Settings

VT secondary rated voltage (V) 250.000 50-250 (increment = Definition of the transformer secondary voltage. Must
0.001) correspond to the characteristics of the transformer
used.
VT Adapter magnitude 50.600 30-60 (increment = 0.001) Used to calibrate the phase A measurement taken by
correction phase A the VT adapter to improve accuracy. The corresponding
calibration value is indicated on the VT adapter.

VT Adapter magnitude 50.600 30-60 (increment = 0.001) Used to calibrate the phase B measurement taken by
correction phase B the VT adapter to improve accuracy. The corresponding
calibration value is indicated on the VT adapter.

VT Adapter magnitude 50.600 30-60 (increment = 0.001) Used to calibrate the phase C measurement taken by
correction phase C the VT adapter to improve accuracy. The corresponding
calibration value is indicated on the VT adapter.

VPIS-V3-Specific Parameter Settings

VT sensor type None • None Choice of the type of VPIS adapter installed in the MV
• EMS59577 cubicle (EMS59577).

Capacitive adapter magnitude 1.00000 0.2-8 (increment = 0.001) Used to correct the sensor phase A measurement to
correction phase A improve accuracy.

Capacitive adapter magnitude 1.00000 0.2-8 (increment = 0.001) Used to correct the sensor phase B measurement to
correction phase B improve accuracy.

Capacitive adapter magnitude 1.00000 0.2-8 (increment = 0.001) Used to correct the sensor phase C measurement to
correction phase C improve accuracy.

Phase A angle correction 0.000 -180 to 180 (increment = Used to correct the induced phase shift on phase A
0.001) caused by the sensor used.

Phase B angle correction 0.000 -180 to 180 (increment = Used to correct the induced phase shift on phase B
0.001) caused by the sensor used.

Phase C angle correction 0.000 -180 to 180 (increment = Used to correct the induced phase shift on phase C
0.001) caused by the sensor used.

Execute automatic calibration No • No Immediate activation of the calibration. This calibration

now • Yes is executed after validating this option, using the L-L
nominal voltage Un as the reference. The corrections
are stored permanently in the product. The calibration is
executed only with this command (no automatic
calibration at start).

264 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Network Characteristics
There are other parameters in addition to the sensor parameters.
• The SCxxx module can take current and voltage measurements at 50 Hz or
60 Hz to correspond with the existing network frequencies.
• The sequence of phases A, B, and C can be inverted.
Measured voltages and frequency parameter settings
Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Sensors page.

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Voltage Transformer

Nominal frequency 50 • 50 Choice of MV network frequency

(Hz) • 60
Phase rotation No • Yes Used to invert the phase sequence:
inverted • Yes = ACB (inverted)
• No
• No = ABC (normal sequence)
The ACB sequence must be used when the CT wiring or connection
configuration has been inverted in relation to the theoretical phase sequence or
for networks with an inverted phase sequence.
NOTE: This inversion affects current and voltage.

NT00378–EN–10 265
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Switch Control

WARNING
HAZARD OF INCORRECT EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• The SC module has various software interlocks to reduce the risk of
unintended switch operations. For these to work as intended, both the
module configuration AND the wiring between the module and the
equipment must be correct.
• Ensure that the main switch position indications are correctly wired.
• Ensure that the earth switch position indication(s) is/are correctly wired.
• Ensure that the disconnector position indication is correctly wired (if
applicable).
• Ensure that the SC module is correctly configured to match the wiring
arrangement for the earth switch and disconnector (if applicable).
• Ensure that the HMI is configured to show the correct arrangement of earth
switch and disconnector (if applicable). Refer to Setting Graphical
Representation of the Switch, page 51.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

266 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Switch control page.

The switch control settings are used to adapt to any type of switch. The
management of switch position control and command signals is essentially
specific to each switch type.
Commands can be issued from a variety of sources. Remote commands are
received by the SCADA system via the HU250. Local commands are received via
the buttons on the front panel of the SCxxx modules or via the Web server pages.
Commands can also be received via the automation functions present in the
HU250 module (ATS, or other) or the SCxxx module (SEC). Local commands on
the front panel of the module can be disabled by configuration to prevent
unintended operation.
The T300 systematically performs a consistency check of the switch positions
before executing a command.

NT00378–EN–10 267
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Interlock Function
The interlock function is managed by the T300 "Cilo" BIN controller. The interlock
function checks only the command execution conditions. It rejects a command if
the execution conditions are not fulfilled. The majority of these conditions are
defined by configuration via a specific parameter.
When the earth switch and disconnector wiring is selected, the earth switch
interlock with the main switch command is disabled. Then, when the earth switch
is closed, the main switch operations are not blocked.
On the SC160 module, the tripping protection cannot be blocked by the interlock
function.
The T300 power supply is only capable of managing one switch command at a
time. If several commands are issued simultaneously (commands made using the
buttons on the front panels of two SCxxx modules at the same time, or commands
via the SCxxx sectionalizer automation functions that have detected a potential
issue on their channel), the interlock function coordinates with the system
modules to help ensure that a command will only be executed if the previous
command is considered to be complete.
The diagram below summarizes the various command input options checked by
the interlock function as well as the possible blocking sources:

SCADA Remote
Command

Local HMI
Local
(buttons, LED, Web.
Command
etc.)
Interlock Command
(Cilo) outputs

SCxxx Automation
automation Command

Blocking

HU250 Automation
automation Command

Blocking

External interlock DI

Blocking

PS50
power supply
Blocking

SC160
tripping command

The table below summarizes the main command rejection conditions for the
interlock function:

Command status Result of the

Command
Command already being executed on the same SCxxx module Rejected

268 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Command status Result of the

Command
Command already being executed on another SCxxx module

Manual command in local or remote mode when the automation function is active and the corresponding blocking
function has been enabled by configuration

Open command when the switch is already open or its position is unknown and the corresponding blocking function
has been enabled by configuration

Close command when the switch is already closed or its position is unknown and the corresponding blocking function
has been enabled by configuration

Ground switch closed or in unknown position

Switch command when the external interlock digital input (DI5) is enabled and the corresponding blocking function has
been enabled by configuration

Switch command when the 24/48 V motor mechanism power supply is not available or there is a problem with the
battery (end of life or low charge)

Command blocked because protection trip lockout is active

Switch control parameter settings

Access via SC0x > Settings > Switch control page.

NT00378–EN–10 269
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Interlocking

Enable local commands Yes • No Enables local switch commands via the buttons on the front panel
• Yes of the SCxxx module

Enable automation to block local Yes • No Enables the blocking of local or remote switch commands when the
or remote commands automation function is enabled. In this case, the automation
• Yes
function also manages the other command options (see the "Local/
Remote Mode" section for more information).

Enable local mode to block Yes • No Enables the blocking of automation commands when local control
automation • Yes mode is enabled on the HU250

Block if switch position is Yes • Yes Enables the blocking of switch commands when the position of the
unknown or same as command • No switch is not known or inconsistent (e.g. in the same state as the
command issued)

External input mode for open None • None Enables the blocking of the switch open command by external
commands • Block if true digital input (DI5 on 9-way switch state connector)

• Block if false
External input mode for close None • None Enables the blocking of the switch close command by external
commands • Block if true digital input (DI5 on 9-way switch state connector)

• Block if false
External local/remote input No • Yes Enables forcing the local mode on the SCxxx by using the DI7
• No external input
The SCxxx responds to remote commands when both the
HU250 and the S0xxx are in remote mode. The SCxxx
responds to local commands when either the HU250 or the
SCxxx is in local mode.

Switch Positions and Commands

Managing Switch Positions
There are several ways of managing switch position signals. In principle on the
T300, the switch position is obtained via a double status signal (open, closed). It is
possible, however, to manage the switch position via a single status signal, i.e.
using one of the hard-wired status indications from the switch (open or closed).

Wired switch inputs

SCxxx 9-way connector (DI3, DI4, DI5, DI6, and DI7 can be configured)

270 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Switch or breaker states 9–pin plug-in-screw connector

Switch or breaker states

1 DI1–Switch or breaker open

0 2 DI2–Switch or breaker closed

1
C 3 DI3–Earthing switch open
2
ESO
3 4 DI4–Earthing switch closed
ESC
4 5 DI5–Switch interlock
INT
5
MV 6 DI6–MV voltage presence
6
FREE
7 7 DI7–SCxxx local/remote input
FREE
8 8 DI8–Unassigned digital input
0V 9
9 DI9–Common (0V)
COM
1
CC
2
OC
3
+ - Control by –V

- + Control by +V

NOTICE
HAZARD OF MISWIRING
The digital inputs accept only wet contacts. Consequently, these inputs must not
receive voltage.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

The table below summarizes the various options for managing switch position
signals according to the switch wiring:

Input Wiring Parameter Hard-Wired Digital Input Pins Switch Status Signal

DI1 (Switch or breaker Open) DI2 (Switch or breaker

Closed)

Open Active (1) Open

Inactive (0) Closed

Closed Active (1) Closed

Inactive (0) Open

Open and closed Active (1) Inactive (0) Open

Inactive (0) Active (1) Closed

Active (1) Active (1) Invalid

Inactive (0) Inactive (0) Intermediate

NT00378–EN–10 271
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Switch command outputs

SCxxx 3-way connector

Switch or breaker controls 3–pin plug-in-screw connector

Switch or breaker controls

1 DO1–Motor pack power supply
common
2 DO2–Closing control or breaker
close
3 DO3–Opening control or breaker
tripping

Control by –V

Control by +V

12Vdc < V < 127Vdc or

90Vac < V < 220Vac

The same type of single or double command management is possible for switch
control. The following table summarizes the different management modes
possible and the resulting switch action:

Output Wiring Parameter Hard-Wired Digital Output Pins Command sent to switch

DO2 (Closed command) DO3 (Open command)

Open Active (1) Open

Active (1) Close

Closed Active (1) Close

Active (1) Open

Open and closed Active (1) Inactive (0) Open

Inactive (0) Active (1) Close

(1): Each pulse of the output wiring activates the complementary command compared to the current state

In order to proceed to the command, two relays (select + open or close) must be
activated at the same time. They are controlled by two different micro-controllers
to secure commands and avoid unexpected operations.

272 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Switch control parameter settings

Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Switch control page

NT00378–EN–10 273
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Main Switch
Input wiring Open and • Open Choice of wiring used for the switch position inputs:
closed • Open means that the open status is wired to manage the 2 switch status
• Closed
signals (open and closed).
• Open and
closed • Closed means that the closed status is wired to manage the 2 switch
status signals (open and closed).
• Open and closed means that both states (open and closed) are wired
to manage the corresponding switch status signals.

Output wiring Open and • Open Choice of wiring used for the switch command outputs:
closed • Open means that only the open command is wired to control the 2
• Closed
switch positions.
• Open and
closed • Closed means that only the close command is wired to control the 2
switch positions.
• Open and closed means that both commands (open and close) are
wired to control the 2 switch positions.

Pulse mode Fixed width • Fixed width There are several options for managing the switch command signal:
• Status return. • Fixed width: This is a fixed period defined by the Pulse duration
Not available for parameter to enable the switch command polarity. At the end of this set
SC160 in period, command polarity stops.
Tripping
• Status return: Variable period for enabling command polarity. This
protection
depends on the time taken by the switch to change position. Command
mode.
polarity stops as soon as the change of position is detected.
• Latched. Not Not available for SC160 in Tripping protection mode.
available for
• Latched: In this mode, the control relay remains energized until the
SC160 in
opposite command is detected. On power-up, the initial relay status will
Tripping
be set by the Latched mode startup mode parameter. If the command
protection
does not execute, the relay remains in its last position.
mode.
Not available for SC160 in Tripping protection mode.In this mode,
simultaneous multi-channel commands are possible. Note that the
power supply of T300 has the power necessary only to control a single
motorization at a time.
Pulse duration 2,200 • 50–60,000 Definition of the time it takes to send the switch command polarity (in Fixed
(ms) width mode)
• From 200 in
Tripping
protection
mode, for a
SC160 module.

(increment = 50)

Latched mode No action • No action Choice of mode used for the initial state of the control relay on power-up. Only
startup mode • Open valid for Pulse mode = Latched.

• Closed

Ground Switch (Earth Switch) and Series Disconnector

In the same way as for switch position signals, the ground (earth) switch can also
be managed by a single or double status signal according to the wiring of the MV
switch inputs (open or closed).
In the case of use with series disconnector, then the ground switch and
disconnector are managed by single status signal only.
The table below summarizes the various options for managing ground (earth)
switch position signals according to the switch wiring:

Input Wiring Parameter Hard-Wired Digital Intput Pins Ground Switch Status Signal

DI3 (Ground Switch Open) DI4 (Ground Switch Closed)

None

Open Active (1) Open

Inactive (0) Closed

Closed Active (1) Closed

274 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Inactive (0) Open

Open and closed Active (1) Inactive (0) Open

Inactive (0) Active (1) Closed

Active (1) Active (1) Bad

Inactive (0) Inactive (0) Intermediate

DI3 (Disconnector DI4 (Ground Switch Ground Switch Status Disconnector Status
Open) Closed) Signal Signal

Active (1) Inactive (0) Open Open

Earth Switch and
Series Disconnector Inactive (0) Inactive (0) Open Closed

Active (1) Active (1) Closed Open

Inactive (0) Active (1) Bad Bad

Ground (earth) switch parameter setting:

Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Switch control page, Earth switch tab.

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Ground (Earth) Switch

Input wiring Close- • None Choice of wiring used for the ground switch inputs:
d • Open • None means that the interlock function does not take account of the
ground switch.
• Closed
• Open means that the open status is wired to manage the 2 ground
• Open and closed switch signals (open and closed).
• Earth switch and series • Closed means that the closed status is wired to manage the 2 ground
disconnector switch signals (open and closed).
• Open and closed means that both states (open and closed) are wired
to manage the corresponding ground switch signals
• Earth switch and series disconnector means that the DI3 is wired to
manage the disconnector state (open and closed) and DI4 is wired to
manage the earth switch state (open and closed).

Managing Switch Commands

Switch commands can be managed according to several modes on the T300. The
mode used generally allows adaptation to the different types of switch used, which
each have their own specific mode of operation. This applies mainly to sequencing
and the command polarity enabling period.
The diagrams opposite and below show the operating principle for executing an
open command in each mode. The principle is the same for a close command.
Explanations for each mode are also provided in the table above.

NT00378–EN–10 275
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Principle of a command in Fixed width mode:

Command in progress
Open command

Active

Inactive
Pulse duration
End of command
Switch position Switch in open position

Closed

Open

Maximum operation time

Principle of a command in Status return mode:

Command in progress
Open command

Active

Inactive

End of command
Switch position Switch in open position

Closed

Open

Maximum operation time

Principle of a command in Latched mode:

Close command

Active

Inactive

Command in progress
Open command

Active

Inactive

End of command
Switch position Switch in open position

Closed

Open

Maximum operation time

Command Filter Time Delays

The inputs for reading the switch position are scanned continuously during and
after the command operation time, with a consistency check.
Once the control relay has de-energized, the command is considered to be
complete by the T300 when the switch signals a position that corresponds to the
request. The command is considered to be in ERROR mode if the position is not
consistent with the command issued or if the position is unknown after the filter
time delay.

276 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Command filter time delay parameter settings:

Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Switch control page, Main switch tab, and set
up by the following parameters:
• Maximum operation time (ms)
• Intermediate state filter time (ms)

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Main Switch
Maximum 15,000 1,000–65,000 Maximum wait time for the switch to change position following a command before
operation time (increment = 100) an ERROR is declared for this command. In Pulse mode=Status return, this also
(ms) corresponds to the maximum time it takes to send the command polarity if the
change of position is not detected within this time period.

Intermediate state 10,000 0–30,000 Time delay for filtering the switch status before an intermediate or unknown state is
filter time (ms) (increment = 100) declared. This delay is used to filter transient states or unintended changes. When
a command is executed, it is preferable to check for a filtered and stable state
before declaring an ERROR on the switch position.

Principle of switch position filtering after an open command (in Fixed width
mode):

Close command

Active

Inactive

Command in progress Command in progress

Open command

Active

Inactive

End of command End of command

Switch position Command not Switch position - open
successful
Closed

Open

Maximum operation time T < Maximum operation time

Command not successful Command successful

NT00378–EN–10 277
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Hit and Run Function

The Hit and Run function is only available in local mode. It is available for all
different command modes (fixed width, status return and latched).
The Hit and Run function adds an extra level of risk minimization on manual
commands on MV switches. A time delay is applied after the user has pressed the
buttons on the front panel of the SCxxx module to issue the command to the MV
switch before the command is executed. This leaves sufficient time to exit the
substation before the command is executed.
Hit & Run function parameter setting:
Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Switch control page, Main switch tab, and set
up by the Hit & Run delay time (seconds) parameter.

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Main Switch
Hit & Run delay time 0 0–60 Execution delay for the Hit & Run function. The delay corresponds to the time
(seconds) required to exit the substation before the command is executed.
Only available on the T300 in Local mode.

Available for all commands types (fixed width, status return and latched).

Switch Input Filters

In the same way as the filters that are applied to the digital inputs, some types of
filter can also be applied to the switch inputs (states).
Digital Input Filtering:

Digital Input Filtering

Debouncing Holding
Digital User data
input

Anti-chatter

NOTE: For the digital inputs (DI1 to DI4) that correspond to the switch position
signals, an additional 20 ms filter (not shown in the diagram), is applied to the
user data.

278 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Digital input filter parameter setting:

Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Switch control page, Filtering tab.

Parameter De- Configuration Description

fault range

Digital Inputs

Sample period 5 • 1 Sampling period on the digital inputs for taking a state into account
(ms) • 5
• 10
Debouncing 0 0–100 Filtering period for the bounce on a digital input. The value configured for the filter
sample count (increment = 1) corresponds to a number of Sample period periods. The digital input must remain in the
same state for a period greater than the defined debouncing period for its state to be
taken into account. A value of 0 inhibits the debouncing filter.

Hold time (ms) 0 0–2,000 Hold time for a digital input. When a change of state (debounce-filtered) is detected on a
(increment digital input, the input is locked in its new state until the Hold time has elapsed.
= 1 ms) At the end of the time period, the input returns to its actual value.
A value of 0 inhibits the hold filter.
Chatter 0 0–60,000 Sliding time period corresponding to a window of observation and counting of the
detection time (increment changes of state on a digital input. If during this period, the count becomes higher than
(ms) = 1 ms) the Chatter detection count value, the anti-chatter filter is activated, the state of the
input is maintained at its last state. An event is signaled with the value maintained at its
last state and with quality flags indicating “invalid”. The quality of the data is then
signaled as bad. The anti-chatter filter becomes inactive again if, during the same
period, no change of state is detected on the digital input.
A value of 0 inhibits the anti-chatter filter.
Chatter 16 0–255 Counts the number of changes of state on a digital input to define the anti-chatter filter
detection count (increment = 1) action. The changes of state counted are only those filtered by the debouncing filter.

NT00378–EN–10 279
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Front Panel Voltage Indication

Access via Settings > SC0x > Voltage absence/presence page.

A LED on the front panel of the SCxxx module indicates the presence or absence
of the MV network voltage.
The status is also reported to the Head Unit for display on the web pages and for
use by Automation functions.
The voltage presence indication can be configured with two different sources:
• Digital input DI6 connected to an external voltage presence relay
• Measurements from the voltage sensors.
When configured to use measured values, the threshold and delay settings are
displayed.
These settings are used to determine the value of two status variables for “voltage
absence for three phases” or “voltage presence for three phases” (see diagrams).
The variable “Voltage presence for HMI", that is displayed on the Head Unit web
pages, is a combination of “presence OR not absence”.
For steady-state conditions, this variable is true if at least one phase is present.
For transient conditions, the value depends on the operate delay times and hold
delay times.
Note that the voltage presence thresholds are common with those configured in
the Fault indication/Voltage presence page.

280 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Detection of MV voltage absence from the Detection of MV voltage presence from the
measures measures

MV network voltage Hysteresis MV network voltage Hysteresis

30% +
Hysteresis 70%
30% 70% -
Hysteresis

ToA
Voltage absence ThA Voltage presence
ToP ThP
Yes Yes

No
No

Front panel voltage indication parameter setting:

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Voltage absence (parameter available only for the case Voltage presence source = Measured)

Start threshold (%) 30 10-100 Definition of the measured MV network voltage threshold, as a percentage of
(increment = 1) the nominal voltage, below which the MV network voltage will be considered to
be absent.
NOTE: Configure the threshold taking into account hysteresis (6%).
Consult the glossary for the definition of hysteresis.

Operate delay time 50 0-300000 Period within which the voltage must be below the Start threshold level to
(ms) (increment = 1) consider the MV network voltage to be absent.

Hold delay time 40 40-300000 Period within which the voltage must return to above the Start threshold level
(ms) (increment = 1) to consider the MV network voltage to be not absent (to define the delay to be
configured, take into account hysteresis: 6%).

Voltage presence (parameter available only for the case Voltage presence source = Measured)

Start threshold, (%) 50 10-100 Definition of the measured MV network voltage threshold, as a percentage of
(increment = 1) the nominal voltage, above which the MV network voltage will be considered to
be present.
NOTE: Configure the threshold taking into account hysteresis (7%).
Consult the glossary for the definition of hysteresis.

Operate delay time 50 0-300000 Period within which the voltage must remain above the Start threshold to
(ms) (increment = 1) validate the overvotlage detection.

Hold delay time 40 40-300000 Period within which the voltage must return to below the Start threshold level
(ms) (increment = 1) to consider the MV network voltage to be not present (to define the delay to be
configured, take into account hysteresis: 7%).

Front panel indication

Voltage presence Digital • Measured Choice of source for indicating voltage presence/absence on the front panel of
source input the SCxxx module:
• Digital input
• Measured: voltage measurement taken by the voltage sensors.
• Digital input: digital input DI6 ("MV Presence") on the SCxxx 9-way
connector. This digital input is typically connected to an external voltage
relay installed in the MV cubicle (for example. VD23).

Number of absent All • Any • If the option is All, the three phase must be absent to declare an overall
phases to report • All voltage absence.
overall absence • If the option is Any, one single phase (any of them) voltage absence is
enough to have an overall voltage absence.

NOTE: To get the voltage absence and the voltage presence at the same
time, Voltage absence operate delay time and Voltage presence hold
delay time parameters must be set up with the same value.

NT00378–EN–10 281
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Active Overpower
Access via SC0x > Settings > Active Overpower page.
The indication Active Overpower is based on ANSI 32P standard, “Directionnal
active overpower”.
This is a two-way indication based on calculated active power, for the following
applications:
• active overpower (or maximum active power) to detect overloads and allow
load shedding
• reverse active power to detect:
◦ power injection from distributed production if the measure is done on
transformer incomer
◦ abnormal power flow if the measure is done on the feeder (MV line
switchgear).
The indication 32 P is triggered if the absolute value of the active power is greater
than the threshold PS if the operation mode is maximum active power (lower than
the threshold -PS) and if the ratio reactive power / active power (Q / P) is less than
32.

reverse power overpower

-Ps Ps
P

282 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Setting Active Overpower indication:

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Instance 1 enable No • Yes Instance activation

• No
Start threshold 5% 1% to 120 % Percentage of the apparent power that the active power must reach to trigger
the function.
Operate delay time 100 ms 100 ms to Period (in millisecond) within which the active power must be greater than the
300000 ms Start threshold level to consider the Overpower to be present.

Direction Forward Forward or The mode of operation of the function. Forward for maximum active power.
backward Backward for reverse active power.

NT00378–EN–10 283
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Fault Current Detection Indication (FPI) and Tripping

Protection on the SC160 Module
General
The SCxxx is capable of detecting a fault current on any type of neutral system
with or without the presence of distributed power on the MV or LV network.
Fault current Detection and Protection modes available:
• If Tripping Protection disabled (in Global setting menu), available modes:
◦ Indication only
◦ FPI+Sectionalizer
• If Tripping Protection enabled (in Global setting menu), available modes:
◦ Indication only
◦ FPI +Tripping protection
Fault current detection is based on the following international ANSI code
standards:
• Phase overfault current detection or, detection and tripping protection (ANSI
50/51)
• Ground (earth) fault current detection or, detection and tripping protection
(ANSI 50N/51N)
• Negative sequence overvoltage/broken conductor detection (ANSI 47)
• Directional phase overfault current detection or, detection and tripping
protection (ANSI 67)
• Directional ground (earth) fault current detection or, detection and tripping
protection (ANSI 67N)
Three ammetric fault current instances and two directional fault current instances,
each with their specific settings and detection mode, can operate separately or
simultaneously on the fault current detector and for each SCxxx channel. The first
instance that checks the fault current condition activates the detector and the
corresponding indicator on the T300.
The ability to combine instances allows the T300 to adapt to the characteristics
and type of protection used upstream in line with the MV network characteristics.
This also enables adjustment based on the fault current values measured by the
measurement sensors.
For example, one instance can be defined for overload detection (typically an
IDMT curve) and another instance can be defined for short-circuit detection
(typically a DT curve). See the resulting detection curve example opposite.
Each instance includes two groups of settings. These two groups correspond to
two sets of thresholds and time delays that are typically linked to two upstream
protection settings.
These two sets of thresholds can be useful for managing power supply source
changeover, for example, in an MV loop with a dual power supply (e.g. changing
over from a line supply to a generator or vice versa).
The settings group can easily be changed by a command to select group 1 or
group 2 from the preset thresholds, without needing to reconfigure the T300. This
is done in the Monitoring & Control > Substation page (see the corresponding
section) or remotely from the SCADA system.

Fault Current Detector and Protection Tripping Logical Nodes on

the SC160 Module
The T300 fault current detection algorithms are based on the ANSI standards as
well as on a certain number of logical nodes (LN, as described in standard

284 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

IEC 61850) each with their own specific role. These are given for information
purposes in the table below.

Logical Node (LN) Category Description

PhPTOC PTOC (ANSI 50/51) Phase overfault current detection indication and tripping protection

EfPTOC PTOC (ANSI 50N/51N) Ground (earth) fault current detection indication and tripping protection

SEfPTOC PTOC (ANSI 50N/51N) Sensitive Ground (earth) fault current detection indication

BcPTOV PTOV (ANSI 47) Negative sequence overvoltage / broken conductor detection

DirPhPTOC PTOC (ANSI 67) Directional phase overfault current detection indication and Directional phase
overfault current detection indication and tripping protection

DirEfPTOC PTOC (ANSI 67N) Directional ground (earth) fault current detection indication and Directional ground
(earth) fault current detection indication and tripping protection

AbsPTUC PTUC Current absence detection

PRSPTOC PTOC Current presence detection

AbsPTUV PTUV Voltage absence detection

PrsPTOV PTOV Voltage presence detection

SVPI SVPI Indication of voltage presence based on inputs from the PTOV and PTUV logical nodes

SCPI SCPI Indication of current presence based on inputs from the PTOC and PTUC logical nodes

SFPI SFPI Fault current indication calculation based on confirmation of fault current detection (SVPI and/or
SCPI)

EfPTRC PTRC Protection trip conditioning. Combines the output for the earth fault PTOC instances (ANSI
50N51N and 67N)

PhPTRC PTRC Protection trip conditioning. Combines the output for the phase-overcurrent fault PTOC
instances instances (ANSI 5051 and 67)

ClpPTUC PTUC Cold load pickup absence detection

ClpPTOC PTOC Cold load pickup presence detection

EfPCLP PCLP Cold load pickup for earth faults

PhPCLP PCLP Cold load pickup for phase faults

DPhPCLP PCLP Cold load pickup for directional phase faults

DEfPCLP PCLP Cold load pickup for directional earth faults

FltMMXU FltMMXU H1 current and voltage at time of fault for phases A, B, C and residual.

NOTE: PCLP is a non-standard extension to the logical nodes defined in

IEC 61850-7-4.

Interconnection between the logical nodes used on the SC160 module

Circuit
MV switchgear SC160 breaker
MMXU IHMI

Trip
PTOC function

PTRC
TCTR PTOC
SCPI SCADA data
PTUC
External lamp
TVTR Automation
SFPI
...
PTOV
SVPI
PTUV HU250

NT00378–EN–10 285
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Fault Current Detection Indication (FPI) Principle

Counters are used for storing the type and number of fault currents on the MV
network to provide statistical and analytical data on the quality of the network.
Internal variables, which can be consulted on the Monitoring & Control > Data >
Analog page, allow you to save the latest current and voltage values before the
fault current occurs on the network (values stored up to 3 seconds before the fault
current appears).
NOTE: In case of type B connection (2 phase CTs + 1 core balance CT), the
only mean to detect a fault on phase B is to use a core balance current
transformer and activate the earth fault detection.
Monitoring phase B is done through I0 detection (2 or 3 instances available).
To activate the earth fault detection in the EfPTOC and DefPTOC functions,
set parameters in SC0x > Settings > Non-Directional fault detection Web
server and/or SC0x > Settings > Directional fault detection Web server
page.
Fault current detection curve with three instances:

A
Time

: IDMT

150 ms B : DT
100 ms
C : DT
10 ms
Is (100 A) 1 kA 15 kA Current

Instance A: IDMT curve (overload)

Instance B: DT curve (short-circuit)
Instance C: DT curve (instantaneous short-circuit)

Different Fault Current Types Detected

The T300 can detect and indicate several types of fault current:
• Self-extinguishing fault currents:
Detected fault currents that appear and disappear on the MV network, without
tripping the upstream circuit breaker. This type of fault current is stored in the
event log but not indicated by the LEDs on the T300.
Example of self-extinguisher fault current (the MV network power is not cut:
the fault current is not validated. The delay T_70 is ignored).
PTOC Ts: PTOC operate delaytime
T_0: Fault validation time
Ts T_0 T_3: Fault confirmation time
T_70: Primary CB recloser maximum
ON
operation time

OFF

Indication Self-extinguisher fault

MV network
T_3 T_70
Pres.

Non
Pres.

286 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

• Transient fault currents

Detected and validated fault currents on the MV network that are self-cleared
in the first reclose cycle of the upstream circuit breaker or by a manual reset
action.
Example of transient fault current (the fault current is validated but network
power is restored at the end of the T_3 or T_70 time delay).
PTOC Ts: PTOC operate delay time
T_0: Fault validation time
Ts T_0 T_3: Fault confirmation time
T_70: Primary CB recloser maximum
ON
operation time

OFF
Indication Transient fault
MV network
T_3 T_70
Pres.

Non
Pres.

NOTE: Self-extinguishing and transient fault currents are combined in a

single transient fault current counter.
• Semi-permanent fault currents:
Detected and validated fault currents that trip the upstream protection on the
MV network, but that are self-cleared by the reclose cycles of the upstream
circuit breaker (cycle 2 or cycle 3).
Example of semi-permanent fault current, with reclose cycle (the validated
fault current disappears before the end of the T_70 delay and network power
is restored)
PTOC Ts: PTOC operate delay time
Ts T_0: Fault validation time
T_0 T_3: Fault confirmation time
T_70: Primary CB recloser
ON
maximum operation time

OFF
Indication Semi-permanent fault
MV network
T_3 T_70
Pres.

Non
Pres.

NT00378–EN–10 287
T300 SC160 Module Settings

• Permanent fault currents:

Detected and validated fault currents that trip the upstream protection
permanently on the MV network (with or without reclose cycles). This means
that the upstream circuit breaker remains open at the end of the reclose cycle
time delay (T_70).
Example of permanent fault current, with reclose cycle (the validated fault
current has not been eliminated by the end of the cycle and the T_70 delay
and network power is not restored)
PTOC Ts: PTOC operate delay time
T_0: Fault validation time
T_3: Fault confirmation time
Ts T_0 T_70: Primary CB recloser
maximum operation time
ON

OFF
Indication Permanent fault
MV network
T_3 T_70
Pres.

Non
Pres.

Example of a permanent fault current when there is no confirmation of

network non présence (FPI network presence and confirmation mode=None).
In this mode, the fault current is not validated by the non presence of the MV
network, but only by detection and disappearance of the fault current during
the time delay T_Valid.

PTOC Ts: PTOC operate delay time

T_0: Fault validation time
Ts T_0
ON
Indication
Permanent fault
OFF

Example of a permanent fault current, without reclose cycle (the validated

fault current has not been eliminated by the end of the T_70 delay and
network power is not restored)
PTOC Ts: PTOC operated delay time
T_0: Fault validation time
Ts T_0 T_3: Fault confirmation time
T_70: Primary CB recloser
ON
maximum operation time

OFF
Indication Permanent fault
MV network
T_3 T_70
Pres.

Non
Pres.

288 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

NOTE: When the fault current confirmed by the non presence of the MV
network is not enabled by configuration (FPI network presence and
confirmation mode =None), any detected fault current is only confirmed by
the disappearance of the fault current, if this occurs during the confirmation
time delay (T_Valid). In this mode, any confirmed fault current is considered to
be a permanent fault current.
See the parameter settings table in the Fault Current Indication section for a
detailed explanation of the time delays mentioned in these diagrams (T_0, T_3, T_
70).

Fault current Acknowledgment Principle

The diagram below illustrates the principle for taking account of a detected fault
current according to the current threshold (Threshold value) and configurable
time delay (Reset delay time and Operation delay time) settings.
The time counter mentioned in the diagram is incremented whenever the current
is greater than the fault current threshold and it remains at its most recent value if
the current falls back below the threshold. The counter is then reset if the time for
which the current remains below the detection threshold reaches the Reset delay
time setting.
The following scenarios are possible based on the different phases in the diagram:
• Scenario A
The measured current is not validated as a fault current since the duration for
which the current is present above the fault current threshold (Is) is less than
time Ts. The counter is reset at the end of time Rdt because the current
remains below the threshold Is for a time longer than this delay
• Scenario B
The current greater than threshold Is appears twice in succession above
threshold Is and increments the counter in stages. Time Ts is not reached,
consequently the fault current is not validated. The counter is reset at the end
of time Rdt because the current remains below the threshold Is for a time
longer than this delay.
NOTE: CT saturation phenomena may cause transient conditions for the
current to fall below the threshold. The counting system described in
scenario 2 allows this type of behavior to be filtered.
• Scenario C
The current remains above the threshold Is long enough for the counter to be
incremented until time Ts is reached. The current is validated as a fault
current. As soon as the current falls below the threshold Is, time Rdt is no
longer applicable once the fault current has been validated.
NOTE: For definite time (DT) detection, time Ts remains the same, regardless
of the value of the current Is. In contrast to this, in terms of the principle of
inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) detection, time Ts varies according to
the value of Is.

NT00378–EN–10 289
T300 SC160 Module Settings

I > Is A B C
Yes

Rdt Rdt Ts

No

Time counter

Ts

Fault detection
(PTOC)

Yes

No
Duration

Rdt: Reset delay time

Is: Threshold value (fault current)
Ts: Operation delay time (for taking account of fault current)

General Configuration Rule

The general rules for configuring the settings thresholds on the T300 are as
follows: The fault current detection settings used by the T300 must be configured
on the T300 to correspond to those configured on the upstream circuit breaker on
the MV network. The detection curves and the instances used must also be the
same as those on the protection device for fault current behavior to be identical.
In theory, the fault current detection thresholds and time delays to be configured
on the T300 must be slightly lower (e.g. by 20%) in relation to those of the
upstream circuit breaker for the T300 to be able to detect the presence of the fault
current before tripping the circuit breaker.
Additionally, for an ammetric fault current, the current configured on the T300 must
be greater than the downstream capacitive current.
Fault current detector configuration example:

Circuit Breaker End T300 End

I Max threshold = 350 A Phase fault current threshold = 300 A
I0 threshold = 45 A Ground fault threshold = 40 A
ACK I max. = 250 ms ACK = 225 ms
ACK I0 = 250 ms ACK = 225 ms

290 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Fault Current Tripping Protection Principle

NOTICE
HAZARD OF LOSS OF PROTECTION OR HAZARD OF NUISANCE
TRIPPING
• If the module is no longer supplied with power, the protection functions are
no longer active and all the output relays are inactive. Check that this
operating mode and the watchdog relay wiring are compatible with your
installation.
• Follow these instructions to help prevent from unwanted shutdown of the
electrical installation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Tripping Logic
The SC160 module provides a fault tripping protection function control logic
dedicated to public network distribution protection. The trip event is issued
according to selected protection functions.
When the switch gear is closed it is possible that a fault condition exists that can
cause an immediate trip. In this case, the trip event must take precedence over
completing the “close” relay pulse. This requirement can be generalized so that
regardless of whether a close operation was in progress or not, a Trip event must
always deactivate the “close” relay at the same time as activating the “open” relay.

Tripping Description
The protection control logic does not use a CILO (interlocking) request for
processing, since energy to trip in stored by the circuit breaker function itself. The
Tr signal is set (activates the output relays) when at least one enabled PTOC
operate bit is set. In the case of directional PTOCs, the Tr bit is set only if the
direction is consistent with the direction configuration setting. The Tr is reset
(releases the output relays) when all the enabled PTOC operate bits are reset,
subject to a minimum pulse width.
Internal tripping logic
The diagram below shows the internal tripping logic. Note that the trigger for
disturbance recording is a logical OR of all the over-current pick-up detection
elements regardless of whether they are enabled for tripping.
Trigger for disturbance
PhPTOC1.Str 0 recording
0 >=1
... 0 0
0 FltPTRC1.Str
0
EfPTOC3.Str

PhPTOC1.Op 0 >=1 Internal signal

0 0
PhPTOC2.Op PhPTRC1.Tr to STM32
0
PhPTOC3.Op 0 >=1
0 0 >=1
0
0 0 GenPTRC1.Tr
EfPTOC1.Op >=1
0
EfPTOC2.Op 0 0 External signal
EfPTRC1.Tr
EfPTOC3.Op 0 to 104 Server

Each PTOC instance is T= 200 ms

enabled or disabled for Minimum trip pulse
tripping via settings duration = 200 ms

NT00378–EN–10 291
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Latched trip indications and counters

The logic for the latched trip indications is implemented in the same process as
the switch control and HMI (RTP Application).

Reset command GenPTRC1.Tr S

SET
Q GenPTRC1.TrInd
from Head Unit
GenPTRC1.TrIndRs R CLR Q

Or Module HMI
External signals
PhPTRC1.Tr S
SET
Q PhPTRC1.TrInd to 104 Server

R CLR Q
Count PhPTRC1.OpCnt For SCADA
And/or
SOE Log

EfPTRC1.Tr S
SET
Q EfPTRC1.TrInd

R Q
CLR
Count EfPTRC1.OpCnt

The latched trip indications are reset by any of the following signals:
• a command received from the Head Unit
• the module HMI (OK button), if the module is in local mode
• the module HMI Close command, if the module is in local mode and lockout is
disabled.
Local reset of trip and FPI indications
Whether the protection mode is enabled or not, the last two signals also reset the
FPI indications, in addition to the FPI indication reset command.

GenSFPI1.FltIndRs 0 >=1
From Head Unit 0 0 Reset FPI
0 Indications
HMI, Web page or SCADA
GenPTRC1.TrIndRs

Module HMI OK Button 0 & 0 >=1 Reset Trip

0 0 0
Mode = Local 0 0 Indications

0 &
0 0
Close command

GenPTRC1.EnaLckOut

The "module reset latched trip indications" command (GenPTRC1.TrIndRs) resets

the values of all the latched trip indications. (xxxPTRC1.TrInd). Trip operation
counts can be reset.
Latched trip indications, trip operation counts and trip direction are saved
persistently. If the SC160 module reboots with a tripping lockout enabled, then
tripping is set again at the start of the module.

Tripping Lockout Management

The SC160 general tripping function enables tripping lockout by latching the trip
output contact and indication until a user reset occurs. This leads to the blocking
of the switch closing and related control functions until a user reset occurs. This
feature is configured by parameter setting.

GenPTRC1.EnaLckOut 0 &
0
0 Trip lockout
GenPTRC1.TrInd

Main switch position

Earth switch position Module Switch
External interlock interlocking control
Close command

292 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

When the lockout is enabled and a fault pickup occurs, all buttons remain enabled.
Once the tripping is complete, the ON and OFF buttons are disabled. The OK
button remains enabled to allow the lockout condition to be acknowledged.
The tripping lockout and tripping state determine whether remote commands
received from the head unit are accepted or rejected. This is done using the same
rules as for the manual commands from the buttons.
Lockout setting behaviour

Lockout Trip state Switch state LED User 2 Remote commands Open/Close + OK
enabled Internal trip buttons

No Off Any Off Open accepted Enable all buttons

Close accepted

No Fault pickup - tripping (initial) Closed Orange / blink Open accepted Enable all buttons
imminent (final) Open Close accepted

No Trip latched Any Red / blink Open accepted Enable all buttons
(expected) Open Close accepted

Yes Off Any Off Open accepted Enable all buttons

Close accepted

Yes Fault pickup - tripping (initial) Closed Orange / blink Open accepted Enable all buttons
imminent (final) Open Close accepted

Yes Trip latched Any Red / blink Open rejected Open/Close buttons
(expected) Open Close rejected disabled
OK button action
enabled
Yes Acknowledged Any Off Open accepted Enable all buttons
Close accepted

Tripping Acknowledgement (Reset)

In case of fault protection trip, if lockout is not enabled, the fault and trip
indications is acknowledged when the CB is closed with a local command.
In case of fault protection trip, the tripping SC160 module can be acknowledged
by the following actions:
• a remote reset from the SCADA via protocol (with T300 Generator
configuration)
• the HU250 HMI Reset button (via Easergy Builder configuration)
• a long push on the OK button of the SC160 during 3 s in local mode. The fault
detection indication is also reseted by the same way
• locally by closing the CB if tripping lockout is disabled. The fault detection
indication is also reseted by the same way.
• by a reset from the HU250 Web server application

Fault Current Detection and Tripping Protection Curves on the

SC160 module
Two main types of fault current detection are used on the T300:
• Definite time (DT) detection
• Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) detection
Different detection curves can be derived from these 2 types of fault current
detection.

Definite Time (DT) Detection Curve

The basic principle behind this type of detection is summarized as follows:

NT00378–EN–10 293
T300 SC160 Module Settings

• For a current less than or equal to the configurable fault current threshold Is
(Threshold value), there is no fault current detection.
• For a current greater than Is, fault current detection takes place, but only if the
current remains above this threshold for a time greater than or equal to the
configurable acknowledge time Ts (Operate delay time).

Time
Ts

Is Current

Definite time (DT) detection curve

Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) Detection Curve on the SC160

Module
The basic principle behind this type of detection is essentially the same except for
one difference in that the time taken to acknowledge the fault current depends on
the value of the fault current:
• For a current less than or equal to the configurable fault current threshold Is
(Threshold value), there is no fault current detection.
• For a current greater than Is, the fault current acknowledge time depends on
the value of the current. The higher the current, the shorter the acknowledge
time and vice versa. This type of curve allows the fault current detector to
react more swiftly to high currents.
• The acknowledge time is infinite for a current equal to Is.
The Is (Threshold value) parameter is set by configuration.
Time Ts (Operate delay time) is also a configurable parameter set by the user. It
corresponds to the acknowledge time for a current value of 10 Is.
If the monitored value exceeds 20 times the set point of the measurement
capacity of the SCxxx module, the tripping time is limited to the value
corresponding to the minimum value between the largest measurable value of
SCxxx (7In for CT=5A and 15,6In for CT=1A) and the 20 Is value defined in the
IEC standard.
Both these values are common to all selected curve types. The equation of the
curve is constructed on the basis of these 2 values. It corresponds to the vertical
asymptote of the curves.
Time

Normal inverse
Very inverse
Extremely inverse

Ts

Is 10 Is Current

Several types of IDMT curve, defined on the basis of this principle and the IEC and
IEEE standards, are used by the fault current detector.
3 IDMT curves are defined based on the IEC standard:

294 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

• IEC normal inverse time/A (SIT)

• IEC very inverse time/B (VIT)
• IEC extremely inverse time/C (EIT)
3 IDMT curves are defined based on the IEEE standard:
• IEEE moderately inverse time (MI) o o
• IEEE very inverse time (VI)
• IEEE extremely inverse time (EI)
See the Appendix for more information about these IDMT curves.
Conversion of Time Multiplier settings to Operating Time
The fault current detection function settings must be set up to be consistent with
the settings for the circuit breaker protection at the feeder source.
Sometimes protection device settings are defined using a Time Multiplier setting
and not an Operating Delay setting.
To convert a Time Multiplier setting to Operating Time, use the following formula
Ts = Time Multiplier Setting TMS / β
Where β depends on the selected curve (see tables of equations for IEC and IEEE
here after).
• Equation for IEC-Type IDMT Curves
The equation is similar for each IEC IDMT curve except for the parameters:

A T
td ( I ) = P
´
æ I ö b
ç ÷ -1
è IS ø
Where:
◦ td(I) = Fault current detection time according to the current value (in
seconds). Equivalent to Ts
◦ I = Measured current value
◦ A, p, ß = Parameters defined by the IEC standard (see table below)
◦ Is = Fault current detection threshold value (configurable Threshold
value)
◦ T = Time delay value 10 Is.

Curve Parameters A p ß

Normal inverse time/A 0.14 0.02 2.9709

Very inverse time/B 13.5 1 1.5

Extremely inverse time/C 80 2 0.8081

NOTE: The letters A, B, and C associated with the IEC curves define the
category of a curve. The power "p" defined in the equation is used to
classify a curve into 1 of 3 the categories according to the following
criteria:

Category p

A p ≤ 0.5

B 0.5 ≤ p ≤ 1.5

C p ≥ 1.5

NT00378–EN–10 295
T300 SC160 Module Settings

• Equation for IEEE-Type IDMT Curves

The equation is similar for each IEEE IDMT curve except for the parameters:

A T
td ( I ) = ( P
+ B) ´
æ I ö b
ç ÷ -1
è IS ø
Where:
◦ td(I) = Fault current detection time according to the current value (in
seconds). Equivalent to Ts
◦ I = Measured current value
◦ A, B, p, ß = Parameters defined by the IEEE standard (see table below)
◦ Is = Fault current detection threshold value (configurable Threshold
value)
◦ T = Time delay value 10 Is.

Curve Parameters A B p ß

IEEE moderately inverse time 0.0515 0.114 0.02 1.20676

IEEE very inverse time 19.61 0.491 2 0.68908

EE extremely inverse time 28.2 0.1217 2 0.40548

Inrush Filter
A filter for detecting transformer inrush current can be enabled on the T300 to
prevent spurious fault currents being detected on the MV network.
A current peak may occur on power-up of the MV network due to energization of
the transformers and saturation of the phase CTs installed on the network. These
current peaks may activate the fault current detectors falsely by tripping the
configured thresholds.
To avoid this phenomenon, an algorithm is used to discriminate fault currents from
transformer inrush currents on network power-up.
The algorithm for detecting the transformer inrush phenomenon is based on an
analysis of the ratio between the second harmonic distortion and the fundamental
current on the 3 network phase currents. The inrush filter becomes active when a
high proportion of second harmonics are detected.
The inrush filter is only possible for ANSI 50/51, ANSI 50N/51N, and ANSI 67 type
detection, and for all instances.
Example of inrush current with 2nd harmonic content on transformer
magnetization:

Harmonic Restraint Tab

When a feeder is energized after a long outage, most connected devices draw a
significant inrush current. The inrush current may be greater than the overcurrent

296 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

or earth fault overcurrent settings. To reduce the risk of unwanted tripping, the
function identifies an inrush current and provides a signal which can be used for
blocking low stage of protections.
There are two inrush restraint outputs:
• one for blocking the wrong residual current on inrush current when a feeder is
energized
• one for blocking the over-current on inrush current when a feeder is
energized.

Block Diagram

I1, I2, I3 peak filter Cross blocking

phase T 25ms 0
I1, I2, I3 Harmonic 1 Cross Harmonic 2 Inrush restraint for
blocking phase over-current detection
I1, I2, I3 Harmonic 2 Cross blocking
earth
T 25ms 0

Restriking Harmonic 2 Inrush restraint for

Inhibit & residual over-current detection

Ir Harmonic 1
Earth fault
Samples Ir Inhibit

The 25ms time delay aims to avoid unwanted activation of the inrush restraint at
the fault occurrence: when a fault occurs (single phase-to-ground, phase-to-phase
or 3 phases short-circuit) the inrush restraint might rise up transiently and could
delay the overcurrent protection functions when they are set to instantaneous.

Cross Blocking
The quadratic harmonic 2 is used to do a cross blocking on inrush currents when a
feeder is energized.
Inrush restraint for phase overcurrent:
The Inrush restraint for phase overcurrent protection is inhibited in the following
conditions:
• Current is lower than the minimum setting of ANSI 50/51 protection
• Current is higher than min(Iscmin/2,10In) or min(Iscmin/2,4In). In case of
short-circuit current, current transformers might saturate. This saturation
creates high Harmonic 2 rate which can activate the H2 inrush restraint and
block unexpectedly the overcurrent protection tripping. In order to avoid this
blocking, H2 restraint is inhibited when current is higher than 0.5 Iscmin of the
installation (customer setting).
When 0.5 x Iscmin is higher than 10 In or 4 In (maximum settings of ANSI 50/
51 protection), the current seen by the protection might be lower than 0.5
Iscmin (because of CT saturation) and the H2 restraint could not be inhibited.
In order to insure the correct inhibition, the H2 inrush restraint is inhibited
when the measured current is higher than 10 In or 4 In . This value of 10 In or
4 In ensures a correct detection of short-circuit current up to 25 kA with CT
saturation.

NT00378–EN–10 297
T300 SC160 Module Settings

If I12H 1 + I 22H 1 + I 32H 1 > 3 · (0.006) 2 In 2

and if
Iscmin
max( I1H 1 , I1peak filter , I 2 H 1 , I 2 peak filter , I 3H 1 , I 3 peak filter ) < min( ,10 In or 4 In)
2
then
I12h 2 + I 22h 2 + I 32h 2
TQ =
I12h1 + I 22h1 + I 32h1
else
TQPhase = 0
End
When TQphase is higher than (Phase H2 threshold)², the phase cross blocking is
set.
NOTE:
• For type B acquisition, I2 is considered as equal to 0.
• For type B acquisition, I1²+I3² is compared to 2x0.006²In².

Inrush restraint for earth overcurrent:

The Inrush restraint for earth overcurrent protection is inhibited if current is lower
than the minimum setting of ANSI 50N/51N protection.

If I12H 1 + I 22H 1 + I 32H 1 > 3 · (0.006) 2 In 2

then
I12h 2 + I 22h 2 + I 32h 2
TQ =
I12h1 + I 22h1 + I 32h1
else
TQearth = 0
End
When TQearth is higher than (Earth H2 threshold)², the earth cross blocking is set.
NOTE: The H2 restraint for earth protection must not be inhibited when the
current is higher than min(Iscmin/2,10In) or min(Iscmin/2,4In). In case of
phase-to-phase fault, the three phases CT can saturate differently and create
false zero sequence current. As a result, it is necessary to keep the H2
restraint dedicated for earth protection activated. Cases of phase-to-earth
fault:
• Either the fault current is low (it is generally the case in MV depending on
the neutral earthing system): in this case the phases CT will not saturate
and the H2 restraint will not be activated.
• Or the fault current is high but on one phase only. In this case, there is a
potential CT saturation for the faulty phase. The computation of the H2
rate per phase will avoid the activation of the H2 restraint.

Restriking Earth Fault Inhibit

On restriking earth fault, the harmonic 2 ratio is high only on one phase.

298 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

So to discriminate inrush currents from restriking earth fault we use the harmonic
ratio on each phase, to inhibit the cross blocking inrush restraint.

If Ixh21 > (0.006) 2 In 2 for x = 1 to 3

then
Ixh22
Tx = 2
Ixh1
else
Tx = 0
End
Restriking_Inhibit = (T1 > 0.04) AND (T2 < 0.01) AND (T3 < 0.01)

Restriking_Inhibit = Restriking_Inhibit OR [(T2 > 0.04) AND (T1 < 0.01) AND (T3 < 0.01)]

Restriking_Inhibit = Restriking_Inhibit OR [(T3 > 0.04) AND (T1 < 0.01) AND (T2 < 0.01)]

Earth Fault Inhibit

When an earth fault is present when the feeder is energized, we compare the form
factor of the residual current to discriminate inrush currents from earth fault.
2
If max (| xi |36
i =1 ) < 4 • mod ( I r )
2

then
Earth_fault_inhibit=1
else
Earth_fault_inhibit=0
End
The function

max (| xi |i36=1 )
calculates the maximum value of absolute samples of residual current on one
cycle.

Parameter Settings
Access via SC0x > Settings > Global fault settings page, Harmonic Restraint
tab.

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Group 1 Minimum short-circuit 3500 From In to 999 kA Define the value of the minimum short-circuit current of the
current (A) installation for the setting group 1

Group 2 Minimum short-circuit 2500 From In to 999 kA Define the value of the minimum short-circuit current of the
current (A) installation for the setting group 2

NT00378–EN–10 299
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Threshold for phase (%) 17 From 5% to 50% Define the H2 rate for which the phase inrush restraint is
activated
Threshold for earth (%) 17 From 5% to 50% Define the H2 rate for which the earth inrush restraint is
activated

Cold Load PickUp Function

The Cold Load PickUp Function avoids nuisance tripping of the overcurrent
protection (ANSI 50-51/ ANSI 50-51N/ ANSI 67/ ANSI 67N) during energization
after a long outage. It is used to increase the protection set point temporarily. The
Cold Load PickUp function is only available on the SC160 module
Depending on the installation characteristics, these operations can generate
transient inrush currents likely to exceed the protection set points.
These transient currents may be due to:
• simultaneous resetting of all the loads in an installation (air conditioning,
heating, etc.)
• the power transformer magnetizing currents
• the motor starting currents
In normal circumstances, the protection settings are defined so as to avoid tripping
due to these transient currents. However, if this rule results in inadequate
sensitivity levels or delays that are too long, this function can be used to increase
or inhibit set points temporarily after energization. This function helps to keep a
good level of protection sensitivity, regardless of the constraints affecting
energization.
NOTE: In the rest of this manual, this function is referred to by its abbreviation
CLPU.
Block diagram for CLPU function dedicated for ANSI 50/51 protection –
instance x, setting group A
This block diagram is executed each half cycle (10 ms at 50 Hz - this value is likely
to evolve).

Reset
prioritaire
R
T51
Tcold
& T 0
Max(I1,I2,I3)<Ares T 0
S

Active_51

Max(I1,I2,I3)>Pres
&
G51_x M51_x
CLPU_51 = « Multiply »
1

Service_51-x « ON » &
CLPU_51 = « Blocking »
1 Inh51_x
0

The same logic is applied for setting group B and for ANSI 67 protection, ANSI
67N protection and detection and ANSI 50N/51N protections.
The action of the CLPU for Instance x, setting group A is considered if the
following conditions are true:
• CLPU function in service for instance x – setting group A
• Current absence during more than Tcold followed by current presence.
The CLPU action is reset at the end of T51_x time delay.

300 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

The CLPU modifies the current threshold of the protection if CLPU_51 = “Multiply”
The CLPU inhibits the protection if CLPU_51 = “blocking”.
NOTE: The CLPU must not be activated during a recloser cycle in order to
keep the correct sensitivity of the protections in presence of fault. To do so, a
Tcold time delay higher than the longer time delay used for the recloser slow
cycle must be specified.

Setting Cold Load PickUp (CLPU) function

The Cold Load Pickup function avoids unwanted trip in case of electrical network
reenergizing creating transient inrush current.
When a feeder is energized after a long outage, most connected devices draw a
significant inrush current. The inrush current may be greater than the overcurrent
or earth fault settings, thus causing mal-operation. To prevent unwanted tripping,
the CLPU function automatically increases the settings for a selectable time.
The Cold Load Pickup function is configured for the following protections:
• Phase Fault Protection (ANSI 50/51)
• Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 50/51 N)
• Directional Phase Fault Protection (ANSI 67)
• Directional Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 67N)
The Cold Load Pickup function is enabled for each fault detection and setting
group with Cold load pickup enabled parameter, described in later sections.
Setting the Cold Load Pickup function
1. In Setting group tab, specify the following parameters for each Phase fault
current or Earth fault current protection:
• Cold Load Pickup enabled, Yes or No button
• Cold Load Pickup Multiplier

NT00378–EN–10 301
T300 SC160 Module Settings

2. Set parameters in SC0x > Settings > Global Fault settings page, Cold
Load Pickup tab:

Absence detection global parameters

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Absence threshold (A) 0.05 In From 0.01 In to In Define the maximum current value below which the current is
considered as absent.
Presence threshold (A) 0.1 In From 0.01 In to In Define the minimum current value to consider the current as
present.

Operate delay time (ms) 15 s From 0.1 s to 300 s Define the minimum time of current absence before activating
the CLPU.

302 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Parameters for each fault current protection type (ANSI 50/51, ANSI 50/51V, ANSI 67, ANSI 67N)

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Inhibit mode Multiply • Block Define the action of the CLPU for protection.
• Multiply

Reset delay time 3s From 1 s to 2 h Define the activation time of the CLPU for all instances and all
setting groups of a protection.

Fault Event
The magnitudes of the values of the first harmonic (H1) currents FltMMXU1.A and
voltages FltMMXU1.phsV during the fault are saved and are reported to the Head
Unit for logging or reporting to SCADA.
The phase currents at time of fault are the magnitudes of the H1 values (or the
filtered crest if it is greater) used by the phase over-current PTOCs (ANSI 50/51 or
67 functions) in the cycle that changes the operate status (delayed bit).
The residual current at time of fault is the magnitude of the H1 values (or the
filtered crest if it is greater) used by the earth fault PTOCs (ANSI 50N/51N or 67N
functions) in the cycle that changes the operate status (delayed bit).
If current values (for phase) exceeds the measurement range for the phase
currents, then the over-range quality flag is set.
• Phase current maximum: 20 In (when CT = 1A)
• Phase current maximum: 7 In (when CT = 5A)
If current value of I0 (calculated or measured) exceeds the measurement range,
then the over-range quality flag is set.
• Residual current maximum: 7 In (when I0 is calculated)
• Residual current maximum: 7 In0 (when I0 is measured)
The phase voltages at time of fault are the magnitudes of the H1 values of the
phase voltages during the cycle where the first PTOC operates.
The residual voltage at time of fault is the magnitude of the H1 value of the
residual voltage during the cycle where the first PTOC operates.
If voltage values exceed the measurement range, then the over-range quality flag
is set.
• Phase voltage maximum: 4 Un
• Residual voltage maximum: 4 Un
If one channel is not available, because of the configuration of CT sensors, its
value is fixed to 0.
Voltage channels (line to neutral) are always saved. When the VT sensor is not
wired (single phase) or is wired to measure a line to line voltage, the calculated
line to neutral voltage is used.
An additional variable FltMMXU.ClcExp is needed to signal to the Head Unit that
the other data (voltages and currents harmonic 1) is ready. This variable is
published in the same execution cycle than the publication of the current and
voltage values.

NT00378–EN–10 303
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Fault Current Detection Indication and Tripping Settings on the

SC160 module
Here is an overview of the possible settings for fault current detection and
protection:

Menus in Settings page Fault current type Available Process mode selected for 2 parameter setting
detection menus protection each protection instance in groups in the ND
instances Function activation tab fault detection / Dir.
Fault protection
pages possible for
each instance
None
NDPhPTOC (50/51) Indication only

Non directional Fault FPI + Sectionalizer

current None
NDEfPTOC (50/51N) Indication only
Global setting FPI + Sectionalizer Setting group 1 or
>>Tripping control tab
Setting group 2
>>Tripping disabled button(1) None
DPhPTOC (67) Indication only

Directional Fault FPI + Sectionalizer

current None
DEfPTOC (67N) Indication only
Indication
FPI + Sectionalizer
None

NDPhPTOC (50/51) Indication only

Tripping
Non directional Fault
current None

NDEfPTOC (50/51N) Indication only

Global setting Tripping

Setting group 1 or
>>Tripping control tab
Setting group 2
>>Tripping enabled button None

DPhPTOC (67) Indication only

Tripping
Directional Fault
Current None
DEfPTOC (67N) Indication only
Tripping
Tripping

(1) In gray rows, functions available when tripping is disabled.

Tripping Control Tab

Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Global Fault settings page.

304 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Voltage absence

Tripping Yes • Yes Defines whether tripping protection mode is enabled or not for all fault
enabled • No protections. “Yes” to enable tripping protection.
NOTE: Tripping cannot be enabled with a VPIS–V3 sensor type.

Enable lock out Yes • Yes Defines if tripping lockout function is enabled. "Yes" to enable Tripping lock
• No out.
Refer to Tripping Lock Out Management, page 292

Setting Group Tab

In the Setting Group tab you can select the parameter setting group to apply for
the fault detection type. Two groups of parameter setting can be defined, and you
can switch from Setting 1 to Setting 2 as necessary.
In this tab you can also choose if settings can be changed by protocol or not.
Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Global Fault settings page, Setting group tab

Non-Directional Fault Current Detection and Tripping Protection

Description
In this section:
• ANSI 50/51 Phase (PhPTOC) Overcurrent Description, page 306
• ANSI 50N/51N Earth Fault (EfPTOC) and Sensitive Earth Fault (SEfPTOC)
Description, page 307
• Non-Directional Fault Current Detection and Tripping Protection Parameter
Setting, page 309

NT00378–EN–10 305
T300 SC160 Module Settings

ANSI 50/51 Phase (PhPTOC) Overcurrent Description for SC160 Module

This fault current detection is based on the fundamental component of the rms
current on the 3 phases (types A and D CT connection configurations) and on the
2 phases (type B CT connection configuration). Detection is activated if 1, 2, or all
3 phases reach the operating threshold. Fault current detection is delayed. The
time delay can be definite time (DT) or inverse time (IDMT) according to the
curves indicated in the table below.
2 groups of settings are available. It is possible to change over from one group of
settings to the other during operation as follows:
• Manually in the Substation page in the Web server
• Remotely via the SCADA system
The table below describes the ANSI 50/51 characteristics for both uses on SC150
and SC160 modules. Specificities for each module are indicated.
Each instance has its own specific parameters for each group of settings. The 3
instances can operate simultaneously with different settings.

ANSI 50/51 Characteristics

Number of instances 3
Groups of settings 2

Logical node name PhPTOCx (x = instance number)

Indication only Indication of faulted phases A, B, C (*)

Phase fault detected: instance 1, 2, or 3
FPI + Sectionalizer
• No
• Indication only: the instance is used for fault detection, but not in the
sectionalizer. A fault detected by the instance will be indicated, but ignored by
the sectionalizer.
• FPI + sectionalizer: the instance is used both by the FPI and the sectionalizer.

Fault current tripping (only available on the SC160 Tripping on phase fault: instance 1, 2 and 3
module when Tripping protection is “enabled”).

Parameter Setting (For Each Instance)

Instance 1 • No
Instance 2 • Indication only: the instance is used for fault detection, but not in the
sectionalizer. A fault detected by the instance will be indicated, but ignored by
Instance activation Instance 3 the sectionalizer.
• FPI + sectionalizer: the instance is used both by the FPI and the sectionalizer.
• Fault current tripping (only available on the SC160 module when Tripping
protection is “enabled”).

Instantaneous (on SC160 Instance 1, 2, and 3

module)

IEC definite time (DT)

Inverse definite minimum

time (IDMT):
• IEC normal inverse
time/A
Detection mode • IEC very inverse time/
(curve type) B
• IEC extremely Instance 1, 2, and 3
inverse/C
• IEEE moderately
inverse time
• IEEE very inverse
time
• IEEE extremely
inverse time

306 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Parameter Setting (For Each Instance)

Overcurrent DT or Instantaneous
threshold
IDMT
See parameter settings table, page 309
Acknowledge time DT or Instantaneous
.
IDMT
Reset time DT or Instantaneous
Inrush filter All instances Active or inactive
Cold load pickup All instances See parameter settings table, page 309
.
(*): Phase B fault indication is not available with type B CT connection.

Example detection curve with several instances:

• Instance 1: Inactive:
• Instance 2: Active/IEC inverse time/A (IDMT)
• Instance 3: Active/IEC definite time (DT)
Time (second)

100

Tripping curve
10 instance 2

1
Tripping curve
instance 3
0.1

0.01
0 1 Is instance 2 2 3 Is instance 3 4 5
1.2 In 3.5 In I/In

ANSI 50N/51N Earth Fault (EfPTOC) and Sensitive Earth Fault (SEfPTOC) Description
for SC160 Module
Ground fault detection is based on residual current values measured by a core
balance CT (type B, C or D connection configuration) or calculated from the
currents of all 3 phases (types A and D connection configuration).
Type D connection configuration allows 2 ways of detecting ground fault currents:
• By measuring the current from the 3 p hase CTs
• By measuring the current from 1 core balance CT (for greater accuracy)
NOTE: It is still possible to define by configuration a ground fault
measurement obtained by adding the 3 phase CTs together, even if a core
balance CT is available, knowing that this does not really make sense, as this
configuration does not provide the most accurate results.
Detection is activated if the residual current reaches the threshold defined by
configuration.
This is delayed. The time delay can be definite time (DT) or inverse time
(IDMT) according to the curves indicated in the table below.

ANSI 50N/51N Characteristics

Number of instances 3 available instances for EfPTOC (capable of operating simultaneously with different
settings)
Only one instance available for SEfPTOC

Groups of settings 2

Logical node name • EfPTOC (x = instance number)

• SEfPTOC
Earth fault detected
Fault current indication only Cross-country fault detected: instance 3 Generic phase fault indication
Indication of faulted phases A, B, C (*) Phase fault detected: instance 1, 2, or 3
• No

NT00378–EN–10 307
T300 SC160 Module Settings

ANSI 50N/51N Characteristics

• Indication only: the instance is used for fault detection, but not in the sectionalizer. A
fault detected by the instance will be indicated, but ingnored by the sectionalizer.
FPI + Sectionalizer
• FPI + sectionalizer: the instance is used both by the FPI and the sectionalizer.
Fault current tripping protection (only
available on SC160 when Tripping protection
is set Enabled)

Tripping on Phase
fault: instance 1, 2
and 3
Parameter Setting (For Each Instance)

Instance 1 Activation of the instance for detecting phase-to-phase fault currents

• No
• Indication only: the instance is used for fault detection, but not in the sectionalizer. A
Instance activation fault detected by the instance will be indicated, but ignored by the sectionalizer.
• FPI + sectionalizer: the instance is used both by the FPI and the sectionalizer.
Instance 2
• Fault current tripping (only available on the SC160 module when Tripping protection
is “enabled”).
Instance 3
Ires (sum of all 3 phases)
Residual current acquisition
I0 (directly from the core balance CT)

Instantaneous
IEC definite time (DT)

Inverse definite
minimum time (IDMT):
• IEC normal
inverse time/A
• IEC very inverse
Detection mode time/B Instance 1, 2, and 3
(curve type)
• IEC extremely
inverse/C
• IEEE moderately
inverse time
• IEEE very
inverse time
• IEEE extremely
inverse time
Ground fault DT
threshold
IDMT
Acknowledge time DT See parameter settings table, page 309.

IDMT
Reset time DT
Inrush filter All instances Active or inactive
Cold load pickup All instances See parameter settings table, page 309.

(*): Instance 3 is dedicated to detect high fault currents. There is no value in using the inrush filter in this case, since inrush currents can
only be detected for lower fault currents.

308 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Non-Directional Fault Current Detection and Tripping Protection Parameter Setting

Configuring a PhPTOC instance Configuring a EfPTOC instance

Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Non- Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Non-
directional fault detectionpage ANSI 50/51 directional fault detection page, ANSI 50N/
51N

Parameters are the same in both Indication only or Tripping modes.

2 groups of settings can be defined. It is possible to change over from one group
of settings to the other during operation as follows:
• Manually in the Substation page in the Web server
• Remotely via the SCADA system
Each instance has its own parameters for each group of settings. The 3 instances
can operate simultaneously with different settings.

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Function Activation – PhPTOC: Phase Over-current
Instance 1, None • None • Indication only: Activation of instance 1, 2 or 3 for detecting phase-to-phase fault
2 or 3 • Indication only currents
enabled
• Tripping • Tripping: Activation of instance 1, 2 or 3 for detecting phase-to-phase fault
currents and tripping protection

Function Activation – EfPTOC: Earth Fault / SEfPTOC: Sensitive Earth Fault

Instance 1, None • None • Indication only: Activation of instance 1, 2 or 3 for detecting phase-to-phase fault
2 or 3 • Indication only currents
enabled
• Tripping • Tripping: Activation of instance 1, 2 or 3 for detecting phase-to-phase fault
currents and tripping protection

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Setting Group 1 or 2 – PhPTOC Instance 1, 2, or 3

Operating IEC • Instantaneous Choice of the type of standardized IEC or IEEE curve to apply to the selected instance
curve type defi- • IEC definite time for:
nite • detecting (Indication only) phase-to-phase fault currents
time • IEC normal
inverse • and tripping protection (Tripping), for settings group 1 or 2.
• IEC very inverse
• IEC extremely
inverse
• IEEE extremely
inverse
• IEEE very inverse
• IEEE moderately
inverse

NT00378–EN–10 309
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Threshold 100 • Instantaneous Minimum threshold for detecting phase-to-phase fault currents, and tripping protection.
value (A) • DT The current must be detected above this threshold for a longer time than the Operate
delay time to validate the presence of a fault.
• IDMT
(increment = 1) DT or instantaneous for Detection only
• from 0.02 In (or 2 A – highest value to be used) to 10 In (FPI 1 A)
• from 0.02 In (or 2 A – highest value to be used) to 4 In (FPI 5 A)

DT or instantaneous for Tripping

• from 0.1 In (or 2 A – highest value to be used) to 10 In

IDMT for Detection only

• from 0.02 In (or 2 A – highest value to be used) to 2.4 In (FPI 1A)
• from 0,02 In (or 2 A – highest value to be used) to In (FPI 5 A)

IDMT for Tripping

• from 0.1 In (or 2 A – highest value to be used) to 2.4 In

Operate 100 • Instantaneous: 0 Minimum time for which the detected current must be greater than the phase-to-phase
delay time • DT: 50- Threshold value to validate the fault current.
(ms) 300,000 ms for all Constraint: Depending Time curves are truncated at the minimum between the
instances dynamic of acquisition (1) and 20 Is, and replaced by a DT curve.
Depending Time curves are truncated for a delay lower than 20 ms and replaced by a
• IDMT: 100- DT curve.
12,500 ms
(increment = 1)

Reset 0 0 ; 50-300000 ms Minimum time for which the current must pass and remain below the fault current
delay time (increment = 1) detection threshold to reset the Operate delay time. For the period when the current is
(ms) below the threshold, the Operate delay time maintains its value, as long as there is no
reset. This time is incremented again if the current exceeds the threshold. This reset
time is inactive once the fault current has been validated.
Constraint: When reset time equal to 0, a Tmini reset time equal to 35 ms is used
whatever the power frequency cycle, in order to limit the impact of the CT saturation

Inrush filter No • Instance 1, 2 and Activation of the algorithm for detecting transformer inrush
enabled 3:
◦ No
◦ Yes
Cold load No • Instance 1, 2 and Define if CLPU is enabled for ANSI50/51.
pickup 3:
enabled ◦ No
◦ Yes
Cold load 150 % From 100 % to 999 % Define the value of the multiplying factor applied on Is threshold for ANSI50/51.
pickup
multiplier

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Setting Group 1 or 2 – EfPTOC / SEfPTOC Instance 1, 2, or 3

Io No • Instance 1, 2 and Activation of the I0 current measurement by core balance CT for ground fault detection.
measured 3: If this option is not enabled, the residual current is calculated by adding together the
◦ No currents from the 3 phase CTs. Note: This parameter is only configurable for a type D
connection configuration with core balance CT.
◦ Yes
Operating IEC • Instantaneous Choice of the type of standardized IEC or IEEE curve to apply to the selected instance
curve type defi- • IEC definite time for detecting zero sequence fault currents for settings group 1 or 2.
nite
time • IEC normal inverse
• IEC very inverse
• IEC extremely
inverse
• IEEE extremely
inverse
• IEEE very inverse
• IEEE moderately
inverse
Threshold 100 • Instantaneous Minimum threshold for detecting zero sequence fault currents. The current must be
value (A) • DT detected above this threshold for a longer time than the Operate delay time to validate
the presence of a fault current.
• IDMT

310 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Operate 100 • Instantaneous Minimum time for which the detected current must be greater than the zero sequence
delay time • DT: 50-300,000 ms Threshold value to validate the fault current.
(ms) for all instances
• IDMT: 100-12,500
ms
Reset delay 0 0 ; 50-300,000 ms Minimum time for which the current must pass and remain below the fault current
time (ms) detection threshold to reset the Operate delay time. For the period when the current is
below the threshold, the Operate delay time maintains its value, as long as there is no
reset. This time is incremented again if the current exceeds the threshold. This reset
time is inactive once the fault has been validated.
Constraint: When reset time equal to 0, a Tmini reset time equal to 35 ms is used
whatever the power frequency cycle, in order to limit the impact of the CT saturation.

Inrush filter No • Instance 1, 2 and Activation of the inrush current filter function.
enabled 3:
NOTE: The inrush filter is only valid for an I0 current calculated using the sum of
◦ No the 3 phase CTs.
◦ Yes
Cold load No • Instance 1, 2 and Define if CLPU is enabled for ANSI50N/51N.
pickup 3:
enabled ◦ No
◦ Yes
Cold load 150- From 100 % to 999 % Define the value of the multiplying factor applied on Is threshold for ANSI50N/51N.
pickup %
multiplier

Instantaneous and Definite time (DT) I0 measured

Min Max
FPI (tripping CT 0.008 In0 Or 0.4 A 3.5 In0 FPI 1 A
disabled)
1.6 In0 FPI 5 A
Tripping CT 3.5 In0 FPI 1 A
enabled

Instantaneous and Definite time (DT) I0 sum

Min Max
FPI (tripping CT EfPTOC, FPI 1 A / FPI 5 A: 0.02 In 3.5 In FPI 1 A
disabled) or 2 A
1.6 In FPI 5 A
SEfPTOC, FPI 1 A / FPI
5 A: 0.008 In or 2 A
Tripping CT 0.1 In 3.5 In FPI 1 A
enabled

Depending time (IDMT) I0 measured:

Min Max
FPI (tripping CT 0.008 In0 Or 0.4 A In0
disabled)

Tripping CT
enabled

Depending time (IDMT) I0 sum

Min Max
FPI (tripping CT EfPTOC, FPI 1 A / FPI 5 A: 0.02 In In
disabled) or 2 A

SEfPTOC, FPI 1 A / FPI

5 A: 0.008 In or 2 A
Tripping CT 0.1 In
enabled

NT00378–EN–10 311
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Directional Fault Current Detection and Tripping Protection on the SC160

Directional fault current detection uses the following ANSI detection standards:
• (ANSI 67) Directional phase overfault current detection
• (ANSI 67) Directional phase overfault current detection and tripping
protection on SC160 module only
• (ANSI 67N) Directional ground (earth) fault current detection
• (ANSI 67N) Directional ground (earth) fault current detection and tripping
protection on SC160 module only
According to the global tripping capability configuration (enabled/disabled), the
SC160 uses the following algorithms:
• the same ANSI 67 algorithm for managing:
◦ directional phase fault indication or
◦ Circuit Breaker tripping capability
• different ANSI 67N algorithms for managing:
◦ directional earth/ground fault indication or
◦ Circuit Breaker tripping capability
Both functions (ANSI 67N Detection and ANSI 67N Tripping) operate with the
residual current measured with core balanced CT or computed from the three
phases currents.
With the current acquisition type D (3 phases CT and core balance CT) both
residual current measured or computed can be selected.
◦ Tripping capability enabled:
The protection function (TRIP) and fault indication (FPI) use I0 vector
projection. This projection method is suitable for radial feeders in resistive,
isolated or compensated neutral systems.
This method combines a transient criteria with a permanent criteria
according to the settings, depending on the neutral system type.
◦ Tripping capability disabled:
The fault current detection (FPI) combines a ground fault detection with a
fault current direction indication. The fault current is taken into account if
the residual voltage exceeds the threshold defined by configuration and
the direction of the fault current is determined by projecting the residual
current onto the residual voltage during the transient phase.

Directional Fault Current Detection and Tripping Protection Description (Tripping

disabled)
If Tripping Protection disabled (in Global setting menu), available modes:
Indication only or FPI+Sectionalizer
Parameter setting:
• Parameters are identical in both Indication only and FPI+Sectionalizer
modes.
• The ANSI 67 parameter setting (if Tripping Protection mode disabled), is the
same on the SC150 or SC160 module, except the additional Cold load
pickup parameters on the SC160 module.
For description, refer to: ANSI 67 parameter setting on SC150/SC160
module, page 220.

312 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

• The ANSI 67N parameter setting (if Tripping Protection mode disabled), is
the same on the SC150 or SC160 module, except the additional Cold load
pickup parameters, and different configuration range for two parameters on
the SC160 module.
For description, refer to: ANSI 67N parameter setting on SC150/SC160
module, page 224.

Directional Fault Current Detection and Tripping Protection (Tripping enabled)

If Tripping Protection is enabled, the available modes are Indication only or
Tripping protection.
Directional fault current detection uses the following ANSI detection standards:
• Directional phase overfault current detection indication (Indication only) or,
detection and tripping protection (Tripping) (ANSI 67)
• Directional ground fault current detection indication (Indication only) or,
detection and tripping protection (Tripping) (ANSI 67N)
The characteristics for each ANSI code are given below.
Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Directional fault detection page.

This page allows you to define:

• Which process mode (Detection only or Tripping Protection) is activated on
each protection, and on which instance.
Protections/Function:
◦ Phase over-current
◦ Earth fault
• Process applied:
◦ None
◦ Indication only
◦ Tripping
Refer to:
• ANSI 67 Directional Phase (DPhPTOC) Fault Current Parameter Setting on
SC160 module, page 316
• ANSI 67N Directional Earth (DEfPTOC) Fault Current Parameter Setting for
Detection and Tripping Protection, page 321

NT00378–EN–10 313
T300 SC160 Module Settings

ANSI 67 Directional Phase Overcurrent Description for SC160 Module (Tripping

enabled)
On the SC160 module, the ANSI 67 protection function has directional phase
overcurrent fault detection indication and tripping capability.
The contribution of the ANSI 67 function to the protection control logic or detection
logic is set via configuration.
ANSI 67 protection function for detection indication and tripping is activated only
when the VT connection mode settings is “3 phase ABC”.
In a looped network where a fault current is supplied with power at both ends, but
also in a network with several power sources, a method of detection that is
sensitive to the direction of the fault current flow is required to be able to locate
and indicate the fault current direction selectively: this is the role of directional
phase overcurrent detectors.
Fault current detection operates if the phase overcurrent function is enabled for at
least 2 of the 3 phases. The fault current direction (network or busbar) will also be
determined and associated with this detection. The detector indicates the phases
in which the fault current has occurred and the direction of the fault current.
Direction convention for a directional fault current:

Busbar direction Network direction

• Busbar direction: fault current from the busbar to the network (fault located on
the busbar side) (=Backward)
• Network direction: from the network to the busbar (fault located on the
network side) (=Forward)
To enable detection, the residual current must reach the threshold defined by
configuration. Detection is delayed. The time delay can be definite time (DT) or
inverse time (IDMT) according to the curves indicated in the ANSI 67
characteristics table.
2 groups of settings are available. It is possible to change over from one group of
settings to the other during operation as follows:
• Manually in the Substation page in the Web server
• Remotely via the SCADA system
Direction of Fault Current
The direction of the fault current is determined by the comparison between the
phase current and the polarization voltage. The detector therefore requires both
current and voltage data. The direction is classed as either busbar or network
according to the direction convention defined opposite. Polarization voltage is the
phase-to-phase voltage in quadrature with the current for cos φ= 1 (phase-to-
phase voltage creating a 90° angle in relation to the current).
The table below indicates the polarization voltage used to determine the direction
as a function of the current on each phase (only phases 1 and 3 are used in the
case of type B CT connection):

Measured current I1 I2 I3
Polarization voltage U23 U31 U12

Example with 1 phase: current and polarization voltage (U32 in this case)

314 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

The current vector plane on 1 phase is divided into 2 semi-planes separated by a

boundary line. These 2 semi-planes correspond to 2 zones: the network zone and
the busbar zone.
The characteristic angle φ is the angle between the perpendicular to the boundary
line between these 2 zones and the polarization voltage. The value of this angle
(which is configurable) determines the position of this boundary line in the vector
plane.
The direction of the fault current is determined by the presence of current in the
zone in which this vector plane is located:
• Current in the busbar zone: the fault current is in the direction of the busbar
• Current in the network zone: the fault current is in the direction of the network
This rule of positioning of current in the vector plane depends on the value of the
angle α between the current and the polarization voltage.

Example of fault current on phase 1, in the Example of fault current on phase 1, in the
network zone, with characteristic angle φ = 30°: network zone, with characteristic angle φ = 45°:

I1
I1
α1
α1
θ = 45˚
θ = 30˚
U32
U32

Voltage Memory
In the event of a 3-phase fault current close to the busbar, the level of each
polarization voltage may not be sufficient (close to zero) to detect the fault current
correctly. The fault current detector therefore uses a voltage memory to detect the
fault current reliably.
To help ensure that the voltage memory is only used for a 3-phase fault current,
the detector verifies that at least 2 phase-to-phase voltages are close to zero.
NOTE: If a fault current occurs just after the MV network is energized, the
direction of the fault current cannot be indicated by the voltage memory. In this
case, where the voltage is zero just before the fault current, the voltage
memory is not reliable for determining the direction. The fault current will still
be detected and indicated by the detector, however.

ANSI 67 Characteristics
Number of instances 2 (capable of operating simultaneously with different settings)

Groups of settings 2

Logical node name DPhPTOCx (x = instance number)

Fault current indication Type of fault current detected

NT00378–EN–10 315
T300 SC160 Module Settings

ANSI 67 Characteristics
Phase with fault current condition: instance 1, 2 with indication of direction

FPI + Sectionalizer Generic phase fault indication Indication of faulted phases A, B, C (*)

Phase fault detected: instance 1 or 2

Fault current tripping protection (only available on Tripping on phase fault: instance 1 and 2
the SC160 module when Tripping protection is
enabled)

Cold Load Pickup Enabled (Yes / No)

Parameter Setting (For Each Instance)

Instance 1 Active or inactive

Instance activation
Instance 2 Active or inactive
IEC definite time (DT) Instance 1, 2, and 3

Inverse definite minimum

time (IDMT):
• IEC normal inverse
time/A
• IEC very inverse time/
Detection mode B
(curve type) • IEC extremely inverse/ Instance 1 and 2
C
• IEEE moderately
inverse time
• IEEE very inverse time
• IEEE extremely
inverse time
Overcurrent DT
threshold
IDMT
Acknowledge time DT See parameter setting table, page 316.

IDMT
Reset time DT
Inrush filter Active or inactive
Characteristic angle 30, 45, or 60° (default: 45°)

ANSI 67 Directional Phase (DPhPTOC) Fault Current Parameter Setting on SC160

module (Tripping enabled)

Configuring a Phase fault current (DPhPTOC Configuring a Phase fault current (DPhPTOC
instance) Detection only instance) Tripping

316 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

The following table describes parameters when selecting Tripping enabled in

Global settings and Indication only or Tripping selected in Function
Activation tab.

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Function Activation – DPhPTOC: Phase Over-current

Instance 1 or 2 None • None Activation of instance 1 or 2 for detecting phase-to-phase fault currents

• Indication only
• Tripping

Parameter Default Configuration Description Only

range for
Trip-
ping

Setting Group 1 or 2 – PhPTOC Instance 1 or 2

Operating curve type IEC definite • Instantaneous Choice of the type of standardized IEC or IEEE algorithm to apply
time to the selected instance for detecting phase-to-phase fault currents
• IEC definite for settings group 1 or 2.
time (DT)
• IDMT:
◦ IEC normal
inverse
◦ IEC very
inverse
◦ IEC
extremely
invers
◦ IEEE
extremely
inverse
◦ IEEE very
inverse
◦ IEEE
moderately
inverse
Threshold value (A) 100 • DT Minimum threshold for detecting phase-to-phase fault currents, and
tripping protection. The current must be detected above this
• IDMT threshold for a longer time than the Operate delay time to validate
the presence of a fault.

DT for Detection only

• from 0.02 In (or 2 A – highest value to be used) to 10 In (FPI
1 A)
• from 0.02 In (or 2 A – highest value to be used) to 4 In (FPI
5 A)

DT for Tripping
X
• from 0.1 In (or 2 A – highest value to be used) to 10 In

IDMT for Detection only

• from 0.02 In (or 2 A – highest value to be used) to 2.4 In (FPI
1 A)
• from 0,02 In (or 2 A – highest value to be used) to In (FPI 5 A)

IDMT for Tripping

X
• from 0.1 In (or 2 A – highest value to be used) to 2.4 In

Operate delay time 100 Minimum time for which the detected current must be greater than
• DT: 50-
(ms) 300,000 ms the phase-to-phase Threshold value to validate the fault current.

• IDMT: 100-
12,500 ms

Reset delay time 0 Minimum time for which the current must pass and remain below
• 0
(ms) the fault current detection threshold to reset the Operate delay
• 50-300000 ms time. For the period when the current is below the threshold, the
Operate delay time maintains its value, as long as there is no
reset. This time is incremented again if the current exceeds the
threshold. This reset time is inactive once the fault current has
been validated.

NT00378–EN–10 317
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Parameter Default Configuration Description Only

range for
Trip-
ping

Do not define a reset time between 1 and 49 ms. When you choose
a reset time equal to 0, a reset time equal to 35 ms fixed is used
internally to limit the impact of the CT saturation.

Inrush filter enabled No • No Activation of the inrush current filter function

• Yes
Cold load pickup No • No Define if CLPU is enabled for ANSI 67.
enabled • Yes
Cold load pickup 150 % From 100 % to Define the value of the multiplying factor applied on Is threshold for
multiplier 999 % ANSI 67.

Characteristic angle 45 • 30° Choice of characteristic angle value. The characteristic angle is the
(degrees) • 45° angle between the perpendicular to the boundary line and the
magnitude of polarization (phase-to-phase voltage in quadrature
• 60° with the current for Cos φ=1). The value of the characteristic angle
determines the position of the boundary line defining the separation
between the busbar zone and the network zone (see the
description of the ANSI 67 function).

Tripping direction Forward • Backward Define the direction of the tripping zone. Only available if the
protection instance is configured in Tripping mode. X
• Forward

ANSI 67N Directional Earth (DEfPTOC) Fault Detection indication and Tripping
Protection Description (Tripping enabled)
The SC160 module can provide ANSI 67N protection function for earth
overcurrent directional fault protection and tripping capability. The contribution of
the ANSI 67N function to the protection control logic or detection logic is set via
configuration.
Protection tripping is activated according to the direction setting Forward or
Backward by instance.
ANSI 67 N protection function for detection and tripping is activated only when the
VT connection mode settings is “3 phase ABC”.
Earth fault protection is with selective tripping according to fault current direction.
The protection function uses I0 vector projection. This projection method is
suitable for radial feeders in resistive, isolated or compensated neutral systems.
Tripping direction
The direction of the residual current is qualified as busbar direction or line
direction according to the following convention:

Busbar direction Network direction

Busbar direction: fault current from the busbar to the network (fault located on
busbar side) (=Backward)
Network direction: from the network to the busbar (fault located on network side)
(=Forward)
The tripping zone is set for tripping in busbar zone or tripping in line zone.
The reverse zone is the zone for which the protection function does not trip.
The detection of current in the reverse zone is used for indication.

318 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

The function determines the projection of the residual current I0 on the

characteristic line, the position of which is determined by the setting of
characteristic angle θ0 in relation to the residual voltage. The projection value is
compared to the Is0 set point.
This protection function is suitable for radial feeders in resistive, isolated or
compensated neutral systems.
With compensated neutral systems, it is characterized by its capacity to detect
very brief, repetitive faults (recurrent faults). In the case of Petersen coils with no
additional resistance, fault detection under steady state conditions is not possible
due to the absence of active zero sequence current. The protection function uses
the transient current at the beginning of the fault to ensure tripping.
The θ0 = 0° setting is suitable for compensated or impedant neutral systems.
When this setting is selected, the parameter setting of the sector is used to reduce
the protection tripping zone to ensure its stability on fault-free feeders.
The protection function operates with the residual current measured at one of the
relay I0 inputs (operation with sum of three currents impossible). The protection
function is inhibited for residual voltages below the Vs0 set point. It implements a
definite time (DT) delay.
The tripping direction may be set at the busbar end or line end.
Each of the two units has two groups of settings. Switching to setting group A or B
can be carried out by a logic input or a remote control order, depending on the
settings.
Memory
The detection of recurrent faults is controlled by the time delay T0mem which
extends the transient pick-up information, thereby enabling the operation of the
definite time delay even with faults that are rapidly extinguished (≈ 2 ms) and
restrike periodically. Even when a Petersen coil with no additional resistance is
used, tripping is ensured due to fault detection during the transient fault
appearance. Detection is extended throughout the duration of the fault based on
the criterion V0 u V0mem, within the limit of T0mem. With this type of application,
T0mem must be greater than T (definite time delay).
Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N type 1 protection (characteristic angle Ɵ ≠ 0):

Is0

θ0
V0

Tripping
zone

Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N type 1 protection (characteristic angle Ɵ = 0°):

characteristic angle:
θ0 = 0°

sector

V0

Tripping Is0 set point

zone

NT00378–EN–10 319
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Block diagram

V1
V2 ∑
V3 V0 memory reset
V0 > Vs0 V0 V0 < V0mem

external VT

I0 measured I0 I0 cos (φ0 - θ0) < -Is0 busbar/ &

0 T0mem T 0
I0
or I0 sum φ0 I0 cos (φ0 - θ0) > Is0 line delayed
I0 cos (φ0 - θ0) < -0.8 Is0 choice memory output

pick-up signal and to logic discrimination

instantaneous output reverse zone

instantaneous output at 0.8 Is0

ANSI 67N tripping Characteristics

Number of instances 2 (capable of operating simultaneously with different

settings)

Groups of settings 2

Logical node name DEfPTOCx (x = instance number)

Parameter Setting (For Each Instance)

Instance 1 Active or inactive

Instance activation
Instance 2 Active or inactive
Ires (sum of all 3 phases)
Residual current acquisition
I0 (directly from the core balance CT)

Detection mode (curve type) IEC definite time (DT) Instance 1 and 2

Minimum residual voltage threshold DT

Acknowledge time DT See parameter setting table, page 321.

Reset time DT
Residual voltage peak threshold
See parameter setting table, page 321.
Residual current peak threshold

320 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

ANSI 67N Directional Earth (DEfPTOC) Fault Parameter Setting for Detection Indication
and Tripping Protection (Tripping enabled)
Description of parameters when Tripping enabled is selected in Global setting
and Tripping is selected in Function activation.
Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Directional fault detection page

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Function Activation – DEfPTOC Tripping: Earth Fault Current

Instance 1 or 2 Non- • None • Indication only: Activation of instance 1 or 2 for detecting phase-to-
e • Indication only phase fault currents

• Tripping • Tripping: Activation of instance 1 or 2 for detecting phase-to-phase

fault currents and tripping protection

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Setting Group 1 or 2 – DEfPTOC Tripping Instance 1 or 2

Io measured Yes • No Activation of the I0 current measurement by core balance CT for directional
• Yes ground fault detection. If this option is not enabled, the residual current is
calculated by adding the currents from the 3 phase CTs together.
NOTE: This parameter is only configurable for a type D connection
configuration with core balance CT.

Operating curve IEC IEC definite time This type of detection only uses the IEC definite time algorithm.
type defi-
nite
time
Operate delay time 100 50-300,000 ms Minimum time for which the detected voltage must be greater than the
(ms) (increment = 1) Minimum residual voltage threshold to validate the presence of a fault
current.
Minimum residual 10 2% - 80% Minimum value, as a percentage of the nominal voltage, above which the
voltage threshold (% (increment = 1) residual voltage activates fault current detection. The residual voltage must
nominal line be detected above this threshold (excluding during the transient phase) for a
voltage) longer time than the Operate delay time to validate the presence of a zero
sequence fault current.

NT00378–EN–10 321
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Cold load pickup No • No Define if CLPU is enabled for DEfPTOC (ANSI 67N) fault detection.
enabled • Yes
Cold load pickup 150- From 100 % to 999 % Define the value of the multiplying factor applied on Is threshold for ANSI
multiplier % 67N.

Tripping direction For- • Forward Define the direction of the tripping zone. Only available if protection instance
ward is configured in Tripping mode.
• Backward
Threshold value (A) 100 • I0 measured: Minimum threshold for detecting zero sequence fault currents. The current
From 0.008 In0 to must be detected above this threshold for a longer time than the Operate
3.5 In0 (CT) delay time to validate the presence of a fault current.
• I0 sum:
From 0.1 In to 3.5 In
(CT)

Characteristic angle 0° • -45° Define the orientation of the tripping angle.

(degrees) • 0°
• 15°
• 30°
• 45°
• 60°
• 90°
Desensitization area 86° • 86° Define the desensitization area of the protection. Only applied / accessible if
(degrees) Characteristic angle θo=0°.
• 83°
• 76°
Maximum time of 0 • 0 Maximum time during which the instantaneous bit is memorized.
memorization • From 0.05 s to 300 s
Minimum residual 0 • 0 Minimum value of the residual voltage for which the instantaneous bit is
voltage threshold for • 2% - 80% memorized.
memorization (%
nominal line
voltage)

322 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Fault Current Validation and Indication

Access via SC0x > Settings > Fault indication page.
The T300 offers several ways of indicating fault currents detected on the MV
network:
• Via the LEDs on the front panel of the SCxxx module: 2 "arrow" LEDs are lit
orange, red, or green depending on the indication phase or the type of
detection.
• Via an external LED.
• In the Substation Web server page: A red "flash" symbol is displayed for all
fault current types, accompanied by a red or green arrow to indicate the
direction of the fault current (for a directional fault current).
On the LEDs (front panel and external), fault currents (validated and confirmed)
can be indicated in different ways depending on the type of detection and the fault
current type:
• Ammetric detection: Flashing red for earth fault, Steady for cross-country or
phase-to-phase faults.
• Directional detection: Flashing red or green for earth faults, steady red or
green for other types of fault.
NOTE: On the LEDs on the front panel only, an orange indication phase
precedes the green or red indication. This phase corresponds to the fault
current confirmation wait time within which the fault current type is analyzed
(transient, or semi-permanent/permanent).

Fault Current Indication

The diagrams below illustrate the different indication phases for a potential fault
current. Note that these diagrams correspond to indication via LEDs on the front
panel, which is the most comprehensive method in terms of number of colors
represented, as it includes the orange indication phase that does not exist with the
other types of indication (via external LED or the Web server).
No indication of a non-validated (and therefore unconfirmed) transient fault current
on the front panel:

Network current
T_0: Fault validation time

ID
IN

T_0
Network voltage

Present

Non Pres.

Fault indication

Yes

No

NT00378–EN–10 323
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Indication of a validated but not confirmed transient fault current on the front
panel:
Network current Ts : Operated delay time
T_0: Fault validation time
ID T_3: Fault confirmation time

IN

Ts T_0
Network voltage

Present

T_3

Non Pres.

Fault indication

Blink Orange
Yes

No

Indication of a permanent or semi-permanent validated and confirmed fault current

on the front panel:
Network current
Ts: operate delay time
ID T_0: Fault validation time
T_3: Fault confirmation time
IN
T_70: Primary CB recloser
maximum operation time

Ts T_0
Network voltage

Present

T_3 T_70

Non Pres.

Fault indication

Blink Orange Green/Red

Yes

No

Indication of a permanent or semi-permanent validated and confirmed fault current

on the front panel, reset by a power return:
Network current Ts: Operate delay time
T_0: Fault validation time
ID T_3: Fault confirmation time
T_70: Primary CB recloser maximum operation time
IN T_Res 1: Time before resetting indication if network present

Ts T_0
Network voltage

Present

T_3 T_70

Non Pres.

T_Res 1
Fault indication

Blink Orange Green/Red

Yes

No

324 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Indication of a permanent validated and confirmed fault current on the front panel,
reset by the network non presence delay time:
Network current
Ts: operate delay time
T_0: Fault validation time
ID T_3: Fault confirmation time
T_70: Primary CB recloser maximum operation time
IN
T_Res 2: Time before resetting indication if network not present

Ts T_0
Network voltage

Present

T_3 T_70

Non Pres.

Fault indication

Blink Orange Green/Red

Yes

T_Res 2

No

The principle for these diagrams remains the same for indication via external LED,
except for the fact that there is no orange phase and the red (or green) indication
is therefore given at the start of the confirmation phase.
Instructions on how to configure external LED are given in the T300 Quick Start
Guide (NT00383). Refer to this document for more information.
In the Web page, the indication principle is the same as for the external LED.
See the parameter settings table for a detailed explanation of the time delays
mentioned in these diagrams (T_0, T_3, T_70, etc.).

Resetting a Fault Current

A fault current indication is reset as follows:
• Automatically when power is restored (if the corresponding option is enabled)
• Automatically at the end of the reset delay time, if the voltage remains absent
for the duration of this time delay
• Manually by pressing the button on the front panel of the HU250 module
(general reset for all channels where a fault current has been detected)
• Manually from the Web server, using the Reset button on the Substation
page
• Remotely from the SCADA system, via the communication protocol.

Fault Current Validation (and Indication)

A detected fault current is generally validated by the non-presence detection of the
MV network, if the T300 configured for this purpose.
The MV network absence/presence detection is also used by the T300 to indicate
the fault current passage, by various means (for example LEDs on the front panel,
or indications on the Monitoring > Substation page).
Absence/presence detection of the MV network can be done by monitoring current
or the voltage (parameter FPI network presence and confirmation mode). You can
also choose not to monitor current or voltage of the MV network for fault
confirmation. In this case, the fault is indicated if the threshold is exceeded,
without any further validation.

NT00378–EN–10 325
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Some automation functions might also use the MV presence/absence detection as

a start condition for a reclose cycle or a fault current isolation (for example ATS, if
present in the unit).
This table summarizes the signaling/indication possibilities proposed by the T300
for indicating the MV network absence/presence, depending whether current or
voltage is used for detection.

FPI IHM Web server Data pages

Network Absence/Presence
By current Yes No No Yes

By voltage Yes Yes Yes Yes

Detection of MV current absence/ Detection of MV voltage presence/

presence non-presence by the measures
ToA: Operate delay time – current ToP: Operate delay time – voltage
absence (by default: 50 ms) presence (by default: 65 ms)
ToP: Operate delay time – current ThP: Hold delay time – voltage
presence (by default: 50 ms) presence (fixed at 40 ms)

MV network current MV network voltage

Hysteresis

5A 70%
4A 70% +
Hysteresis

ToA
Current absence Voltage presence

Yes Yes

No No

ToP ToP ThP

Current presence Voltage non presence

Yes Yes

No No

Detection of Network Absence/Presence by the Current

The detection of MV network absence/presence by the observation of the current
is carried out only by the measurement of the MV currents from CTs. Configurable
thresholds based on these measurements are used to determine the level at
which the current is detected to be present or absent and for how long, and the
level at which these detections were canceled out and for how long.
The current is considered to be present if the 3 phases meet the presence criteria
defined by the configured thresholds and time delays. The current is considered to
be absent if at least 1 phase meets the absence criteria defined by the configured
thresholds and time delays. The current is considered to be non-present if at least
one of the phases no longer meets the presence criteria defined by the configured
thresholds and time delays. The current is considered to be non-absent if the 3
phases no longer meets the absence criteria defined by the configured thresholds
and time delays.
Network current absence detection for validation of a fault current uses the
following standardized ANSI standard: ANSI 37 (undercurrent detection).
NOTE: If current is chosen as the source for validating a fault current, a
detected fault current is validated by the non-presence of the MV current and
not by the absence of the MV current.

326 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

ANSI 37 Characteristics
Number of instances 1 (presence/absence)

Groups of settings 1

Detection mode Definite time (DT)

Logical node name AbsPTUC x (x = instance number)

Hysteresis reset detection 0,2 % x In

Parameter Setting (For Each Instance)

Operation mode On all 3 phases

Detection threshold
See parameter table, page 328.
Time delays

Detection of Network Presence/Absence by the Voltage

Detection of MV network presence/absence by the observation of the voltage can
be carried out in several ways:
• By the information from the digital input DI6 of the SC150 module (MV
network presence via an external voltage presence relay, e.g. VD23)
• By the information from the digital input DI5 of the HU250 module (main
supply presence/absence information via the PS50 power supply)
• By the measurement resulting from the voltage sensors. Configurable
thresholds related to these measurements define whether the MV voltage is
considered to be present and for what duration this detection is considered to
be not present (see diagram attached). The voltage is considered as present
(or absent) if all the measured phases (1, 2 or 3 phases according to
configuration) satisfy the criteria of presence (or absence) defined by the
thresholds and time delays. The voltage is considered as not present (or not
absent) if at least one phase no longer checks the presence (or-absence)
criteria defined by the thresholds and time delays.
NOTE: If voltage is chosen as the source for validating a fault current, a fault
current detected is validated by the non-presence of the MV network voltage
and not by the absence of the MV network voltage. Note that these voltage
presence thresholds are for the most common with those configured in the
Voltage presence/absence page.

NT00378–EN–10 327
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Fault Current Validation and Indication Parameter Setting

Setting Fault Mode and Timeouts
Access via SC0x > Settings > Fault indication page, Fault mode and timeouts
tab.

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Fault current Mode and Timeouts tab
FPI network Cur- • None Choice of source to define presence of the MV network and to enable a fault
presence and rent • Voltage current detection confirmation (confirmation by absence of current and non-
confirmation mode presence of voltage). None disables fault current confirmation. In this case,
• Current detection of a fault current only is sufficient to validate and indicate it.

It is advisable to enable fault current detection confirmation by either

current or voltage to help ensure that only fault currents detected by the
upstream protection device are confirmed.

Voltage presence AC • Measured The voltage source can be acquired in several ways for the fault current
source power • Digital input indication:
supply
• AC power supply • Measured: Using the measurement from the voltage sensors
• Digital input: Using the information from the digital input DI6 of the
SC150 module (via external voltage relay)
• AC power supply: Using the information from the digital input DI5 of the
HU250 module (via the PS50 module). Parameter only available for the
options FPI network presence and confirmation mode = Voltage.

Fault validation 3,000 0-300,000 for SC150 Observation window within which the MV network (via observation of the
time: time to wait for current or voltage) must be non present to validate a fault current that has just
network absence 0-10,000 for SC160 been detected. This validation is used to filter self-extinguishing type faults
(ms) (T_0) and only validate those fault that have caused the upstream circuit breaker or
recloser to trip. Fault current indication starts the moment the fault current is
validated.
Automatically reset Yes • Yes If enabled, this option is used to clear the permanent fault current indication,
permanent fault • No once the MV network power has been restored, at the end of the Time before

328 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Fault current Mode and Timeouts tab
indications if resetting permanent fault indications if network present delay. On
network present networks with "non-sustained" fault currents, the fact that the upstream circuit
breaker or recloser has reclosed means that the fault current has
disappeared. It is therefore generally no longer necessary to indicate it.

Fault indication Net- • Network present • Network present: The permanent fault can be reset with an indication
reset mode work of “Network present”, once the MV network power has been restored.
• Network present
pres- AND switch • Network present AND switch closed: This condition can be completed
ent closed by a “switch closed” condition, to cover cases where automation system
• Network present (such as sectionalizer) has opened the switch. Therefore, even if the MV
And switch closed, network has been restored, the fault can be still present downstream
OR current and must be still indicated.
present • Network present And switch closed, OR current present: The third
case is to add a security, for the case the network present indication
would fail: a current present indication normally corresponds to network
present and switch closed

Time before 240 1-1440 This time delay corresponds to a maximum delay (timeout) for indicating a
resetting permanent (increment = 1) permanent fault current if the MV network is still non present. It is important to
fault indications if leave the indication active for a certain length of time to be able to locate the
network not present fault on the MV network. However, indication stops at the end of this timeout,
(mn) (T_Res 2) primarily to save battery power.

Time before 0 0-300 Filter time before clearing indication of a permanent fault current, when MV
resetting permanent (increment = 1) network presence is detected again. This time delay is used to help ensure
fault indications if that the MV network is in a stable state and that no other fault current has
network present (s) occurred, before being able to clear the fault current indication.
(T_Res 1)

Time before 1 0-300 This time delay corresponds to a maximum delay (timeout) for indicating a
resetting transient (increment = 1) transient fault current. Indication stops at the end of this timeout.
fault indications (s)

Enable cross- No • Yes This option is used to enable detection of "double" fault, i.e. 2 simultaneous
country fault • No phase-to-ground fault on 2 phases and at 2 different locations on the network.
detection
NOTE: Double fault are only available on instance 3 of a zero sequence
fault (in ammetric fault current detection).

Setting Recloser Parameters

Access via SC0x > Settings > Fault indication page, Recloser Parameters tab.

NT00378–EN–10 329
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Recloser Parameters
Primary CB recloser 0 0-300 (increment = 1) After a fault current has been detected on the MV network, this time delay
maximum operation corresponds to the maximum wait time for the reclose cycle of the upstream
time (ms) (T_70) protection device. This time delay is used to categorize the detected fault
current as a permanent or semi-permanent fault current depending on
whether it occurs during the delay period or not (see the "Fault current
Detection" section). Setting a value of "0" disables this time delay. In this case,
the fault current is categorized as a permanent fault current at the end of the
Fault confirmation time.
NOTE: This time delay must be set to a value other than "0" to be able to
use the Sectionalizer automation function.
Fault confirmation 3,000 0-10,000 Confirmation time corresponding to an observation window within which
time: delay before power must not be restored on the MV network after a fault current has been
re-checking for validated. The fault is indicated by the color orange on the LEDs on the front
network absence panel during this confirmation phase. This stops if the fault current is not
(ms) (T_3) confirmed during this confirmation window. Once the time delay expires,
confirmation is enabled and the fault remains indicated (although now either
red or green) until the reset time becomes active.

Selecting the Active Setting Group

Access via SC0x > Settings > Global fault settings page, Setting group tab.

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Active setting group

Active setting group 1 1 or 2 Choice of group of parameter settings to apply to fault detection. Each group
includes specific thresholds, time delays, and parameters (see the sections
relating to ammetric and directional fault detection).

330 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Setting Voltage Presence / Absence Parameters

Access via SC0x > Settings > Fault indication page, Voltage presence tab.

NT00378–EN–10 331
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Voltage presence

Start threshold (%) 70 10-100 (increment = 1) Definition of the measured MV network voltage threshold, as a percentage of
the nominal voltage, above which the MV network voltage is considered to be
present.
NOTE: Configure the threshold taking into account hysteresis (7 %).
Consult the glossary for the definition of hysteresis.
Parameter available only for the case Voltage presence source = Measured.

Operate delay time 65 0-300000 (increment = Period within which the voltage must be above the Start threshold level to
(ms) 1) consider the MV network voltage to be present. Parameter available only for
the case Voltage presence source = Measured.

Hold delay time 40 — Period within which the voltage must return to below the Start threshold level
(ms) to consider the MV network voltage to be not present (to define the delay to be
configured, take into account hysteresis: 7 %). Parameter available only for
the case Voltage presence source = Measured.
NOTE: The Hold Delay time delay used for the voltage presence of the
MV fault indication is fixed at 40 ms.
Voltage absence

Start threshold (%) 30 10-100 (increment = 1) Definition of the measured MV network voltage threshold, as a percentage of
the nominal voltage, below which the MV network voltage is considered to be
absent.
NOTE: Configure the threshold taking into account hysteresis (6 %).
Consult the glossary for the definition of hysteresis.
Parameter available only for the case Voltage presence source = Measured.

Operate delay time 50 0-300000 (increment = Period within which the voltage must be below the Start threshold level to
(ms) 1) consider the MV network voltage to be absent. Parameter available only for
the case Voltage presence source = Measured.

NOTE: The grayed-out parameters are fixed and cannot be modified.

Setting Current Absence / Presence Parameters

Access via SC0x > Settings > Fault indication page, Current absence/
presence tab.

332 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Current absence
Threshold value (A) 0.008 0.002 In-0.02 In (*) Definition of the measured current threshold below which the MV network
In (increment = 0.1) current is considered to be absent.

Operate delay time 50 0-300,000 Period within which the current must remain below the Threshold value to
(ms) (increment = 1) validate detection of the absence of the MV network current.

Current presence

Threshold value (A) 0.01 In 0.002 In-0.02 In (*) Definition of the measured current threshold below which the MV network
(increment = 0.1) current is considered to be present.

Operate delay time 50 0-300,000 Period within which the current must remain above the Threshold value to
(ms) (increment = 1) validate detection of the presence of the MV network current.
NOTE: It is the non-presence of the MV network current that allows to
validate and indicate a fault current.
(*): In corresponds to the nominal current at the CT primary (by default In = 500 A).

Advanced Settings
Access via SC0x > Settings > Fault indication page, Advanced settings tab.

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Advanced settings

Publish indication No • No This option is used to wait for the fault confirmation (network absence) to
only after indicate the fault. By default, the fault is indicated as soon as the detection
confirmation • Yes element is triggered.

Validation starts Rising • Rising This option is used to start the validation timer when the fault condition
after fault condition becomes untrue (falling edge of the detection element). By default, the
detected • Falling validation timer starts on the rising edge of the detection element.

Locating Fault Currents on the MV Network

The LEDs on the T300 are used to help locate the fault current on the MV network
according to the following rules:

NT00378–EN–10 333
T300 SC160 Module Settings

• Ammetric detection
The fault current is only signaled by fault current detectors located on the
section of the MV network upstream of the fault current: i.e. the fault current
will be located between the last detector indicating the fault current and the
first detector not indicating the fault current. The fault current is indicated by a
red flashing LED regardless of type (zero sequence, double, or phase-to-
phase).
Example of colors indicating a fault current in ammetric detection

Det.1 Det. 2 Det.1 Det. 2 Det.1 Det. 2

• Directional detection
Fault current detection is directional. All the T300 RTUs located on the
section of MV network where the fault current has been signaled flash the
same color. The direction of the fault current is indicated by the color of the
LED. The following rules apply when the LED on the front panel of the
detector in the substation indicates the color green or red:
◦ Green: The fault current impacts the section of the network in the direction
of the busbar in the substation.
◦ Red: The fault current impacts the section of cable outside the substation.

Example of colors indicating a fault Second example of colors indicating

current in directional detection: a fault current in directional
detection:

Det.1 Det. 2 Det.1 Det. 2 Det.1 Det. 2 Det.1 Det. 2 Det.1 Det. 2 Det.1 Det. 2

NOTE: This theory is only valid if there is sufficient capacitive current in the
network for a downstream detector to indicate the fault current (via flashing
LED).
The section in which the fault current condition exists will therefore be identified in
the conventional manner:
• Either in the section between the last detector to indicate the fault current
(flashing) and the first detector that is not flashing
• Or by 2 consecutive detectors that are flashing the same color, indicating 2
opposite directions.

334 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

MV Power Measurement Settings

Access via SC0x > Settings > Measurements page.

These power measurements are optional on the SCxxx. If this option is not
present in the equipment, the corresponding parameter settings page is not
displayed in the Web server. This is also true for the values of these optional
measurements displayed on the MV Measurement/PM – Power, and PM – Energy
pages. See the relevant section for more information on displaying these
measurements.
The SCxxx is used to take power measurements for the purposes of monitoring
the MV network. These power measurements comply with standard IEC 61557-
12.
The SCxxx takes these MV measurements using the same current and voltage
sensors as those used to detect fault currents.
The SCxxx stores the power measurements taken. These can be viewed locally
via the Web server or remotely via the SCADA system.
Parameters
MV Power measurements require certain options to be configured.

NT00378–EN–10 335
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Setting the RMS values Setting the Average values

Measurement parameter settings

The same parameters specify the Power Measurement for MV or LV network.

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
RMS
Positive power Yes • No Definition of the direction of the power flow on the channel. By default, a positive
flow is from line direction corresponds to a flow of power from the line to the CTs. This parameter
• Yes
to CT depends on the location of the channel (channel = feeder or incomer). The choice
assigns the sign for the power measurements calculated by the module (SCxxx or
LV150).

Power factor IEC • IEC Choice of sign convention for the power factor calculation:
sign convention • IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission
• IEEE
• IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

Zero dead-band 0.35 • 0.01–10 Filtering of low values on measured voltages. Values below this percentage will
for voltage be filtered and displayed at zero value to avoid inaccurate measurement.
measurements
(% of nominal)

Average

Calculation 10 • 1 Definition of the period for calculation interval of the averages on the
interval period • 5 measurements.
(m)
• 10
• 15
• 20
• 30
• 60
First day of Sun- • Monday Definition of the first day of the week for the calculation of averages and min/max
week day • Tuesday including a period based on the weeks.

• Wednesday
• Thursday
• Friday
• Saturday
• Sunday

336 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

MV Power Quality Parameter Setting

Access via SC0x > Settings > Power Quality page.

Parameters are displayed in the Voltage variation events, Current unbalance

variations and Voltage unbalance variations tabs.
These power quality measurements are optional on the SC150. If this option is not
present in the equipment, the corresponding parameter setting page is not
displayed in the Web server. This is also true for the values of these optional
measurements displayed on the MV Measurement/Power – Quality page. See
the relevant section for more information on displaying these measurements.
Voltage measurement of power quality is performed with the 3-phase voltages.
Therefore, if power quality option is activated, parameter VT connection mode is 3
phase ABC.
In addition to power measurements, the T300 can also take measurements to
check the quality of the power supply on the MV network.
These measurements are completed according to the principles of IEC 61000-4-
30 class S (up to harmonic 40).
They are used in particular to monitor the number and duration of voltage
interruptions, sags (dips), or swells, as well as the current and voltage unbalance
and the harmonics.
The T300 takes these measurements using the same current and voltage sensors
as those used to detect fault currents.
The T300 stores the measurements taken. These can be viewed locally via the
Web server or remotely via the SCADA system.
Power quality measurements require certain options to be configured.

NT00378–EN–10 337
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Setting the voltage unbalance parameters Setting the current unbalance parameters

These are summarized in the table below:

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Voltage variation events tab

Voltage dip start (%) 90 5-100 Threshold, as a percentage of the nominal voltage, below which the detected
drop in voltage is considered to be a voltage sag (dip) by the power quality
measurement.
Voltage swell start 110 100–150 Threshold, as a percentage of the nominal voltage, above which the detected
(%) voltage rise is considered to be a voltage swell by the power quality
measurement.
Dip or swell short 1000 10-60,000 Duration below which the presence of a voltage sag (dip) or swell is considered
duration (ms) to be short duration.

Dip or swell long 60,000 10-60,000 Duration above which the presence of a voltage sag (dip) or swell is considered
duration (ms) to be long duration.
Similarly, the average duration corresponds to the time interval between the
short and long duration.

Voltage interruption 5 1-90 Threshold, as a percentage of the nominal voltage, below which the detected
start (%) drop in voltage is considered to be a voltage interruption by the power quality
measurement.
Interruption short 180 60-900 Duration below which the voltage interruption is considered to be short duration.
duration (s) Similarly, a long duration corresponds to an interruption lasting longer than the
time set for the short duration.
There is no notion of average duration for voltage interruptions.

Current unbalance variations tab

Start threshold (%) 5 1–100 Threshold, as a percentage of the nominal current, above which the current
variation is considered to be a current unbalance by the power quality
measurement, provided that this variation lasts longer than the configured
Operate delay time.

Operate delay time 1,000 200–60,000 Time delay above which the current variation is taken into account and
(ms) considered to be a current unbalance by the power quality measurement.

Voltage unbalance variationstab

Start threshold (%) 5 1–100 Threshold, as a percentage of the nominal voltage, above which the voltage
variation is considered to be a voltage unbalance by the power quality
measurement, provided that this variation lasts longer than the configured
Operate delay time.

Operate delay time 1,000 200-60,000 Time delay above which the voltage variation is taken into account and
(ms) considered to be a voltage unbalance by the power quality measurement.

338 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Disturbance Record Settings

Access via SC0x > Settings > Disturbance Record page.

Disturbance Records
Operation
The disturbance record function is used to record measured analog signals, digital
input signals and logical states.
The storage of records is activated by one or more events set in the Disturbance
records page in the Web server, for each SCxxx module.
Depending on the trigger position setting, the stored event can begin before the
event and continues afterwards.
stored record
time

triggering event

Records comprise the following information:

• Values sampled from the different signals
• Date
The disturbance records can log the following elements:
• Actual samples at a rate of 4,800 samples per second for:
◦ Ia, Ib, Ic, I0 (measured) according to CT connection mode setting for
SCxxx module (in SC0x/Settings/Sensors page)
◦ Va, Vb, Vc or Uab, Ubc, Uca according to VT board type and VT
connection mode setting for SCxxx module (in SC0x/Settings/Sensors
page)
• Any change of state of the main switch (digital inputs DI1 and DI2)
• Any change of state of digital input (digital inputs DI3 to DI8)
• Any change of active Instantaneous PTOC (ANSI 50/51, 50N/51N, 67/67N
and 47)
• Any change of active Instantaneous (ANSI 59, 59N)
• Any change of PQ event indications (dip, swell, and interruption)
• Any change of network presence as defined by fault confirmation
Files can be transferred locally using a PC which is connected on the HU250 front
panel and includes the T300 Web server access. The record files can be
downloaded from the T300 Web server (see the Disturbance Records Page, page
88).
Files can also be transferred by protocol. Refer to the protocol user manual and
the Easergy Builder manual for more information on file transfer by protocol.

Characteristics
Characteristics Values
Recording content • Set-up file: date, channel characteristics, sampling rate
• Sample file: recorded signals

Sampling frequency 4,800 samples per second

NT00378–EN–10 339
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Characteristics Values
Analog signals recorded (2) • Ia, Ib, Ic, I0 (measured) current channels
• Va, Vb, Vc or Uab, Ubc, Uca voltage channels

Logical states recorded (1) (3) Digital input signals and logical states

Number of recordings stored Up to 50 (recorded in FIFO (First In First Out) type shift storage: when the maximum number of
records is reached, the oldest record is erased when a new record is triggered.)

Total duration of a recording (1) 100 to 70,000 ms

Maximum recording capacity 140 s maximum with 70 s maximum per record

File format COMTRADE - IEC 60255-24 Ed. 1 - 2001

Comtrade revision 1999 or 2013
(1) To be set in the SC0x Disturbance Records Page, page 88 in the T300 Web server.

(2) According to type and connection of sensors.

(3) According to T300 system configuration.

340 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Disturbance Records Parameter Setting

Accessed via Settings > SC0x > Disturbance records page.

NT00378–EN–10 341
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Recording 1,500 100-70,000 Total duration of a recording

duration (ms)

Trigger 33.3 0-100 Sets the trigger point as a percentage of the recording
position (%) duration. For example, the default settings show that the
overall recording time is set to 1.5 s with the trigger point
being at 33.3 % of this, taking into consideration the
following recording times: 0.5 s before trigger and 1 s after
trigger.

Trigger on No • No Disturbance record triggered on any change on network

network • Any change presence
presence

Trigger on fault No • No Disturbance record triggered on instantaneous detection of

indication • Rise a protection event (ANSI 50/51, 50N/51N, 67, 67N, 47)

Trigger on No • No Disturbance record triggered on instantaneous detection of

voltage event a protection event (ANSI 59 or 59N)
• Rise
Trigger on No • No If power quality available, disturbance record triggered on
power quality the occurrence of a power quality event (voltage dip or
• Rise
event swell or interruption)

Trigger on No • No Digital channel selected to trigger the disturbance record on

digital input 1 • Rise either a rising (low to high) or a falling (high to low)
to Trigger on transition or any change
digital input 8 • Fall
• Any change

342 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Comtrade 2013 • 2013 Version of the comtrade.

revision • 1999
If 1999 is selected, the following parameters are displayed
further down:
• Channel order
• Phase identification
• Data scaling

Filename YYYYMMDD_ • YYYYMMDD_hhmmssuuuuuu Format of the comtrade file name:

hhmmssuuuuuu • NNNN_YYYYMMDD_ NNNN is the comtrade number
hhmmssuuuuuu
YYYYMMDD_hhmmssuuuuuu and YYYYMMDD_
• NNNN_YYYYMMDD_ hhmmss_xxx are the comtrade date with:
hhmmss_xxx
• YYYY = year
• MM = month
• DD = day
• hh = hour
• mm = minute
• ss = second
• uuuuuu = microsecond
• xxx = millisecond
Channel order Standard • Standard Only displayed if Comtrade revision = 1999.
• Specific If Standard is selected, the channel order is similar to
SC150.

If Specific is selected, the channel order is:

• Voltage channel (U instead of V and Vz for neutral)
• Current channel (Iz for neutral instead of I0)
• and only two digital channels:
◦ FW1 (Switch open)
◦ HW1 (Switch closed)

Phase None • None Only displayed if Comtrade revision = 1999.

identification
• Specific
The channel identification is the 3rd element in analog
channel information (ph) in the configuration file (*.cfg).

Analog channel information: An,ch_id,ph,ccbm,uu,a,b,

skew,min,max,primary,secondary,PS.

If None is selected, the channel phase identification is

empty.

If Specific is selected, the channel phase identification is A

or B or C or Z.
Data scaling Primary • Primary Only displayed if Comtrade revision = 1999.
• Secondary
The disturbance recording data scaling is the last element
in analog channel information (PS) in the configuration file
(*.cfg).

Analog channel information: An,ch_id,ph,ccbm,uu,a,b,

skew,min,max,primary,secondary,PS.

If Primary is selected, the converted data is in primary (PS

= P).

If Secondary is selected, the converted data is in

secondary (PS = S).

Any configuration change on this function or on sensors and network

characteristics stops the record in progress. It is saved but may not comply with
the expected duration. Previous records are kept as they were recorded. In case
of voltage absence during disturbance recording in progress, the record is lost.

NT00378–EN–10 343
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Disturbance Record Triggers

Depending on the T300 system configuration, a disturbance record can be
triggered on either one or several of the following conditions:
• Network presence and absence
• Combination of instantaneous bits of fault detection protections (ANSI 50/51,
50N/51N, 67,67N, 47)
• Combination of instantaneous bits of ANSI 59 and 59N voltage
• PQ event (dip, swell, interruption)
• Digital input and switch change of state
• Dedicated command
Disturbance record can be triggered on communication via remote control or a
dedicated command sent from the T300 Web server. Triggering on dedicated
command is always active.
There is no effect on a record if a new trigger happens while the record is already
on-going.
Use WaveWin software to analyse disturbance record file.

344 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Automation Settings
Access via Settings > SC0x > Sectionalizer page.

NT00378–EN–10 345
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Sectionalizer Automation
Sectionalizer automation is used to disconnect a section of feeder that has a
permanent fault. It is used in conjunction with an upstream circuit breaker or
recloser. This type of automation is applicable for feeders with sections of
overhead line.
The general principle is that the automation function counts the number of supply
interruptions. When the configured number of interruptions is reached, the
controller opens the MV load break switch during the recloser "dead time", that is,
whilst the voltage is absent. This isolates the downstream fault, allowing the
recloser to restore supply to the upstream sections.
A feeder may have several sectionalizer switches, each with a different
configuration, such that upstream devices are set to open at a higher number of
supply interruptions than the downstream devices.
A supply interruption is defined as a fault current followed by network absence.
The sectionalizer automation uses the same network absence state as the FPI
functions.
Upstream
protection
device Switch 1 Switch 2 Fault

NOTE: On the SC160 module, the sectionalizer is not available if the Tripping
mode is enabled. It is available when the Tripping mode is disabled.

Operation
In normal operating conditions, the MV network is energized and the switch is
closed.
The automation function sends an open command to the MV switch if:
• The module sectionalizer setting is enabled for the active setting group.
• The T300 automation status is ON.
• The switch is closed.
• The number of supply interruptions counted reaches the number configured.
• The MV network is absent.
• There is no fault current.
Automation enable/disable
Each SCxxx module has parameter settings to enable or disable sectionalizer
automation for the MV switch controlled by that module.
In addition, automation functions are enabled or disabled globally on the T300 (for
all SCxxx modules) either remotely from the SCADA system or locally:
• By pressing simultaneously the

(automation state button) and OK buttons on the front of the HU250 module.
• Via the Web server (on the Monitoring & control > Substation page).

346 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Automation and FPI settings

The sectionalizer automation works in conjunction with the fault passage
indication function. To use the sectionalizer automation, certain FPI parameters
must have compatible values:
• The FPI network presence and confirmation mode setting must be either
Voltage or Current.
• The Primary CB recloser maximum operation time must be at least
1,000 ms and greater than the time required to detect the required number of
supply interruptions.
• If it is required to ignore the first rapid reclose cycle, then the recloser Fault
confirmation time should be greater than the first rapid cycle time.

Example 1: Example 2:
Count after confirmation mode = No Count after confirmation mode = Yes
Open after 3 interruptions Rapid cycle ignored Open after 2 interruptions,
plus operation delay time

Maximum operation time Maximum operation time

Fault 1 confirmation time

Current Current Fault 2 confirmation time
Absense confirmation time
Absense confirmation time
Operation delay time
Open
Open Command
Command
Time
Time
Interruption: 1 2

Interruption:1 2 3

Network absence can be detected:

• By measurement sensors (current or voltage). If the voltage measuring
sensor is used, refer to the chapter Front panel voltage indication, page 363
to set the corresponding MV voltage absence settings.
• By digital input DI6.
• By the AC power supply (in this case, the T300 must be powered by a low
voltage source from the MV line on which the switch is installed).
For details, see the Fault Current validation and indication section.

Automation Lock Out

Certain conditions can block the automation function. When this occurs, the
“automation locked” LED lights up orange on the front panel of the SCxxx
(and the HU250). It is possible to reset the automation lock out as follows:

• By pressing the Reset (fault current indication reset) button on the front
of the HU250 module

• On the Substation page, by clicking the Reset button associated with

the automation function.
The automation lock out conditions are active only if the Enable LockOut option
is activated by configuration. These conditions are associated with any action that
makes it impossible to operate the MV switch, namely:
• If the T300 is in local mode and the Enable local mode to block automation
option is enabled by configuration.
• If the switch interlock digital input (DI5) is enabled and the External input
mode for open commands blocking option is enabled by configuration.
• If the switch position is unknown at the time of the command and the Block if
switch position is unknown or same as command option is enabled by
configuration

NT00378–EN–10 347
T300 SC160 Module Settings

NOTE: The three blocking options above can be configured in the Switch
control page (see the Interlock Function section).

Sectionalizer automation parameter setting

Access via SC0x > Settings > Sectionalizer page.
The setting includes two groups of settings. These two groups define two sets of
preset parameters.
The settings group can easily be changed by a command to select group 1 or
group 2 from the preset thresholds, without needing to reconfigure the T300. This
is done in the Monitoring & Control > Substation page (see the corresponding
section) or remotely from the SCADA system.
Sectionalizer automation requires certain options to be configured. These are
summarized in the table below.

Parameter De- Configuration Description

fault range

Sectionalizer
Enabled No • No Activation of the sectionalizer automation function on the SCxxx.
• Yes NOTE: On the SC160 module, if the tripping protection is enabled, the
sectionalizer function is not available.
Supply interruptions 4 1-4 Number of confirmed faults to detect during the sectionalizer Maximum
operation time (ms) to trigger the sectionalizer automation action

Count supply Yes • No Counting supply interruptions condition:

interruptions after • Yes • When the setting value is No, supply interruptions are counted as soon as a
confirmation time (3000 fault has been validated by a supply interruption.
ms)
• When the setting value is Yes, the function waits for the confirmation time
before counting supply interruptions. Confirmation time is set in Fault
confirmation time: time network must be absent (ms) in the Settings >
SC0x > Fault indication > Recloser parameterspage.

Direction Any • Any Choice of the fault current direction taken into account to activate sectionalizer
• Forward automation

• Backward
Enable LockOut Yes • No This setting applies if the switch does not open when commanded.
• Yes • When the setting value is No then the automation function attempts to open
the switch on the next interruption.
• When the setting value is Yes then the automation function is locked out
and is not activated for new fault interruptions until it is reset by the user.
When lock out is active, the “automation locked”

LED is lit on the front of both the SCxxx and HU250 modules.
Absence confirmation 0 0-10,000 The time network must be absent before the sectionalizer automation takes the
time (ms) decision to send the switch open command.

Open command delay 0 0-30,000 Additional delay after confirmation of network absence before executing the
time (ms) switch open command

Maximum operation 0 0-30,000 Sectionalizer maximum operation time. If the Enabled setting value is Yes, this
time (ms) setting must be greater than 1,000 ms and less than or equal to the value of
Primary CB recloser maximum operation time (ms).

Primary CB recloser 0 0-300,000 Read only (copy of the value set in the Settings > SC0x > Fault indication >
maximum operation Recloser parameters page).
time (ms) After a fault current has been detected on the MV network, this time delay
corresponds to the total operation time for all the reclose cycles of the upstream
protection device.

348 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Local I/O on SCxxx module

Customizing LEDs on the SCxxx module
The color of 3 user LEDs on the front of the SCxxx/LV150 modules can be
customized.
LEDs 1 to 3 can be assigned to different variables/functions. The colors and
behaviour can be customized for each state.

Access via Settings > SCx > Local inputs and outputs page.

NT00378–EN–10 349
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Variables/functions that can be associated with each LED (1, 2, 3)

Associated variables Comment Type Proposed Color / Behavior

None Default for LED 2 SPS • 0 Intermediate: Off

• 1 Off = Off
• 2 On = Off
Dummy switch

Simulated switch position Default for LED 1 (dummy circuit breaker) DPS • 0 Intermediate: Off
• 1 Off = Open: Green
• 2 On = Closed: Red
Physical inputs

Digital input 5 (Switch interlock input) SPS • 0 = Off

• 1 On = Orange
Digital input 6 (Voltage presence) SPS
• Invalid: Red-blink
Digital input 7 SPS

Digital input 8 SPS

Physical outputs

Open command output status SPS • 0 Off = Off

• 1 On = Orange
Close command output status SPS

Switch controller blocking conditions

External lock active Default for LED 3. SPS • 0 Off = Off

Logical OR of {MainXSWI_BlkOpn_stVal,
• 1 On = Orange
MainXSWI_BlkCls_stVal}
• Invalid: Red-blink
Switch open commands blocked Function of variables {Switch position, Digital input 5} SPS
and setting {“External input mode for Open
commands”}

Switch closed commands Function of variables {Switch position, Digital input 5} SPS
blocked and setting {“External input mode for Close
commands”}

Sectionalizer state
Sectionalizer enabled for active setting group SPS • 0 Off = Off
• 1 On = Green
Sectionalizer automation started (in progress) SPS • 0 Off = Off
• 1 On = Orange
Automation operated (sectionalizer opened the switch) SPS

FPI Phases
Fault indication on phase A / B / SPS • 0 Off = Off
C
• 1 On = Red
FPI Faults
Phase fault SPS • 0 Off = Off
Earth fault SPS • 1 On = Red

Sensitive Earth fault SPS

Associated variables Comment Type Proposed Color / Behavior

Protection
Protection enabled Locked for LED1: LED1 is always associated with SPS • 0 Off = Off
“Protection enabled”. • 1 On = Green
• Invalid: Off
Tripping indication Default for LED 2 DPS • 0 Intermediate: Orange blink
• 1 Off = Off
• 2 On = Red blink
• Invalid = Off

350 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Setting LED colors

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

LEDs 1 to 3
On state color Red • Off Choice of color for LEDs 1 to 3 for the active state of the
• Red data.
Off state color Green • Green Choice of color for LEDs 1 to 3 for the inactive state of the
data.
• Orange
Intermediate state color Off • Red blink Choice of color for LEDs 1 to 3 for the intermediate state of
the data. The intermediate state can be, for instance, the
• Green blink transitional phase of a change of state. For DPS only.
• Orange blink
Bad state color Off Choice of color for LEDs 1 to 3 for a bad state of the data.
A bad state may be an unexpected state for the data. For
DPS only

Invalid state color Green blink Choice of color for LEDs 1 to 3 for an invalid state of the
data. An invalid state corresponds to a missing known
state for the data.

Settings by Protocol
A part of the SC160 module settings can be read and changed by protocols in
using advanced configuration and specific commands and sequence:
1. select the setting group to edit (edition phase)
2. send the setting values
3. wait for 5s
4. confirm application of new settings
5. wait for 5s
6. read the applied settings and check them.
NOTE: If the same setting is edited several times during the edition phase,
only the first value is saved.
Refer to the protocol user manual and the Easergy Builder manual for more
information on settings by protocol DLT634.5101-2002 and DLT634.5104-2009.

NT00378–EN–10 351
T300 SC160 Module Settings

The following settings are accessible by protocol:

Name Description Type Unit

AbsPTUV1_LnEna_setVal Voltage absence 1 enabled Bool

AbsPTUV1_OpDlTmms_setVal Voltage absence 1 validation time setting Unsigned int ms

AbsPTUV1_StrValPct_setMag Voltage absence 1 threshold setting as percentage of rating Float %

AbsPTUV2_LnEna_setVal Voltage absence 2 enabled Bool

AbsPTUV2_OpDlTmms_setVal Voltage absence 2 validation time setting Unsigned int ms

AbsPTUV2_StrValPct_setMag Voltage absence 2 threshold setting as percentage of rating Float %

DEfPTOC1_LnEna_setVal Directional earth fault detection instance 1 enabled Bool

DEfPTOC1_OpDlTmms_setVal Directional earth fault detection instance 1 validation time Unsigned int ms
setting

DEfPTOC1_StrVal_setMag Directional earth fault detection instance 1 current threshold Float A

setting

DEfPTOC2_LnEna_setVal Directional earth fault detection instance 2 enabled Bool

DEfPTOC2_OpDlTmms_setVal Directional earth fault detection instance 2 validation time Unsigned int ms
setting

DEfPTOC2_StrVal_setMag Directional earth fault detection instance 2 current threshold Float A

setting

DPhPTOC1_LnEna_setVal Directional phase fault detection instance 1 enabled Bool

DPhPTOC1_OpDlTmms_setVal Directional phase fault detection instance 1 validation time Unsigned int ms
setting

DPhPTOC1_StrVal_setMag Directional phase fault detection instance 1 threshold setting Float A

DPhPTOC2_LnEna_setVal Directional phase fault detection instance 2 enabled Bool

DPhPTOC2_OpDlTmms_setVal Directional phase fault detection instance 2 validation time Unsigned int ms
setting

DPhPTOC2_StrVal_setMag Directional phase fault detection instance 2 threshold setting Float A

EfPTOC1_LnEna_setVal Earth fault detection instance 1 enabled Bool

EfPTOC1_OpDlTmms_setVal Earth fault detection instance 1 validation time setting Unsigned int ms

EfPTOC1_StrVal_setMag Earth fault detection instance 1 threshold setting Float A

EfPTOC2_LnEna_setVal Earth fault detection instance 2 enabled Bool

EfPTOC2_OpDlTmms_setVal Earth fault detection instance 2 validation time setting Unsigned int ms

EfPTOC2_StrVal_setMag Earth fault detection instance 2 threshold setting Float A

EfPTOC3_LnEna_setVal Earth fault detection instance 3 enabled Bool

EfPTOC3_OpDlTmms_setVal Earth fault detection instance 3 validation time setting Unsigned int ms

EfPTOC3_StrVal_setMag Earth fault detection instance 3 threshold setting Float A

EfPTRC1_RefDEfPTOC1_setVal Directional Earth Fault 1 enabled for tripping Bool

EfPTRC1_RefDEfPTOC2_setVal Directional Earth Fault 2 enabled for tripping Bool

EfPTRC1_RefEfPTOC1_setVal Earth Fault 1 enabled for tripping Bool

EfPTRC1_RefEfPTOC2_setVal Earth Fault 2 enabled for tripping Bool

EfPTRC1_RefEfPTOC3_setVal Earth Fault 3 enabled for tripping Bool

EfPTRC1_RefSEfPTOC1_setVal Sensitive Earth Fault 1 enabled for tripping Bool

FeaDGIO1_DebTmms_setVal Digital input debouncing sample time (corresponding to Unsigned int ms

Debouncing sample count * Sample period (ms))

MainXSWI1_PlsOnTmms_setVal Main switch control pulse duration Unsigned int ms

PhPTOC1_LnEna_setVal Phase fault detection instance 1 enabled Bool

PhPTOC1_OpDlTmms_setVal Phase fault detection instance 1 validation time setting Unsigned int ms

352 NT00378–EN–10
SC160 Module Settings T300

Name Description Type Unit

PhPTOC1_StrVal_setMag Phase fault detection instance 1 threshold setting Float A

PhPTOC2_LnEna_setVal Phase fault detection instance 2 enabled Bool

PhPTOC2_OpDlTmms_setVal Phase fault detection instance 2 validation time setting Unsigned int ms

PhPTOC2_StrVal_setMag Phase fault detection instance 2 threshold setting Float A

PhPTOC3_LnEna_setVal Phase fault detection instance 3 enabled Bool

PhPTOC3_OpDlTmms_setVal Phase fault detection instance 3 validation time setting Unsigned int ms

PhPTOC3_StrVal_setMag Phase fault detection instance 3 threshold setting Float A

PhPTRC1_RefDPhPTOC1_setVal Directional Phase Fault 1 enabled for tripping Bool

PhPTRC1_RefDPhPTOC2_setVal Directional Phase Fault 2 enabled for tripping Bool

PhPTRC1_RefPhPTOC1_setVal Phase Fault 1 enabled for tripping Bool

PhPTRC1_RefPhPTOC2_setVal Phase Fault 2 enabled for tripping Bool

PhPTRC1_RefPhPTOC3_setVal Phase Fault 3 enabled for tripping Bool

PrsPTOV1_LnEna_setVal Voltage presence 1 enabled Bool

PrsPTOV1_OpDlTmms_setVal Voltage presence 1 validation time setting Unsigned int ms

PrsPTOV1_StrValPct_setMag Voltage presence 1 threshold setting as percentage of rating Float %

PrsPTOV2_LnEna_setVal Voltage presence 2 enabled Bool

PrsPTOV2_OpDlTmms_setVal Voltage presence 2 validation time setting Unsigned int ms

PrsPTOV2_StrValPct_setMag Voltage presence 2 threshold setting as percentage of rating Float %

SEfPTOC1_LnEna_setVal Sensitive earth fault detection enabled Bool

SEfPTOC1_OpDlTmms_setVal Sensitive earth fault detection validation time setting Unsigned int ms

SEfPTOC1_StrVal_setMag Sensitive earth fault detection threshold setting Float A

TCTR1_IoPriARtg_setMag CT Core balance primary rated current Float A

TCTR1_IoSecARtg_setMag CT Core balance secondary rated current Float A

TCTR1_PhPriARtg_setMag CT Phase primary rated current Float A

TCTR1_PhSecARtg_setMag CT Phase secondary rated current Float A

TVTR1_PriVRtg_setMag Primary rated voltage (phase-to-phase) Float V

TVTR1_SecVRtg_setMag Secondary rated voltage (phase-to-phase) Float V

Parameter Setting
Access via SC0x > Settings > Global fault indication page, Setting group tab.

NT00378–EN–10 353
T300 SC160 Module Settings

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
Enable settings by Yes • No This option specifies whether edition of settings by protocol is enabled or
protocol • Yes disabled.

354 NT00378–EN–10
LV150 Module Settings T300

LV150 Module Settings

What’s in This Chapter
LV Current and Voltage Sensors................................................................... 356
Front Panel Voltage Indication...................................................................... 363
LV Power Measurement Settings.................................................................. 366
LV Power Quality Settings............................................................................ 368
Local I/O on LV150 module .......................................................................... 370

Other functionalities (common to the SC150, SC160 and LV150 modules):

Voltage Monitoring, page 372
Broken Phase Conductor Detection, page 379
Port Configuration, page 382

Each LV150 module supports the following T300 functions:

• LV Current and voltage measurements
The LV150 is compatible with all standard current sensors (according to IEC
61869-2).
There are 2 possible connection configurations for acquiring the current
measurement:
◦ 3 phase CTs
◦ 3 phase CTs + 1 neutral measurement CT

NT00378–EN–10 355
T300 LV150 Module Settings

• LV network voltage monitoring

◦ Undervoltage detection (ANSI 27)
◦ Overvoltage detection (ANSI 59)
◦ Neutral overvoltage detection (ANSI 59N)
◦ Broken conductor detection (ANSI 47)
• Broken conductor detection
• Power measurements and power quality
◦ Power measurements (IEC 61557-12)
◦ Power quality (according to the principles of IEC 61000-4-30 Class S)
• Transformer monitoring
◦ Temperature monitoring with threshold alarm
◦ Measurement of current peaks
• Port configuration
◦ Limit access to a physical port on the LV150 module
• Local I/O
All these functions are explained in detail in this manual, together with the
corresponding application parameter settings.

LV Current and Voltage Sensors

Access via Settings > LV0x > Sensors page.

356 NT00378–EN–10
LV150 Module Settings T300

LV Current Sensors
The LV150 default configuration includes a current transformer with a ratio of
500:1. The type of CT to be used is selected by the user.
It is possible, however, to define a different primary/secondary ratio by
configuration if a CT with different characteristics is used.
Several CT connection configurations are possible on the LV150:
• 3 phase CTs
• 3 phase CTs + 1 neutral measurement CT
NOTE: In 3 phase CTs mounting, the neutral is calculated by summing the
measurements on the 3 phase sensors. In 3 phase CTS + neutral mounting,
the neutral is measured directly on the neutral sensors.
Current sensor parameter settings:
N L3 L2 L1
S1

I1 1
S1 S2

Shorting I2 2
S1 S2
block
I3 3
S2
S1
Com I 4
S2
Com N 5

N 6

NT00378–EN–10 357
T300 LV150 Module Settings

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Current Transformer
CT connection mode D • None Choice of CT connection configuration options:
• A • 3 phase CTs
• D • 3 phase CTs + neutral.

Phase CT primary rated current 500 50 –3000 (increment = 1) Nominal value of the current at the phase CT primary
(A)

Phase CT secondary rated 1 • 1 Nominal value of the current at the phase CT

current (A) • 5 secondary

Phase A (B, C) inversion No • No Used to reverse the direction of the current flowing
• Yes from phase A (B, or C). This parameter is used to
compensate for an inversion of the direction of
connection of the CT on the LV cable via the software.
Neutral CT primary rated current 500 50 –3000 (increment = 1) Nominal value of the current at the neutral CT primary
(A)

Neutral CT secondary rated 1 • 1 Nominal value of the current at the neutral CT

current (A) • 5 secondary

Neutral inversion No • No Used to reverse the direction of the residual current.

• Yes This parameter is used to compensate via the software
an inversion of the direction of connection of the CT on
the LV cable or a reverse winding direction of neutral
CT compared to phase CTs.

358 NT00378–EN–10
LV150 Module Settings T300

NOTICE
HAZARD OF INCORRECT CURRENT MEASUREMENTS
Pay attention to the mounting direction of the CTs. It must not have an impact on
the current measurement.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
• The current sensors used for measuring must be 1 A or 5 A secondary with
security factor limiting the current to 100 A secondary -1 s (according to
standard 61869-2).
• The toroids must be short-circuited at the secondary when they are
disconnected from the T300 (e.g. during a maintenance operation). To do
this, use a shorting block.
• The low-voltage insulation of the Easergy CTs means they can only be used
on insulated cables.
• Always use grounded external CTs for current inputs.
• Ensure the LV Network is turned off before to install the CTs on the LV cable
and making the CTs connections to the LV150.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

LV Voltage Sensors
The LV150 uses a single sensor (Voltage adapter) for measuring and monitoring
Low Voltage. The LV150 requires LV measurement for the following functions:
• LV network monitoring
• LV voltage measurement
• LV power measurement
• LV power quality measurement
The measurement is carried out directly from the sensor without any calibration.
The LV sensor used with LV150 is shown in the table below. This type of voltage
sensor (available as an option) including a specific adapter allows the connection
interface to the LV150 module:

NT00378–EN–10 359
T300 LV150 Module Settings

LV150-Voltage adapter (VT) Voltage input on the LV150

VT adapter

Voltage Sensor Description Adapter Required

VT Resistive voltage adapter/divider with 10 KV/1 sec (6 KV/1 mn) insulation. LV150-Voltage adapter (ref:
NOTE: The LV150 Voltage adapter accepts 3 phase + neutral LV EMS59574): Voltage input (LL): 190 V to
connections. 415 VAC IP 30
For more information about the mounting of the adapter, refer to the
LV150 Voltage adapter Installation guide (ref: NT00393).

The link between the adapter and the voltage input on the LV150 module (RJ45
connector) is via "straigth-through" Ethernet cable including RJ45 connectors.

360 NT00378–EN–10
LV150 Module Settings T300

Voltage sensor parameter settings:

Access via LV0x > Settings > Sensors page.

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Voltage Transformer

VT type VT • None Choice of the type of voltage adapter used as the voltage
• VT measurement sensor.
The dedicated adapter for the LV150 is the Voltage adapter
(VT).

VT connection 3 phases + 3 phases + neutral ABCN Choice of the type of connection used for the voltage sensor. The LV
mode neutral sensor requires the wiring of the three phases plus the neutral.
ABCN
L-L nominal voltage 400 190-415 (increment = 1) Definition of the nominal voltage of the LV network (phase-to-phase
(V) voltage).

VT Adapter cable Less than • Less than 1 m Definition of the length of the Ethernet cable used for the Voltage
length 1m • 1 m to 2 m adapter-LV150 adapter link.

• More than 2 m The length of the cable affects the accuracy of the
measurement.
VT Adapter 150.400 140-160 (increment =0,001) Used to calibrate the phase A measurement taken by the Voltage
magnitude adapter to improve accuracy. The corresponding calibration value is
correction phase A indicated on the Voltage adapter.

VT Adapter 150.400 140-160 (increment =0,001) Used to calibrate the phase B measurement taken by the Voltage
magnitude adapter to improve accuracy. The corresponding calibration value is
correction phase B indicated on the Voltage adapter.

VT Adapter 150.400 140-160 (increment =0,001) Used to calibrate the phase C measurement taken by the Voltage
magnitude adapter to improve accuracy. The corresponding calibration value is
correction phase C indicated on the Voltage adapter.

VT Adapter 150.400 140-160 (increment =0,001) Used to calibrate the neutral measurement taken by the Voltage
magnitude adapter to improve accuracy. The corresponding calibration value is
correction neutral indicated on the Voltage adapter.

NT00378–EN–10 361
T300 LV150 Module Settings

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
• Do not connect Voltage adapter directly to the MV sensors. Always use fuse
and disconnect switch (maximum voltage allowable on the Voltage adapter
inputs: 10 VAC).
• Never short the secondary of a Voltage Transformer (VT).
• Do not connect items of equipment with different earth potentials with an
RJ45 cable.
• Do not use RJ45 cable longer than 10 meters (32.8 feet).
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Network Characteristics

There are other parameters in addition to the sensor parameters.

• The LV150 module can take current and voltage measurements at 50 Hz or
60 Hz to correspond with the existing network frequencies.
• The sequence of phases A, B, and C can be inverted.
Measured voltages and frequency parameter settings:

Parameter De- Configu- Description

fault ration
range

Network Characteristics
Nominal 50 • 50 Choice of LV network frequency
frequency (Hz)
• 60
Phase rotation No • Yes Used to invert the phase sequence:
inverted • Yes = ACBN (inverted)
• No
• No = ABCN (normal sequence)
The ACBN sequence must be used when the CT wiring or connection configuration has been
inverted in relation to the theoretical phase sequence or for networks with an inverted phase
sequence.
NOTE: This inversion affects current and voltage.

362 NT00378–EN–10
LV150 Module Settings T300

Front Panel Voltage Indication

Access via Settings > LV0x > Voltage absence/presence page.

A LED on the front panel of the LV150 module indicates the presence or absence
of the LV network voltage.
The voltage presence indication source are the measurements from the voltage
sensors.
The LED uses colors to show how many phases are present. Off means 3 phases
absent Red means 3 phases present Orange means 1 or 2 phases present.
The threshold and delay settings are used to determine the value of two status
variables for “voltage absence for three phases” or “voltage presence for three
phases” (see diagrams).

NT00378–EN–10 363
T300 LV150 Module Settings

Front panel voltage indication settings:

Parameter De- Configuration Description

fault range

Voltage absence

Start threshold (%) 30 10-100 Definition of the measured LV network voltage threshold, as a percentage of the nominal
(increment = 1) voltage, below which the LV network voltage will be considered to be absent.
NOTE: Configure the threshold taking into account hysteresis (6 %). Consult the
glossary for the definition of hysteresis.

Operate delay time 50 0-300000 Period within which the voltage must be below the Start threshold level to consider the LV
(ms) (increment = 1) network voltage to be absent.

Hold delay time 40 40-300000 Period within which the voltage must return to above the Start threshold level to consider
(ms) (increment = 1) the LV network voltage to be not absent (to define the delay to be configured, take into
account hysteresis: 6 %).

Voltage presence

Start threshold (%) 70 10-100 Definition of the measured LV network voltage threshold, as a percentage of the nominal
(increment = 1) voltage, above which the LV network voltage will be considered to be present.
NOTE: Configure the threshold taking into account hysteresis (7 %). Consult the
glossary for the definition of hysteresis.

Operate delay time 50 0-300000 Period within which the voltage must be above the Start threshold level to consider the LV
(ms) (increment = 1) network voltage to be present.

Hold delay time 40 40-300000 Period within which the voltage must return to below the Start threshold level to consider
(ms) (increment = 1) the LV network voltage to be not present (to define the delay to be configured, take into
account hysteresis: 7 %).

Front panel indication

Voltage presence Digi- • Meas- Choice of source for indicating voltage presence/absence on the front panel of the SCxxx
source tal ured module:
input • Digital • Measured: voltage measurement taken by the voltage sensors.
input • Digital input: digital input DI6 ("MV Presence") on the SCxxx 9-way connector. This
digital input is typically connected to an external voltage relay installed in the MV
cubicle (for example. VD23).

Detection of LV voltage absence from the measures

LV network voltage Hysteresis

30% +
Hysteresis
30%

ToA
Voltage absence ThA

Yes

No

ToA: Operate delay time – voltage absence (by default: 50 ms)

ThA: Hold delay time – voltage absence (by default: 40 ms)

364 NT00378–EN–10
LV150 Module Settings T300

Detection of LV voltage presence from the measures

LV network voltage Hysteresis

70%
70% +
Hysteresis

Voltage presence
ToP ThP
Yes

No

ToP: Operate delay time – voltage presence (by default: 50 ms)

ThP: Hold delay time – voltage presence (by default: 40 ms)

NT00378–EN–10 365
T300 LV150 Module Settings

LV Power Measurement Settings

Access via LV0x > Settings > Measurements page.

The LV150 module is used to take power measurements for the purposes of
monitoring the LV network. These power measurements are implemented
according to standard IEC 61557-12.
Unlike the SC150 module, these power measurements are not optional. These
are included as standard in the LV150 module.
LV power measurements are displayed locally in the Web server in the LV
Measurement > PM - Power and PM – energy pages. See the relevant section
for more information on displaying these measurements.
The LV150 stores the power measurements taken. These can be viewed locally
via the Web server or remotely via the SCADA system.

366 NT00378–EN–10
LV150 Module Settings T300

Parameters
Setting the RMS values Setting the Average values

LV Power measurements require certain options to be configured. These are

summarized in the table below:

Measurement parameter settings

The same parameters specify the Power Measurement for MV or LV network.

Parameter De- Configuration range Description

fault
RMS
Positive power Yes • No Definition of the direction of the power flow on the channel. By default, a positive
flow is from line • Yes direction corresponds to a flow of power from the line to the CTs. This parameter
to CT depends on the location of the channel (channel = feeder or incomer). The choice
assigns the sign for the power measurements calculated by the module (SCxxx or
LV150).

Power factor IEC • IEC Choice of sign convention for the power factor calculation:
sign convention • IEEE • IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission
• IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

Zero dead-band 0.35 • 0.01–10 Filtering of low values on measured voltages. Values below this percentage will
for voltage be filtered and displayed at zero value to avoid inaccurate measurement.
measurements
(% of nominal)

Average

Calculation 10 • 1 Definition of the period for calculation interval of the averages on the
interval period • 5 measurements.
(m)
• 10
• 15
• 20
• 30
• 60
First day of Sun- • Monday Definition of the first day of the week for the calculation of averages and min/max
week day • Tuesday including a period based on the weeks.

• Wednesday
• Thursday
• Friday
• Saturday
• Sunday

NT00378–EN–10 367
T300 LV150 Module Settings

LV Power Quality Settings

Access via LV0x > Settings > Power Quality page.

In addition to power measurements, the T300 can also take measurements to

check the quality of the power supply on the LV network. These measurements
are implemented according to standard IEC62586-PQI-S. They are used in
particular to monitor the number and duration of voltage interruptions, sags (dips),
or swells, as well as the current and voltage unbalance and the harmonics.
These power quality measurements are optional on the LV150. If this option is not
present in the equipment, the corresponding parameter setting page is not
displayed in the Web server. This is also true for the values of these optional
measurements displayed on the LV Measurement/Power – Quality page. See
the relevant section for more information on displaying these measurements.
The T300 stores the measurements taken. These can be viewed locally via the
Web server or remotely via the SCADA system.
Power quality measurements require certain options to be configured. These are
summarized in the table below:

Setting the current unbalance parameters Setting the voltage unbalance parameters

Power quality parameter settings:

368 NT00378–EN–10
LV150 Module Settings T300

Parameter De- Configura- Description

fault tion range

Voltage variation events tab

Voltage dip start 90 5-100 Threshold, as a percentage of the nominal voltage, below which the detected drop in
(%) voltage is considered to be a voltage sag (dip) by the power quality measurement.

Voltage swell start 110 100–150 Threshold, as a percentage of the nominal voltage, above which the detected voltage rise is
(%) considered to be a voltage swell by the power quality measurement.

Dip or swell short 1000 10-60,000 Duration below which the presence of a voltage sag (dip) or swell is considered to be short
duration (ms) duration.

Dip or swell long 60,000 10-60,000 Duration above which the presence of a voltage sag (dip) or swell is considered to be long
duration (ms) duration.
Similarly, the average duration corresponds to the time interval between the short and long
duration.
Voltage 5 1-90 Threshold, as a percentage of the nominal voltage, below which the detected drop in
interruption start voltage is considered to be a voltage interruption by the power quality measurement.
(%)

Interruption short 180 60-900 Duration below which the voltage interruption is considered to be short duration. Similarly, a
duration (s) long duration corresponds to an interruption lasting longer than the time set for the short
duration.
NOTE: There is no notion of average duration for voltage interruptions.

Current unbalance variations tab

Start threshold (%) 5 1–100 Threshold, as a percentage of the nominal current, above which the current variation is
considered to be a current unbalance by the power quality measurement, provided that this
variation lasts longer than the configured Operate delay time.

Operate delay time 1,000 200–60,000 Time delay above which the current variation is taken into account and considered to be a
(ms) current unbalance by the power quality measurement.

Voltage unbalance variationstab

Start threshold (%) 5 1–100 Threshold, as a percentage of the nominal voltage, above which the voltage variation is
considered to be a voltage unbalance by the power quality measurement, provided that this
variation lasts longer than the configured Operate delay time.

Operate delay time 1,000 200-60,000 Time delay above which the voltage variation is taken into account and considered to be a
(ms) voltage unbalance by the power quality measurement.

NT00378–EN–10 369
T300 LV150 Module Settings

Local I/O on LV150 module

Customizing LEDs on the LV150 module
The color of 3 user LEDs on the front of the LV150 modules can be customized.

LEDs 1 to 3 can be assigned to different variables/functions. The colors and

behaviour can be customized for each state.
Access via Settings > LVx > Local inputs and outputs page.

Variables/functions that can be associated with each LED (1, 2, 3):

Associated variables Comment Typ- Proposed Color / Behavior

e

None Default for LEDs1, 2, SPS • 0 Intermediate: Off

3 • 1 Off = Off
• 2 On = Off
Voltage indication

Voltage absence indication instance 1 / 2 SPS • 0 Off = Off

• 1 On = Orange

370 NT00378–EN–10
LV150 Module Settings T300

Voltage presence indication instance 1 / 2 SPS • 0 Off = Off

• 1 On = Red
Voltage neutral displacement indication 1 / 2 /3 SPS • 0 Off = Off
• 1 On = Orange

Setting LED colors:

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

LEDs 1 to 3
On state color Red • Off Choice of color for LEDs 1 to 3 for the active state of the data.
Off state color Green • Red Choice of color for LEDs 1 to 3 for the intive state of the data.
• Green
Intermediate state Off Choice of color for LEDs 1 to 3 for the intermediate state of the data. The
color • Orange intermediate state can be, for instance, the transitional phase of a change
• Red blink of state. For DPS only.

Bad state color Off • Green blink Choice of color for LEDs 1 to 3 for a bad state of the data. A bad state
• Orange blink may be an unexpected state for the data. For DPS only

Invalid state color Green Choice of color for LEDs 1 to 3 for an invalid state of the data. An invalid
blink state corresponds to a missing known state for the data.

NT00378–EN–10 371
T300 Settings Common to LV150, SC150 and SC160 Modules

Settings Common to LV150, SC150 and SC160

Modules
What’s in This Chapter
Voltage Monitoring ...................................................................................... 372
Broken Phase Conductor Detection .............................................................. 379
Port Configuration ....................................................................................... 382

Voltage Monitoring
• MV Voltage is monitored on the SCxxx modules
Accessed via Settings > SCxxx > Voltage monitoring page
• LV Voltage is monitored on the LV150 modules
Accessed via Settings > LV150 > Voltage monitoring page

Undervoltage and Overvoltage

• For LV: Accessed via Settings > LV0x > Voltage monitoring page.
• For MV: Accessed via Settings > SCxxx > Voltage monitoring page.

Voltage monitoring enables the T300 to detect voltage anomalies on the MV or LV

network. For example, an abnormally low voltage or high voltage on one or more
phases can have consequences on the status of the electrical network, so it is
important that the T300 detects and reports it.
Note that the T300 only detects, reports and records voltage anomalies. No action
or order is produced by the T300 following the detection of an anomaly.
The T300 implements some standard detections to monitor network voltage
anomalies. These are summarized below:

372 NT00378–EN–10
Settings Common to LV150, SC150 and SC160 Modules T300

• ANSI 27 (Undervoltage detection): detects a voltage drop or an abnormally

low voltage (for example due to an unbalance) on each phase.
• ANSI 59 (Overvoltage detection): detects overvoltages on each phase.
Voltage monitoring is performed by voltage measurements from the voltage
sensors.
Configurable thresholds and delays define the detection sensitivity (see parameter
table).
For each SCxxx or LV150 module, you can operate two voltage monitoring
instances. Each instance can operate independently and simultaneously with
different detection modes. Each instance includes two groups of configuration
settings. These two groups define two sets thresholds and time delays. Each
voltage monitoring instance applies one of these groups of configuration settings.
Cooperating instances have the same detection mode and the same group of
configuration settings. The first instance that checks the condition enables
minimum and maximum voltage detection and the corresponding signaling on the
SCxxx or LV150 module.
The settings group can easily be changed by a command, to select group 1 or
group 2 from the preset thresholds, without needing to reconfigure the T300. This
is done in the Monitoring & Control > Substation page (see the corresponding
section) or remotely from the SCADA system.

ANSI 27 Characteristics
Number of instances 2 (capable of operating simultaneously with different settings)

Groups of settings 2

Detection mode Definite time (DT)

Logical node name AbsPTUV x (x = instance number)

Hysteresis reset detection 6%

Parameter Setting (For Each Instance)

Instance activation Instance 1 Active or inactive

Instance 2 Active or inactive
Measured voltage Phase-to-phase voltage or phase-to-neutral voltage

Operation mode On any phase

Detection threshold
Time delays See parameter table below.

Reset time delay

ANSI 59 Characteristics
Number of instances 2 (capable of operating simultaneously with different settings)

Groups of settings 2

Detection mode Definite time (DT)

Logical node name PrsPTOV x (x = instance number)

Hysteresis reset detection 7%

Parameter Setting (For Each Instance)

Instance activation Instance 1 Active or inactive

Instance 2 Active or inactive
Measured voltage Phase-to-phase voltage or phase-to-neutral voltage

Operation mode On any phase or on all 3 phases

Detection threshold
Time delays See parameter table below.

Reset time delay

NT00378–EN–10 373
T300 Settings Common to LV150, SC150 and SC160 Modules

Detection of MV Undervoltage from the Detection of MV Undervoltage from the

measures measures

TsU: Operate delay time –undervoltage (by TsO: Operate delay time – overvoltage (by
default: 50 ms) default: 50 ms)
ThU: Hold delay time – undervoltage (by default: ThO: Hold delay time – overvoltage (by default:
40 ms) 40 ms)

MV network votlage MV network votlage

Hysteresis Hysteresis

30% +
Hysteresis 70%
30% 70% +
Hysteresis

TsU
Undervoltage ThU Overvoltage

Yes
Yes

TsO ThO
No
No

MV or LV undervoltage and overvoltage parameter setting:

374 NT00378–EN–10
Settings Common to LV150, SC150 and SC160 Modules T300

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Function activation – Voltage monitoring

Instance 1 enable No • No Activation of instance 1 for voltage monitoring

• Yes
Instance 2 enable No • No Activation of instance 2 for voltage monitoring

• Yes
Setting group 1 or 2 - Undervoltage - Instance 1 and 2

Start threshold, (%) 30 10-200 Definition of the measured voltage threshold below which the undevoltage will
(increment = 1) be detected.
NOTE: Configure the threshold taking into account hysteresis (6 %).
Consult the glossary for the definition of hysteresis.

Operate delay time (ms) 50 0-300000 Time within which the voltage must remain below the Start threshold to
(increment = 1) validate the undervotlage detection.

Hold delay time (ms) 40 0-300000 Time within which the voltage must return above the Start threshold to
(increment = 1) cancel undervoltage detection (to define the delay to be configured, take into
account hysteresis: 6 %).

Setting group 1 or 2 - Overvoltage - Instance 1 and 2

Start threshold, (%) 70 10-200 Definition of the measured voltage threshold above which the overvoltage will
(increment = 1) be detected.
NOTE: Configure the threshold taking into account hysteresis (7 %).
Consult the glossary for the definition of hysteresis.

Operate delay time (ms) 50 0-300000 Time within which the voltage must remain above the Start threshold to
(increment = 1) validate the overvoltage detection.

Hold delay time (ms) 40 0-300000 Time within which the voltage must return below the Start threshold to cancel
(increment = 1) overvoltage detection (to define the delay to be configured, take into account
hysteresis: 7 %).

Neutral Overvoltage
• For LV: Accessed via Settings > LV0x > Voltage monitoring page.

NT00378–EN–10 375
T300 Settings Common to LV150, SC150 and SC160 Modules

• For MV: Accessed via Settings > SCxxx > Voltage monitoring page.

The voltage monitoring also enables the T300 to observe Neutral voltage
anomalies, reflecting whether the network is unbalanced.
Note that the T300 only detects, reports and records neutral voltage anomalies.
No action or order is produced by the T300 following the detection of an anomaly.
The Neutral voltage anomaly is managed by the following standard detection:
• ANSI 59N (Neutral overvoltage detection): detection of abnormal voltages
or insulation faults by measuring the residual voltage.
Neutral overvoltage monitoring is performed by voltage measurements from the
voltage sensors.
This monitoring can also be performed by calculation and summation of the three
phase voltages (in the absence of residual voltage direct measurement).
Configurable thresholds and delays define the detection sensitivity (see parameter
table).

ANSI 59N Characteristics

Number of instances 3 (capable of operating simultaneously with different settings)

Groups of settings 2

Detection mode Definite time (DT)

Logical node name FPTOV x (x = instance number)

Hysteresis reset detection 7%

Parameter Setting (For Each Instance)

Instance activation Instance 1 Active or inactive

Instance 2 Active or inactive
Instance 3 Active or inactive
Measured voltage Phase-to-phase voltage or phase-to-neutral voltage

Operation mode On neutral or 3 phases

Detection threshold
See parameter table below.
Time delays

376 NT00378–EN–10
Settings Common to LV150, SC150 and SC160 Modules T300

ANSI 59N Characteristics

Reset time delay

Detection of MV Neutral overvoltage

MV network votlage
Hysteresis

10%
10% +
Hysteresis

Neutral overvoltage

Yes

TsN ThN

No

TsN: Operate delay time – neutral overvoltage

ThN: Hold delay time – neutral overvoltage

Neutral overvoltage settings

Access via SC0x > Settings > Neutral overvoltage page.

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Function activation – NeutPTOV- Neutral overvoltage

Instance 1 enable Yes • No Activation of instance 1 for neutral overvoltage monitoring

• Yes
Instance 2 enable Yes • No Activation of instance 2 for neutral overvoltage monitoring

• Yes
Instance 3 enable No • No Activation of instance 3 for neutral overvoltage monitoring
• Yes
Setting group 1 or 2 - NeutPTOV - Instance 1, 2 and 3

Start threshold, (%) • Instance 1: 10-200 Definition of the measured neutral voltage threshold above which a
◦ 10 (increment = 1) neutral overvoltage will be detected.

• Instance 2: NOTE: configure the threshold taking into account hysteresis (7%).
Consult the glossary for the definition of hysteresis.
◦ 30
• Instance 3:
◦ 60

NT00378–EN–10 377
T300 Settings Common to LV150, SC150 and SC160 Modules

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Function activation – NeutPTOV- Neutral overvoltage

Operate delay time • Instance 1: 0-300000 Time within which the neutral voltage must remain above the Start
(ms) ◦ 3000 (increment = 1) threshold to validate the neutral overvotlage detection.

• Instance 2:
◦ 1000
• Instance 3:
◦ 300
Hold delay time • Instance 1: 0-300000 Time within which the neutral voltage must return below the Start
(ms) (increment = 1) threshold to cancel neutral overvoltage detection (to define the delay to
◦ 3000
be configured, take into account hysteresis: 7%).
• Instance 2:
◦ 1000
• Instance 3:
◦ 300

378 NT00378–EN–10
Settings Common to LV150, SC150 and SC160 Modules T300

Broken Phase Conductor Detection

• For SCxxx module: Accessed via SC0x > Settings > Broken Conductor
page
• For LV150 module: Accessed via LV0x > Settings > Broken Conductor
page

Detecting a broken phase conductor is an optional function on the SCxxx or

LV150 module. If this option is not present in the equipment, the corresponding
parameter setting page is not displayed in the Web server.
Broken conductor detection uses the following ANSI detection standard: Negative
sequence overvoltage detection (ANSI 47).
The characteristics of this ANSI code are given below.

ANSI 47: Negative Sequence Overvoltage Detection

The loss of a phase resulting from a broken phase conductor creates an
unbalance on the network. The negative sequence voltage component becomes
significant. The T300 uses this negative sequence voltage component to detect a
break in a conductor.
Broken conductor detection is therefore enabled on the module (SCxxx or LV150)
if the negative sequence voltage component detected is greater than the
configurable Start threshold for a longer time than the Operate delay time.
Broken conductor detection is canceled if the negative sequence voltage
component falls below the configurable Reset Threshold for a longer time than
the Hold delay time.

NT00378–EN–10 379
T300 Settings Common to LV150, SC150 and SC160 Modules

ANSI 47 Characteristics
Number of instances 2 (capable of operating simultaneously with different
settings)

Groups of settings 2

Logical node name BcPTOV x (x = instance number)

Fault current indication Fault current detected

Parameter Setting (For Each Instance)

Instance activation Instance 1 Active or inactive

Instance 2 Active or inactive
Minimum negative sequence voltage component DT See parameter settings table
threshold
Acknowledge time DT

Reset threshold DT
Reset time DT

Balanced line supply. The negative sequence Examples of unbalanced line supplies with a
component (Vi) of the 3-phase voltages is zero. significant negative sequence voltage
component (Vi ≠ 0).

V3 V1
120° a²V2 V1
V1

V1 or
aV3
<120°
V2 Vi = 0 V3
V3 V2
Vi ≠ 0 V2
2
Vi = 1/ 3(V 1 + a V 2 + aV 3)
where a = j 2p / 3 Vi ¹ 0

Parameters
Two broken phase conductor instances, with their detection mode and their
specific settings can operate individually or simultaneously and for each module
(SCxxx or LV150). The first instance that checks the condition enables broken
phase conductor detection and the corresponding signaling on the T300.
Each instance includes two groups of settings. These two groups enable two sets
of preset thresholds.
The settings group can easily be changed by a command to select group 1 or
group 2 from the preset thresholds, without needing to reconfigure the T300. This
is done in the Monitoring & Control/Substation page (see the corresponding
section) or remotely from the SCADA system.
Broken conductor detection parameter settings:
Access via SC0x / LV0x > Settings > Broken Conductor page.

380 NT00378–EN–10
Settings Common to LV150, SC150 and SC160 Modules T300

Parameter Default Configuration Description

range

Function activation – Broken conductor

Instance 1 enable No • No Activation of instance 1 for detecting broken phase conductor
• Yes
Instance 2 enable No • No Activation of instance 2 for detecting broken phase conductor
• Yes
Setting Group 1 or 2 – BcPTOV Instance 1, 2

Start threshold (%) Inst. 1: 10 2-30 Value, as a percentage of the nominal voltage, above which the
Inst. 2: 20 (increment = 1) negative sequence voltage component activates broken conductor
detection. The negative sequence voltage component must be
detected above this threshold for a longer time than the Operate
delay time to validate detection.

Operate delay time (ms) 1000 0-300,000 Minimum time for which the detected negative sequence voltage
(increment = 1) component must be above the Start threshold to validate broken
conductor detection.
Reset threshold (%) Inst. 1: 5 2-30 Value, as a percentage of the nominal voltage, below which the
Inst. 2: 15 (increment = 0.1) negative sequence voltage component cancels broken conductor
detection, provided that it remains below this threshold for the Hold
delay time. This value must be configured below the value of the
Start threshold.
Hold delay time (ms) 0 0-300,000 Minimum time for which the negative sequence voltage component
(increment = 1) must remain below the Reset threshold to cancel broken conductor
detection.

NT00378–EN–10 381
T300 Settings Common to LV150, SC150 and SC160 Modules

Port Configuration
Access via Settings > LV0x/SC0x > Port Configuration page.

T300 manages port configuration to limit access to the minimal subset of required
physical ports.

382 NT00378–EN–10
Settings Common to LV150, SC150 and SC160 Modules T300

Configuration of Physical Ports

To limit access to a physical port on the T300 equipment, you can deactivate ports
from the Web server.
For physical port configuration on:
• HU250, refer to Port configuration on HU250, page 123
• LV150, see below
• SCxxx, see below

Physical port on LV0x Physical port on SC0x

A B
A B

• A: LAN left
• B: LAN right

NT00378–EN–10 383
T300 Settings Common to LV150, SC150 and SC160 Modules

In the T300 Web server:

• By default, both SC0x/LV0x Ethernet ports are enabled (parameter set to
None).
• At least one of the SC0x/LV0x Ethernet ports must be enabled to access the
T300 equipment. Otherwise, the communication with the T300 equipment is
lost.

NOTICE
HAZARD OF LAN NETWORK MISUSE
Use the LAN network for internal communication between T300 modules.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment malfunction.

The T300 LAN network is designed for internal communication between T300
modules.
It is also possible to connect to this LAN via a PC to establish an Ethernet
connection to the equipment.
Other use of the LAN network does not guarantee a correct functioning of the
system.
The parameter settings of SC0x/LV0x Ethernet physical ports are as follows:

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Physical ports

Ethernet
Disable port None • None Ethernet LAN port dedicated to internal communication between
• Left T300 modules or for connecting a PC.

• Right

For physical port configuration on a T300 system, see the example in the section
HU250 Port Configuration, page 125.

Configuration of Logical Ports

Under Logical ports/WebServer, set the Disable web pages to Yes to not
access the HTML pages for SC0x/LV0x Module Maintenance. These HTML pages
are configured during commissioning.
Refer to the Quick Start Guide (NT00383-xx) for more information on
commissioning operations, in particular changing the IP address of SC0x/LV0x
modules.

384 NT00378–EN–10
PS50 Module Settings T300

PS50 Module Settings

Access via Settings > PS01 pages.

The T300 Web server is also used to define the PS50 power supply module
settings.
The module is delivered with the default factory settings. These settings can be
customized via PS01 page.
The PS50 module communicates with the HU250 module via an RS485 Modbus
link. It is via this communication that the settings defined in the Web page are sent
to the PS50 module.
These settings are saved in the PS50 module and in the T300 configuration.
Setting the supply input supervision parameters:

NT00378–EN–10 385
T300 PS50 Module Settings

Setting the battery test parameters:

Setting the telecom output supervision parameters:

Setting the backup management parameters:

386 NT00378–EN–10
PS50 Module Settings T300

The table below lists the settings that can be modified:

Parameter Default Configuration range Description

Supply Input Supervision

Input indication enable ON • OFF Activation of the AC line supply monitoring input for the corresponding
• ON signal.

Input indication absence 60 V 50-240 Definition of the threshold for enabling the voltage absence signal on the AC
threshold line supply input.

Input indication presence 70 V 50–240 Definition of the threshold for enabling the voltage presence signal on the
threshold AC line supply input.

Input indication absence 40 ms 20–2,000 Time delay for the absence of voltage for the AC line supply input signal.
timer The voltage must be below the defined threshold for the duration of this time
period to activate the signal.

Input indication presence 40 ms 20–2,000 Time delay for the presence of voltage for the AC line supply input signal.
time The voltage must be above the defined threshold for the duration of this time
period to activate the signal.

Battery Charger

Battery type 24 Ah • 24 Ah Definition of the type of battery used with the PS50
• 38 Ah
Nominal capacity 24.0 Ah Indication of the nominal capacity of the battery according to the type of
battery selected. This is an advanced setting available on the set points list,
and used if the battery type is forced to 0 (=manual) in the same list.

Battery Test

Automatic test enable ON • OFF Activation of the automatic battery test

• ON
Automatic test interval 1d 1–100 Time interval for the automatic battery test

Automatic test retries 2 1–9 Definition of the maximum number of unsuccessful attempts to carry out the
count battery test. If the counter total is reached, the battery test is abandoned.

Automatic test retries 12 h 1–24 Time interval between each unsuccessful attempt to test the battery
interval
Test AC internal maximal 40 mO- 30–300 Internal maximum resistance for the battery test (AC measurement)
resistance hm
Telecom Output Supervision

Output max current ON • OFF Activation of monitoring of maximum current delivered at the
enable telecommunication power supply output
• ON
Output max current 1.0 A 0.2–4 Maximum current threshold for the telecommunication power supply output.
threshold If the current reaches this value during the Output max current timer period,
the corresponding power supply is automatically cut.

Output max current timer 180 s 1–300 Duration for which the current must exceed the Output max current
threshold before the telecommunication power supply output is cut.

Backup Management

Backup time enable ON • OFF Activation of the battery backup power supply
• ON
Backup time duration 16 h 1–16 Definition of the battery backup duration in the event of loss of the AC line
supply
At the end of this period, the power is automatically cut to conserve the
battery.

NT00378–EN–10 387
T300 Commissioning Tests

Commissioning Tests

CAUTION
HAZARD OF INCORRECT EQUIPMENT OPERATION
The SC modules have various software interlocks to reduce the risk of
unintended switch operations. For these to work as intended, both the module
configuration AND the wiring between the module and the equipment must be
correct. Ensure that the following are checked:
• Main switch position status
• Earth switch disconnector position status
• Disconnector position status (if applicable).
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment
damage.

Some instructions are given here by way of example in terms of how to

commission the equipment and help ensure that it is operating correctly with all
the associated connections and devices operational.
The PC used to configure the T300 can remain connected to the HU250 module
during the tests. This allows users to observe the different equipment states and
the time-stamped events.

Local/Remote Button in “Local” Position

• Verify that the PC has taken account of the local mode option.
• Verify that the MV cubicle motor mechanisms function correctly: opening and
closing of each channel, switch position information corresponding to the
status of the LEDs.
• Verify “locked” information (ground switch): check that the “locked” inputs are
taken into account by the equipment.

Local/Remote Button in “Remote” Position

• Verify that the MV cubicles status is correctly displayed on the control station.
• Verify that the cubicle connection cables are correctly identified. Disconnect
the cubicle connection cables from the T300: the loss of position must be
signaled on the front panel of the corresponding SCxxx module.
• If equipped with Harting connectors, check that the HA10 connectors for
linking the cubicles have a locating device.
If you have dummy devices, install them on the HA10 connectors so as not to
overload the battery or the MV cubicle.
• Verify the remote controls:
◦ Check that each command taken into account by the SCADA system is
correctly transmitted and executed by the equipment: opening and closing
of each channel.
◦ Check that the switch position information received by the SCADA system
corresponds to the status indicated by the LEDs.
• Verify the digital inputs:
◦ Check that the digital inputs are taken into account by the equipment and
that the signals are retransmitted to the SCADA system.

388 NT00378–EN–10
Commissioning Tests T300

• Verify the fault current detection function:

◦ Use a current simulator available as an option to generate a fault current
to check the fault current conditions configured in the T300 and help
ensure that the T300 detects and indicates the fault current and
retransmits the signals to the SCADA system.
◦ Remove the dummy devices and reconnect the cubicle connection cables
to their corresponding HA10 connector (with locating device).
• Verify “locked” information (ground switch):
◦ Check that the “locked” inputs are taken into account by the equipment
and that the signals are retransmitted to the SCADA system.
• Verify voltage presence information:
◦ Simulate the absence/presence of voltage on the voltage acquisition
device (DI6 or voltage sensor) and check that the voltage absence/
presence is taken into account by the equipment and that the signals are
retransmitted to the SCADA system.
• Verify the “loss of AC voltage” alarm:
◦ Open the AC voltage fuse unit and check that the equipment takes
account of the loss of line supply and that this signal is retransmitted to the
SCADA system.
NOTE: These tests can store time-stamped events. Do not forget to clear
them from the PC used for configuration.

LED Test Button on Front Panel

• Check that all LEDs on front panel of HU250, SCxxx and LV150 are blinking
by pressing the Test LED button on the front panel of the HU250 module.
This test also checks the internal communication between the modules. Refer
to the chapter Testing the LEDs on the front panel, page 405 for more
information about this test.
NOTE: See the Operation, page 392 section for more information on how the
commands and the local/remote modes work on the T300.

Check-list to be Used During Commissioning or After Firmware Upgrade

WARNING
HAZARD OF INCORRECT EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Check that the configuration of the earth switch and disconnector matches the
switchgear and wiring.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

Checks to be performed during commissioning

During a commissioning phase, it is recommended to check all the inputs/outputs
connected to the T300:
• Check consistency between physical status and corresponding status in
T300.
• Check effectiveness of commands.
Checks to be performed after a firmware upgrade and an import of a new
configuration
After a firmware upgrade and the import of a new configuration, it is recommended
to check that the main variables of the system have a value and a quality which
are consistent with the reality. Example of a list of variables that should be
checked:

NT00378–EN–10 389
T300 Commissioning Tests

• For HU250:
◦ General health error
◦ General health warning
• For SCxxx:
◦ Module health error
◦ Main switch position status
◦ Earth switch disconnector position status
◦ Disconnector position status (if configured)
◦ Voltage absence for all phases
◦ Voltage presence for all phases
◦ RMS current phase A, B, C
◦ RMS voltage phase A, B, C
• For LV150:
◦ Module health error
◦ Voltage absence for all phases
◦ Voltage presence for all phases
◦ RMS current phase A, B, C
◦ RMS voltage phase A, B, C

390 NT00378–EN–10
 T300

Operation
What’s in This Part
Indications and Actions on the Front Panel ..................................................... 392
Testing the LEDs on the Front Panel .............................................................. 405
Local/Remote Mode ..................................................................................... 406
Switch Commands ....................................................................................... 408
Other Commands......................................................................................... 409

NT00378–EN–10 391
T300 Indications and Actions on the Front Panel

Indications and Actions on the Front Panel

What’s in This Chapter
Indications and Actions on the Front Panel of the HU250 Module .................... 393
HU250 LED Status ...................................................................................... 394
Indications and Actions on the Front Panel of the SC150 Module .................... 396
SC150 LED Status ...................................................................................... 398
Indications and Actions on the Front Panel of the SC160 Module .................... 399
SC160 LED Status ...................................................................................... 401
Indications and Actions in the Front Panel of the LV150 Module ...................... 402
LED Status on LV150 Module - Meaning of Colors ......................................... 403
Indications and Actions on the Front Panel of the PS50 Module ...................... 404

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC S HOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
• Wear your personal protective equipment (PPE) and comply with the safe
electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E in the USA or applicable local
standards.
• This unit must be installed and serviced only by qualified electrical
personnel.
• Turn off all power supplying this unit before working on or inside the unit.
• Always use a properly rated volt age sensing device to confirm that the
power is off.
• A live current transformer secondary circuit must not be opened without
turning off the primary side of the transformer and short circuiting
transformer secondary circuit first.
• Replace all devices, door s and covers before turning on power to this unit.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
• The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure
modes of control paths and, for certain critical control functions, provide a
means to achieve a safe state during and after a path failure. Example:
Emergency Stop.
• Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control
functions.
• System control paths may inc lude communication links. Consideration must
be given to the implications of anticipated transmission delays or failures of
the link.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

During operation the T300 indicates a certain number of signals via the LEDs on
the front panel of the modules.
There are also pushbuttons allowing manual user actions. These indications and
actions are summarized in the tables below for each module type.
For a more detailed description of the cause of each potential issue, refer to the
section entitled Diagnostic LEDs on the Front Panel, page 415.

392 NT00378–EN–10
Indications and Actions on the Front Panel T300

Indications and Actions on the Front Panel of the HU250

Module
The following image shows the HU250 LEDs.

A. HU250 states A B C
B. Local/remote mode
C. Automation function states and checks
Easergy
D. Power supply
E. Customizable LEDs
F. 4G modem box or IEEE 802.15.4 protocol J
(T300 option) LEDs
AC
Supply D
G. RS-232-RS-485 modem LEDs 48/24V

G TX
12V
EXT H
H. Reset RX

I. LED test F I

RS232-RS485
E

4G-GPS
HU250
012345
YYMMXXXX

Once the T300 is energized, the LEDs on the front panel can be lit to indicate
operating states.
The buttons allow actions from the user.
These informations and actions are summarized in the following table.

Description of HU250 module

Part Description

A HU250 states
A.1 A.1 HU250 operating
A.2 A.2 Equipment status
A.3 A.3 Wi-Fi access during operation (activated by local mode)
A.4 A.4 Communication status with modules (SCxxx, LV150, PS50…).

B Local/remote mode
B.1 B.1 Remote mode position: All local switch commands (via the front panel and Wi-Fi) via the SCxxx module are
B.2 blocked.
B.2 Local mode position: All remote commands are blocked.
B.3 B.3 Pushbutton for selecting local or remote mode.
The changeover to local mode enables Wi-Fi access.

C and H Automation function states and checks

C.1 C.1 Automation active
C.2 C.2 Automation inactive
C.3
C.3 Automation locked
C.4 C.4 Button to change state of automation function (ON/OFF)

H.1 Button to confirm change of state. Both buttons (change of state and OK button) need to be pressed
H.1 simultaneously to implement the change of state. This changeover occurs simultaneously on all T300 modules using
the automation functions.
It is only possible to change the state of the automation function using the buttons in local mode.

NT00378–EN–10 393
T300 Indications and Actions on the Front Panel

Part Description

Automation commands from Head Unit are blocked when the tripping protection is enabled on the SC160
module.
D Power supply
Supply
D.1 AC D.1 AC line supply operating
D.2 48/24V
D.2 48 V/24 V motor mechanism power supply operating
D.3 12V
D.4 EXT D.3 Transmission equipment power supply operating
D.5 D.4 Overconsumption on transmission equipment power supply
D.5 Battery status
These states correspond to the information retransmitted by the PS50 module via Modbus communication
between modules. If another type of power supply module is used, these LEDs can be customized using the
Easergy Builder advanced configuration tool.

E Customizable LEDs
E.1 E.1; E.2; E.3 Freely configurable LEDs for customized status indication.
E.2 These LEDs can be customized using the Easergy Builder advanced configuration tool. Refer to the T300
E.3
Quick Start.

F 4G modem box or IEEE 802.15.4 protocol (T300 option) LEDs

F.1 F.1 LED indicating activity on the mobile (2G/3G/4G) or IEEE 802.15.4 networks. Flashes when searching for a
F.2 network or transferring data, and, for IEEE 802.15.4 protocol, when commissioning the device.
F.3 F.2 LED indicating a modem status: lights for a SIM card status or to indicate a network connection problem (at
receive level, etc.).
F.3 GPS signal reception status LED (modem box only)

G RS-232-RS-485 modem LEDs

G.1 TX G.1 TX: LED indicating transmission of RS-232/RS-485 data.
G.2 RX G.2 RX: LED indicating reception of RS-232/RS-485 data.

I Reset
I.1
I.1 Button for resetting all fault current indications on all SCxxx modules as well as automation locking.

J LED test
J.1
J.1 LED test button forcing all LEDs on the front panel of all T300 modules and the external LED to light up. Used to
detect any potential anomaly on the LEDs.

NOTE: See the table on the next page for the meaning of the different flashing
and color combinations for each of the LEDs. Some LEDs can be customized
by configuration.

HU250 LED Status

Meaning of the color indications for each LED
Flashing Steady
LED status LED legend OFF
Red Green Red Green Orange

A A.1 Boot - Fault OK COM fault -

A.1
A.2 A.2 - - Major fault - Minor Fault OK
A.3
A.4 A.3 - - Fault ON In progress OFF

A.4 - - Fault - - OK
B B.1 - - - Remote - Local
B.1
B.2 - - Local - - Remote
B.2

C C.1 - - - ON - OFF
C.1
C.2 C.2 - - OFF - - ON
C.3
C.3 - - - - Locked Unlocked

394 NT00378–EN–10
Indications and Actions on the Front Panel T300

Flashing Steady
LED status LED legend OFF
Red Green Red Green Orange

D D.1 - - AC OFF AC ON - -
Supply
D.1 AC
D.2 48/24V
D.2 - - Fault OK - -
D.3 12V
D.4 EXT
D.5 D.3 - - Fault OK - -

D.4 - - Fault OK - -

D.5 - - Fault OK - -

E(1) E.1 - - - - ON OFF

E.1
E.2 - - - - ON OFF
E.2
E.3 - - - -
E.3 ON OFF

4G modem F.1 - Active - - - Inactive

F
F.1
F.2 - - Fault - - OK
F.2
F.3 - Active and - No synchro - Disabled
F.3
synchro

IEEE 802.15.4 F.1 - Commission- - OK - Inactive

receiver ing
F
F.1 F.2 - - Fault - - OK
F.2

G G.1 - Transmission - - - Inactive

G.1 TX

G.2 RX
G.2 - Reception - - - Inactive

(1) LEDs customizable by configuration. Default values only indicated.

NOTE: Indications in bold correspond to normal operation (first power up
without existence of a potential issue indication).

NT00378–EN–10 395
T300 Indications and Actions on the Front Panel

Indications and Actions on the Front Panel of the SC150

Module
SC150 SC150H

A B C C B E

Easergy

D OK

E
F ON
A D F G H I
G
H OFF

I SC150
012345
YYMMXXXX

Part Description of indications and actions

A SC150 Status
A.1SC150 operating, communication status with the HU250
A.1
A.2 Equipment status (potential software issue, potential hardware issue, potential configuration issue)
A.2

B Local/Remote
B.1 Local mode: Commands via the front panel (or Wi-Fi) are possible. Commands from the control center are locked.
B.1
B.2 Remote mode: Local commands via the front panel of the SC150 module (or Wi-Fi) are locked. Commands from the
B.2 control center are possible
The Local/Remote position displayed on the SC150 is a copy of the display managed on the HU250 module.

C Automation function states and checks

C.1 C.1 Automation active
C.2 C.2 Automation inactive
C.3 C.3 Automation locked
The automatic control enabled and disabled states on SC150 modules are copied from the HU250 module. The
automation locked state on an SCxxx module reflects the state of the SC150 module and is copied to the HU250
module.
D Special function LEDs
D.1 Default assignment:
D.2
D.1 Simulated switch position (green = open, red = closed)
D.3
D.2 Unassigned
D.3 External lock (orange = external lock configured and input active)
These LEDs can be customized. Refer to Indications and Actions on the Front Panel of the SC150 Module, page
396 (T300 User Manual).

E Local switch commands

Local switch commands are only possible in local mode.
E.1 OK

E.1Command confirmation button. This button must be pressed simultaneously with the change of state (OK or OFF)
E.2 ON
button for the command to be considered.
E.2 Button to close switch (ON)
E.3 Button to open switch (OFF)
OFF
E.3

396 NT00378–EN–10
Indications and Actions on the Front Panel T300

Part Description of indications and actions

F Switch state
Switch position symbolized by a representation in 2 colors:
F.1 Vertical/red: closed position
F.2 Oblique/green: open position
F.2
F.1

G Ground (earth) switch state

Position of the ground (earth) switch symbolized by 2 states and 1 color:
G.1 Off: Ground (earth) switch in open position
G.1 Green: Ground (earth) switch in closed position

H Voltage presence
If DI6 used:
H.1 H.1 Red: Voltage present (DI active)
Off: Voltage absent (DI inactive)

If voltage sensor used:

H.1 Red: Voltage present on 3 phases, or invalid measures
Off: Voltage absent on 3 phases
Orange: Intermediate, which means Presence on at least one phase, and Absence on at least one phase.

I Fault current detection

Fault current detection is symbolized by two arrows that can indicate the direction of the fault current (for directional fault
I.1 current type only):
I.1 Arrow pointing backward, flashing orange means fault detection in progress, flashing green means permanent earth
I.2 fault, steady green means permanent phase fault, flowing in the direction indicated by the arrow (toward the busbar).
I.2 Arrow pointing forward, flashing orange means fault detection in progress, flashing red means permanent earth fault,
steady red means permanent phase fault, flowing in the direction indicated by the arrow (toward the network). Also,
serves to indicate the presence of an ammetric type fault current.

NT00378–EN–10 397
T300 Indications and Actions on the Front Panel

SC150 LED Status

Meaning of the color indications for each LED
Flashing Steady
LED status LED legend OFF
Red Green Orange Red Green Orange

A A.1 Start-up - - Fault OK COM OFF -

A.1 - - - -
A.2 Major fault Minor fault OK
A.2

B B.1 - - - - Remote - Local

B.1 B.2 - - - Local - - Remote
B.2

C C.1 - - - - ON - OFF
C.1 C.2 - - - OFF - - ON
C.2
C.3
C.3 - - - - - Locked Unlocked

D(1) D.1 - - - Simulated Simulated - Unknown

closed open
D.1
D.2 D.2 - - - - - - -
D.3
D.3 - - - - - External No lock
lock
F F.1 Invalid - Intermediate - - Open
Closed
state
F.2 Invalid - Intermediate Closed Open - Closed
F.2 state

F.1

G G.1 Invalid - Intermediate - Closed - Open

state
G.1

H H.1 - - - ON (3 - ON (1 or 2 OFF (3
phases or phases) phases or
H.1 DI6) or DI6)
Invalid

I I.1 - Earth fault Fault - Phase fault No fault

towards detection in towards -
I.1 busbar progress busbar
I.2 I.2 Earth fault - Fault Phase fault - - No fault
towards detection in towards
network or progress network or
ammetric ammetric
fault fault

(1) LEDs customizable by configuration. Default values only indicated.

NOTE: Indications in bold correspond to normal operation (first power up
without existence of a potential issue indication).The switchgear and voltage
presence states cannot be determined during normal operation as they
depend on the network status and the position of the breaking

398 NT00378–EN–10
Indications and Actions on the Front Panel T300

Indications and Actions on the Front Panel of the SC160

Module
NOTE: SCxxx generic name is used because the information below is
common to different types of SC modules (SC150, SC150H, SC160).

A B C

Easergy

D OK

E
F ON

G
H OFF

I SC150
012345
YYMMXXXX

Part Description of indications and actions

A SC160 Status
A.1 SC160 operating, communication status with the HU250
A.1
A.2 Equipment status (potential software issue, potential hardware issue, potential configuration issue)
A.2

B Local/Remote
B.1 Local mode: Commands via the front panel (or Wi-Fi) are possible. Commands from the control center are locked.
B.1
B.2 Remote mode: Local commands via the front panel of the SC160 module (or Wi-Fi) are locked. Commands from the
B.2 control center are possible
The Local/Remote position displayed on the SC160 is a copy of the display managed on the HU250 module.

C Automation function states and checks

C.1 C.1 Automation active
C.2 C.2 Automation inactive
C.3 C.3 Automation locked
The automatic control enabled and disabled states on SCxxx modules are copied from the HU250 module. The
automation locked state on an SC160 module reflects the state of the SC160 module and is copied to the HU250
module.
D Special function LEDs
D.1 Default assignment:
D.1 Tripping mode (green = enabled, unlit = disabled)
D.2
D.2 Tripping indication (orange flashing quickly = fault pick up/tripping imminent, red flashing slowly = trip latched)
D.3
D.3 Unassigned
These LEDs can be customized. Refer to Customizing the LEDs on the SCxxx, page 349.

E Local switch commands

Local switch commands are only possible in local mode.
E.1 OK

E.1Trip acknowledgment button: this button must be pressed during 3 s for resetting trip indication.
E.2 ON
Control enabling button: this button must be pressed simultaneously with the change-of-state button (ON or OFF) for
control to be accepted.

E.3
OFF E.2 Button to close switch (ON)

E.3 Button to open switch (OFF)

NT00378–EN–10 399
T300 Indications and Actions on the Front Panel

Part Description of indications and actions

F Switch state
Switch position symbolized by a representation in 2 colors:
F.1 Vertical/red: closed position
F.2 Oblique/green: open position
F.2
F.1

G Ground (earth) switch state

Position of the ground (earth) switch symbolized by 2 states and 1 color:
G.1 Off: Ground (earth) switch in open position
G.1 Green: Ground (earth) switch in closed position

H Voltage presence
If DI6 used:
H.1 H.1 Red: Voltage present (DI active)
Off: Voltage absent (DI inactive)

If voltage sensor used:

H.1 Red: Voltage present on 3 phases or invalid measure
Off: Voltage absent on 3 phases
Orange: Intermediate which means presence on at least one phase, and Absence on at least one phase

I Fault current detectionand tripping

Fault current detection or tripping is symbolized by two arrows that can indicate the direction of the fault current (for
I.1 directional fault current type only):
I.2 I.1 Arrow pointing backward, flashing orange means fault detection in progress, flashing green means permanent earth
fault, steady green means permanent phase fault or tripped on earth fault, steady green means permanent phase fault or
tripped on phase fault, flowing in the direction indicated by the arrow (toward the busbar).
I.2 Arrow pointing forward, flashing orange means fault detection in progress, flashing red means permanent earth fault
or tripped on earth fault, steady red means permanent phase fault or tripped on phase fault, flowing in the direction
indicated by the arrow (toward the network). Also, serves to indicate the presence of an ammetric type fault current.

400 NT00378–EN–10
Indications and Actions on the Front Panel T300

SC160 LED Status

Meaning of the color indications for each LED
Flashing Steady
LED status LED legend OFF
Red Green Orange Red Green Orange

A A.1 Start-up - - Fault OK COM OFF -

A.1 - - -
A.2 Module is Major fault Minor or OK
A.2 going to transcient
restart fault
or
Not yet
configured

B B.1 - - - - Remote - Local

B.1 B.2 - - - Local - - Remote
B.2

C C.1 - - - - ON - OFF
C.1 C.2 - - - OFF - - ON
C.2
C.3
C.3 - - - - - Locked Unlocked

D(1) D.1 - - - - Tripping - Tripping

mode mode
D.1 enabled disabled
D.2
D.3 D.2 Trip latched - Tripping - - - No fault
imminent
D.3 - - - - - - -

F F.1 Invalid - Intermediate - - Open

state or
Earth switch
closed (with Closed
F.2 earth switch
only)
F.1
F.2 Invalid - Intermediate - Open - Closed
state
G G.1 Invalid - Intermediate - Closed - Open
state
G.1

H H.1 - - - ON (3 - ON (1 or 2 OFF (3
phases or phases) phases or
H.1 DI6) or DI6)
invalid

I I.1 - Earth fault Fault - Phase fault No fault

towards detection in towards -
I.1 busbar progress busbar
I.2 I.2 Earth fault - Fault Phase fault - - No fault
towards detection in towards
network or progress network or
ammetric ammetric
fault fault

(1) LEDs customizable by configuration. Default values only indicated.

NOTE: Indications in bold correspond to normal operation (first power up
without existence of a potential issue indication).The switchgear and voltage
presence states cannot be determined during normal operation as they
depend on the network status and the position of the breaking.

NT00378–EN–10 401
T300 Indications and Actions on the Front Panel

Indications and Actions in the Front Panel of the LV150

Module

A B

Easergy

LV150
012345
YYMMXXXX

Part Description of indications and actions

A LV150 states
A.1 A.1 LV150 operating, communication status with the HU250
A.2 A.2 Equipment status (potential software issue, potential hardware issue, potential configuration issue).

B Not used.
B.1
B.2

C Not used
C.1 These LEDs can be customized. Refer to Customizing the LEDs on the LV150 module, page 370.
C.2
C.3

D Voltage presence
D.1 Red: power on 3 phases or invalid measure
D.1 Off: Power off on 3 phases
Orange: Power on on at least one phase, and power off on at least one phase

402 NT00378–EN–10
Indications and Actions on the Front Panel T300

LED Status on LV150 Module - Meaning of Colors

Flashing Steady
Indicator LED legend OFF
state Red Green Orange Red Green Orange

A A.1 Start-up - - Fault OK Com OFF -

A.1 A.2 - - - Major fault - Minor fault OK

A.2

B B.1

B.1 Not used

B.2

C C.1

C.1
Not used
C.2
C.3

D D.1 - - - ON (3 - ON (1 or 2 OFF (3
phases) or phases) phases)
Invalid
D.1

NOTE: The indications in bold letters correspond to normal operation (first

power up without existence of a potential issue indication). The voltage
presence states cannot be determined for normal operation, because that
depends on the state of the network.

NT00378–EN–10 403
T300 Indications and Actions on the Front Panel

Indications and Actions on the Front Panel of the PS50

Module

A B C D E F G H

Part Description of the states and actions

A PS50 Module Status
A.1 If the LED flashes green once a second, this indicates that the PS50 module is operating
A.2 If the LED flashes green every 100 ms, this indicates the startup sequence
A.3 If the LED flashes green every 4 seconds, this indicates that the PS50 is in standby mode.

B Network voltage status

B.1 If the LED is red, this indicates that the network voltage is absent.

C Battery status LED

C.1 Red LED indicates that the battery has a potential issue or at end of life (replacement needed).

D Equipment status LED

D.1 If the LED is red, this indicates a potential issue on the PS50 module.

E 48 V/24 V power supply status

E.1 If the LED is green, the 48 V/24 V is operating.

F 12 V IED power supply status

F.1 If the LED is green, the 12 V IED power supply is operating.

G 12 V transmission power supply status

G.1 If the LED is green, the 12 V transmission power supply is operating.

H Reset button
This button has 2 functions:
H.1 To restart outputs
H.2 To restart the reserve power supply (12 V and 24 V/48 V) after a long power outage.

I Modbus communication status

9.1 If the LED flashes yellow, this indicates that the internal Modbus communication between the PS50 and the
HU250 modules is operating.
NOTE: During the startup sequence, the LED is lit when there is no communication then is off when
receiving and transmitting frames.

NOTE: All the LEDs mentioned above only include single color indication.

404 NT00378–EN–10
Testing the LEDs on the Front Panel T300

Testing the LEDs on the Front Panel

Location of the local/remote and LED test buttons on the front of HU250 module

A
B

A. Local/Remote button
B. LED test button
The LED test button on the front of the HU250 module is used to:
• Verify LED operation: Once the pushbutton has been pressed, all the LEDs
on the front panel of the HU250, SC150 and LV150 modules flash for 10 s,
lighting up alternately in orange, red, and green. The external LEDs are also
activated during this period. This test is also used to verify module
synchronization, by checking that all LEDs are flashing on all modules at the
same time.
• Verify communication on the SC150 and LV150 modules: The LED test is
also a way of checking communication between the HU250 and various
SC150 modules. This test, initiated by the HU250, is then sent to the various
modules via the internal IP communication using IEC 60870-5-104 protocol.
Those SC150 and LV150 modules with flashing LEDs indicate that the link
with the HU250 is operational.

NT00378–EN–10 405
T300 Local/Remote Mode

Local/Remote Mode
What’s in This Chapter
Automation Enabled .................................................................................... 407

The local/remote pushbutton on the front of the HU250 module is used to select
the T300 operating mode. This mode on the HU250 module is copied to all the
SC150 modules. Each time the pushbutton is pressed, the mode switches
between local and remote mode and vice versa.
It is also possible to use an external local/remote selector switch by connecting it
to digital inputs 7 and 8 on the HU250 module to replace the pushbutton on the
front panel (see the "External Local/Remote" section for more information).
By default, the local/remote mode is managed by the pushbutton on the front of
the HU250. Remote mode can be forced by setting External local/remote key to
Yes in the HU01/Settings/Local inputs and outputs/Miscellaneous page.
In addition, each SC150 module can be configured to use a digital input to provide
the local/remote mode for the individual module (see section Switch Control, page
97). The SC150 responds to remote commands when both the HU250 and the
SC150 are in remote mode.
The SC150 responds to local commands when either the HU250 or the SC150 is
in local mode.
Local and remote modes imply differences in terms of the actions and command
options available on the equipment. Some interfaces/access levels are considered
to be active in local mode and allow control and actions in local mode and others
do the same in remote mode. The table below summarizes these differences.
Note that the user control options will depend not only on the T300 operating
mode, but also the access level used:

Interface/Access Control in Local Mode Control in Remote Mode

Local human machine interface (HMI) x

Web server via Wi-Fi access x

Web server via LAN access x

Web server via WAN access x

SCADA protocols x

The table below gives a more precise summary of the actions that are possible or
inhibited on each interface in local or remote mode:

Interface/Access Functions Local Remote

Human Machine Interface (HMI)

HU250 Fault current reset button Enabled Enabled

LED test button Enabled Enabled
Automation ON/OFF button Enabled Disabled
Local/remote button Enabled Enabled
SC150 Switch control button Enabled Disabled
Web Server
Web server via Wi-Fi access Writing command variables Enabled Disabled

Other actions on CoreDB variables Enabled Enabled

Web server via LAN/WAN access Writing command variables Disabled Enabled

Other actions on CoreDB variables Enabled Enabled

Protocols
IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC 60870-5-104 Single (CSC) and double (CDC) commands Disabled Enabled

Other object type Enabled Enabled

406 NT00378–EN–10
Local/Remote Mode T300

Interface/Access Functions Local Remote

Human Machine Interface (HMI)

DNP3 Binary output commands (object group 12) Disabled Enabled

Other object type Enabled Enabled

Modbus Write functions (FC=5, 6, 15, 16) Disabled Enabled

Read functions (FC=1, 2, 3, 4) Enabled Enabled

IEC 61850 MMS Controls services Disabled Enabled

Other MMS services (Read, Write, Reports, Enabled Enabled
Data access)

Automation Enabled
When the automation function is used and enabled on the T300 for the purposes
of controlling an MV switch, it may be advisable to block manual commands,
regardless of whether they are issued locally or remotely, to help ensure control is
left purely to the automation function.
Commands are therefore blocked on the SC150 by default when the automation
function is active. This can be modified by configuration (see the "Switch Control"
section for more information).
The table below summarizes the command inhibit and activation options
according to the state of the automation function and depending on the source of
the command and the mode used:

Source of Command Local Mode Remote Mode

Action
Automation OFF Automation ON Automation OFF Automation ON
Via SC150 front panel Command OK Command blocked Command rejected by SC150
(configurable)

Via Web server Command OK Command blocked Command rejected by HU250

(configurable)

Via SCADA system Command rejected by HU250 Command OK Command blocked

(configurable)

Via automation functions N/A Command blocked N/A Command OK

(SEC, ATS, etc.) (configurable)

NT00378–EN–10 407
T300 Switch Commands

Switch Commands
Switches can only be controlled if:
• The battery is connected to the equipment at the correct level.
• The “Local/Remote” selector switch is in the correct position to allow control
according to the access method used (see the "Local/Remote Mode"
section).
• The motor mechanism power supply (24 V or 48 V) is present.
• No other command is in progress
A command taken into account moves the switch into the corresponding position:
• A command on a closed switch opens it.
• A command on an open switch closes it.

408 NT00378–EN–10
Other Commands T300

Other Commands
The power supply module can be used to reset the power supply:
• To restore the "Telecom power supply” when this output has been
disconnected following overconsumption.
• To reactivate the backup power source (battery) in the event of an extended
power outage.
• To reactivate the power supply outputs following a detected overload or short-
circuit.

NT00378–EN–10 409
T300

Maintenance
What’s in This Part
General ....................................................................................................... 411
Diagnostic LEDs on the Front Panel .............................................................. 415
Powering Down the Equipment ..................................................................... 420
Battery Maintenance .................................................................................... 421
Replacing the HU250, SCxxx or LV150 Module .............................................. 423
Replacing a Modem Box ............................................................................... 425
Replacing the PS50 Module .......................................................................... 426
Zigbee Network Maintenance........................................................................ 428

410 NT00378–EN–10
General T300

General
What’s in This Chapter
Menu Overview ........................................................................................... 411

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC S HOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
• Wear your personal protective equipment (PPE) and comply with the safe
electrical work practices. See NFPA 70E in the USA or applicable local
standards.
• This unit must be installed and serviced only by qualified electrical
personnel.
• Turn off all power supplying this unit before working on or inside the unit.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that the power
is off.
• A live current transformer secondary circuit must not be opened without
turning off the primary side of the transformer and short circuiting
transformer s econdary circuit first.
• Replace all devices, doors and covers before turning on power to this unit.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

The equipment does not require regular maintenance. The integrated battery test
informs the user of its availability.
NOTE: There is no fuse in the T300. All the power supplies are protected by
electronic protection devices that cut out automatically in the event of
overconsumption or short-circuit and that can be reactivated manually using
the Reset button on the PS50 module (via the Web server).
Fix the issue before reactivating. Reactivating repeatedly on fault may
damage the equipment.
The T300 features several diagnostic tools for troubleshooting. These require a
PC equipped with a Web browser. It is then possible to read the internal states of
the equipment and the events stored by the T300 (see also "Commissioning").
The following tools are available for maintenance and diagnostics.

Menu Overview
Substation and System Pages
These Web server pages display all the T300 states and measurements as well
as any internal potential issues to help perform diagnostics. Each potential issue
detected is indicated by a red symbol. The information displayed in these pages
that can indicate the presence of a potential issue is summarized below:
Substation page – Web server (showing PS50 general health status)

NT00378–EN–10 411
T300 General

• Substation Page
◦ The general health of the PS50 power supply module with indication of the
associated temperature,
◦ The health of all the power supplies with an indication of the associated
measured voltages and consumption levels,
◦ The health of the battery charger,
◦ The health of the battery with its associated temperature measurement,
◦ The automation blocking state (locked).
Substation page – Web server (showing PS50 general health status)

412 NT00378–EN–10
General T300

• System Page
◦ The general health of the HU250 module with indication of any
configuration or PLC potential issues,
◦ The health of each SC150 and LV150 module with indication of any
potential configuration issue,
◦ The health of the PS50 module with indication of a battery or charger
status,
◦ The health of the communication on the internal LAN between the SC150/
LV150 and HU250 modules,
◦ The health of the internal RS485 communication between the HU250 and
the PS50,
◦ The cellular communication signal strength, as well as modem current
IP@.

Viewing Events
Diagnostics/Events page – Web server

The diagnostic log files available (e.g. the Events and System files) are used to
view the history of events that have occurred on the T300. This can help
determine the cause of a potential issue.
• All events displayed in the diagnostic log files are time- and date-stamped.
• A large number of time- and date-stamped events are stored to help ensure
that sufficient information is fed back over time to identify the source of a
problem.
• These files can be saved to PC in a format supported by Excel to be able to
run diagnostics, reports, or statistics at a later date.
• Files can be transferred by email to advise a maintenance service or engineer
of the potential issue or, if necessary, to seek advice from the T300
manufacturer.
It is then recommended to send it with a backed-up configuration file.

NT00378–EN–10 413
T300 General

LED Indications
The T300 provides a certain amount of diagnostic information via the LEDs on the
front panels of the T300 modules (see the "Operation - Commands and
Indications" section).
These LEDs provide information about the operating state of the T300 and
indicate the presence of a potential issue. See the table on the next page for more
information about the diagnostics offered by the LEDs.
NOTE: In addition to the information indicated by the LEDs, it is often
necessary to view the diagnostic log files or the Substation and Physical View
pages in the Web server to determine the source of the potential issue more
accurately.

414 NT00378–EN–10
Diagnostic LEDs on the Front Panel T300

Diagnostic LEDs on the Front Panel

It is advisable to use a PC connected to the T300 to determine the cause of an
issue.
The events corresponding to these issues can be viewed in the following
diagnostic logs:
• Events log
• System log
NOTE: The following diagnostic tables consider the use of the default T300
power supply (PS50).

LED LED color Possible causes Solutions

On the HU250 module

All LEDs Off Cabinet power supply Check the cause of the loss of
interrupted automatically after AC voltage. If the AC voltage
an extended power outage. remains absent, there is an
option to reboot the power cycle
by pressing the Reset button on
the PS50 module. If the power
supply does not restart, change
the PS50 module and/or the
battery.

ON LED Orange (steady) No dialog on the internal link Check that the Ethernet bridges
between the HU250 module and between the modules are
one of the other modules. present and correctly
connected. The ON LED
must also be lit
orange on the corresponding
SCxxx or LV150 module
exhibiting the potential
communication issue to enable
it to be identified. Replace the
module if all the connections are
correct.
Red (steady) T300 equipment status:
Indicates an issue on the A FAULT LED
HU250, or one of the SCxxx, must also be lit on the module.
LV150 or PS50 modules. Refer to the possible causes as
to why this LED might be lit to
determine a solution.
Red (flashing) The HU250 is starting up. Wait until the HU250 module
startup phase is complete. If the
flashing persists, replace the
HU250.
HU250 FAULT LED Red (steady) MAJOR FAULT on the T300 MAJOR FAULT on the HU250
include potential configuration
issues, potential modem box
issues, and potential PLC
issues. For major FAULT on
SCxxx, LV150 or PS50
modules, refer to the description
of the specific LED that is lit on
the module.
The Physical View page is
used to determine the module
and the cause of the issue. It is
also possible to find the
description by consulting the
potential issues in the System
log file.

Orange (steady) MINOR FAULT on the T300 MINOR FAULT on the HU250
may relate to PLC variables that
are not correlated with the
HU250 database. Review the
PLC program configuration.
Consult the potential issues in
the System log file to find the
description of the incorrect PLC
variables.

NT00378–EN–10 415
T300 Diagnostic LEDs on the Front Panel

LED LED color Possible causes Solutions

On the HU250 module

Wi-Fi LED Red Potential Wi-Fi issue Reboot the T300 by cycling the
AC supply and battery off and
on again. If the problem
persists, replace the HU250
module.
Off Wi-Fi inactive By default, the Local/Remote
button enables or disables the
Wi-Fi connection. If Wi-Fi is not
enabled in local mode, check
that it is configured to be active
in the IP interface parameters in
the T300 Web server.
Internal COM LED Red (steady) No dialog on the internal link Check that the Ethernet bridges
between the HU250 module and between the modules are
one of the other modules. present and correctly
connected. Refer to the
Physical View page in the Web
server to determine which
module is exhibiting the issue.

The ON LED must

also be lit orange on the module
exhibiting the potential
communication issue to enable
it to be identified. Replace the
module if all the connections are
correct.
AC supply LED Red (steady) AC power supply circuit breaker Reset the circuit breaker to
tripped restore power to the equipment.
If the circuit breaker trips again,
cut the power to each module in
turn to determine where the
potential issue lies and replace
the module.
The AC power supply circuit Replace the connector on the
breaker output connector is PS50 module.
disconnected
No power supply to the cabinet Reconnect the AC voltage input.

Momentary absence of AC Wait for the AC voltage to be

voltage restored (the cabinet running on
battery).

Motor mechanism power LED Red (steady) Automatic disconnection of the Determine the type of issue
24/48 V power supply output using the indications given in
after an issue is detected (short- the PS50 module view in the
circuit, overload, overvoltage on System page:
this output) or abnormal • MAJOR PS50 FAULT: See
operation of power supply. possible actions in the
corresponding description
of the PS50 error LED.
• MINOR PS50 FAULT: See
possible actions in the
corresponding description
of the PS50 error LED.
Potential issue regarding the Replace the PS50 module.
Power supply module

Transmission power LED Red (steady) Automatic disconnection of the Determine the type of issue
transmission power supply using the indications given in
output after an issue is detected the PS50 module view in the
(short-circuit, overload, System page:
overvoltage on this output) or • MAJOR PS50 FAULT: See
abnormal operation of power possible actions in the
supply. corresponding description
of the PS50 error LED.
• MINOR PS50 FAULT: See
possible actions in the
corresponding description
of the PS50 error LED.
Potential issue regarding the Replace the PS50 module.
Power supply module

416 NT00378–EN–10
Diagnostic LEDs on the Front Panel T300

LED LED color Possible causes Solutions

On the HU250 module

Transmission power FAULT Red (steady) Overconsumption on the 12 V Check the transmission
LED transmission output (> 1 A for equipment. Restore power by
3 min by default) pressing the Reset button on
the PS50 module or reset the
power supplies from the
Substation page in the T300
Web server. If the potential
issue recurs 3 minutes later,
replace the transmission
interface or the PS50 module.
Battery status LED Red (steady) Battery status The health of the battery can be
checked on the Substation
page in the Web server. If the
battery is declared to have
potential issue, check the wiring
(corrosion, connection, etc.). If
the wiring is OK, replace the
battery by a new charged
battery.

Battery disconnected Check the battery connection

and wiring. You can check the
disconnected indication on the
Substation page in the Web
server. Reconnect the battery to
the PS50 module and wait
several minutes to see if the
indication disappears (the time
period depends on the level of
charge of the battery).

LED LED color Possible causes Solutions

On the SCxxx or LV150 module
ON LED Orange (steady) No internal dialog between the Check that the Ethernet bridges
SCxxx/LV150 module and the between the modules are
HU250 module. present and correctly
connected. The ON LED
must also be lit
orange on the HU250 module.
Check the address of the
SCxxx/LV150 module (refer to
the Quick Start Guide for
instructions on how to do this).
Replace the SCxxx/LV150
module if the connections and
address are correct.
Red (steady) Potential SCxxx/LV150 issue Refer to the possible causes for
an SC150/LV150 FAULT LED

.
Red (flashing) The SCxxx/LV150 is starting up Wait until the SCxxx/LV150
module startup phase is
complete. If the flashing
persists, replace the SCxxx/
LV150.
SCxxx/LV150 FAULT LED Red (steady) Major SCxxx/LV150 potential MAJOR FAULT on the SCxxx/
issue LV150 include hardware or
firmware potential issue. Reboot
the T300 or try to reload the
latest firmware version. If the
problem persists, replace the
SCxxx/LV150 module.
Orange (steady) Minor SCxxx/LV150 potential A MINOR FAULT on the SCxxx/
issue LV150 is due to a potential
configuration issue. Reload a
valid configuration file. Also
check the HU250 configuration.

NT00378–EN–10 417
T300 Diagnostic LEDs on the Front Panel

LED LED color Possible causes Solutions

On the PS50 Module

AC voltage absent Red
LED (steady) See the description for a red AC supply LED on the HU250 (identical symptoms and
solutions).

Battery status LED Red

(steady) See the description for a red battery error LED on the HU250 (identical symptoms
and solutions).

PS50 FAULT LED Red MAJOR PS50 FAULT The presence of a MAJOR FAULT is symbolized by a red flash in
(steady) the detailed view of the PS50 module in the System Web server
page.
Disconnect the T300 power supply and the battery then turn the
power on again. If the problem persists after the reboot, replace
the PS50 module.
MINOR PS50 FAULT The presence of a MINOR FAULT is symbolized by an orange
warning in the detailed view of the PS50 module in the System
page.
The possible causes include:
• Potential issue on one of the power supply outputs (short-
circuit, overload): identify the origin of the short-circuit
(wiring or connected device) or the overload (potential
device power supply issue).
• Thermal protection device tripped: leave it to cool and reset
via the Reset button on the PS50. If the problem persists,
check that there is sufficient cooling in the cabinet to help
ensure correct operation.
• Permanent overvoltage on the AC supply input: check that
the supply voltage is not greater than the specified
acceptable input range for the power supply. This may be
caused by the increased voltage associated with the loss of
a phase, for example.

24/48 V supply Off

FAULT LED See the description for a red motor mechanism power LED on the HU250
(identical symptoms and solutions).

12 V IED power Off Automatic disconnection of the Press the Reset button on the PS50 module to reboot the power
FAULT LED transmission power supply supplies. If the potential issue persists, disconnect the
output after a potential issue is equipment connected to this output. Reset the equipment. If the
detected (short-circuit, potential issue is still present, replace the PS50 module.
overload, overvoltage on this Otherwise, check the wiring and the devices powered by this
output) or abnormal operation output. Note that this Reset can also be actuated from the
of power supply. Substation page in the T300 Web server.

If the AC supply LED Check the cause of the loss of AC voltage. If the AC voltage
remains absent, there is an option to reboot the power supply by
is also off, the pressing the Reset button on the PS50 module. If the power
Cabinet power supply has been supply does not restart, change the PS50 module.
automatically disconnected
following an extended AC
voltage outage.

418 NT00378–EN–10
Diagnostic LEDs on the Front Panel T300

LED LED color Possible causes Solutions

On the PS50 Module

12 V transmission Off
power LED See the description for a red transmission power LED on the HU250 (identical
symptoms and solutions).

Modbus Off Potential internal link issue Check that the RS485 cable is correctly connected between the
communication between the HU250 and PS50 2 modules. Check the Modbus address on the PS50 module
LED modules (thumbwheels) and that the communication speed and
parameters are the same as those of the link.

Other Diagnostics
Events Possible causes Solutions
Unexecuted Switch command is not Check:
commands executed • the battery connection (commands cannot be executed without a battery)
• the position of the local/remote selector switch
• the validity of the command issued
• the T300 connection with the switches
• for deeper diagnosis check main switchgear control failure code in Event
Log on the Web server and refer to appendix SCxxx Potential Issue Codes
on Switch/Breaker Control, page 442 for failure code explanation.

NT00378–EN–10 419
T300 Powering Down the Equipment

Powering Down the Equipment

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
• The CTs should not remain disconnected, while being installed and power
on. If a disconnection is to be made, for any reason whatsoever, a short-
circuit is required at the secondary part of the CTs. CTs connectors are IP2X.
• No cable modifications are required to connect the CT and voltage cables to
the cabinet. Cables should not be modified under any circumstances.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

• Cut the AC power supply, either externally or via the circuit breaker inside
the cabinet.
• Break the battery circuit:
Disconnect the battery from the power supply module. Once both these
actions have been implemented, all LEDs on the T300 front panel will be off.
This indicates that the Easergy T300 cabinet is therefore powered down (off).

420 NT00378–EN–10
Battery Maintenance T300

Battery Maintenance
What’s in This Chapter
Replacing the Battery .................................................................................. 421
Battery Care and Storage............................................................................. 421
Equipment Disposal .................................................................................... 422

Replacing the Battery

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
• Before replacing the battery, make sure first of all that it is disconnected from
the power supply module (battery cable must be disconnected).
• Do not make a short-circuit between the battery terminals + and - and any
metallic part of the T300, when removing it.
• Protect the + and - terminals of the battery contact, during storage period.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE
HAZARD OF MALFUNCTION
• Use batteries with recent manufacturing dates (less than 3 months old).
• Do not store batteries for longer than 6 months without charging them.
• Dispose of batteries correctly.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Before carrying out any operations on the battery, disconnect it from the
equipment.
Remove the battery by sliding it out, remove the terminal protectors, and unscrew
the 2 nuts, then disconnect the Faston connectors from the connection cable.
Follow these instructions in reverse to insert a new battery.

Battery Care and Storage

The batteries used are sealed lead acid type. This technology offers several
advantages, including reducing risk or explosion or acid leakage, and no special
care is required.
However, this type of battery does have limitations:
• Limited number of charge cycles
• Average 10-year lifetime, with aging accelerated by high temperatures
• Ages in storage (do not store for longer than 6 months without recharging as
this type of battery does not tolerate deep discharge)
• Difficult to forecast battery life
The power supply module is designed to optimize the battery characteristics. A
battery status alarm informs the remote control system of a battery-related
problem.
NOTE: The battery is an important component as the switch commands
cannot be executed if the battery is not connected and charged.

NT00378–EN–10 421
T300 Battery Maintenance

Equipment Disposal
Example of module installed on the PS50 power supply unit

The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment containing

batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid
short-circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation may apply to
the disposal of the equipment.

WARNING
HAZARD OF LOSS OF CONFIGURATION OR INCORRECT OPERATION
• Before replacing a module, it is important to back up the T300 configuration
to help ensure no parameter settings are lost, including the Zigbee
commissioning information. Part of the parameter settings are effectively
saved in each module.
• The configuration therefore needs to be reloaded to the T300 once a new
module has been installed.
• See the "Managing the configuration" section for more information on how to
save and restore configuration settings.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

422 NT00378–EN–10
Replacing the HU250, SCxxx or LV150 Module T300

Replacing the HU250, SCxxx or LV150 Module

What’s in This Chapter
Addressing the SCxxx and LV150 Modules ................................................... 423
Checking the Firmware Version .................................................................... 424
Importing a Stored Configuration .................................................................. 424
Checks To Be Performed After Module Replacement ..................................... 424

How to remove the T300 module from the DIN mounting rail:

The module removal-installation principle is the same for all T300 modules
(HU250, SCxxx, LV150). The module is clipped onto a DIN rail.
Before removing a module, you must first:
• Power down the cabinet, refer to Powering Down the Equipment, page 420.
• Disconnect all cables, connectors, and Ethernet bridges from the modules.
The module can then be removed as follows:
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver (< 6 mm, 0,236 in), pull down the tab that holds
the module in place on the DIN rail.
2. Tilt the module forwards to free it from the rail.
3. Pull the top of the module upwards to remove it from the rail.
To insert a new module, follow the instructions above in reverse and restore the
cabinet power. Refer to the module Installation Manual for more installation
instructions.

Addressing the SCxxx and LV150 Modules

A. Dummy switch position LED – front panel of SCxxx module

After an SCxxx or LV150 has been replaced, its IP address needs to be
configured. Refer to the T300 Quick Start Guide for detailed instructions on how to
proceed.

NT00378–EN–10 423
T300 Replacing the HU250, SCxxx or LV150 Module

It is then necessary to check (if possible) that the address has been taken into
account. This check is possible for the SCxxx, by performing the following
operations:
• In the Substation page in the Web server, click the symbol corresponding to
the SCxxx to be checked.
• In the Simulation section displayed on screen, open or close the dummy
switch and check that the first customizable LED on the front of the
corresponding SCxxx is lit red or green depending on the command sent.
This test can be used to check the SCxxx address and dialog with the HU250.
Dummy switch control – Monitoring > Subview of SC – page

See the Substation page, page 45 section for more information on simulation.

Checking the Firmware Version

After a module has been replaced, it is necessary to check that it includes the
most up-to-date version of the firmware.
To do this, connect to the T300 Web server and check the current version
indicated in the Maintenance/Firmware page.
If this is not up-to-date, refer to the Updating the Firmware, page 129 for
instructions on how to update the firmware.
NOTE: On a T300, all modules have to be upgraded with the firmware
provided in the same T300 firmware package (firmware versions must be part
of the same T300 release).

Importing a Stored Configuration

Once the firmware has been updated, it is necessary to load the configuration that
was present in the previous module to help ensure that the new module has the
same configuration. This configuration should have been saved before the module
was replaced.
To load the stored configuration, refer to the Managing the Configuration, page
134/Uploading the configuration, page 138.

Checks To Be Performed After Module Replacement

After a module replacement, it is recommended to check that the main variables of
the system have a value which is consistent with the reality. Refer to
Commissioning tests, page 388 chapter.

424 NT00378–EN–10
Replacing a Modem Box T300

Replacing a Modem Box

Each modem box can be interchanged quickly and easily in the HU250 module.
The modem box is factory-installed but can be removed and replaced with another
type of modem if necessary. To install a modem box:
• Unscrew the screw on the front of the modem box using a flat-blade or cross-
head screwdriver.
• Pull the modem box to free the connector on the rear from the HU250
module. To install a modem box in its slot, carry out the procedure in reverse.
NOTE: Replacing a modem box with one of the same kind does not require
any configuration. Changing the modem for one of a different kind requires the
configuration to be modified using Easergy Builder (refer to the Easergy
Builder User Guide). Adding a new modem requires the use of T300
Generator.

NT00378–EN–10 425
T300 Replacing the PS50 Module

Replacing the PS50 Module

What’s in This Chapter
Addressing the PS50 Module ....................................................................... 426
Commissioning ........................................................................................... 427

To remove the PS50 module, proceed as follows:

• Power down the cabinet, refer to Powering Down the Equipment, page 420.
• Disconnect all cables and connectors from the PS50 module.
The module can then be removed as follows:
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver (< 6 mm, 0,236 in), pull down the tab that holds
the module in place on the cabinet DIN rails.
2. Tilt the module forwards to free it from the rails.
3. Pull the top of the module upwards to remove it from the rails.
To insert a new module, follow the instructions above in reverse and restore the
cabinet power. Refer to the PS50 Installation Manual for more installation
instructions.

Addressing the PS50 Module

Thumbwheels and Modbus link status LED – PS50

After a PS50 has been replaced, its Modbus address needs to be configured.
• Configure the thumbwheels on the PS50 module to correspond to the module
that has just been replaced to help ensure the Modbus address is the same.
• Once powered up, check that no potential module link issues are indicated on
the HU250 and that the Modbus link status LED is flashing regularly on the
PS50 module.

426 NT00378–EN–10
Replacing the PS50 Module T300

Commissioning
The PS50 module is delivered with the factory default settings. If these are not
suitable, they can be customized via the Settings > PS01 page in the Web server.
To set the PS50 module parameters, refer to PS50 Module Settings, page 385.

NT00378–EN–10 427
T300 Zigbee Network Maintenance

Zigbee Network Maintenance

What’s in This Chapter
Zigbee Network Management ...................................................................... 428
Zigbee Box (K7) Replacement...................................................................... 430

Zigbee Network Management

Accessed via Maintenance > Zigbee Network Management page.

Overview
The Zigbee Network Management page displays the status of the Zigbee
network used to monitor the environmental conditions and thermal conditions in
the substation and cubicles.
A Zigbee network is operational when all the following conditions are met:
• Sensors installed in the substation are physically enabled.
• Sensors are paired with the network.
• Network configuration is saved. It is automatically saved 20 seconds after the
sensors have been paired.
This page displays a general status of the network commissioning
(Commissioning Level).
It displays the commissioning status of the sensors installed in the substation and
cubicles, and used to monitor the environmental conditions and thermal conditions
on the cables.
The sensors displayed in this window have been declared using Easergy Builder.
Use the Zigbee Network Management page for the following actions:
• Pair the installed and declared sensors to associate them with the Zigbee
network,
or
• Unpair the paired sensors to remove them from the Zigbee network. Click the
corresponding button in the Actions columns.
• Replace sensors.

428 NT00378–EN–10
Zigbee Network Maintenance T300

Network Commissioning Level

There are three commissioning levels:
• Level 1: Some devices need to be paired.
• Level 2: All installed devices are paired.
• Level 3: Network processor information internally saved*.
*“Network processor information internally saved”, means that a copy of the
internal memory of the Zigbee box (K7) is saved in the HU250. This copy is used
when replacing a Zigbee box (K7), to set up the same network configuration,
without any other action than the physical K7 replacement.

New Network Creation

Before creating a new network, remove the existing network as follows:
1. Unpair all sensors (required condition).
2. Click the Net New creation button in the Zigbee Network Management
window.

Pairing Sensors
To pair sensors means to associate them with the Zigbee network.

Sensor status Description

Offline and Not paired

Online and Paired

Online and Unpairing (previously paired, has been unpaired)

Offline and Paired

A sensor is Offline when data is no longer received from the sensor, for example,
due to an incident on the sensor, or absence of current to supply TH110 sensors.

Pairing Single Sensors

In the Actions column, click the Pair button corresponding to the

sensor you want to enable and associate with the Zigbee network.
You can also pair a sensor that is not yet configured (with unknown ID). The
selected sensor is the first one that responds to the pairing request. In such a
case, check that the selected sensor to pair is the expected one.
Prerequisites before pairing a sensor:
• TH110 sensor: it must be powered with the required current.
• CL110 sensor: you must press the sensor button.
When clicking the Pair button, the parameter dialog box is displayed to allow you
to set up the timeout. Refer to Zigbee devices parameters, page 162.

NT00378–EN–10 429
T300 Zigbee Network Maintenance

Pairing All Configured Sensors

This action pairs all the configured sensors (with known IDs) in one click.

Click the Mass. Pair button . The timeout dialog is displayed to

allow you to set up the maximum time, in minutes, for this massive pairing action.
Keep the recommended default timeout, which depends on the number of
devices.

Saving IDs
The IDS are automatically saved in a file independently from the configuration.
This action allows to additionally save them in the configuration file (for export/
import purpose).
This action is optional and only concerns discovered IDs, that is, sensor IDs that
have not been configured using Easergy Builder.
After sensors have been paired, the configuration can be updated with the
discovered IDs.

Unpairing Sensors
To unpair sensors means to remove them from the Zigbee network.
There are two ways to unpair a sensor:
• Press the Unpair button corresponding to the sensor you want to remove
from the Zigbee network.
• Disable the sensor physically.
For example, to disable a CL110 sensor, press 5 seconds on the CL110
button. To disable sensor physically, refer to the sensor user manual.
During the unpairing process, the sensor pairing status is displayed in orange.
When the sensor is unpaired, it is displayed in red.
Sensors are then displayed with the Pair button available and with an unkown ID.

Replacing Sensors
1. Unpair the sensor to replace.
2. Pair the new sensor displayed with unknown ID
or
set up the new sensor ID in the Zigbee devices parameters window, then pair
the new sensor.

Zigbee Box (K7) Replacement

Replace the Zigbee box (K7).
Check that the Network commissioning level is 3.

430 NT00378–EN–10
 T300

Appendices
What’s in This Part
Appendix A: General characteristics .............................................................. 432
Appendix B: List of Potential Issue Codes ...................................................... 442
Appendix C: Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) ....................................... 444
Appendix D: Wi-Fi Access............................................................................. 448

NT00378–EN–10 431
T300 Appendix A: General characteristics

Appendix A: General characteristics

What’s in This Chapter
HU250........................................................................................................ 432
SC150 ........................................................................................................ 433
SC160 ........................................................................................................ 434
LV150......................................................................................................... 436
HU250, SCxxx and LV150............................................................................ 437
PS50 .......................................................................................................... 439

HU250
Technical Characteristics - Modem Box and Interfaces
RS modem box • RJ45 connector
• Insulation: 2 kVACrms/5 kV overvoltage
The RS modem box can be configured as follows:
• RS-232
◦ With all the control signals to manage an external modem, such as a radio modem, or
connection to a PC
◦ Maximum data rate: 115,200 bps
• RS-422/RS485
◦ Maximum distance: 1,500 m
◦ Maximum data rate: 38,400 bps
◦ Polarization and line impedance resistors adaptation: configurable for 2-wire mode
◦ 2-wire or 4-wire mode: configurable via the HU250

4G modem or Zigbee protocol • 4G modem box, standard EU version

◦ 5 LTE bands: 800/900/1800/2100/2600 MHz; 5 FDD bands (20, 8, 3, 7, 1)
◦ 3 UMTS bands (WCDMA): 900/1800/2100 MHz; 3 FDD bands (8, 3, 1)
◦ 2 GSM/GPRS/EDGE bands: 900/1800 MHz
◦ GPS synchronization option (requires additional antenna)
• 4G modem box, standard US version
◦ 5 LTE bands: 700/700/850/AWS (1700/2100)/1900 MHz; 5 FDD bands (13, 17, 5, 4, 2)
◦ 3 UMTS bands (WCDMA): 850/AWS (1700/2100)/1900 MHz; 3 FDD bands (5, 4, 2)
◦ 4 GSM/GPRS/EDGE bands: 850/900/1800/1900 MHz
◦ GPS synchronization option (requires additional antenna)
• Zigbee protocol (K7Z)
◦ Operating frequency range (standard IEEE 802.15.4): 2405 – 2480 MHZ

Ethernet ports • RJ45 10/100 base T connector

• Auto-negotiation
• DHCP client
• Isolation (Port 4: 4 kVAC rms/8 kV overvoltage)
• Isolation (Port 3 and 5: 2 kVAC rms/5 kV overvoltage)

Wi-Fi • 2.4 GHz IEEE 802.11n. band backward-compatible with standard IEEE 802.11b/g
• WPA CCMP security
• DHCP server
Power Supply

Power consumption < 3 VA

432 NT00378–EN–10
Appendix A: General characteristics T300

SC150
Output Characteristics

Motor mechanism nominal voltage 12 VDC to 127 VDC/90 VAC to 220 VAC

AC supply nominal voltage 250 VAC

Maximum interrupt voltage 440 VAC

Nominal current 8A
DC current limiting 8A

Current limiting supplied, 4 s max. 15 A

Maximum breaking capacity 2,000 VA

Typical motor control current 15 s 16 A for 50 ms and 6 A for 15 s

Digital Input Characteristics

8 single or double inputs (0 V common) IEC 61131-2 compatible

Voltage Measurement inputs Characteristics (LPVT/VT version)

Measurement range 0.1 Un to 4 Un

Accuracy (without sensors) Standard IEC 61557-12

Voltage • 0.5% - from 20% of Un to 120% of Un
• 5% - < 20% of Un and > 120% of Un
Voltage accuracy with sensors Schneider LPVT 0.5% with calibration

MV voltage range Nominal voltage (Un) 3 to 36 kV

Frequency 45 to 67 Hz

Voltage input impedance • SC150 for capacitive adapter interface: 4 MΩ

• SC150 for LPVT-VT adapter interface: 10 MΩ

Current Measurement CT inputs Characteristics

Measurement range Phase CT input • 0.02 to 20 In (1 A minimum) for CT = 1 A*

• 0.02 to 7 In (1 A minimum) for CT = 5 A*
* Setting value of Phase CT secondary rated current in the SC0x >
Settings > Sensors page

Zero sequence CT input 0.01 In to 3.5 In (1 A min)

Accuracy (without sensors) Standard IEC 61557-12

Current 0.5%: 0.1 In to 2 In (1% outside of this range)

Permissible overload 10 A continuous operation

50 A – 10 s per hour
120 A – 1 s
Impedance 1 milli Ohm

Burden 0.025 VA
Power Measurement Characteristics (LPVT/VT version)

Standards Power and energy IEC 61557-12/PMD/SD/K70/1

Accuracy (without sensors) Active power 1%

Active energy 1%

Number of samples per cycle • IEC 61557-12

• According to the principles of IEC 61000-4-30 class S (up to
harmonic 40)

Frequency range 45 to 67 Hz

Power Supply

Power consumption < 2 VA

NT00378–EN–10 433
T300 Appendix A: General characteristics

SC160
Output Characteristics

Motor mechanism nominal voltage 12 VDC to 127 VDC/90 VAC to 220 VAC

AC supply nominal voltage 250 VAC

Maximum interrupt voltage 440 VAC

Nominal current 8A
DC current limiting 8A

Current limiting supplied, 4 s max. 15 A

Maximum breaking capacity 2,000 VA

Typical motor control 15 s 16 A for 50 ms and 6 A for 15 s

current
Digital Input Characteristics

8 single or double inputs (0 V common) IEC 61131-2 compatible

Voltage Measurement inputs Characteristics (LPVT/VT version)

Measurement range 0.1 Un to 4 Un

Accuracy (without sensors) Standard IEC 61557-12

Voltage • 0.5% - from 20% of Un to 120% of Un
• 5% - < 20% of Un and > 120% of Un
Voltage accuracy with Schneider LPVT 0.5% with calibration
sensors
MV voltage range Nominal voltage (Un) 3 to 36 kV

Frequency 45 to 67 Hz

Voltage input impedance • SC150 for capacitive adapter interface: 4 MΩ

• SC150 for LPVT-VT adapter interface: 10 MΩ

Current Measurement CT inputs Characteristics

Measurement range Phase CT input • 0.008 to 20 In (1 A minimum) for CT = 1 A*

• 0.008 to 7 In (1 A minimum) for CT = 5 A*
* Setting value of Phase CT secondary rated current in the SC0x >
Settings > Sensors page

Zero sequence CT input 0.01 In to 7 In (1 A min)

Accuracy (without sensors) Standard IEC 61557-12

Current 0.5%: from 0.1 In to 2 In (1% outside of this range)
3%: <0.1 In and >1.2 In up to 20 In

Permissible overload 10 A continuous operation

50 A – 10 s per hour
120 A – 1 s
Impedance 1 milli Ohm

Burden 0.025 VA
Power Measurement Characteristics (LPVT/VT version)

Standards Power and energy IEC 61557-12/PMD/SD/K70/1

Accuracy (without sensors) Active power 1%

Active energy 1%

Number of samples per cycle • IEC 61557-12

• According to the principles of IEC 61000-4-30 class S (up to
harmonic 40)

Frequency range 45 to 67 Hz

Tripping protection perfomances

434 NT00378–EN–10
Appendix A: General characteristics T300

Phase fault protection (50N/ Precision of the threshold ± 5% or ± 0.01 IN when influences quantities are at rated values
51)
Tripping delay definite time ±2% or from -15 to +30 ms (1)

Tripping delay depending time ±5% or from -15 to +30 ms at 10 Is (1)

(IDMT)

Operation time Instantaneous (Pickup) < 40 ms at 1.2 Is

Overshoot time < 30 ms at 2 Is

Return time < 50 ms at 2 Is
Earth fault protection (50N/ Precision of the threshold ± 5% or ± 0.004 INO/ ISOwhen influences quantities are at rated
51N) values
Tripping delay definite time ±2% or from -15 to +30 ms (1)

Tripping delay depending time ±5% or from -15 to +30 at 10 Is

(IDMT)

Operation time Instantaneous (Pickup) < 40 ms at 1.2 Is

Overshoot time < 30 ms at 2 Is

Return time < 50 ms at 2 Is
Directional phase fault Precision of the threshold ± 5% or ± 0.02 IN when influences quantities are at rated values
protection (ANSI 67)
Tripping delay definite time for ±2% or from -15 to +30 ms (1)
tripping time ≥ 100 ms

Tripping delay depending time ±5% or from -15 o +30 ms

(IDMT) for tripping time ≥ 100 ms

Operation time Instantaneous (Pickup) < 80 ms at 2 Is (it takes into account the
40 ms confirmation time)

Overshoot time < 30 ms at 2 Is

Return time < 55 ms at 2 Is (for a reset time equal to 0)

Directional earth fault Precision of the threshold ± 5% or ± 0.02 IN when influences quantities are at rated values
protection (ANSI 67N)
Tripping delay definite time ±2% or from -15 to +30 ms when influences quantities are at rated
values
Tripping delay depending time ±5% or from -15 to +30 ms
(IDMT)

Operation time Instantaneous (Pickup) < 50 ms at 2 Is

Overshoot time < 50 ms at 2 Is

Return time < 55 ms at 2 Is (for a reset time equal to 0)

(1) If H2 restraint is enabled, the tripping time is delayed by 12 ms.

Power Supply

Power consumption < 2 VA

NT00378–EN–10 435
T300 Appendix A: General characteristics

LV150
Voltage Measurement inputs Characteristics (LPVT/VT version)

Measurement range 0.1 Un to 4 Un

Accuracy (without sensors) Standard IEC 61557-12

Voltage 0.5% from 20% Un to 120% Un

MV voltage range Nominal voltage (Un) 190 to 400 VAC

Frequency 45 to 67 Hz

Voltage input impedance With Voltage adapter interface: 10 MΩ

Current Measurement CT inputs Characteristics

Measurement range Phase CT input 0.01 In to 7 In (1 A min)

Sensors 3 phases + neutral (1 A min)

Zero sequence CT input 0.01 In to 3.5 In (1 A min)

Accuracy (without sensors) Standard IEC 61557-12

Current 0.5%: 0.1 In to 2 In (1% outside of this range)

Permissible overload 10 A continuous operation

50 A – 10 s per hour
120 A – 1 s
Impedance 1 milli Ohm

Burden 0.025 VA
Power Measurement Characteristics (LPVT/VT version)

Standards Power and energy IEC 61557-12/PMD/SD/K70/1

Accuracy (without sensors) Active power 1%

Active energy 1%

Number of samples per cycle • IEC 61557-12

• According to the principles of IEC 61000-4-30 class S (up
to harmonic 40)

Frequency range 45 to 67 Hz

Temperature Measurements Characteristics

Sensors Type 3 measures by PT100 sensor

Measurement range Temperature -55°C to 250°C (-67°F to 482°F)

Resolution 1°C (1°F)

Power Supply

Power consumption < 2 VA

436 NT00378–EN–10
Appendix A: General characteristics T300

HU250, SCxxx and LV150

Harmonized standard
EN 61000-6-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-2: generic standards - Immunity for industrial
environments
EN 61000-6-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-4: generic standards - Emission standard for industrial
environments
Dielectric Compatibility

Dielectric IEC 60255-27 Common mode (CM) • Isolation (50 Hz/1 min.):
2 kV
• Overvoltage (1.2/50 μs):
5 kV
Differential mode (DM) • Isolation (50 Hz/1 min.):
1 kV
• Overvoltage (1.2/50 μs):
3 kV
Electromagnetic Compatibility/Immunity

Electrostatic discharge IEC 61000-4-2 15 kV in air

Level 4/Criteria B 8 kV on contact
Radiated, radio-frequency, IEC 61000-4-3 30 V/m – 27 MHz to 6 GHz
electromagnetic field immunity Level 4/Criteria A AM 80% - 1 kHz

Immunity to fast transients IEC 61000-4-4 Power supply, Ethernet, voltage CM: ±4 kV 5 kHz – 100 kHz
Level 4/Criteria A and current inputs

Digital inputs and outputs CM: ±2 kV 5 kHz – 100 kHz

Surge immunity IEC 61000-4-5 Common mode: 2 kV - 1.2/50 μs wave

Level 3/Criteria A
Differential mode: 1 kV - 1.2/50 μs wave

Immunity to conducted IEC 61000-4-6 10 Vrms - 0.15 MHz to 80 MHz

disturbances induced by radio- Level 3/Criteria A AM 80% - 1 kHz
frequency fields

Immunity to radiated magnetic IEC 61000-4-8 100 A/m – 50 Hz persistent

fields Level 5/Criteria B 1,000 A/m 1 to 3 s

Immunity to pulse magnetic IEC 61000-4-9 1,000 A/m

fields Level 5/Criteria A
Conducted disturbances in IEC 61000-4-16 CM: 30 V for 15 Hz to 150 kHz, 300 V (DC/50/60 Hz) for 1 s
common mode Level 4/Criteria A
Conducted disturbances in IEC 61000-4-18 (including IEC CM: 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 3 MHz, 10 MHz, 30 MHz - 2.5 kV
common mode 61000-4-12) DM: 100 kHz, 1 MHz -1 kV
Level 3/Criteria A
Immunity to voltage sags (dips) IEC 61000-4-29 Voltage sags (dips) • 24 VDC: 100 ms
and short interruptions Criteria A • 48 VDC: 500 ms
Short interruptions • 24 VDC: 100 ms
• 48 VDC: 500 ms
Emission Test
Radio disturbance CISPR 22 Class A (EN 55022)

Starting equipment

Maximum start-up time IEC 61557-12 1 min 30 sec

Environmental Conditions
Operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 -40°C to +70°C
IEC 60068-2-2
Storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 -40°C to +85°C
IEC 60068-2-2
Humidity, steady state IEC 60068-2-78 93% RH, 40°C, RH without condensation, 56 days

Change of temperature IEC 60068-2-14 -40°C to +70°C, 5°C/min, 10 cycles, 27 hrs without condensation

Humidity IEC 60068-2-30 144 hours: 6 cycles of 24 hours (+55°C, 93% RH for 9 hours; +25°
C, 95% RH for 6 hours)

NT00378–EN–10 437
T300 Appendix A: General characteristics

Salt mist test IEC 60068-2-11 168 hours

Safety

Protection of people and IEC 60255-27 Insulation resistance (CM & DM : 500 V, R > 100 Mohm) Protective
property bounding continuity (12 V, < 12 ohm, 60 s)

Fire resistance IEC 60695-2-11 850°C

Mechanical Characteristics
Degree of protection IEC 60529 • Front panel: IP4x
• Body of module: IP2x

Ruggedness IEC 62262 IK7 2J (front face)

Vibration IEC 60068-2-6 10 to 2,000 Hz/1 g (peak value) 10 cycles

Bumps IEC 60068-2-29 10 g/16 ms/1,000 bumps non-operating

Shock IEC 60068-2-27 10 gn/11 ms/3 pulses during operation

438 NT00378–EN–10
Appendix A: General characteristics T300

PS50
Capacity

Number of modules Up to 16 modules

Voltage Input Characteristics

AC voltage input 90 to 264 VAC - 50/60 Hz single-phase

DC voltage input 110 to 220 VDC

Overvoltage 440 VAC max.

Voltage Output Characteristics

12 V IEDs Nominal output power 36 W

Nominal output voltage 12 V (10.5 V to 15 V)

DC current 3A
Overload limit 8A
Current peak on short-circuit 13 A – 50 ms

Overvoltage protection on output 15.5 V

12 V Telecom Nominal output power 18 W

Nominal output voltage 12 V (10.5 V to 15 V)

DC current 1.5 A
Overload limit 8A
Current peak on short-circuit 13 A – 50 ms

Overvoltage protection on output 15.5 V

48 V and 24 V motor 24 V 48 V
mechanism and IEDs
Nominal output power 10 W 10 W

Nominal output power 300 W (60 s) 300 W (60 s)

Nominal output voltage 24 V ± 10% 48 V ± 10%

DC current 0.4 A 0.2 A

Overload limit 3A 1.5 A
Current peak on short-circuit 40 A 40 A

Nominal output current 30 A for 50 ms then 12 A for 15 s 15 A for 50 ms then 6 A for 15 s

Overvoltage protection on output 27 V 55 V

Battery Management

Number of batteries 1
Charger capacity Up to 38 Ah

Battery type No-maintenance, lead-acid type

Charge management Nominal voltage 10.5 V to 15 V

Battery type Configurable: 38 Ah, 24 Ah, or other

Compensated temperature By measuring internal temperature

Charge time 10 to 24 hours

Battery protection • Against deep discharge

• Against short-circuits
• Against reverse polarity

Battery test • Automatic periodic tests

• On internal charge
• Can be activated by communication

Battery monitoring • End of life detection

NT00378–EN–10 439
T300 Appendix A: General characteristics

• Connection/disconnection detection
Battery

Brand Yuasa
Voltage/Amps 12 V/24 Ah
12 V/38 Ah
Model 24 Ah: SWL750
38 Ah: SWL1100
Type Lead acid

Battery life 10 years

Temperatures • Storage: -20°C to +60°C

• Charge: -15°C to +50°C
• Discharge: -20°C to +60°C

Weight • SWL1100: 14 kg
• SWL750: 9 kg

Contact Outputs

Auxiliary contacts Breaking capacity 60 VDC – 2 A

Contact outputs • Battery status

• AC supply present

Temperature

Operating temperature -40°C to +70°C

Storage temperature -40°C to +70°C

Dielectric Compatibility

Dielectric IEC 60255-27 AC supply input • CM: Isolation (50 Hz/

1 min.): 10 kV
• CM: Overvoltage (1.2/
50 μs): 20 kV
• DM: Overvoltage (1.2/
50 μs): 8 kV

RS485 • CM: Isolation (50 Hz/

1 min.): 1.5 kV
• CM: Overvoltage (1.2/
50 μs): 2.5 kV

Other • CM: Isolation (50 Hz/

1 min.): 2 kV
• CM: Overvoltage (1.2/
50 μs): 5 kV
• DM: Isolation (50 Hz/
1 min.): 1 kV
• DM: Overvoltage (1.2/
50 μs): 3 kV

Electromagnetic Compatibility/Immunity

Electrostatic discharge IEC 61000-4-2 15 kV in air

Level 4/Criteria B 8 kV on contact
Radiated, radio-frequency, IEC 61000-4-3 30 V/m – 27 MHz to 6 GHz
electromagnetic field Level 4/Criteria A
immunity

Immunity to fast transients IEC 61000-4-4 Power supply, voltage outputs, CM: ±4 kV (N4) 5 kHz – 100 kHz
Level 3, 4/Criteria A RS485
Other circuits CM: ±2 kV (N3) 5 kHz – 100 kHz

Surge immunity IEC 61000-4-5 AC supply input CM: 4 kV (N4) - 1.2/50 s wave
µLevel 3, 4/Criteria A DM: 2 kV (N4) - 1.2/50 μs wave

Other CM: 2 kV (N4) - 1.2/50 μs wave

DM: 1 kV (N4) - 1.2/50 μs wave

Immunity to conducted IEC 61000-4-6 Level 3/Criteria A 10 Vrms - 0.15 MHz to 80 MHz
disturbances induced by
radio-frequency fields

440 NT00378–EN–10
Appendix A: General characteristics T300

Immunity to radiated IEC 61000-4-8 100 A/m – 50 Hz persistent

magnetic fields Level 5/Criteria B 1,000 A/m 1 to 3 s

Immunity to pulse IEC 61000-4-9 1,000 A/m

magnetic fields Level 5/Criteria A

Conducted disturbances IEC 61000-4-16 CM: 30 V for 15 Hz to 150 kHz, 300 V (DC/50/60 Hz) for 1 s
in common mode Level 4/Criteria A
Conducted disturbances IEC 61000-4-18 (including IEC CM: 3 MHz, 10 MHz, 30 MHz - 2 kV
in common mode 61000-4-12)
Level 3/Criteria A
Emission Test
Radio disturbance CISPR 22 Class A (EN 55022)

Conducted disturbance CISPR 22 Class A (EN 55022)

Environmental Conditions
Operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 -40°C to +70°C
IEC 60068-2-2
Storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 -40°C to +70°C
IEC 60068-2-2
Humidity, steady state IEC 60068-2-78 93% RH, 40°C, RH without condensation, 56 days

Change of temperature IEC 60068-2-14 -40°C to +70°C, 1°C/min, 10 cycles, 27 hrs without condensation

Humidity IEC 60068-2-30 144 hours: 6 cycles of 24 hours (+55°C, 93% RH for 9 hours; +25°C,
95% RH for 6 hours)

Salt mist test IEC 60068-2-11 168 hours in cubicle

Safety

Protection of people and IEC 60255-27

property

IEC 60255-27 IEC 60255-27 • 500 V CM & DM

• R > 100 MΩ
Fire resistance IEC 60695-2-11 850°C
Flame retardancy IEC 60255-11-5 • Application of flames: 5 times for 15 s at a time
• Interval between each application: 15 s or 30 s (once)

Continuity of protection IEC 60255-27 12 V, < 0.1 Ω, 60 s

link
Mechanical Characteristics
Degree of protection IEC 60529 IP20

Ruggedness IEC 62262 IK7 2J

Vibration IEC 60068-2-6 10 to 2,000 Hz/1 g (peak value) 10 cycles

Bumps IEC 60068-2-29 10 g/16 ms/1,000 bumps non-operating

Shock IEC 60068-2-27 10 gn/11 ms/3 pulses during operation

NT00378–EN–10 441
T300 Appendix B: List of Potential Issue Codes

Appendix B: List of Potential Issue Codes

What’s in This Chapter
SCxxx Potential Issue Codes on Switch/Breaker Control ................................ 442

SCxxx Potential Issue Codes on Switch/Breaker Control

During an opening or closing command to a switch via one of the SCxxx modules,
a code representing the status of the control is displayed on the Monitoring &
Control > Status page. This status can be a potential issue code or simply an
indication of the command result.
The Main switchgear control failure variable displayed in this page takes the
value of this code. Referring to the table below, you can see the code's
correspondence and its meaning, depending on the value displayed for the
variable.

Main switchgear control failure variable

Value (potential issue code) Description

0 Command completed successfully

1 Local command blocked because switch position is intermediate or unknown

2 Local command blocked because switch position is already in correct state

3 Local command canceled by user

4 Switch position did not change within configured maximum operation time

5 Command blocked by Head Unit interlocks, e.g. potential motor supply issue or battery low

6 Command did not execute due to timeout waiting for enable from Head Unit

7 Local command blocked because disabled by configuration

8 Local command blocked because local/remote status is unknown

9 Local command blocked because local/remote status is remote
10 Local command blocked because automation is on
11 Remote command blocked because automation is on
12 Sectionalizer command blocked because automation is off
13 Sectionalizer command blocked because local/remote status is unknown
14 Sectionalizer command blocked because local/remote status is local
15 Unexpected command source (firmware potential issue)

16 Remote command blocked because requested position is not a valid value

17 Command blocked because a command is already in progress for this module

18 Command blocked because the power shutdown signal is active

19 Command blocked because a command is already in progress for another module

20 Command blocked because measured switch position is intermediate or unknown

21 Command blocked because measured switch position is the same as the requested position

22 Command blocked because ground (earth) switch position is not open

23 Open command blocked because external input is false

24 Open command blocked because external input is true

25 Close command blocked because external input is false

26 Close command blocked because external input is true

27 Commands blocked because module behaviour mode is off

442 NT00378–EN–10
Appendix B: List of Potential Issue Codes T300

Main switchgear control failure variable

Value (potential issue code) Description

28 Command blocked because switch controller is in local mode

29 Command blocked because switch controller local/remote input is undefined

30 Command blocked because protection trip lockout is active

31 Command blocked because the OPEN/CLOSE command is in progress

32 Command blocked because a self-test is in progress

NT00378–EN–10 443
T300 Appendix C: Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT)

Appendix C: Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT)

What’s in This Chapter
Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) Curves .............................................. 444

Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) Curves

The table below gives the values and data for each inverse definite minimum time
curve.
It can be used to calculate the detection time for a specific current value for each
curve type.
Example: A motor has an SIT type detection curve including the following
settings:
• Is = 1,000 A
• T (10 Is) = 4 s
You wish to determine the detection time for a current I of 3,500 A.
Solution: You have an SIT curve and an I/Is ratio of 3,500/1,000 = 3.5.
You therefore need to search for the corresponding k value (I/Is) in the table.
Then calculate t=T x k:
i.e.: t = 4 x 1.858 = 7.43 s
The detection time for a current of 3,500 A will therefore be 7.43 seconds.

444 NT00378–EN–10
Appendix C: Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) T300

The different IDMT curves are represented for information purposes on the next
page using the values from this table.
Refer to the Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) Detection Curve, page 294
chapter for the correspondence between the denominations of the IDMT curves
listed in the column title of this table and the names of the IDMT curves cited in this
document.

NT00378–EN–10 445
T300 Appendix C: Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT)

Normal inverse time curve (SIT) Extremely inverse time curve (EIT)
Very inverse time curve (VIT)
t (s)
1000,00
t (s)
100,00

100,00

10,00

courbe (T=1s)

courbe ( T = 1S)
10,00

1,00

temps inverse SIT

1,00

temps très inverse VIT ou LTI

extremement inverse EIT

0,10 I/Is
I/Is 1 10 100
0,10
1 10 100

IEEE inverse time curve

446 NT00378–EN–10
Appendix C: Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) T300

t (s)
10000,00

1000,00

100,00

MI

VI

EI

10,00

1,00

0,10 I/Is
1 10 100

NT00378–EN–10 447
T300 Appendix D: Wi-Fi Access

Appendix D: Wi-Fi Access

What’s in This Chapter
Activation of Local Wi-Fi Access ................................................................... 448
Connection to T300 Web Server via Wi-Fi Access.......................................... 450

Activation of Local Wi-Fi Access

NOTE: Wi-Fi access is disabled by configuration on the T300 RTU when
received from the factory.
To get a wireless connection with the unit, the first step is to activate Wi-Fi access
via the T300 Web server.
To do this, an Ethernet connection to the unit is required.
1. Power on the unit.
2. Wait until the HU250 operating LED is flashing. When the LED lights steadily,
connect the Ethernet cable between the PC and the local LAN Ethernet port
of the HU250.
3. Once connected and logged in, go to the Maintenance > IP configuration
page.
4. In the Wi-Fi section, configure the following settings to activate Wi-Fi access:

Setting By default To be configured Description

Wi-Fi Disabled DHCP Server Enabled means Wi-

Fi activation
Hidden SSID No No
SSID Easergy T300 To customize Enter a unique SSID
for each T300.
IP 192.168.2.254 192.168.2.254 The default settings
can be changed
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 according to the
properties of your
DHCP Server Enabled Enabled LAN network if
Sart IP 192.168.2.10 192.168.2.10 required.

End IP 192.168.2.10 192.168.2.10

5. Click the Save button to apply the changes.

448 NT00378–EN–10
Appendix D: Wi-Fi Access T300

6. Click the Change password button. Define a new personal password.

NOTE: For security reasons, it is important to change default passwords
so they are unique on each T300 RTU

7. Put the unit in Local mode using button on the front panel of the
HU250.
NOTE: By default, Wi-Fi access is activated on the unit only in Local
mode.
8. Click the Wireless icon on the Windows task bar of your computer desktop.

9. Check that the wireless connection (with SSID defined previously) appears in
the Windows task bar and click it.
10. Click the Connect button.

11. Enter the Wi-Fi security key (password defined previously).

12. Windows automatically connects to this Wi-Fi network and the T300 SSID
appears as connected in the task bar. You can now disconnect the Ethernet
cable from the unit.

NT00378–EN–10 449
T300 Appendix D: Wi-Fi Access

Connection to T300 Web Server via Wi-Fi Access

1. Start an Internet browser. Access to the HTML pages is activated according
to the rights related to the user type. Refer to Rights Defined For Each Role/
User, page 93.
2. In the Address field, enter the following IP address: https://192.168.2.254.
Click Ok.
A message appears regarding the Security Certificate.
3. Follow the instructions to override and continue to access the T300 Website.
The startup page of the embedded server appears on screen.
4. Select the language to be used and click Ok.
5. Enter a User name and a Password. The following default users are defined
on the unit:

USERS Operator Engineer Installer Viewer SECADM

Login Operator Engineer Installer Viewer SecurityAd-

min
Password Operator1! Engineer1! Installer1! Viewer1! Security1!

NOTE: for security requirements, all passwords must be changed during

commissioning.
6. Access to the HTML pages is activated according to the rights relating to the
user type.

450 NT00378–EN–10
 T300

Glossary
A
ANSI: American National Standards Institute. Private and non-profit organization
headquartered in Washington that oversees the development of standards for
products, services, processes, systems, and personnel in the United States.

AT: AT is the abbreviation for ATtention. These 2 characters are used to start and
send a command line in the form of text (ASCII codes) to a modem. The modem
responds with OK or gives the response to the request.

B
BIN controller: This relates to the different system data acquisition and
processing application software that has access to the CoreDB database. Each
BIN controller acts as a producer and/or consumer of data managed by CoreDB.

BIN: This is a set of Input/Output (I/O) signals with a common source. They may
relate, for example, to the representation of an IED that communicates with the
T300 RTU, or the representation of a SCADA system that receives or generates
information acquired or generated on the platform.

BlMon: Base Line Monitoring tool is a shell dedicated to monitoring the various
application program components of the firmware. The various communication
channels can be monitored, for example, for diagnostic purposes.

C
CAE: Cybersecurity Administrator Expert. The CAE is a tool for organizing the
T300 security policy and defining system access restrictions and user rights.

CILO: Command InterLOcking. This is the system BIN controller that controls the
switch output commands.

CM: Common Mode

CoreDB: CoreDB is a real-time RTU database that helps ensure the RTU signals
are managed in real time.

CPU: Central Processing Unit

D
DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A network protocol for ensuring that
station IP parameters are automatically configured via automatic IP address
allocation.

DI: Digital Input

DM: Differential Mode

DO: Digital Output

DT: Definite time. Designation for definite time fault current detection curves.

E
Easergy Builder: Easergy Builder is the official configuration tool for Easergy
T300 equipment. This tool can be used to configure all the advanced RTU
functions (for example, database, protocol addressing, events) and to carry out
maintenance tasks on the equipment.

F
FPI: Fault Passage Indicator. Designation of the fault current detection function.

NT00378–EN–10 451
T300

G
GMT: Greenwich Mean Time. Mean solar time at the Royal Observatory in
Greenwich, London, England, used as the universal time standard.

H
HMI: Human Machine Interface

HTTP: Hyper Text Transfer Protocol. Client-server communication protocol

developed for the World Wide Web. HTTPS (where S = Secure) is the secure
variant of HTTP using SSL or TLS protocols.

HU250: Head Unit 250. Control and communication module for the T300.

Hysteresis: Delay of the effect on the cause in the behavior of a signal subjected
to an increasing and then decreasing action (see diagram below). Hysteresis
creates a zone of uncertainty signal detection in which the state is not clearly
identified. Outside this area, the state is known.

I
IDMT: Inverse Definite Minimum Time. Designation for inverse definite minimum
time fault current detection curves.

IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission. The international standards

organization for the fields of electricity, electronics, electromagnetic compatibility,
nanotechnology, and related technologies. It complements the International
Organization for Standardization (ISO), which is responsible for other fields.

IED: Intelligent Electronic Device

IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. The IEEE is a professional

association comprising members from the fields of electrical engineering,
information technology, telecommunications, etc. The organization's mission is to
advance knowledge in the field of electrical engineering and publish associated
standards and other texts written by its members.

IP: Internet Protocol

Is: Maximum fault current threshold

K
K7: Another name for a mode box installed in the modem slots on the HU250.

L
LAN: Local Area Network

LED: Light Emitting Diode

Linux: Operating system running in realtime on the software platform. This is the
element in charge of extracting the various software components from the
hardware.

LIOC: Local Input Output Controller. This is the system BIN controller that
manages the HMI and the digital I/O.

LV150: Low Voltage 150. Low Voltage measurement management module for
T300 equipment.

LV: Low Voltage

M
Module: Hardware device comprising a functional component of the T300 (for
example, SC150, HU250, and PS50 are modules on the T300).

452 NT00378–EN–10
 T300

MV: Medium Voltage

O
OS: Operating System

P
PC: Personal computer

PLC: Programmable Logic Controller

PPP: Point to Point Protocol. Internet transmission protocol for establishing a link-
type connection between 2 hosts on a point-to-point link.

PS50: Power Supply 50. Standard power supply module for the T300 equipment.

PTOC: Protection Time OverCurrent

PTOV: Protection Time OverVoltage

PTUC: Protection Time UnderCurrent

PTUV: Protection Time UnderVoltage

R
RMS: Root Mean Square

RS: Serial link

RTU: Remote Terminal Unit

S
SC150: Switch Control 150. Switch control and MV measurement management
module for the T300.

SCADA: Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition

SEC: Sectionalizer automation function

SFTP: Secure File Transfer Protocol

SHELL: The shell is a command interpreter. It is the interface between the user
and the operating system. The shell uses command lines entered by the user to
act as the intermediary between the operating system and the user. The role of
the shell is to read the command line, interpret its meaning, run the command,
then return the result to the outputs.

SLOT: Slot reserved in the HU250 for a K7 modem.

SNTP: Simple Network Time Protocol

SOE: Sequence Of Events. This relates to saving and storing events and signal
changes in the RTU that manages the data in real time.

SSH: Secure SHell. SSH is both a program and a secure communication protocol.
It is the equivalent of the Telnet program and is used in the same way to run
certain operations remotely (mainly server administration or file transfer
operations). SSH is more secure than Telnet protocol.

SSID: Service Set IDentifier. Name used to identify a Wi-Fi network according to
standard IEEE 802.11.

NT00378–EN–10 453
T300

T
TCP or (TCP/IP): Transmission Control Protocol. Set of protocols used to transfer
data on the Internet.

Ts: Fault current acknowledge time

U
UDP: User Datagram Protocol. Connectionless transport layer communication
protocol for the TCP/IP model.

V
VAC: AC voltage

VDC: DC voltage

W
WAN: Wide Area Network

Wi-Fi: Wireless network

454 NT00378–EN–10
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92500 Rueil Malmaison
France
+ 33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
www.se.com

As standards, specifications, and design change from time to time,

please ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication.

© 2016 – 2023 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

NT00378–EN–10